MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 
FOR  FIELD  ARTILI.ERY 

Care  of  Horses  and  Equipment,  jkin  :i; 
Driving  and  Miscdlaneoyn 

CHRTSTTAM 


o 


TUFTS   UNIVERSITY    LIBRARIES 


3   9090   013   401    845 


Webster  Family  Library  of  Veterinaiy  Medick 
CuHimings  School  of  Veterinary  Medldne  at 
Tufts  University 
200  Westboro  Road 
'^wv.p.r.'^fton,  MA  01536 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  FOR 
FIELD  ARTILLERY 

CARE  OF  HORSES  AND  EQUIP- 
MENT, RIDING,  DRIVING  AND' 
MISCELLANEOUS 


COMPILED  BY 

T.  J.  J.  CHRISTIAN 

MAJOR  FIELD  ARTILLERY 

U.    S.   ARMY 


SIl]p  (EoUegtate  PresB 

GEORGE  BANTA  PUBLISHING  COMPANY 

MENASHA.  WISCONSIN 


COPYRIGHT,  1921 

BY 

GEORGE  BANTA  PUBLISHING  COMPANY 


DEDICATION 

To  the  Artillery  Horse,  who,  "Over  hill,  over  dale,"  with  traces 
straight,  keeps  "The  Caisson  rolling  along." 

To  the  Artillery  Team,  Lead,  Swing,  and  Wheel,  whose  shoulders 
always  in  the  collar,  enables  the  guns,  "In  the  storm,  in  the  night,"  to 
blaze  the  rough  road  of  our  Infantry — this  book  is  dedicated. 


THE   ARTILLERY    SONG 

(Key— D) 

Over  hill,  oAcr  dale,  as  we  hit  the  dusty  trail, 

And  the  Caissons  go  rolling  a-long. 

In  and  out,  hear  them  shout,  counter  march  and  right  about, 

And  the  Caissons  go  rolling  a-long. 

Chorus 

Then  it's  hi!  hi!  hee !  in  the  field  artillery, 
Shout  out  your  numbers  loud  and  strong. 
Where'er  you  go,  you  will  always  know. 
That  our  Caissons  are  rolling  a-long  (Keep  them  rolling). 
And  our  Caissons  are  rolling  a-long  (Keep  them  rolling). 
Keep  our  Caissons  a-roUing  a-long. 
Battery  Halt ! 

In  the  storm,  in  the  night,  action  left  or  action  right, 

See  the  Caissons  go  rolling  a-long. 

Limber  front,  limber  rear,  prepare  to  mount  you  cannoneer 

And  our  Caissons  go  rolling  a-long. 


PREFACE 

•'For  want  of  a  nail,  the.  shoe  was  lost ;  for  want  of  a  shoe,  the  horse 
was  lost ;  for  want  of  a  horse,  the  rider  was  lost ;  for  want  of  a  rider,  the 
battle  was  lost" — 

Because  of  war,  an  army ;  because  of  an  army,  Field  Artillery ; 
because  of  Field  Artillery,  guns  must  get  into  action  ;  because  of  guns, 
teams  of  horses ;  because  of  the  horses,  drivers  ;  and  for  want  of  drivers 
who  lack  the  necessary  knowledge  of  the  care  of  their  horses  and 
equipment,  the  teams  are  lost;  for  want  of  good  riding,  good  driving 
is  lost;  and  for  want  of  good  driving,  guns  fail  to  get  into  position,  and 
the  fire  of  the  battery  is  lost. 

The  purpose  of  this  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  is  to  carefully 
cover  these  important  subjects  so  vital  to  the  necessary  mobility  of  our 
horse-drawn  Field  Artillery. 

The  object  and  need  of  this  text  can  be  most  forcibly  emphasized  by 
the  actual  experience  of  the  Field  Artillery  in  the  World  War,  as 
illustrated  by  the  following  extract  quoted  from  a  letter  written  during 
a  critical  period  of  the  war  by  the  Chief  of  Field  Artillery,  A.  E.  F.,  to 
the  Chief  of  Field  Artillery,  U.  S.  Army: 

"I  want  to  emphasize  two  things  especially:  1st,  Get  the  officers  and 
men  as  thoroughly  disciplined  as  you  possibly  can.  It  is  more  than 
knowledge — more  than  everything  else  combined,  because  with  it  we 
can  soon  get  the  other  things :  without  it  we  cannot  get  them  at  all ; 
2nd,  TEACH  THEM  ALL  YOU  POSSIBLY  CAN  ABOUT  THE 
CARE  OF  THE  HORSE.  WE  CANNOT  HOPE  IN  THE  SHORT 
TIME  AVAILABLE  TO  MAKE  HORSEMEN  OR  GOOD 
DRIVERS  OUT  OF  THEM,  BUT  IF  WE  CAN  TEACH  THEM 
HOW  TO  TAKE  CARE  OF  THEIR  ANIMALS  AND  HOW 
MUCH  THEY  CAN  STAND,  IT  WILD  HELP  GREATLY.  WE 
ARE  HAVING  SO  MUCH  DIFFICULTY  GETTING  HORSES 
OVER  HERE  THAT  WE  DO  NOT  GET  MAN  AND  HORSE  TO- 
GETHER UNTIL  JUST  BEFORE  THE  BRIGADES  LEAVE 
THE  TRAINING  CAMPS  SO  THAT  THERE  IS  NOT  TIME  TO 
TEACH  THE  MEN  ANYTHING  ABOUT  THE  HORSE.  AT 
THE  FRONT  IT  IS  WELL-NIGH  IMPOSSIBLE  TO  TEACH 
THEM  THESE  THINGS;  SO  THE  HORSES  SUFFER  IN 
CONSEQUENCE." 

On  account  of  the  lack  of  a  single  volume  covering  a  complete  course 
of  instruction  for  officers,  noncommissioned  officers  and  drivers  of  the 
Regular  and  National  Guard  Field  Artillery,  for  Reserve  Officers,  and 
specially  for  students  of  R.  O.  T.  C.  Field  Artillery  Units,  this  book  has 
been  compiled  with  the  hope  that  drivers  may  be  taught  "all  they 
possibly  can  about  the  care  of  the  horse,"  and  to  assist  not  only  in 
teaching  "how  to  take  care  of  animals  and  how  much  they  can  stand," 
but  also  "to  make  good  horsemen  and  drivers  out  of  them,"  for  the 


reason  that  "at  the  front  it  is  well-nigh  impossible  to  teach  these 
things"  and  so  that  "the  horses  may  not  suffer  in  consequence." 

Mobility  must  always  be  a  prime  factor  in  assuring  the  utmost  use- 
fulness of  our  Field  Artillery.  Experience  in  France  demonstrated 
that  the  driver  must  be  capable  of  getting  his  gun  anywhere,  under  all 
circumstances.  Perhaps  ill-trained  recruits  can  ride  their  pairs  over 
a  smooth  road  along  level  ground.  l)ut  to  drive  the  same  pair  to  position 
in  war,  over  broken,  shell-torn  battle  areas,  requires  the  most  skillful 
team  of  drivers,  horsemen  who  can  dri\x  with  the  least  wear  and  tear 
on  their  animals  and  equipment.  The  capable  driver  must  know  not 
only  what  he  wants  to  do,  but  how  to  do  it,  which  will  enable  him  not 
only  to  "think  it  over"  but  to  "put  it  over."  The  successful  horseman 
must  first  know  how  to  care  for  his  mounts,  as  a  successful  driver  must 
first  know  how  to  ride. 

The  result  of  the  intensive  war  training  has  brought  out  much  careful 
thought  on  this  subject  from  many  sources,  but  recjuires  a  condensation 
and  ex|)lanation  of  the  best  subject  matter,  in  logical  sequence  for  the 
most  efificient  instruction  in  mounted  courses  for  our  horse  drawn 
Field  Artillery.  Endeavor  has  been  made  in  this  compilation  to  pre- 
sent a  comprehensive,  instructive,  attractive  and  compact  textbook 
for  the  mounted  student  in  the  school  of  Field  Artillery. 

The  subjects  covered  herein  have  been  taken  almost  wholly  or  in 
part  from  service  manuals,  various  official  handbooks,  lectures  and 
instruction  matter  from  The  School  of  Fire,  Brigade  Training 
Pamphlets  from  Artillery  Centers,  the  Field  Artillery  Drill  Regula- 
tions, the  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations,  the  Arni}^  Horseshoer,  the  Stable 
Sergeants'  Manual,  The  Army  Horse  in  Accident  and  Disease, 
instruction  notes  of  the  Mounted  Service  School,  The  F.  A.  C.  O.  T.  S. 
Black  Book  used  at  Camp  Taylor,  Ky.,  instruction  in  draft  by  Colonel 
William  P.  Ennis,  F.  A.,  the  English  Gunners',  Drivers',  and  Mounted 
Soldiers'  Handbook  and  many  other  sources. 


CONTENTS 

PART  I.     The  Care  of  Animals  and  Equipment. 

General     ■^ 

Common   Horse   Sense ^ 

Types  of  Artillery  Horses   6 

Soundness \ 9 

Grooming  20 

Age  of  Horses  as  Indicated  by  Teeth  . .  ., 29 

Dentition  of  the  Horse  30 

Shoeing  32 

Care  of  the  Feet ■. 39 

Exercise  and  Conditioning 41 

Care,  Conditioning  and  Training  of  Horses 43 

Stable  Vices  and  Their  Prevention 46 

Stables  and  Stable  Management 48 

Stable  Hygiene  49 

Feeds  and  Feeding  52 

Feeding  Maxims 56 

Watering  Maxims 56 

Hints  on  Stable  Management  57 

Indications  of  Health  and  Disease  59 

Causes  and  Prevention  of  Disease 60 

Disinfection  and  Disinfectants 62 

Common  Diseases,  Wounds  and  Lameness 64 

Common  Medicines,  Action,  Uses  and  Methods  of  Administration  . .  72 

A  Few  "Casualty"  Hints  and  Things  Worth  Knowing 78 

Miscellaneous  Suggestions   79 

Care  of  Saddlery 81 

The  Care  and  Preservation  of  Leather 81 

Extracts  from  Information  Bulletin  No.  23,  A.  E.  F 85 

PART  11.     Riding. 

Saddles  and  Saddle  Fitting 91 

Fitting  the  Saddle 93 

Bits  and  Bitting 94 

Notes  for  Instructors 95 

To  Fold  the  Saddle  Blanket 99 

To  Put  On  the  Blanket 99 

To  Put  On  and  Take  Off  the  Watering  Bridle 100 

To  Saddle 100 

To  Unsaddle 101 

To  Put  On  and  Take  Off  the  Bit  and  Curb  Bridle 102 

To  Mount  Without  Saddle 107 

To  Dismount  Without  Saddle 107 

Position  of  the  Rider,  or  Attention  (Mounted) 108 

By  Threes— By  the  Right  (Left)  Flank , 117 

Gaits 119 

Increasing  and  Decreasing  the  Pace 120 

The  Walk 121 

The  Trot 121 

The   Gallop 121 

The  False  Gallop 122 

Work  on  Varied  Ground   ■  •  •  •  122 

Posting    • . . . .  124 

Changing  the  Diagonal  in  Posting . .  i.. .  125 

Jumping  Obstacles 126 


CONTENTS— Continued 

PART  III.     Driving. 

Preliminary  for  the  Battery  Mounted 130 

The   Driver    130 

Special  Duty  of  Drivers  131 

Disposition  of  the  Harness 131 

The  Artillery   Harness    133 

Harnessing  and  Unharnessing  135 

To  Harness  by  Detail  in  the  Field  135 

Unharnessing  in  the  Field  137 

Adjustment  and  Fitting  of  Harness  , 140 

Principles  of  Draft  146 

The  Construction  of  the  Artillery  Carriage 146 

The  Physical  Conformation  of  the  Horse,  as  a  Mechanical  Device  . .  147 

The  Team   14« 

Pairing  and  Teaming  Draft  Horses 149 

Mounted   Instruction   149 

Driving    150 

The   Driver   150 

Management  of  Pair   151 

Starting  the  Team 152 

Neck  Reining  153 

Backing 153 

To  Stop  a  Carriage  or  Reduce  Its  Speed 154 

To  Back  a  Carriage  154 

The  Brake  and  Its  Use  154 

Gaits    154 

Marches    1 54 

Hints  on  March  Discipline 157 

Rests    157 

Intervals  and  Distances 157 

Turns  in  Draft  159 

The  Limber  Turn   159 

Recruits    161 

To  Confirm  in  Horses  a  Willingness  to  Pull 161 

Driving  Up  Steep  Slopes  and  Over  Difficult  Ground 162 

Stalled   Teams    164 

Hints  to  Drivers  166 

Field  Management    170 

Arm   Signals    172 

PART  IV.     Miscellaneous — Appendix. 

Restraint  and  Control  of  Animals 181 

Transport  by  Rail  183 

Entraining  and  Detraining 184 

The  Order  in  Which  Trains  Are  Made  Up  185 

Inspection    186 

Preparation  for  Loading 186 

Loading    188 

Detraining    190 

Packing  Drivers'  Rolls    192 

Field  and  Surplus  Kits 192 

Ordnance    Property 192 

Quartermaster  Property   193 

Cordage  196 

Care  of  Cordage  197 

Knots    199 

Types  of  Stables  and  Corrals  205 

Picket  Lines  and  Standings  207 

Driver's    Examination    210 

Drill  Signals   211 

First  Twelve  Day  Period— Equitation 218 


CONTENTS— Continued 

First  Twelve  Day  Period — Hints  on  Equitation 221 

Second  Twelve  Day  Period — Equitation    225 

Second  Twelve  Day  Period — Hints  on  Equitation 228 

Third  Twelve  Day  Period— Equitation  230 

First  Twelve  Day  Period — Driving  Instruction,  Dismounted  231 

Second  Twelve  Day  Period — Drivers'  Instruction  with  Harness  ....  233 
Second  Twelve  Day   Period — Hints   on   Drivers'   Instruction   with 

Harness    234 

Second    Twelve    Day    Period— Drivers'    Instruction— Theory— Drill 

Regulations    •.  •  •  239 

Second   Twelve    Day    Period — Hints    on    Drivers'    Instruction   with 

Harness    241 

Second  Twelve   Day   Period — Noncommissioned   Officers'   Instruc- 
tions— Theory — Drill  Regulations    242 

Third  Twelve  Day  Period — Driving  Instruction  Dismounted 243 

Third  Twelve  Day  Period — Driving  (Lessons  and  Hints) 243 

Third    Twelve    Day    Period— Drivers'    Instruction— Theory— Drill 

Regulations    ; 246 

Third    Twelve    Day    Period — Noncommissioned    Officers'    Instruc- 
tion—Theory—Drill Regulations 247 

Fourth    Twelve    Day    Period— Drivers'    Instruction — Theory— Drill 

Regulations    249 

Twelve  Day  Period— Stables    250 

Twelve  Day  Period— Cleaning  of  Harness  and  Saddlery 250 

Twelve  Day  Period— Making  Rolls— Shelter  Tent  Pitching 251 


LIST  OF  PLATES 

The  Gallant  Team  of  American  Bays  Must  Get  the  Shells  to  the  Battery- 
Position  in  France Frontispiece 

Points  of  the  Horse  5 

Raising  the  Foot   18 

Incisor  Teeth  of  Lower  Jaw  31 

Horseshoeing  Tools   36 

Section  of  Hoof  and  Pastern 38 

Shoeing  Correction  for  Faulty  Pasterns   39 

External  Regions  and  Skeleton  of  the  Horse  61 

Assembling  Stirrup  Strap  91 

Cavalry  Saddle  92 

Reins  and  Bridle   102 

Tying  to  Picket  Line  103 

Jumping   the   Trail    126 

The  Nomenclature  of  Artillery  Harness,  Component  Parts 132 

Unharnessing  in  the  Field   136 

Harness  Fitting  Tests   138 

Holding  Up  and  Holding  Down  Straps  142 

Good  Draft   146 

Driver's  Reins 1 50 

Rest.     Incorrect   156 

Rest.      Correct    156 

The  Halt.     All  Wrong   156 

Limbering    1 58 

The  Limber  Turn    160 

Starting  a  Stalled  Team   164 

Order   in    Battery    171 

Mounted    Evolutions    172 

Arm   Signals    172 

Simple   Knots    204 

Method  of  Stretching  the  Picket  Line   208 

Construction  of  Model  Picket  Line  209 

Drill   Signals   212 


PART  I 


THE   CARE    OF   ANIMALS   AND   EQUIPMENT 

The  Artillery  Horse. 

Stable  Manag-ement. 

Care  of  Animals  in  Sickness  and  Disease. 

Care  of  Harness  and  Equipment. 


GENERAL 
Object. 

To  keep  the  greatest  possible  number  of  animals  in  a  fit  condition 
at  all  times. 

How  Accomplished. 

This  can  be  accomplished  only  by  a  thorotig-h  knowledge  of  animals 
and  their  needs,  the  establishment  and  maintenance  of  systematic 
methods  and  strict  stable  discipline,  and  by  close  supervision  of  details. 
The  old  saying  that  ''an  ounce  of  prevention  is  worth  a  pound  of  cure" 
is  especially  true  in  the  care  of  animals,  for  it  is  a  well  established  fact 
that  the  prevention  of  disease  and  other  causes  of  disability  of  animals 
is  of  far  greater  importance  than  any  treatment  which  can  be  given 
for  the  cure  of  disabilities. 

Animals  are  by  many  thoughtless  people  in  and  out  of  the  service, 
all  too  frequently  considered  as  just  so  many  articles  of  issue,  which 
will  render  the  prescribed  amount  of  service  regardless  of  the  condi- 
tions affecting  their  health  and  general  welfare. 

On  the  contrary,  there  is  probably  nothing  issued  to  our  troops  which 
is  so  perishable  or  so  dependent  upon  the  proper  care.  Despite  their 
great  physical  strength  animals  have  extremely  delicate  constitutions, 
and  must  be  watched  over,  fed  and  tended  with  the  greatest  care  if  we 
are  to  profit  by  the  splendid  service  they  are  capable  of  performing 
when  in  fit  condition. 

All  men  who  have  to  do  with  animals  must  be  trained  in  their  care. 
For  convenience  of  supervision,  animals  can  best  be  observed  in  small 
lots  such  as  platoons  or  sections.  Leaders  of  these  units  must  be  held 
responsible  by  their  superior  officers.  This  does  not  relieve  the 
organization  commander  from  his  responsibility,  for  he  alone  is  re- 
sponsible to  his  superiors  for  the  results  in  his  command. 

Existing  conditions  may  be  such  that  it  seems  impossible  to  obtain 
any  sort  of  satisfactory  conditions.  In  such  cases  ingenuity  and  re- 
sourcefulness will  often  produce  results  which  at  first  appear  to  be 
impossible. 

COMMON  HORSE  SENSE 

1.  Kindness  is  the  best  policy.  Far  better  results  are  obtained  from 
animals  by  kindness  than  by  rough  treatment.  Nearly  all  bad  horses 
are  made  so  by  brutal  treatment. 

2.  Horses  and  mules  are  animals,  not  machines.  They  have  feelings 
just  as  we  have,  and  should  be  treated  with  consideration. 

3.  Horses  are  strong  if  properly  cared  for.  They  cannot  care  for 
themselves.    If  we  neglect  them  they  suffer  and  we  lose  their  service. 

4.  An  animal  is  no  stronger  than  his  weakest  part.  It  will  avail  us 
nothing  for  him  to  have  wonderful  muscles  and  poor  feet.  Every  part 
must  be  cared  for. 


4  MOUNTED  IXSTRUCTIOX 

5.  The  human  voice  has  great  effect  on  animals.  They  read  our 
emotions  by  the  tone.  We  can  increase  our  control  50%  by  using  the 
voice.  Contract  the  habit  of  talking  to  your  animals ;  they  understand 
more  than  you  think. 

6.  Always  speak  on  approaching  an  animal  to  attract  his  attention, 
so  that  you  will  not  startle  him. 

7.  Horses  and  mules  are  naturally  timid.  Gain  their  confidence  and 
respect,  by  gentleness,  patience  and  persistence. 

8.  Never  punish  an  animal  in  anger.  It  would  be  only  satisfying 
your  own  brutal  instinct.  !Most  faults  committed  by  them  are  through 
lack  of  understanding  or  fear,  seldom  through  viciousness.  If  punish- 
ment is  necessary  it  must  follow  the  offense  immediately  and  then  be 
commensurate  with  the  offense. 

9.  Reward  gains  far  more  for  us  than  punishment.  In  training, 
always  reward  a  correct  performance,  no  matter  how  slight.  It  is  our 
only  means  for  telling  him  "well  done."' 

10.  Every  animal  is  an  individual  and  must  be  studied  and  treated 
according  to  his  needs.  There  is  no  greater  mistake  than  treating  them 
like  so  many  biscuits  in  a  pan. 

11.  Feed  animals  so  that  they  may  get  the  best  value  from  their 
rations ;  you  want  it  from  yours.  Feed  clean  food,  properly  prepared, 
frequently,  and  in  small  quantities. 

12.  Feed  animals  so  that  it  will  not  injure  them.  Xever  when  they 
are  heated. 

13.  \\'ater  animals  rationally.  They  should  have  all  they  want  to 
drink.  Xever  water  when  heated  unless  the  exercise  is  to  continue 
immediately.  Xever  immediately  after  feeding,  wait  an  hour.  Before 
feeding  is  the  best  time. 

14.  Work  animals  rationally,  never  to  exhaustion.  If  hard  work  is 
to  be  expected,  have  them  in  condition  to  perform  it. 

15.  Keep  animals  well  by  proper  care ;  don't  wait  until  they  become 
sick  and  cure  them.     Prevent  sickness,  and  cures  will  be  unnecessary. 

16.  Give  animals  clean  stalls  and  clean  beds.  They  will  be  healthier, 
rest  better  and  serve  you  better. 

17.  Save  them  from  exposure,  by  proper  shelter.  They  will  last 
longer  and  require  less  food. 

18.  Keep  them  from  standing  in  mud.  Few  things  will  break  them 
down  more  quickly. 

19.  Groom  animals  thoroughly  and  keep  them  trimmed.  They 
will  be  far  healthier  and  stronger,  and  you  will  be  proud  to  ride  or 
drive  them. 

20.  Watch  their  feet  and  see  that  they  are  well  cared  for.  Their 
feet  are  delicate  and  require  great  care. 

21.  Keep  your  equipment  in  top  shape.  It  will  last  much  longer 
and  be  a  satisfaction  to  you. 

22.  Have  the  best  cared  for  horse  and  equipment  in  the  "outfit," 
and  you'll  have  something  to  be  proud  of. 


MOUXTED  IXSTRUCTIOX 


9. 
10. 
11. 
11a, 
12. 
13. 
13a 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 


Lips. 
Muzzle. 
Face. 
Forehead, 
Ej'ebrows. 
Forelock. 
Ears. 

Lower  jaw. 
Cheek. 
Nostril. 
Poll. 
Throat. 
Parotid. 
Neck. 
,  Mane. 

Jugular  channel, 
Breast  (front  of 
Withers. 
Back. 


Points  of  the  Horse 

18.  Ribs,  or  barrel. 

19.  Girth. 

20.  Loins. 

21.  Croup. 

22.  Tail. 

23.  Dock. 

24.  Flank. 

25.  Belly. 

26.  Sheath. 

27.  Testicles. 

28.  Point  of  shoulder. 
28a.  Shoulder. 

2Sb.  Arm. 

29.  Elbow. 

30.  Forearm. 

31.  Chestnut, 
chest)  i2.  Knee. 

33.  Cannon. 

34.  Fetlock  joint. 


35.  Pastern. 

36.  Coronet. 

37.  Foot. 

38.  Fetlock. 

39.  Point  of  the  hip. 
39a.  Haunch. 

40.  Thigh. 

41.  Stitle. 

42.  Buttock, 

43.  Gaskin. 

44.  Hock. 

44a. Point  of  hock. 

45.  Chestnut. 

46.  Cannon. 

47.  Fetlock  joint. 

48.  Fetlock. 

49.  Pastern. 

50.  Coronet. 

51.  Foot. 


6  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

TYPES    OF   ARTILLERY    HORSES 

The  general  conformation  of  an  Artillery  horse  involves  a  massive 
form,  a  compact  and  blocky  body,  and  a  comparative  shortness  and 
strength  of  limb,  the  whole  being  in  harmonious  proportion.  Weight 
is  a  most  important  consideration,  for  a  true  Artillery  horse  must  weigh 
heavy  compared  with  the  lighter  type.  Grouped  into  classes,  the  light 
Artillery  horse  weighs  1,300  lbs.  and  the  heavy  from  1,300  up.  In  order 
to  pull  heavy  loads,  the  Artillery  horse  must  possess  plenty  of  weight. 
It  becomes  very  evident  that  the  heavy  horse,  in  harness,  brings  greater 
power  into  the  collar  than  does  the  light  horse.  The  height  is  not 
material,  provided  there  is  the  necessary  weight.  Artillery  horses 
usually  stand  from  15  to  17>^  hands,  though  occasional  exceptions 
occur.  The  light  Artillery  rcpiesents  the  lesser  height,  and  as  the 
weight  increases  the  height  may  also  bear  a  relationship  to  it.  Quality 
and  substance,  as  shown  in  hair,  bone,  and  joints,  should  be  preeminent 
with  this  horse.  The  hair  should  be  fine  and  silky,  even  if  long,  and  the 
bone  smooth  and  attractive,  with  neatly  turned  joints,  the  lower  limbs 
being  generally  free  from  all  superfluous  flesh.  Coarse  joints  are 
usually  associated  with  coarse  bones  and  poor  feet;  often  with  a  coarse, 
and  undesirable  head. 

The  action  of  the  Artillery  horse  should  be  true  and  bold.  As  the 
horse  comes  toward  one,  or  goes  from  him  the  line  of  movement  of  the 
limbs  should  be  true,  the  feet  being  carried  straight-away,  with  no 
so-called  paddling  or  irregularity  of  gait.  The  feet  should  be  picked 
up  with  snap,  whether  at  walk  or  trot,  and  carried  clear  of  the  ground, 
showing  the  sole  of  the  foot  clearly  in  the  movement.  High  knee  action 
is  not  essential,  but  a  strong,  full,  true  movement  of  both  knee  and  hock, 
without  dragging  or  stiffness,  is  very  important.  The  Artillery  horse 
should  have  an  active  gait,  for  the  value  of  a  fast  walker  considerably 
exceeds  that  of  the  sluggish  type.  A  free  and  easy  movement  of  knee 
and  back  is  essential  to  high  class  action.  In  connection  with  good 
action  the  head  and  neck  should  be  carried  high,  with  style  and  body 
action,  not  out  of  proportion  with  the  body,  have  plenty  of  breadth  be- 
tween the  eyes.  The  eyes  should  be  reasonably  prominent  and  bright, 
free  from  cloudiness  and  spots;  lids  thin,  well  open,  and  evenly  curved. 
The  nose  and  muzzle  should  be  broad  yet  not  coarse,  with  nostrils  of 
ample  size  for  easy  breathing.  Nicel}^  matched  lips,  and  strong  cheeks 
and  lower  jaws  help  to  make  a  strong  head  with  character.  The  head 
should  be  crowned  with  fine  ears  of  medium  size  gracefully  placed  and 
carried.  Polls  smooth  and  free  from  enlargements  and  scars.  Throat 
and  parotid  region  clear  and  free  from  swollen  and  enlarged  glands. 

Neck:  The  neck  of  the  Artillery  horse  is  strong  and  muscular,  sup- 
porting the  head  gracefully,  and  being  joined  smoothly  and  deeply  at 
the  body.  Some  arch  to  the  neck  is  desirable ;  this  appears  in  a  very 
small  degree  with  mares  and  geldings.  A  neck  with  a  concave  upper 
border  is  known  as  a  ewe  neck  and  is  unsightly. 

Withers:  Extending  well  back,  muscular,  but  not  fleshy — high  but 
not  to  the  extreme  as  is  seen  in  saddle  horses. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  7 

Shoulders:  The  shoulders  should  not  be  as  long  and  sloping  as  with 
a  light  driver,  but  more  upright,  being  well  set  into  the  back,  a  happy 
medium  between  the  straight  and  sloping  shoulder,  giving  the  best 
power  and  movement  for  the  Artillery  horse.  Too  straight  a  shoulder 
promotes  excessive  concussion  and  bone  trouble  of  the  limbs  and  feet. 
Smoothness  of  shoulder  is  essential,  for  roughness  and  prominence  will 
be  sure  to  involve  soreness  and  trouble  from  fit  of  collar. 

Chest:  The  chest  should  be  full  and  deep,  indicating  large  capacity 
of  the  vital  organs.  Narrowness  behind  the  shoulders  is  quite  com- 
mon, and  indicates  defective  constitution.  Too  much  thickness  of 
chest,  an  unusual  occurrence,  may  cause  a  swaying  movement  in  action. 

Arm:  The  arm  must  be  large  and  muscular,  and  placed  so  as  to 
bring  the  legs  in  proper  position  under  the  body,  not  standing  out 
at  the  corners. 

Forearm:  The  forearm  should  be  comparatively  long,  broadly  and 
strongly  muscled  in  its  upper  part  and  gradually  tapering  to  the  knee. 
A  powerful  forearm  on  the  Artillery  horse'  is  slightly  important  and 
its  value  is  not  likely  to  be  overestimated. 

Knee :  The  knee  must  be  broad,  as  viewed  from  the  front,  be  well 
carried  back  and  be  amply  supported  from  below.  This  part  should 
be  neat  and  cleanly  jointed.  A  knee  bent  backwards  is  called  a  "calf- 
knee"  ;  the  opposite  condition  is  known  as  "knee-sprung." 

Pastern:  The  pastern  is  an  important  part  of  the  leg.  It  should 
be  fairly  long,  be  perfectly  smooth  and  free  from  extra  flesh  and  stand 
at  an  angle  of  about  45  degrees.  At  this  slope  concussion  is  received 
in  perhaps  the  least  degree,  and  with  least  injury  to  the  foot  and  leg. 
There  is  some  difiference  of  opinion  among  horsemen  on  the  length 
of  the  pastern,  some  preferring  one  reasonably  long  and  others  one 
of  medium  length.  The  slope  is  more  important  than  the  length, 
but  no  doubt  better  feet  prevail  where  the  pastern  tends  toward  length 
rather  than  shortness.  Sidebones,  ringbones  and  other  foot  troubles 
are  most  prevalent  with  short,  straight  pasterned  Artillery  horses.  As 
the  horse  naturally  places  the  foot  in  action  the  pressure  first  comes 
on  the  frog  and  is  then  distributed  over  the  rest  of  the  foot.  If  the 
pastern  is  straight,  the  toe  and  front  of  the  foot  strike  first  and  thus 
the  concussion  is  greatest. 

Cannon:  The  cannon  bone  is  round,  but  has  tendons  extending 
down  its  back  edge,  more  or  less  separated  from  the  bone.  As  viewed 
from  one  side  the  cannon  and  its  attachment  should  be  deep,  amply 
supporting  the  knee:  and  viewed  from  rear  and  front,  should  be  quite 
flat,  thus  representing  the  strongest  conformation.  Often  the  cannon 
is  tied  in  beneath  the  knee,  which  indicates  weakness.  A  long  or 
rounded  cannon  shows  faulty  conformation  with  the  best  development. 
A  fair  girth  at  the  smallest  point  is  9^  inches.  A  large  girth,  however, 
does  not  always  indicate  proper  development  as  the  leg  may  be  coarse 
and  out  of  proportion. 

Fetlock :  The  fetlock  must  be  smooth  and  deep  with  no  roughness. 


8  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Foot:  The  foot  ought  to  be  large,  the  hoof  dense  and  preferably 
dark  in  color,  the  sole  concave  and  the  frog  large.  There  is  an  old 
saying,  "No  foot,  no  horse."  Sound  feet  are  absolutely  essential  to 
comfort  and  efficiency  of  work.  The  interior  of  the  foot  contains  very 
sensitive  nerves  and  membranes.  If  the  foot  is  too  small  and  con- 
tracted, if  the  frog  is  too  narrow  and  low,  inflammation  of  the  mem- 
branes will  frequently  follow.  The  ample  foot,  wide  on  top  and  behind, 
well  supported  at  the  heel,  and  carried  true  in  movement,  turning 
neither  in  nor  out  at  the  toe,  is  least  likely  to  be  troubled  with  disease. 

Body :  The  body  should  be  short  on  top,  long  below,  broad  along 
the  back,  with  ribs  strongly  arched  and  of  great  depth.  A  long  back 
indicates  weakness  of  both  constitution  and  Artillery  power,  while 
a  short  deeply  muscled  back  means  strength.  If  the  ribs  are  well 
sprung  and  deep,  it  shows  capacity  for  the  internal  organs,  indicates 
a  good  feeder  and  materially  adds  to  the  weight,  which  is  necessary 
in  the  Artillery.  Usually  satisfactory  rib  development  provides  a 
proper  body  conformation.  Often  immature  horses  appear  to  lack 
depth  of  body  to  some  degree,  but  age  and  feeding  establish  the  proper 
proportions.  The  horse  that  lacks  depth  of  body  will  also  lack  the 
power  of  endurance. 

Loin:  The  loin  should  be  broad  and  thickly  muscled.  Narrow,  thin 
loin  indicates  weakness  of  a  serious  character.  Often  the  loin  is 
depressed,  directly  in  front  of  the  space  between  the  hips,  a  distinc- 
tively undesirable  conformation.  Animals  with  a  sway  back  as  a  rule 
show  this  weakness  of  loin. 

Croup:  The  croup  should  be  broad,  wide,  fairly  level  and  heavily 
muscled.  A  steep  croup  is  very  objectionable,  and  affects  both  the 
beauty  and  power  of  the  horse.  A  short,  steep  croup  is  less  strongly 
muscled  than  one  that  is  long.  The  Belgian  and  French  Artillery 
breeds  seem  most  subject  to  steepness  of  rump  and  low  setting  of  tail. 

Thigh :  The  thigh  should  be  strongly  muscled  and  the  quarters 
should  be  thick  and  free.  A  horse  split  up  high  behind,  with  a  thin, 
sharp  tapering  thigh,  lacks  good  Artillery  form  at  this  place.  The 
gaskin.  or  lower  thigh,  where  properly  made,  is  deep  from  the  front 
to  rear  and  heavily  covered  with  muscle. 

Hock :  The  hock  is  a  part  which  requires  careful  study.  As  viewed 
from  one  side,  it  should  show  considerable  depth,  while  from  the  rear 
it  should  possess  a  certain  degree  of  thinness,  though  broad  in  front, 
the  entire  point  being  free  from  extra  flesh.  Thick  hocks  are  very 
common  with  Artillery  horses,  due  to  various  reasons.  The  joint 
may  be  fleshy,  pufiiness  may  occur  for  lack  of  exercise,  or  a  form  of 
spavin  may  exist.  The  hock  should  be  smooth  and  its  various  natural 
curves  well  defined.  As  the  horse  stands  in  a  natural  position  on  his 
feet,  the  hocks  should  be  straight  and  true  as  viewed  from  behind, 
showing  no  evidence  of  weakness.  Where  the  hock  holds  a  true 
position  the  hind  foot  also  stands  true,  neither  toeing  in  nor  out. 
When  toeing  out  the  points  of  the  hock  come  too  close  together, 
while  if  toeing  in  notably  the  points  may  be  wide  apart  and  the  hocks 


1    o 


-    c 

at 

is 

0. 

5 

!- 

" 

- 

- 

'". 

-. 

o 

::i 

- 

°; 

o 

5 

q 

° 

° 

: 

° 

° 

o 

s 

5 

o 

q 

° 

o 

:• 

::• 

s 

° 

q 

o 

- 

:■ 

5 

q 

q 

: 

2 

; 

o 

i 

1 

X 

£ 

«• 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

i 

1 

it 

z 

g 

i 

li 

i 
< 

, 

i 

§ 

J5 
1 

1 
1 

1 

g 

"2 

ll 

s 

2 

1 

! 

1 

t 

1 

i 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

1 

1 

.1 

1 

1 

•-J 

1 

1 

§ 

ll 
IS 

II 

3 

e2 

c 

8  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Foot: 
dark  in 
saying", 
comfort 
sensitiv' 
tracted, 
branes  \ 
well  sn 
neither 
Body 
the  bad 
indicate 
a   short 
sprung 
a  good 
in   the 
proper 
depth  oi 
proporti 
power  c 
Loin: 
loin   inc 
depress( 
tively  u 
show  th 
Croup 

muscled 

beauty  ; 

muscled 

breeds  s 
Thigt 

should  1 

sharp  t; 

gaskin. 

to  rear  ; 
Hock 

from  on 

it  shouL 

the  enti 

commor 

may  be 

spavin  r 

curves  a 

feet,  th( 

showing 

position 
When  1 

while  if 


I 


I 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  9 

appear  springy  and  weak  when  in  action.  The  hock  should  be  sup- 
ported by  a  wide,  thin,  cleanboned  cannon,  which  may  be  about  11 
inches  in  girth  at  its  smallest  point.  From  rear  position  a  line  dropped 
from  the  point  of  the  buttock  or  crouj)  viewed  from  behind,  should 
pass  the  center  of  point  of  hock,  cannon,  pastern  and  foot.  From 
one  side  it  should  pass  parallel  to  the  entire  edge  of  cannon  and  when 
suspended  from  the  point  of  the  hip  should  pass  the  gaskin  at  the 
center  and  drop  to  the  center  of  the  foot.  Such  a  horse  is  likely  to 
have  a  good  constitution  and  be  able  to  resist  hard  work,  fatigue  and 
disease  to  a  maximum  degree.  On  the  other  hand  a  poor  constitution 
is  indicated  by  a  shallow,  narrow  chest,  small  bones,  long  loins,  coarse 
neck  and  head,  with  thick  throat,  small,  long  and  musclar  develop- 
ment, short  thighs  and  forearms,  small  joints,  long,  round  cannons, 
and  hoofs  of  open  texture  with  flat  soles. 

The  temperament  is  indicated  by  the  manner  in  which  the  horse 
responds  to  external  stimuli.  AMien  the  horse  is  spoken  to  or  when 
he  sees  or  feels  anything  that  stimulates  or  gives  alarm,  if  he  responds 
actively,  quickly  and  intelligently,  he  is  said  to  be  of  a  lively  or 
nervous  temperament.  On  the  other  hand,  if  he  responds  in  a  slow, 
sluggish  manner,  he  is  said  to  have  a  sluggish  or  lymphatic  tempera- 
ment. The  temperament  is  indicated  by  the  gait,  by  the  expression 
on  the  face  and  by  the  carriage  of  the  head  and  ears.  The  nature 
of  the  temperament  should  be  taken  into  consideration  in  an  endeavor 
to  ascertain  the  severity  of  a  given  case  of  illness,  because  the  general 
expression  of  an  animal  in  disease  as  well  as  in  health  depends  to  a 
large  extent  on  the  temperament. 

SOUNDNESS 

To  be  theoretically  sound  a  horse  must  have  no  disease  or  other 
condition  that  interferes  or  is  likely  to  interfere  with  his  usefulness. 
A  horse  may  have  a  disease  from  which  he  will  recover.  At  the 
time  of  the  examination  he  will  be  technically  unsound. 

A  blemish  does  not  interfere  with  his  usefulness,  but  is  unsightly, 
as  ewe  neck,  Roman  nose,  wire  cut,  scars,  etc. 

An  examination  for  soundness  should  be  systematic  and  thorough, 
although  it  may  be  rapidly  done.  Examination  should  be  made  with 
the  horse  in  the  stall ;  as  he  backs  out.  stands  at  rest  and  in  motion. 
In  the  stall,  examine  to  see  whether  the  horse  cribs  or  weaves,  or 
has  any  other  stable  habit  which  is  objectionable.  As  the  horse  backs 
out  of  the  stall,  he  may  show  peculiar  use  of  the  hind  legs  or  imperfect 
control,  due  to  serious  disorders  of  the  nervous  system.  Very  fre- 
quently the  first  intimation  of  spavin  may  be  had  as  the  horse  is  made 
to  step  from  side  to  side,  particularly  as  he  steps  toward  the 
spavined  leg. 

At  Rest :  With  the  horse  at  rest  the  observer  should  begin  in  front 
and  examine  the  ears  for  hearing,  for  tumors  that  may  develop  around 
the  base,  for  split  ears,  etc.  ._  _      ,      _  ._   _ 


10  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

The  eyes  should  be  examined  to  test  the  sight,  bearing  in  mind 
that  moon  blindness,  which  recurs  at  intervals  and  leaves  the  eye 
more  or  less  normal  betv^een  times,  still  shows  a  weakened  or  squinting 
appearance  that  is  suggestive. 

The  nasal  chambers  should  be  examined  for  ulcers,  scars,  or  dis- 
charges which  would  suggest  possible  glanders. 

The  teeth  should  be  examined  for  evidence  of  cribbing,  for  age, 
and  for  a  condition  commonly  known  as  parrot  mouth,  which  inter- 
feres with  a  horse  feeding,  i.e.  overhanging  upper  jaw  teeth. 

The  lips  should  be  examined  for  evidence  of  paralysis.  The  glands 
under,  or  rather  between  the  portions  of  the  lower  jaw  should  be 
examined  particularly  with  reference  to  glanders. 

The  poll  should  be  examined  for  scars  or  other  evidences  of  present 
or  previous  poll-evil. 

The  withers  should  be  examined  for  scars,  for  discharging  sores, 
and  other  evidences  of  fistulous  withers. 

The  shoulders  should  be  examined  for  sore  neck  and  particularly 
so-called  collar  boils.  The  latter  are  either  flat  and  broad  or  more 
prominent  tumors,  which  will  usually  subject  a  horse  to  sore  shoulders 
whenever  he  is  put  to  work. 

While  passing  along  the  side  and  flank  the  breathing  should  be 
observed,  as  to  whether  it  is  even  and  regular,  or  jerky,  suggesting 
heaves.  The  flank  and  lower  part  of  the  abdomen  must  be  examined 
for  possible  ruptures. 

Stepping  behind  the  horse,  the  two  hips  are  compared  for  evidence 
of  fractures,  or  what  is  commonly  known  as  hipped  or  hipped  shot. 
This  disorder  does  not  interfere  seriously  with  the  horse's  working 
ability,  but  gives  the  horse  a  very  awkward  appearance. 

An  examination  should  be  made  for  the  following  unsoundnesses 
in  the  leg: 

Splints :  Are  found  on  the  inside  of  the  leg,  from  the  knee  near  which 
they  are  frequently  found,  downward  to  about  the  lower  third  of  the 
principal  cannon  bone.  They  are  of  various  dimensions  and  are  readily 
perceptible  both  to  the  eye  and  to  the  touch.  They  vary  considerably 
in  size,  ranging  from  that  of  a  large  nut  downward  to  very  small  pro- 
portions. In  searching  for  them  they  may  be  readily  detected  by  the 
hand  if  they  have  attained  sufficient  development  in  thein  usual  situ- 
ation, but  must  be  distinguished  from  a  small,  bony  enlargement  that 
may  be  felt  at  the  lower  third  of  the  cannon  bone,  which  is  neither 
a  splint  nor  a  pathological  formation  of  any  kind,  but  merely  the 
button-like  enlargement  at  the  lower  extremity  of  the  small  metacarpal 
or  splint  bone. 

Ringbones :  Extend  around  the  coronary  band  when  on  the  front 
of  the  foot,  and  even  when  not  very  largely  developed,  assume  the 
form  of  a  diffused  convex  swelling.  If  situated  on  the  lower  part, 
it  will  form  a  thick  ring,  encircling  that  portion  of  the  foot  immediately 
above  the  hoof;  when  found  on  the  posterior  part,  a  small,  sharp  bony 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  11 

growth  somewhat  projecting,  either  on  the  inside  or  outside  and  some- 
times may  comprise  the  entire  coronet. 

As  with  splints,  ringbones  may  result  from  severe  labor  in  early 
life,  before  the  process  of  ossification  has  been  fully  perfected ;  or  they 
may  be  due  to  bruises,  blows,  sj^rains,  or  other  violence;  injuries  of 
tendons,  ligaments,  also  may  be  among  the  accountable  causes. 

Spavin:  Bone  spavin  is  an  exostosis  of  the  hock  joint.  The  general 
impression  is  that  in  a  spavined  hock  the  bony  growth  should  be 
seated  on  the  anterior  and  internal  part  of  the  joint,  and  this  is  par- 
tially correct,  as  such  a  growth  will  constitute  a  spavin  in  the  most 
nearly  correct  sense  of  the  term.  But  an  enlargement  may  appear  on 
the  upper  part  of  the  hock  also,  or  possibly  a  little  below  the  inside  of 
the  lower  extremity  of  the  shank  bone,  forming  what  is  known  as  a 
high  spavin ;  or,  again,  the  growth  may  form  just  on  the  outside  of 
the  hock  and  become  an  outside  or  external  spavin.  Serious  in  its 
beginning,  serious  in  its  progress,  it  is  an  ailment  which,  when  once 
established,  becomes  a  fixed  condition  which  there  is  no  known  means 
of  dislodging. 

Blood  Spavin:  Is  situated  in  front  and  to  the  inside  of  the  hock 
and  is  merely  a  varicose  or  dilated  condition  of  the  vein.  It  occurs 
directly  over  the  point  where  the  bog  spavin  is  found,  and  has  thus 
been  frequently  confused  with  the  latter. 

Bog  Spavin:  Is  a  round,  smooth,  well-defined,  fluctuating  tumor 
situated  in  front  and  a  little  inward  of  the  hock.  On  pressure  it  dis- 
appears at  this  point  to  reappear  on  the  outside  just  behind  the  hock. 
If  pressed  to  the  front  from  the  outside  it  will  then  appear  on  the  inside 
of  the  hock.  On  its  outer  surface  it  presents  a  vein  which  is  quite 
prominent,  running  from  below  upward,  and  it  'is  to  the  unnatural 
dilation  of  this  blood  vessel  that  the  term  blood  spavin  is  applied. 

Thoroughpin:  Is  found  at  the  back  and  on  the  top  of  the  hock  in 
that  part  known  as  the  "hollows,"  immediately  behind  the  shank  bone. 
It  is  round  and  smooth,  but  not  so  regularly  formed  as  the  bog  spavin, 
and  is  most  apparent  when  viewed  from  behind.  The  swelling  is 
usually  on  both  sides  and  a  little  in  front  of  the  so-called  hamstring, 
but  may  be  more  noticeable  on  the  inside  or  on  the  outside. 

Sprains:  Express  a  more  or  less  complete  laceration  or  yielding  of 
the  fibers  of  the  muscles,  tendons,  or  the  sheaths  surrounding  and  sup- 
porting them.  The  usual  cause  of  a  sprain  is  external  violence,  such 
as  a  fall  or  a  powerful  exertion  of  strength,  with  following  symptoms 
of  soreness,  heat,  swelling,  and  a  suspension  of  function. 

Curb:  Is  the  bulging  backward  of  the  posterior  part  of  the  hock, 
where  in  the  normal  state  there  should  be  a  straight  line,  extending 
from  the  upper  end  of  the  point  of  the  hock  down  to  the  fetlock.  The 
cause  may  be  a  sprain  of  the  tendon  which  passes  on  the  posterior 
part  of  the  hock,  or  of  one  of  its  sheaths. 

Capped  Elbow:  Or  "shoe  boil,"  is  a  term  applied  to  an  enlargement 
often  found  at  the  point  of  the  elbow.     This  lesion  is  due  to  injury 


12  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

or  pressure  of  the  part  while  it  is  resting  on  the  ground.  If  the  leg 
is  flexed  under  the  body  so  that  the  hoof  or  shoe  is  directly  in  contact 
with  the  elbow,  which  may  occur  in  horses  having  an  extremely  long 
cannon  bone  or  excessive  length  in  the  shoes,  the  greater  part  of  the 
weight  of  the  chest  is  concentrated  at  this  point  and  the  pressure 
may  cause  a  bruise  or  an  inflammation. 

Capped  Hock:  Is  a  bad  habit  of  rubbing  or  striking  the  partitions 
of  their  stalls  with  their  hocks  which  prevails  among  some  horses, 
with  the  result  of  an  injury  which  shows  itself  on  the  upper  points 
of  those  bones.  From  its  analogy  to  the  condition  of  capped  elbow 
the  designation  of  capped  hock  has  been  applied  to  this  condition. 

Stringhalt:  Is  an  involuntary  movement  of  one  or  both  hind  legs, 
in  which  the  foot  is  suddenly  and  spasmodically  lifted  from  the 
ground  much  higher  than  it  is  normally  carried,  with  excessive  flexion 
of  one  bone  upon  the  other.  This  peculiarity  is  usually  prominent, 
although  it  may  disappear  with  work,  only  to  reappear  after  a  short 
rest.  Veterinarians  and  pathologists  are  yet  in  doubt  in  respect  to  the 
cause  of  this  afTection,  as  well  as  to  its  essential  nature. 

Flatfoot:  Is  that  condition  in  which  the  sole  has  little  or  no  con- 
vexity. It  is  confined  to  the  fore  feet,  which  are  generally  broad  and 
low-heeled. 

In  flatfoot  there  can  be  little  or  no  elasticity  in  the  sole,  for  the 
reason  that  it  has  no  arch,  and  the  weight  of  the  animal  is  received  on 
the  entire  plantar  surface,  as  it  rests  upon  the  ground  instead  of  on 
the  wall.  For  these  reasons  such  feet  are  particularly  liable  to  bruises 
of  the  sole  and  corns.  Horses  with  flatfoot  should  be  shod  with  a  shoe 
having  a  wide  web,  pressing  on  the  wall  only,  while  the  heels  and  frog 
are  never  to  be  pared.  Flatfoot  generally  means  weak  walls,  and  as 
a  consequence  the  nails  of  the  shoe  are  readily  loosened  and  the  shoe 
cast. 

Clubfoot:  Is  a  term  applied  to  such  feet  as  have  the  walls  set  nearly 
perpendicular.  When  this  condition  is  present  the  heels  are  high,  the 
fetlock  joint  is  thrown  forward,  or  knuckles,  and  the  weight  of  the 
animal  is  received  on  the  toes.  The  shoe  should  not  be  pared,  but  the 
heels  are  to  be  lowered  as  much  as  possible  and  a  shoe  put  on  with  a 
long,  projecting  toe  piece,  slightly  turned  up,  while  the  heels  of  the 
shoe  are  to  be  made  thin. 

Crookedfoot:  Is  that  condition  in  which  one  side  of  the  wall  is 
higher  than  the  other.  If  the  inside  wall  is  the  higher,  the  ankle  is 
thrown  outward,  so  that  the  fetlock  joints  are  abnormally  wide  apart 
and  the  toes  close  together.  Animals  with  this  deformity  are  "pigeon 
toed,"  and  are  prone  to  interfere,  the  inside  toe  striking  the  opposite 
fetlock.  If  but  one  foot  is  affected,  the  liability  to  interfere  is  still 
greater,  for  the  reason  that  the  fetlock  of  the  perfect  leg  is  nearer  the 
center  plane. 

When  the  outside  heel  is  the  higher  the  ankle  is  thrown  in  and  the 
toe  turns  out.  Horses  with,  such  feet  interfere  with  the  heel.  If  but 
one  foot  is  so  affected,  the  liability  to  interfere  is  less  than  when  both 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  13 

feet  are  affected,  lor  the  reason  that  the  ankle  of  the  perfect  leg  is  not 
so  near  to  the  center  plane.  Such  animals  are  especially  liable  to 
stumbling  and  to  lameness  from  injury  to  the  ligaments  of  the  fetlock 
joints.  This  deformity  is  to  be  overcome  by  such  shoeing  as  will 
equalize  the  disparity  in  length  of  walls  and  by  proper  boots  to  pro- 
tect the  fetlock  from  interfering. 

Interfering:  An  animal  is  said  to  interfere  when  one  foot  strikes 
the  opposite  leg,  as  it  passes  by,  during  locomotion.  The  inner  sur- 
face of  the  fetlock  joint  is  the  part  most  subject  to  this  injury,  al- 
though, under  certain  conditions,  it  may  happen  to  any  part  of  the 
ankle.  It  is  seen  more  often  in  the  hind  than  in  the  fore  legs.  It  may 
cause  lameness,  dangerous  tripping,  and  thickening  of  the  injured 
parts.     Faulty  conformation  is  the  most  prolific  cause  of  interfering. 

Knuckling:  Is  a  partial  dislocation  of  the  fetlock  joint,  in  which  the 
relative  position  of  the  pastern  bone  to  the  cannon  and  coronet  bones 
is  changed,  the  pastern  becoming  more  nearly  perpendicular,  with  the 
lower  end  of  the  cannon  bone  resting  behind  the  center  line  of  the 
large  pastern,  while  the  lower  end  of  this  bone  rests  behind  the  center 
line  of  the  coronet.  While  knuckling  is  not  always  an  unsoundness, 
it  nevertheless  predisposes  to  stumbling  and  to  fmcture  of  the  pastern. 

Windgall:  Joints  and  tendons  are  furnished  with  sacs  containing  a 
lubricating  fluid  called  synovia.  When  these  sacs  are  overdistended 
by  reason  of  an  excessive  secretion  of  synovia,  they  are  called  wind- 
galls.  They  form  a  soft,  puffy  tumor  about  the  size  of  a  hickory  nut. 
and  are  most  often  found  in  the  fore  leg.  at  the  upper  part  of  the  fet- 
lock joint,  between  the  tendon  and  the  skin  bone.  When  they  develop 
in  the  hind  leg  it  is  not  unusual  to  see  them  reach  the  size  of  a  walnut. 
Occasionally  they  appear  in  front  of  the  fetlock  on  the  border  of  the 
tendon.  The  majority  of  horses  are  not  subject  to  them  after  colt- 
hood  has  passed.  The  tumor  is  more  or  less  firm  and  tense  when  the 
foot  is  on  the  ground,  but  is  soft  and  compressible  when  the  foot 
is  off  the  ground.  In  old  horses  windgalls  generally  develop  slowly 
and  cause  no  inconvenience.  If  they  are  caused  by  excessive  tension 
of  the  joint  the  tumor  develops  ra])idly.  is  ten^e.  hot  and  painful,  and 
the  animal  is  exceedingly  lame. 

Overreach:  A\nien  the  shoe  of  the  hind  foot  strikes  and  injures  the 
heel  or  quarter  of  the  fore  foot  the  horse  is  said  to  overreach.  It  rarely 
happens  exce|)t  when  the  animal  is  going  fast ;  hence  is  most  apt  to 
appear  in  running  and  trotting  horses.  In  trotters  the  accident  gen- 
erally happens  when  the  animal  breaks  from  a  trot  to  a  run.  The  out- 
side heels  and  quarters  are  most  liable  to  the  injury. 

Frostbites:  Excepting  the  ears,  the  feet  and  legs  are  about  the  only 
parts  of  the  horse  liable  to  become  frostbitten.  In  mountainous  dis- 
tricts, where  the  snowfall  is  heavy. and  the  cold  often  intense,  frost- 
bites are  not  uncommon,  even  among  animals  running  at  large. 

Quittor:  Is  generally  seen  in  but  one  foot  at  a  time,  and  more  often 
in  the  fore  than  in  the  hind  feet.  It  nearly  always  attacks  the  inside 
quarters  but  may  affect  the  outside,  the  band  in  front,  or  the  heel. 


14  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  '     " 

where  it  is  of  but  little  consequence.  It  consists  in  the  inflammation 
of  a  small  part  of  the  coronary  band  and  adjacent  skin,  followed  by- 
sloughing  and  suppuration,  which  in  most  cases  extends  to  the  neigh- 
boring sensitive  laminae.  Injuries  to  the  coronet,  such  as  bruises, 
overreaching,  and  calk  wounds,  are  considered  as  the  common  causes 
of  the  disease.  Still,  cases  occur  in  which  there  appears  to  be  no 
existing  cause,  just  as  in  other  forms  of  quittor,  and  it  seems  fair  to 
conclude  that  subhorny  quittor  may  also  be  produced  by  internaf 
causes. 

Canker:  Of  the  foot  is  due  to  the  rapid  reproduction  of  a  vegetable 
parasite.  It  not  only  destroys  the  sole  and  frog,  by  setting  up  a 
chronic  inflammation  in  the  deeper  tissues,  but  prevents  the  growth 
of  a  healthy  horn  by  which  the  injury  may  be  repaired.  The  essential 
element  in  the  production  of  canker  is  the  parasite ;  consequently  the 
disease  may  be  called  contagious.  As  in  all  other  diseases  due  to 
specific  causes,  however,  the  seeds  of  the  disorder  must  find  a  suitable 
soil  in  which  to  grow  before  they  are  reproduced.  It  may  be  said, 
then,  that  the  conditions  which  favor  the  preparation  of  the  tissues 
for  a  reception  of  the  seeds  of  this  disease  are  simply  predisposing 
causes.  The  condition  most  favorable  to  the  development  of  canker  is 
dampness — in  fact,  dampness  seems  indispensable  to  the  existence  and 
growth  of  the  parasite ;  the  disease  is  rarely,  if  ever,  seen  in  high,  dry 
districts,  and  is  much  more  common  in  rainy  weather  than  in  dry 
seasons.  Filthy  stables  and  muddy  roads  have  been  classed  among 
the  causes  of  canker,  but  it  is  very  doubtful  whether  these  conditions 
can  do  more  than  favor  a  preparation  of  the  foot  for  the  reception  of 
the  disease  germ. 

Corns:  A  corn  is  an  injury  to  the  living  horn  of  the  foot,  involving 
the  soft  tissues  beneath,  whereby  the  capillary  blood  vessels  are  rup- 
tured and  a  small  quantity  of  blood  escapes  which,  by  permeating 
the  horn  in  the  immediate  neighborhood,  stains  it  a  dark  color.  If  the 
injury  is  continuously  repeated,  the  horn  becomes  altered  in  character 
and  the  soft  tissues  may  suppurate  or  a  horny  tumor  develop.  Corns 
always  appear  in  the  sole  in  the  angle  between  the  bar  and  the  outside 
wall  of  the  hoof.'  In  many  cases  the  laminge  of  the  bar,  of  the  wall, 
or  of  both,  are  involved  at  the  same  time.  The  fore  feet  are  almost 
exclusively  the  subjects  of  the  disease,  for  two  reasons:  first,  because 
they  support  the  greater  part  of  the  body ;  secondly,  because  the  heel 
of  the  fore  foot  during  progression  is  the  first  placed  upon  the  ground 
whereby  it  receives  much  more  concussion  than  the  heel  of  the  hind 
foot,  in  which  the  toe  first  strikes  the  ground.  It  may  be  said  that  all 
feet  are  exposed  to  corns,  and  that  even  the  best  feet  may  sufi^er  from 
them  when  conditions  necessary  to  the  peculiar  injury  are  present. 
Among  the  causes  and  conditions  which  predispose  to  corns  may  be 
named  high  heels,  which  change  the  relative  natural  position  of  the 
bones  of  the  foot  and  thereby  increase  the  concussion  to  which  these 
parts  are  subject;  contracted  heels,  which  in  part  destroy  the  elas- 
ticity of  the  foot,  increase  the  pressure  upon  the  soft  tissues  of  the 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  15 

heel,  and  render  lacerations  more  easy;  long  feet,  which  by  removing 
the  frog  and  heels  too  far  from  the  ground  deprive  them  of  necessary 
moisture ;  this,  in  turn,  reduces  the  elastic  properties  of  the  horn  and 
diminishes  the  transverse  diameter  of  the  heels ;  weak  feet,  or  those 
in  which  the  horn  of  the  wall  is  too  thin  to  resist  the  tendency  to 
spread,  whereby  the  soft  tissues  are  easily  lacerated.  Wide  feet 
with  low  heels  are  always  accompanied  with  a  flat  sole  whose  pos- 
terior wings  either  rest  upon  the  ground  or  the  shoe  and  as  a  conse- 
quence are  easily  bruised;  at  the  same  time  the  arch  of  the  sole  is  so 
broad  and  flat  that  it  cannot  support  the  weight  of  the  body,  and  in 
the  displacement  which  happens  when  the  foot  is  rested  upon  the 
'ground  the  soft  tissues  are  liable  to  become  bruised  or  torn. 

It  is  universally  conceded  that  shoeing,  either  as  a  direct  or  predis- 
posing cause,  is  most  prolific  in  producing  corns.  A  shoe  so  set  as 
to  press  upon  the  sole  or  one  that  has  been  on  so  long  that  the  hoof 
has  overgrown  it  until  the  heels  rest  upon  the  sole  and  bars  become 
a  direct  cause  of  corns.  Indirectly  the  shoe  becomes  the  cause  of 
corns  when  small  stones,  hard,  dry  earth,  or  other  objects  collect  be- 
tween the  sole  and  shoe.  Lastly,  a  rapid  gait  and  excessive  knee 
action  especially  on  hard  roads,  predispose  to  this  disease  of  the  feet. 

Bruise  of  the  Frog:  Generally  happens  from  stepping  on  a  rough 
stone  or  other  hard  objects.  It  is  more  liable  to  take  place  when  trot- 
ting, running  or  jumping  than  when  at  a  slower  pace.  A  stone  wedged 
in  the  shoe  and  pressing  on  the  frog  or  between  the  sides  of  the  frog 
and  the  shoe,  if  it  remains  for  a  time,  produces  the  same  results. 
A  cut  through  the  horny  frog  with  some  sharp  instrument  or  a  punc- 
tured wound  by  a  blunt  pointed  instrument  may  also  cause  suppura- 
tion and  gangrene  of  the  plantar  cushion.  Broad,  flat  feet  with  low 
heels  and  a  fleshy  frog  are  most  liable  to  these  injuries. 

Contracted  Heels,  or  Hoofbound:  Is  a  common  disease  among 
horses  kept  on  hard  floor  in  dry  stables,  and  in  such  as  are  subject  to 
much  saddle  work.  It  consists  in  an  atrophy,  or  shrinking,  of  the  tis- 
sues of  the  foot,  whereby  the  lateral  diameter  of  the  heels  is  di- 
minished. It  afi^ects  the  fore  feet  principally,  but  is  seen  occasionally 
in  the  hind  feet,  where  it  is  of  less  importance,  for  the  reason  that  the 
hind  foot  first  strikes  the  ground  with  the  toe,  and  consequently  less 
expansion  of  the  heels  is  necessary  than  in  the  fore  feet,  where  the 
weight  is  first  received  on  the  heels.  Any  interference  with  the  ex- 
pansibility of  this  part  of  the  foot  interferes  with  locomotion,  and 
ultimately  gives  rise  to  lameness.  Usually  but  one  foot  is  afifected  at  a 
time,  but  when  both  are  diseased  the  change  is  greater  in  one  than  in* 
the  other.  Occasionally  but  one  heel,  and  that  the  inner  one,  is  con- 
centrated ;  in  these  cases  there  is  less  liability  of  lameness  and  per- 
manent impairment  of  the  animal's  usefulness. 

Sand  Cracks:  May  occur  in  any  part  of  the  wall,  but  ordinarily  are 
only  seen  directly  in  front,  when  they  are  called  toe  cracks ;  or  on  the 
lateral  parts  of  the  walls  when  they  are  known  as  quarter  cracks. 


16  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Toe  Cracks:  Are  most  common  in  the  hind  feet,  while  quarter 
cracks  nearly  always  affect  the  fore  feet.  The  inside  quarter  is  more 
liable  to  the  injury  than  the  outside,  for  the  reason  that  this  quarter 
is  not  only  the  thinner,  but  during"  locomotion  receives  a  greater  part 
of  the  weight  of  the  body.  A  sand  crack  may  be  superficial,  involving 
only  the  outer  parts  of  the  wall,  or  it  may  be  deep,  involving  the  whole 
thickness  of  the  wall  and  the  soft  tissues  beneath. 

The  toe  crack  is  most  likely  to  be  complete — that  is,  extending  from 
the  coronary  band  to  the  sole — while  the  quarter  crack  is  nearly  al- 
ways incomplete,  at  least  when  of  comparatively  recent  origin.  Sand 
cracks  are  most  serious  when  they  involve  the  coronary  band  in  the 
injury.  They  may  be  complicated  at  any  time  by  hemorrhage,  in- 
flammation of  the  laminse,  suppuration,  gangrene  of  the  lateral  carti- 
lage and  of  the  extensor  tendon.  Relative  dryness  of  the  horn  is 
the  principal  predisposing  cause  of  sand  cracks.  Heavy  shoes,  large 
nails,  and  nails  set  too  far  back  toward  the  heels,  together  with  such 
diseases  as  canker,  quittor,  grease,  and  suppurative  corns,  must  be  in- 
cluded as  occasional  causes  of  sand  cracks. 

Sidebones:  A  sidebone  consists  in  a  transformation  of  the  lateral 
cartilages  found  on  the  wings  of  the  cofifin  bone  into  bony  matter  by 
the  deposition  of  lime  salts.  The  disease  is  a  common  one,  especially 
in  heavy  horses  used  for  draft,  in  cavalry  horses,  cow  ponies,  and 
other  saddle  horses,  and  in  runners  and  trotters. 

Sidebones  are  peculiar  to  the  fore  feet,  yet  they  occasionally  de- 
velop in  the  hind  feet,  where  they  are  of  little  importance  since  they 
cause  no  lameness.  In  many  instances  sidebones  are  of  slow  growth 
and,  being  unaccompanied  with  acute  inflammation,  they  cause  no 
lameness  until  such  time  as,  by  reason  of  their  size,  they  iifterfere 
with  the  action  of  the  joint.  Sidebones  often  grow  in  heavy  horses 
without  any  apparent  injury  and  their  development  has  been  at- 
tributed to  the  overexpansion  of  the  cartilages  caused  by  the  great 
weight  of  the  animal.  Blows  and  other  injuries  of  the  cartilages 
may  set  up  an  inflammatory  process  which  ends  in  the  formation 
of  these  bony  growths.  High-heeled  shoes,  high  calks,  and  long'  feet 
are  always  classed  among  the  conditions  which  may  excite  the 
growth  of  sidebones.  They  are  often  seen  in  connection  with  con- 
tracted heels,  ringbones,  navicular  disease,  punctured  wounds  of  the 
foot,  quarter  cracks,  and  occasionally  as  a  sequel  to  founder. 

Ringbones:  Is  the  growth  of  a  bony  tumor  on  the  ankle.  This 
tumor  is,  in  fact,  not  the  disease,  but  simply  the  result  of  an  inflam- 
matory action  set  up  in  the  bone  tissue  proper  of  the  pastern  bone. 

Injuries  such  as  blows,  sprains,  overwork  in  young,  undeveloped 
animals,  fast  work  on  hard  roads,  jumping",  etc..  are  among  the  princi- 
pal exciting  causes  of  ringbone.  Horses  most  disposed  to  this  disease 
are  those  with  short,  upright  pasterns,  for  the  reason  that  the  shock 
of  locomotion  is  but  imperfectly  dissipated  in  the  fore  legs  of  these 
animals.     Improper  shoeing  such  as  the  use  of  high  calks,  too  great 


DEPARTMENT  OF  HORSEMANSHIP 
INSPECTION  FOR  COMMON  UNSOUNDNESS 


ANIMAL  IDENTIFICATION 

Name 

Color 

Markings . 


Name_ 


Rank. 


riass_ 


HOOF  BRANDS 


Right  Fore 


Left  Fore 


Platoon 


Date. 




YES 
or 
NO 

REMARKS 

Over  Age 

Under  Age 

Blindness 

Poll  Evil 

Fistula  of  Withers 

Chronic  Sore  Back 

Splint 

Ringbone 

Sidebone 

Quittor 

Navicular  Disease 

Contracted  Heels 

Dropped  Sole 

Bone  Spavin 

Bog  Spavin 

Curb 

Bad  Mouth 

GENERAL  REMARKS: 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  19 

a  shortening  of  the  toe  and  correspondingly  high  heels,  predispose 
to  this  disease  by  increasing  the  concussion  of  the  feet. 

In  Motion:  The  horse  should  be  examined  while  walking  and  trot- 
ting. The  movements  of  the  neck  and  head  are  studied  as  he  comes 
toward  the  observer;  then,  as  he  passes  by,  the  movements  of  the 
limbs  are  noted  as  to  the  height  to  which  they  are  raised;  the  bend 
of  the  joints  whether  easy  and  natural  or  otherwise.  The  way  in 
which  the  foot  lands  upon  the  ground,  whether  flat,  on  the  toe,  one 
side,  or  on  the  heel,  is  to  be  noted  and  considered.  As  the  horse 
passes  from  the  observer  the  movements  of  the  hips  and  hind  legs 
are  noted  with  a  view  to  detecting  lameness  in  those  parts.  Examina- 
tion in  motion  on  a  hard  road  or  pavement  should  be  made,  especially 
to  bring  out  diseases  of  the  feet.  Then  motion  in  deep  mud  or  in  snow 
should  be  studied.  If  these  are  not  available,  the  horse  should  be 
made  to  step  over  a  rail  or  plank  held  up  about  a  foot  from  the  ground 
in  order  to  detect  or  make  more  prominent  possible  soreness  or  lame- 
ness in  the  shoulder  or  hip. 

The  Lungs:  Finally,  the  horse  should  be  given  vigorous  exercise 
on  a  full  stomach ;  for  instance,  a  run  to  a  heavy  wagon,  or  a  short 
run  uphill  to  determine  whether  the  lungs  are  normal,  or,  in  other 
words,  for  the  purpose  of  testing  his  wind.  It  is  possible  to  partially 
disguise  abnormal  breathing  while  the  horse  is  at  rest,  but  it  is  practi- 
cally impossible  to  do  so  if  the  horse  is  given  violent  exercise,  and  the 
latter  should  preferably  be  done  after  feeding  and  watering.  The 
pulse  and  temperature  are  also  taken  at  this  time. 

Raising  the  Foot:  In  preparing  to  raise  a  horse's  foot  never  ap- 
proach the  animal  suddenly,  for  he  will  not  only  be  startled,  but  a 
sudden  pull  at  his  foot  will  probably  disturb  his  balance,  and  the  lift- 
ing will  be  more  difficult  for  both  man  and  horse. 

To  raise  the  fore  foot,  the  shoer  stands  with  his  back  to  the  horse's 
head  and  places  his  inside  hand  on  the  horse's  shoulder.  Then,  bend- 
ing over,  he  runs  his  hand  gently  down  the  back  of  the  leg  until  the 
fingers,  with  the  thumb  on  the  outside,  are  just  above  the  fetlock. 
The  shoer's  shoulder  is  pressed  against  the  shoulder  of  the  horse,  forc- 
ing the  weight  upon  the  other  fore  foot.  A  slight  grasp  of  the  hand  on 
the  tendons  is  usually  sufficient  to  induce  the  horse  to  raise  the  foot. 

The  shoer  next  straddles  the  horse's  leg  and  holds  the  foot  upon 
his  knees,  standing  so  that  his  body  is  about  opposite  the  horse's 
shoulder,  and  in  close  to  him,  so  that  the  horse's  leg  is  not  pulled  out- 
ward in  a  strained  position.  The  shoer's  toes  should  be  turned  in  to 
give  strength  to  the  position. 

Raising  the  hind  foot  is  performed  in  two  different  ways.  In  the 
first  method  the  shoer,  standing  at  the  horse's  flank  and  with  his  back 
to  the  animal's  head,  bends  until  his  shoulder  presses  the  horse's 
thigh,  runs  his  hand  gradually  down  the  tendons  and  grasps  them 
as  in  raising  the  fore  foot.  In  the  second  method,  the  one  generally 
employed,  the  shoer  stands  as  in  the  first  method,  but  with  his  outside 


20  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

foot  advanced ;  the  hand  nearest  the  horse  is  placed  upon  the  animal's 
hip,  gently  pushing  him  over  and  forcing  the  weight  upon  the  op- 
posite hind  foot ;  meanwhile  the  other  hand  is  run  slowly  down  the 
back  tendons  from  below  the  hock.  The  leg  is  grasped  under  the  fet- 
lock and  is  slightly  raised  forward.  The  shoer  now  swing's  his  inside 
leg  under  the  horse's  leg.  presses  it  with  his  knee  and  extends  it  to 
the  rear.  Care  must  be  exercised  that  the  foot  is  not  held  too  high  nor 
carried  too  far  to  the  rear  or  outward,  for  the  discomforts  of  these 
strained  positions  will  induce  the  horse  to  pull  his  leg  away. 


GROOMING 

The  Skin  Consists  Primarily  of  Two  Parts: 

1.  The  superficial  layer  containing'  no  blood  vessels  and  known  as 
the  epidermis.  This  layer  consists  of  cells  placed  side  by  side,  and 
more  or  less  modified  in  shape  by  their  mutual  compression  and  by 
surface  evaporation  and  drying.  As  these  cells  dry,  they  form  scales 
which  fall  off  continually  and  form  dandruff. 

2.  The  second  or  deeper  layer  contains  a  large  number  of  blood 
vessels  and  is  called  the  dermis  or  true  skin.  This  layer  is  formed 
of  somewhat  rounded  cells  and  have  the  selective  power  of  what  they 
shall  take  up  for  their  own  nourishment  and  on  what  they  shall  admit 
into  the  circulation  from  without.  Thus  certain  agents,  like  iodine 
and  belladonna,  are  readily  admitted,  whereas  others,  like  arsenic  are 
excluded.  This  layer  contains  fibrous  bundles,  cells,  blood  vessels, 
nerves,  glands,  gland  ducts  and  hairs. 

Hairs  grow  from  follicles,  sacs  hollowed  out  in  the  skin  and  extend- 
ing to  its  deepest  layers.  The  hair  itself  is  formed  of  the  same  kind 
of  cells,  firmly  adherent  to  one  another  by  a  tough  intercellular  sub- 
stance and  overlapping-  each  other  like  slates  on  a  roof,  in  a  direction 
toward  the  free  end.  There  are  glands  ending  in  the  above  sacs  which 
secrete  an  oily  substance  which  gives  glow  to  the  hair  and  prevents 
its  becoming  dry  and  brittle,  and  kee])s  the  skin  soft  and  pliable. 

The  fibrous  bundles  of  the  true  skin  contain  plain,  muscular  fibers, 
which  are  not  controlled  by  the  will,  but  contract  under  the  influence 
of  cold  and  under  certain  nervous  influences,  as  in  some  skin  diseases 
and  in  chill  or  fever,  and  lead  to  contraction,  tightening  or  corruga- 
tion of  the  skin,  contributing  to  produce  what  is  commonly  called 
"hidebound."  Besides  these,  the  horse's  skin  is  furnished  with  an 
expansion  of  red,  voluntary  muscle,  firmly  attached  to  the  fibrous 
bundles,  and  by  which  the  animals  can  not  only  dislodge  insects  and 
other  irritants,  but  even  shake  oft*  the  harness.  The  fleshy  envelope 
covers  the  sides  of  the  trunk  and  the  lower  portions  of  the  neck  and 
head,  the  parts  unprotected  by  the  mane  and  tail,  and  serves  to  throw 
the  skin  of  these  parts  into  i)uckers,  or  ridges,  in  certain  irritating  skin 
diseases. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  21 

There  are  numerous  isolated  glands,  opening  directly  on  the  sur- 
face of  Ihe  skin,  producing-  a  somewhat  thicker  and  more  odorous 
secretion.  They  are  found  in  large  numbers  in  the  folds  of  the  skin, 
where  chafing-  would  be  liable  if  the  surface  were  dry,  as  on  the  sheath, 
scrotum,  and  inner  side  of  the  thigh,  around  the  anus,  in  the  hollow 
of  the  heel,  beneath  the  fine  horn  of  the  frog,  on  the  inner  side  of  the 
elbow,  on  the  lips,  nostrils  and  e3^elids.  When  closed  by  dried  secre- 
tion these  glands  may  become  distended  so  as  to  form  various  sized 
swellings  on  the  skin,  and  when  inflamed  they  may  throw  out  offen- 
sive liquid  discharges,  as  in  "grease,"  or  produce  red,  tender,  fungous 
growths,  commonly  called  "grapes." 

The  cutaneous  covering  presents  such  an  extensive  surface  for  the 
secretion  of  dermis  scales,  hairs,  horn,  sweat  and  other  excretory  mat- 
ters, that  any  extensive  disorder  in  its  functions  may  lead  to  serious 
internal  disease  and  death.  Again,  the  intimate  nervous  sympathy  of 
dififerent  points  of  the  skin  v/ith  particular  internal  organs  renders 
certain  skin  disorders  causative  of  internal  disease  and  certain  inter- 
nal diseases  causative  of  affections  of  the  skin.  The  mere  painting  of 
the  skin  with  an  impermeable  coating  of  glue  is  speedily  fatal ;  a  cold 
draft  striking  on  the  chest  causes  inflammation  of  the  lungs  or  pleura  ; 
a  skin  eruption  speedily  follows  certain  disorders  of  the  stomach,  the 
liver,  the  kidneys,  or  even  the  lungs;  simple  burns  of  the  skin  cause 
inflamm.ations  of  internal  organs,  and  inflammation  of  such  organs 
cause  in  their  turn  eruptions  of  the  skin.  The  relations — nervous, 
secretory,  and  absorptive — between  the  skin  and  internal  organs  are 
most  extensive  and  varied,  and  therefore  a  visible  disorder  in  the  skin 
may  point  at  once  and  specifically  to  a  particular  fault  ini  diet,  to  an 
injudicious  use  of  cold  water  when  the  system  is  heated,  to  indiges- 
tion and  improper  grooming. 

The  sweat  glands  of  the  horse,  like  those  of  man,  are  composed  of 
simple  tubes  which  extend  down  through  the  cuticle  and  dermis  in  a 
spiral  manner,  and  are  coiled  into  balls  in  the  deeper  layer  of  the  true 
skin.  In  addition  to  their  importance  in  throwing  offensive  waste 
products  out  of  the  system,  these  tend  to  cool  the  skin  and  the  entire 
anatomy  of  the  animal  through  the  evaporation  of  their  watery  secre- 
tion. Their  activity  is  'therefore  a  matter  of  no  small  moment,  as 
besides  regulating  the  animal  heat  and  excreting  impurities,  they 
influence  largely  the  internal  organs  through  the  intimate  sympathy 
maintained  between  them  and  the  skin. 

Chafing  is  a  common  cause  of  disease  of  the  skin  and  is  especially 
liable  to  affect  the  fat  horse  between  the  thighs,  by  the  side  of  the 
sheath  or  scrotum,  on  the  inner  side  of  the  elbow,  or  where  the  harness 
chafes  on  the  poll,  shoulder,  back,  breastbone  and  under  the  tail.  The 
accumulation  of  sweat  and  dust  between  the  folds  of  the  skin  and  on 
the  surface  of  the  harness,  and  the  specially  acrid  character  of  the 
sweat,  in  certain  horses  contributes  to  chafing.  The  heels  often 
become  congested  owing  to  the  irritation  caused  by  the  short  bristly 
hairs  in  clipped  heels.     Again  congestion  may  occur  from  friction  by 


22  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

halter,  harness,  or  other  foreign  body  under  the  pastern,  or  inside  the 
thigh  or  arm,  or  by  reason  of  blows  from  another  foot  (cutting,  inter- 
fering, overreaching).  Finally  erythema  is  especially  liable  to  occur  in 
spring,  when  the  coat  is  being  shed,  and  the  hair  follicles  and  general 
surface  are  exposed  and  irritable  in  connection  with  the  dropping  of 
the  hairs. 

The  Value  of  Grooming 

"The  value  of  grooming  is  dependent  upon  the  force  with  which  the 
brush  is  used  and  the  thoroughness  of  the  other  work.  As  is  seen 
above,  grooming  is  essential  to  the  general  health  and  condition  of 
the  domesticated  horse.  Horses  improperly  groomed  with  ragged 
manes,  unkept  pastern,  feet  improperly  looked  after,  form  an  indica- 
tion of  an  inefficient  organization.  Clean  horses  properly  harnessed 
and  smartly  turned  out,  add  to  the  esprit  of  an  organization  and  give 
a  fair  indication  of  the  discipline  and  efficiency."    D.  &  S.  R.  F.  A. 

"To  Judge  the  Cleanliness  of  a  horse :  The  hand  may  be  passed  the 
reverse  way  of  the  hair  to  get  a  view  of  the  skin.  When  the  points  of 
the  fingers  are  run  firmly  against  the  set  of  the  coat,  lines  of  gray  are 
left  on  the  coat  of  a  dirty  skin  and  the  points  of  the  fingers  are  covered 
with  scurf.  Between  the  branches  of  the  under  jaw,  under  the  crown 
piece  of  the  halter,  at  the  bends  of  the  knees  and  hocks,  under  the  belly 
and  between  the  forelegs  and  thighs  are  the  places  usually  neglected 
when  the  work  is  not  thorough  and  which  should  be  looked  at  when  the 
horse  is  being  inspected."    D.  &  S.  R.  F.  A. 

Cracked  Heels  (Scratches  or  Chaps  on  Knee  and  Hock)  :  This 
usually  sets  in  with  swelling,  heat,  and  tenderness  of  the  hollow  of 
the  heel,  with  erections  of  the  hair  and  redness  (in  white  skins),  with 
stififness  and  lameness,  which  may  be  extreme  in  irritable  horses. 
Soon  slight  cracks  appear  transversely  and  may  gain  in  depth  and 
width  and  may  even  suppurate.  More  frequently  they  become  cov- 
ered at  the  edges  or  throughout  by  firm  incrustations  resulting  from 
the  drying  of  the  liquids  thrown  out,  and  the  skin  becomes  increas- 
ingly thick  and  ridged.  A  similar  condition  occurs  behind  the  knee 
and  in  front  of  the  hock,  and  may  extend  from  these  points  to  the  hoof, 
virtually  incasing  that  side  of  the  limb  in  a  permanent  incrusting 
sheath. 

Causes:  Besides  a  heavy  lymphatic  constitution,  which  predisposes 
to  this  affection,  the  causes  are  overfeeding  on  grain,  unwholesome 
fodder,  close,  hot,  dirty  stables,  constant  contact  with  manure  or  urine 
and  their  emanations,  working  in  deep  irritant  mud ;  above  all  in 
limestone  districts,  irritations  by  dry  limestones  or  sandy  dust  in  dry 
weather  on  dirt  roads ;  also  cold  drafts,  snow  and'  freezing  mud,  wash- 
ing the  legs  with  caustic  soap,  wrapping  the  wet  legs  in  thick  woolen 
bandages  which  soak  the  skin  and  render  it  sensitive  when  exposed 
next  day,  clipping  the  heels,  weak  heart  and  circulation,  natural  or 
supervening  on  overwork,  imperfect  nourishment,  impure  air,  lack  of 
sunshine,   chronic   exhaustion,   or   debilitating  diseases,  or  functional 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  23 

or  structural  diseases  of  the  heart,  liver  or  kidneys.  These  last  induce 
dropsical  swelling-  of  the  limbs  (stocking),  weaken  the  parts,  and  in- 
duce cracking.  Finally,  the  scar  of  a  preexisting  crack,  weak,  rigid  and 
unyielding,  is  liable  to  reopen  under  any  severe  exertion ;  hence  rapid 
paces  and  heavy  draft  are  active  causes. 

Warts:  These  are  essentially  an  overgrowth  of  the  superficial  layer 
of  the  skin.  They  are  mostly  seen  in  young  horses  about  the  lips,  eye- 
lids, cheeks,  ears,  beneath  the  belly  and  on  the  sheath,  but  may  develop 
anywhere.  The  smaller  ones  may  be  clipped  ofif  with  scissors  and 
the  raw  surface  cauterized  with  bluestone.-  The  larger  may  be  sliced 
ofT  with  a  sharp  knife,  or  if  with  a  narrow  neck  they  may  be  twisted 
ofT  and  then  cauterized.  If  very  vascular  they  may  be  strangled  by  a 
wax  thread  or  cord  tied  around  their  necks,  at  least  three  turns  being 
made  around  and  the  ends  being  fixed  by  passing  them  beneath  the 
last  preceding  turn  of  the  cord,  so  that  they  can  be  tightened  day  by 
day  as  they  slacken  by  shrinkage  of  the  tissue.  Very  broad  warts  that 
cannot  be  treated  in  this  way  may  be  burned  down  with  a  soldering 
bolt  at  a  red  heat  to  beneath  the  surface  of  the  skin,  and  any  subse- 
quent tendency  to  overgrowth  kept  down  by  bluestone. 

Vegetable  Parasites  of  the  Skin:  Ringworm.  This  is  especially 
common  in  young  horses  coming  into  training  and  work.  In  the  horse 
the  symptoms  are  the  formation  of  circular,  scurfy  patch  where  the 
fungus  has  established  itself,  the  hairs  of  the  affected  spot  being  erect, 
bristly,  twisted,  broken,  or  split  up  and  dropping  ofif.  Later  the  spot 
first  afifected  has  become  entirely  bald,  and  a  circular  row  of  hairs 
around  this  are  erect,  bristly,  broken  and  split.  These  in  turn  are  shed 
and  a  new  row  outside  passes  through  the  same  process,  so  that  the 
extension  is  made  in  more  or  less  circular  outline.  The  central  bald 
spot,  covered  with  a  grayish  scurf  and  surrounded  by  a  circle  of  broken 
and  split  hairs  is  characteristic.  The  eruption  usually  appears  on 
the  back,  loins,  croup,  chest  and  head. 

The  most  efifective  way  of  reaching  the  parasite  in  the  hair  follicles 
is  to  extract  the  hairs  individually,  but  in  the  horse  the  mere  shaving 
of  the  aiTected  part  is  usually  enough.  It  may  then  be  painted  with 
tincture  of  iodine  twice  a  day  for  two  weeks.  Germs  about  the  stable 
may  be  covered  up  or  destroyed  by  a  whitewash  of  freely  burned 
quicklime,  the  harness,  brushes,  etc.,  may  be  washed  with  caustic 
soda  and  then  smeared  with  a  solution  of  corrosive  sublimate  one 
half  dram  and  water  one  pint. 

Another  parasite  which  attacks  the  horse's  head  where  the  harness 
presses,  leads  to  the  dropping  of  the  hair,  leaving  bald  patches  cov- 
ered with  a  branlike  scurf,  without  any  eruption,  heat,  tenderness, 
swelling,  or  rigidity  of  the  skin.  A  lotion  of  carbolic  acid  one  dram 
and  water  2^^  ounces  is  usually  applied  to  effect  a  cure. 

Animal  Parasites  of  the  Skin:  Mange.  The  mite  is  nearly  micro- 
scopical, but  may  be  detected  with  a  magnifying  lens  among  moving 
scurf  taken  from  the  infected  skin.  It  burrows  little  galleries  in  and 
beneath  the  scurf  skin,  where  it  hides  and  lays  its  eggs  and  where  its 


14  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

young  are  hatched.  It  is  therefore  often  difficult  to  find  the  parasite 
on  the  surface,  unless  the  skin  has  been-  heated  by  a  temporary  expo- 
sure to  the  sun  or  in  a  warm  room. 

Symptoms:  The  symptoms  are  an  incessant,  intolerable  and  increas- 
ing itching  of  some  part  of  the  skin  (head,  mane,  tail,  back,  etc.)  the 
horse  inclining  himself  toward  the  hand  that  scratches  him  and  mov- 
ing his  lips  as  if  himself  scratching.  The  hairs  may  be  broken  and 
rubbed  off,  but  the  part  is  never  entirely  bald,  as  in  ringworm,  and 
there  may  be  papules  or  any  kind  of  eruption  or  open  sores  from  the 
energy  of  the  scratching.  Scabs  of  any  thickness  may  form  but  the 
special  features  are  the  intense  itching  and  the  presence  of  the  parasite. 

Treatment  consists  in  dipping  the  horses  and  a  dipping  vat  is  usually 
at  every  remount  station  for  this  purpose  and,  if  necessary,  a  brush 
and  a  thorough  application  of  tobacco  1}-^  ounces  and  water  2  pints, 
prepared  by  boiling. 


Grooming.    Pulling  Manes  and  Tails.    Trimming  Manes  and  Fetlocks. 
Clipping.    Washing. 

Grooming:  Grooming  is  essential  to  the  general  health,  condition 
and  appearance  of  animals. 

The  specific  benefits  derived  from  grooming  are :  The  removal  of 
dirt  and  body  waste  from  the  skin  and  coat ;  the  maintenance  of  health 
and  condition  by  the  stimulation  of  skin  secretions ;  the  prevention 
of  skin  diseases  (mange,  lice,  etc.)  ;  and  the  improvement  in  the  appear- 
ance of  the  coat  and  animal  generally. 

The  value  of  grooming  depends  upon  the  thoroughness  and  speed 
with  which  it  is  done.  Men  should  he  encouraged  to  work  hard  and 
fast,  skip  nothing,  and  get  through.  Each  man's  grooming  should 
be  inspected  as  soon  as  possible  after  completion,  and  if  satisfactory, 
the  man  dismissed. 

Every  animal  in  the  stable  should  be  groomed  thoroughly  at  least 
once  a  day.  Before  leaving"  the  stable  for  work  or  exercise,  horses 
will  be  brushed  off,  mane  if  any  neatly  arranged,  tail  brushed  out, 
eyes  cleaned,  nostrils  and  dock  wiped  out,  and  feet  cleaned. 

On  return  from  work  or  exercise  grooming  should  be  proceeded 
with  immediately,  except  for  such  delay  as  is  necessary  incident  to 
wiping  off  and  putting  away  equipment.  Heated,  wet,  or  sweating 
horses  should  be  cooled  out  before  being  groomed.  In  the  case  of 
such  horses,  the  equi])ment  should  be  removed  and  quickly  put  aside, 
then  the  horse  given  a  brisk  rubbing"  with  the  wisp  or  drying  cloth. 
Ijlanketed  and  walked  until  thoroughly  cool.  A  couple  of  swallows  of 
water  every  few  minutes  will  assist  the  cooling  out  and  is  beneficial 
to  the  animal. 

Grooming  Tools:  Each  mounted  man  should  have  the  following 
grooming  kit:  curry  comb,  horse  brush,  dandy  brush  (if  procurable), 
hoof  liook,  grooming  cloth,  and  wisp. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  25 

The  Currycomb:  The  currycomb  is  not  beneficial  to  skin  or  to 
the  coat  except  in  removing  mud  and  dirt.  This  can  generally  be 
done  with  the  horse  brush,  if  properly  used.  On  the  other  hand  the 
currycomb  often  scratches  the  skin  and  irritates  the  horse,  and  not 
infrequently  makes  horses  "conscientious  objectors"  to  be  groomed. 

The  Horse  Brush:  The  horse  brush  is  the  principal  tool  in  groom- 
ing. When  properly  used  it  reaches  the  skin,  the  bristles  or  fibers 
penetrating  through  the  hair  of  the  coat.  It  removes  scurf,  dirt  and 
dust,  stimulates  the  skin  and  hair  growth  and  to  a  certain  extent 
massages.     Too  much  stress  cannot  be  laid  upon  its  use. 

The  Dandy  Brush:  The  dandy  brush  is  not  an  article  of  regular 
issue,  but  its  use  is  strongly  recommended  whenever  it  can  be  pro- 
cured. When  used  it  takes  the  place  of  the  currycomb  and  cleans 
the  horse  far  more  quickly  than  the  horse  brush  alone.  When  used 
it  should  be  followed  by  the  horse  brush. 

The  Hoof  Hook:  The  hoof  hook  is  used  to  clean  out  the  feet.  It 
is  frequently  found  attached  to  the  back  of  the  horse  brush,  but  if  not, 
can  be  easily  made  by  the  horseshoer.  Three-eighths  inch  iron  wire  or 
a  horseshoe  drawn  out  to  that  dimension  will  make  excellent  ones.  The 
wire  should  be  about  eight  inches  long  to  start  with.  The  end  is 
sharpened  slightly  and  given  a  round  point,  then  bent  at  right  angles 
about  1V4  inches  from  the  point.  The  other  end  can  be  turned  into 
a  small  ring  for  a  handle.  The  point  should  not  be  sharp  as  there  is 
danger  of  injuring  the  feet  by  going  too  deep  into  the  commissures 
and  cleft  of  the  frog.  It  is  a  very  necessary  tool  and  no  trooper  should 
be  without  one. 

The  Grooming  Cloth:  The  grooming  cloth  is  used  to  remove  dirt 
and  dust  from  the  coat,  to  wipe  ofif  the  head  and  clean  the  dock,  and 
to  polish  the  coat.  It  is  also  used  to  dry  horses  with.  It  is  usually 
made  from  old  toweling  or  condemned  blankets  which  serve  the 
purpose  satisfactorily.  It  should  be  from  a  foot  and  a  half  to  two 
feet  square,  or  even  larger. 

The  Wisp:  A  wisp  is  a  pad  of  straw  or  hay  made  by  twisting  the 
material  into  a  rope  and  doubling  it  into  convenient  sized  pads  as 
follows :  Take  a  rope  of  twisted  straw  or  hay  eight  to  ten  feet  long. 
Make  two  loops  at  one  end  (fig.  1)  one  loop  being  slightly  longer 
than  the  other.  The  remainder  of  the  rope  is  now  twisted  alternately 
around  each  loop  until  the  end  is  reached  when  it  is  passed  through  the 
extremity  of  each  loop  and  tucked  under  one  of  the  twists  (fig.  2). 
A  really  good  wisp  should  be  no  wider  than  can  be  conveniently 
grasped  by  the  hand,  about  one  foot  long  and  two  or  three  inches 
thick.  Care  must  be  taken  not  to  waste  material  in  making  wisps. 
It  is  used  in  regular  grooming  and  in  drying  out  wet  horses.  In 
regular  grooming  it  should  be  dampened  slightly  to  make  the  straw 
less  brittle.  With  wet  horses  this  is  unnecessary  as  sufficient  mois- 
ture is  absorbed  from  the  horse. 

Wisping  is  really  a  form  of  massage  and  is  a  most  valuable  means 
of  improving  the  condition  of  the  skin  and  coat  and  for  making  muscle. 


26  "     MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

It  stimulates  the  skin  generally,  produces  a  ^'igorous  circulation  and 
glosses  the  coat.  It  should  not  be  omitted  from  grooming  unless  pre- 
vented by  shortage  of  straw  or  the  necessity  for  great  haste. 

In  wisping  wet  horses  the  wisp  should  be  worked  forward  and 
backward  well  into  the  coat,  so  that  full  advantage  may  be  taken  of 
the  friction.    After  drying  in  this  manner,  the  coat  should  be  laid  flat. 

Washing  and  Disinfecting  of  Grooming  Tools:  Whenever  neces- 
sary to  wash  and  disinfect  currycombs  or  brushes,  either  to  clean 
them  or  as  a  precaution  against  the  spread  of  disease  proceed  as  fol- 
lows :  First  clean  thoroughly  by  dipping  them  in  a  strong  soda 
solution,  followed  by  dipping  in  a  strong  salt  solution  to  stiffen  the 
bristles.  Then  immerse  in  a  1%  solution  of  creosol  for  15  minutes, 
shake  out  and  stand  with  bristles  down  to  dry.  Grooming  cloths  can 
be  treated  similarly. 

Normal  Method  of  Grooming:    (For  average  thick-coated  horse.) 

(a)  Clean  out  the  foot  with  the  hoof  hook  being  careful  not  to  use 
too  much  pressure. 

(b)  Take  the  currycomb  in  the  right  hand,  fingers  over  the  back 
of  the  comb,  and  the  brush  in  the  left  hand ;  first  use  currycomb  on 
near  side  of  the  horse,  beginning  on  the  neck,  then  breast,  withers, 
shoulder,  foreleg  down  to  the  knee,  then  back,  side,  belly,  loin,  flank, 
croup  and  hind  leg  down  to  hock. 

Change  currycomb  to  left  hand  and  brush  to  the  right,  and  proceed 
in  a  similar  manner  on  the  off  side  of  horse. 

Strike  currycomb  against  heel  frequently  to  free  it  from  dirt. 

The  currycomb  should  never  be  used  on  the  legs  from  the  knees 
and  hock  downward,  nor  about  the  head.  When  occasionally  required 
to  loosen  mud  or  matted  hair  on  the  fleshy  parts  of  the  body,  it  must 
be  applied  gently. 

(c)  Take  brush  in  left  hand  and  currycomb  in  right ;  brush  entire 
near  side  of  horse  in  same  order  as  when  currycomb  was  used,  except 
that  in  brushing  legs,  brush  down  to  the  hoof. 

Change  brush  to  right  hand,  currycomb  to  left,  and  proceed  in 
similar  manner  on  the  ofif  side. 

After  every  few  strokes,  clean  dust  and  hair  from  brush  with  the 
currycomb. 

In  using  the  brush,  the  man  should  stand  well  away  from  the  horse, 
keep  his  arm  stiff  and  throw  the  weight  of  the  body  against  the  brush. 
Absolutely  nothing  is  gained  by  standing  close  to  the  horse  and  pawing 
him  gently  with  the  brush. 

In  grooming  the  belly  apply  the  brush  the  way  of  the  hair,  the 
brush  in  the  left  hand  on  the  near  side,  and  in  the  right  hand  on  the 
off  side.  The  skin  under  the  flanks  and  between  the  fore  and  hind 
quarters  must  be  soft  and  clean. 

Next  brush  head,  mane,  and  tail. 

In  cleaning  mane  and  tail,  begin  brushing  at  the  ends  of  the  hair 
and  gradually  work  up  to  the  roots,  separating  the  locks  with  the 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  27 

fingers  so  as  to  get  out  all  the  scurf  and  dirt.  Tails  require  frequent 
washing  with  warm  water  and  soap. 

(d)  Having  done  with  currycomb  and  Innish,  go  over  the  horse 
with  the  wisp.  The  wisp  should  be  held  about  the  middle  in  the  full 
grasp  of  the  hand,  and  brought  down  with  a  bang  on  the  coat  in  the 
direction  of  the  hair.  The  ])ressure  should  be  continued  throughout 
each  stroke,  and  the  ])rocess  rei)eated  all  over  the  body. 

(Note:  Should  service  condition  render  wisping  impracticable,  it 
may  be  omitted.) 

(e)  Finally  with  grooming  cloth,  wipe  about  the  face,  eyes,  nostrils 
and  dock,  and  give  final  polish  all  over. 

(f)  No  horse  will  be  considered  in  order  until  he  is  thoroughly 
clean,  his  mane  and  tail  brushed  out  and  laid  flat,  his  eyes,  mouth, 
nostrils  and  dock  wiped  or  washed  out,  and  his  feet  cleaned. 

It  should  be  a  matter  of  pride  with  each  man  to  have  the  best 
groomed  horse.  He  should  be  encouraged  in  his  efforts,  and  stimulated 
by  competition  and  rewards. 

Special  Method  of  Grooming:    (For  fine  coated  and  clipped  horses). 

Use  normal  method  omitting  the  use  of  currycomb,  except  occasion- 
ally to  remove  caked  mud.  The  dandy  brush  can  be  used  in  place  of 
the  currycomb  in  these  cases  to  good  advantage.  It  will  remove  the 
mud  and  is  less  likely  to  scratch  or  irritate  the  horse. 

Grooming  By  Detail 

To  groom  by  detail  the  instructor  causes  the  men  to  stand  to  heel 
and  commands:  1.  By  detail.  2.  COMMENCE  GROOMING. 
Clean  and  brush  front  legs  from  the  knees  down,  rubbing  under  the 
fetlocks  and  around  the  coronets  with  the  brush  and  hand  ;  time,  2 
minutes.  3.  CHANGE.-  Same  as  at  second  command,  the  hind  legs 
from,  the  hocks  down;  time,  2  minutes.  4.  CHANGE.  On  the  near 
side,  with  currycomb  and  brush,  groom  neck,  shoulder,  arm,  elbow, 
back,  side,  flank,  loins,  croup,  and  the  hind  leg  to  the  hock;  time,  4 
minutes.  5.  CFIANGE.  First  on  the  near  side,  after  finishing  up  on 
the  off  side,  groom  chest  between  the  forelegs,  the  belly,  and  between 
the  hind  legs;  time;  3  minutes.  6.  CHANGE.  Same  as  4,  on  the  off 
side;  time,  4  minutes.  7.  CHANGE.  Brush  head,  ears,  and  throat; 
with  the  hand  rub  the  throat  and  between  the  forks  of  the  lower  jaw ; 
time,  1  minute.  8.  CHANGE.  Brush  and  lay  forelock  and  mane; 
time.  2  minutes.     9.  CHANGE.     Brush  out  the  tail,  time.  2  minutes. 

10.  CHANGE.  With  the  grooming  cloth,  or  with  a  damp  cloth  or 
sponge  if  the  parts  are  foul,  wipe  out  the  eyes  and  nostrils ;  wipe  the 
muzzle,  dock,  sheath,  and  up  between  the  hind  legs;  time.  2  minutes. 

11.  CHANGE.  Clean  out  the  feet;  time,  2  minutes.  12.  CHANGE. 
Complete  anv  unfinished  work.  13.  CEASE  GJ^OOMING.  14. 
STAND  TO  HEEL. 

Hand  Rubbing:  Hand  rubbing  is  beneficial,  being  soothing  and 
restful  to  tired  muscles  and  stimulating  to  the  circulation.  It  also 
removes  loose  hair  and  helps  to  produce  a  glossy  coat.     The  hands 


28  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

are  slapped  down  briskly  on  the  coat,  one  after  the  other,  with  the 
weight  of  the  body  behind  them  while  they  are  moved  over  the  skin 
with  firm  pressure. 

After  very  hard  work,  the  horse's  leg's  should  he  hand-rubbed  briskly 
with  the  fingers  and  palms,  up  and  down,  and  then  bandaged  loosely. 

The  Sheath:  Sheath  should  be  kept  clean  by  washing  when  neces- 
sary with  warm  water  and  castile  soap. 

The  Feet:  At  "Stables"  each  man  should  carefully  inspect  his  horse's 
feet  for  any  evidence  of  picked-up  nails,  thrush,  or  other  disease.  Any 
horse  in  need  of  shoeing  or  of  attention  for  other  cause  must  be  reported 
to  the  Stable  Sergeant,  who  will  see  that  the  necessary  action  is  taken. 
The  Stable  Sergeant  will  also  inspect  carefully  all  animals  shod  since 
last  "Stables." 

As  a  preventative  against  thrush,  the  feet  should  l)e  washed  out 
with  a  3%  solution  of  creolin  or  creosol,  and  careful  attention  must 
be  paid  to  the  standings. 

Pulling  Manes  and  Tails:  Manes  and  tails  should  be  kept  pulled 
thin  and  even.  This  is  done  by  grasping  a  few  hairs  at  a  time  and 
sliding  the  hand  up  close  to  the  roots,  then  giving  a  quick  jerk  so  as 
to  pull  them  out  by  the  roots.  Always  work  on  the  longest  hairs  and 
on  the  under  side  of  the  mane  or  tail. 

Tails  should  be  shortened  to  about  four  inches  below  the  hocks. 
The  dock  and  upper  part  of  the  tail  should,  be  kept  free  from  coarse 
hairs. 

Trimming  Manes  and  Fetlocks:  Fetlocks  should  be  neatly 
trimmed,  and  that  part  of  the  mane  upon  which  the  crown  piece  rests 
should  be  closely  clipped. 

Clipping  manes  is  optional  with  Regimental  Commanders.  It  is, 
however,  strongly  recommended,  especially  for  field  service.  When 
manes  are  clipped  it  should  be  done  close,  all  the  way  up. 

Clipping:  The  clipping  of  heavy  coats  is  strongly  recommended 
for  many  reasons.  It  should  be  done  in  the  fall  before  the  winter  sets 
in  and  as  often  thereafter  as  necessary.  During  cold  weather  it  should 
be  done  over  the  neck  and  bod}^  only,  leaving  the  hair  on  the  legs. 
The  principal  reasons  for  clipping  are  as  follows : 

Except  under  field  conditions  in  the  coldest  climates,  animals  can 
be  kept  sufficiently  warm  when  clipped,  hence  the  long  coat  is  unneces- 
sary. Long  hair  prevents  thorough  cleaning,  causes  loss  of  condition 
and  may  cause  respiratory  diseases.  Long  hair  on  field  service  is  a 
menace  to  the  whole  command,  as  it  harbors  lice,  mange  and  other 
skin  diseases,  and  makes  them  most  difficult  to  combat.  Special  care 
must  be  taken  to  blanket  clipped  animals  during  sudden  changes  of 
weather  and  when  it  is  extremely  cold  or  damp. 

Power  clippers  are  the  best,  but  hand  clippers  will  serve.  Clipper 
heads  and  blades  must  be  used  with  care  as  they  are  easily  dulled 
and  broken.  They  can  be  resharpencd  and  should  be  as  often  as  may 
be  necessary.     While  using  power  clippers  a  small  pan  of  oil  should 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  29 

be   at   hand,   and    the    head   immersed   frequently   with    the    machine 
running". 

Washing:  The  j^ractice  of  washing  horses,  although  not  injurious 
in  warm  weather,  should  be  discouraged.  It  is  a  lazy  man's  way  of 
grooming  and  while  it  removes  dirt  and  sweat,  the  benefit  derived 
from  the  action  of  the  brush  on  the  skin  and  coat  is  lost.  Cleaning 
legs  by  washing  should  not  be  permitted  as  scratches  and  grease  heel 
wdll  result.  Whenever  a  horse  is  washed  he  should  be  treated  as 
described  above  for  cooling  out  horses. 

AGE  OF  HORSES  AS  INDICATED  BY  TEETH 

The  horse  is  provided  with  two  sets  of  teeth,  temporary  and  perma- 
nent. The  temporary,  or  milk  teeth,  are  those  of  the  first  growth  or 
dentition.  The  permanent  differs  in  appearance  from  the  temporary 
one  by  being  larger,  longer,  darker  or  more  yellowish  in  color,  and 
by  having  a  well-marked  groove  down  the  anterior  or  front  face  of  the 
crowm.  It  does  not  have  the  constricted  neck  which  is  characteristic 
of  the  milk  tooth. 

The  three  principal  tooth  substances  are  called  dentine,  enamel,  and 
cement.  The  dentine  composes  the  main  body  of  the  tooth.  It  is 
protected  by  a  covering  of  enamel,  which  is  very  white  in  color  and 
is  the  hardest  of  all  animal  substances.  The  cement  is  a  yellowish 
colored  bony  material  found  in  the  center  of  the  tooth.  The  grinding 
surface  of  tooth  is  called  the  table,  and  there  is  an  unfolding  of  the 
enamel  on  the  table  of  the  teeth,  which  forms  in  the  incisors  a  cavity, 
the  bottom  of  wdiich  is  filled  with  cement  to  a  depth  wdiich  varies  in 
different  animals.  The  imfilled  portion  of  this  cavity  forms  what  is 
called  the  cup.  The  cups  are  deeper  in  the  upper  incisors  than  they 
are  in  the  lower  ones.  They  soon  become  stained  by  food  juices  so 
that  they  appear  very  black  in  color.  Ordinarily  after  a  lower  incisor 
has  been  in  wear  for  three  years  its  table  surface  has  been  worn  down 
to  the  cement  filling  and  the  blackened  cup  cavity  has  disappeared. 
It  is  often  difficult  for  the  inexperienced  observer  to  determine  when 
the  cup  has  actually  disappeared.  He  expects  to  see  the  table  surface 
perfectly  level  and  of  uniform  color,  whereas  the  enamel  being  so 
much  harder  than  either  the  dentine  or  the  cement,  stands  in  relief  on 
the  table  surface,  and  envelops  a  very  shallow  and  sometimes  slightly 
stained  depression  (of  cement)  for  several  years  after  the  black  cup 
cavity  is  considered  to  have  disappeared.  In  the  center  of  the  tooth, 
and  extending  almost  its  entire  length,  is  the  pulp  cavity  channel, 
wdiich  in  life  is  filled  with  a  fleshy  tissue  or  pulp  through  the  medium 
of  wdiich  the  tooth  derives  its  nourishment.  As  the  tooth  is  worn  off 
with  age  the  outer  extremity  of  the  sensitive  pulp,  which  would 
otherwise  became  exposed,  is  changed  into  a  yellowish  colored  ivory- 
like substance  that  completely  fills  and  closes  the  cavity.  Hence,  when 
the  tooth  has  worn  down  to  the  pulp  cavity,  the  latter  appears  on  the 
table  surface  (just  in  front  of  the  remains  of  the  cup)  as  a  yellowish 
colored  mark  called  the  dental  star.    This  usually  makes  its  appearance 


30 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


when  the  animal  is  eight  years  old,  although  in  very  hard  teeth  it  is 
often  not  apparent  until  about  eleven  years.  Depending  upon  the 
hardness  of  the  dentine  and  the  character  of  the  food,  the  teeth  wear 
away  at  the  rate  of  about  one-twelfth  of  an  inch  per  year.  As  an  incisor 
is  not  of  uniform  shape  or  size  from  its  crown  to  its  roots,  it  is  at  once 
apparent  that  wear  will  continually  change  the  form  of  its  table  surface. 
By  their  growth,  changes  of  form  and  wearing,  the  teeth  of  the  horse 
furnish  a  very  reliable  guide  to  determine  the  animal's  age.  In  the 
adult  animal  they  number  from  thirty-six  in  the  female  to  forty  in  the 
male,  and  are  classed  according  to  their  location,  form  and  functions, 
as  incisors,  canines,  and  molars.  The  incisors,  or  cutters,  occupy  the 
front  part  of  the  mouth.  They  are  twelve  in  number,  six  in  the  lower, 
and  six  in  the  upper  jaw.  In  each  jaw  there  are  two  central,  two 
lateral,  and  two  corner  incisors.  The  canines,  or  tushes,  occupy  the 
front  part  of  the  interdental  space.  The  tushes  are  usually  absent  in  the 
mare,  or  if  present,  are  very  small.  They  are  four  in  number,  two  in 
each  jaw.  The  molars,  or  grinders,  occupy  the  back  part  of  the  mouth. 
They  are  twenty-four  in  number,  six  in  each  side  of  the  jaw.  Naming 
from  front  to  rear  they  are  designated  first,  second,  third,  etc.  Quite 
frequently  supplementary  molars,  called  "wolf  teeth,"  are  present.  If 
so,  they  appear  directly  in  front  of  the  first  molar,  in  the  upper  jaw. 
To  obtain  the  best  view  of  the  mouth,  grasp  the  upper  lip  firmly  with 
the  right  hand,  and  place  the  left  in  the  interdental  space  from  the  right 
side,  using  the  thumb  to  depress  the  lower  lip,  and  the  back  of  the 
hand  to  press  the  tongue  upward  and  backward.  In  this  way  the  right 
hand  serves  as  a  twitch  to  hold  the  horse,  while  the  left  one  uncovers 
the  lower  incisors. 


DENTITION  OF  THE  HORSE 


Kind 

Number 

When  Appear 

When  Replaced 

Center 

-Middle 

Corner 

Birth 

2y2    years 
3>4   years 
4^2    years 

Incisors 

4  to  6  weeks 

6  to  9  months 

4  to  5  years 

Birth 

Birth 

rpirst 

2>4    years 

Second 

TVii'rrI 

2^4    years 
Sy2   years 

Molars 

Birth 

Fourth 

Fifth 

10  to  12  months... 

2   years  

4  to  5  years 

Sixth 

Ages  of  horses  by  the  teeth  are  determined  by  shedding  and  appear- 
ance of  the  teeth  up  to  four  years,  a6cording  to  table.  Cups  wear  out  of 
center  pair  of  incisors  of  lower  jaw  at  about  six  years;  middle  pair  of 


32 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


incisors  at  about  seven  years  ;  and  corner  incisors  at  about  eight  years  ; 
cups  wear  out  of  center  of  incisors  upper  jaw  at  nine  years,  middle  pair 
at  eleven  years,  and  corner  incisors  at  about  twelve  years.  Quality  of 
the  teeth,  kind  of  food,  and  the  way  the  teeth  fit  together  to  be  con- 
sidered. 


SHOEING 

The  horse's  foot  is  particularly  liable  to  disease  both  from  the 
delicacy  of  its  mechanism,  and  the  injury  to  which  it  is  exposed.  The 
feet  of  the  stabled  horse  bear  eloquent  testimony  to  the  class  of  man- 
agement which  is  in  vogue.  Cleanliness  is  an  all-important  feature. 
Under  the  influence  of  manure  and  urine  the  horn  of  the  foot  is  very 
liable  to  suffer,  the  urine  acts  chemically  by  its  alkaline  nature,  in 
which  horn  is  more  or  less  soluble.  This  corrosive  action  is  particu- 
larly evident  in  the  matter  of  the  sole  and  frog,  especially  the  latter, 
where  in  conjunction  with  wet  and  filth,  inflammatory  trouble  is  set 
up  in  the  sweat  glands  of  the  frog,  with  destruction  of  horn  and  loss 
of  function. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  33 

Tlie  horn  of  the  foot  requires  for  its  healthy  condition  to  be  kept  in 
contact  with  the  ground  ;  the  effect  of  pressure  is  remarkable,  and 
cspeciall}^  is  this  seen  in  the  frog\ 

Pressure  also  keeps  the  foot  normal  in  shape  and  width ;  the  parts 
are  intended  for  contact  with  the  ground  and  pressure,  and  if  the  pres- 
sure is  riot  obtained  the  foot  atrophies,  wastes  away;  this  shrinkage, 
besides  other  effects,  also  means  a  loss  of  bearing  surface. 

The  care  of  the  feet  in  the  stable  or  on  the  picket  line  is  comprised 
in  the  words  "cleanliness  and  ordinary  dryness."  Cleanliness  to  in- 
sure the  horn  undergoing  no  chang-e  as  the  result  of  the  action  of 
urine  and  faeces,  ordinary  dryness  to  avoid  the  rotting  of  horn  b_y 
constant  exposure  to  wet.  It  has  been  known  for  ages  that  horses 
kept  on  dry  surface  have  stronger  and  better  feet,  more  capable  of  re- 
sisting injury,   than   those  brought   up   on   filthy   and   moist   ground. 

As  the  wear  is  greater  than  secretion,  the  excessive  wear  of  tlie  foot 
which  results  from  work  necessitates  some  protection  being  afforded. 
and  this  is  given  by  shoeing. 

In  the  application  of  the  shoe  to  the  foot  the  functions  of  the  \'arious 
parts  must  be  borne  in  mind.  A  horse's  weight  is  carried  by  the  A^'all 
of  the  foot  and  that  part  of  the  sole  adjacent  to  it,  the  bars  and  the 
frog.  All  of  these  parts  in  an  unshod  foot  are  in  contact  with  the 
ground.  The  sole  being  concave,  would  not  rest  upon  the  ground  ex- 
cepting in  soft  soil,  nor  is  it  intended  to  carry  weight  excepting  where 
it  joins  with  the  wall. 

When  a  shoe  is  placed  on  the  foot  the  natural  condition  just  men- 
tioned should  be  complied  with,  the  shoe  should  rest  on  the  wall,  ad- 
jacent circumference  of  the  sole,  and  the  bars.  The  frog  should  rest 
on  the  ground  ;  it  is  one  of  the  anti-concussion  mechanisms  and  can- 
not perform  this  function  unless  on  the  ground.  This  India  rubber- 
like structure  acts  like  a  non-skidding,  pneumatic  tire  to  the  body, 
excepting  that  it  does  not  wear  out  from  constant  use. 

I  wish  to  draw  your  attention  to  an  important  part  of  the  foot 
which  is  greatly  ill-treated  or  neglected  in  shoeing,  and  that  is  the 
heel.  We  find  that  all  its  patts  are  constructed  with  an  elastic  structure 
intended  to  yield,  to  expand  and  contract,  to  act  as  a  buffer  or  cush-o!i 
for  the  lateral  cartilages;  furthermore  the  wall  is  one-third  thinner, 
one-third  lower  and  one-third  younger  at  the  heel  than  at  the-  toe, 
all  helping-  the  elastic  cushion  in  its  function.  AVith  this  positive 
knowledge  of  the  rational  requirement  of  this  ])art  of  the  foot,  it  is 
most  essential  that  Ave  should  shoe  accordingly.  That  is  to  retani,  as 
much  as  it  is  possible  to  do,  the  natural  functions  of  the  heel.  There 
is  no  form  of  shoeing  that  prevents  and  blocks  these  functions  more 
effectively  than  the  application  of  calks  to  shoes,  consequently  calk 
shoes  are  not  to  be  recommended  except  for  winter  shoeing  when  the 
roads  are  icy  and  slippery.  At  no  other  time,  whether  for  draft  or 
other  purposes,  roads  hilly  or  not,  should  calk  shoes  be  tolerated. 

It  is  useless  to  elaborate  here  and  explain  the  why  and  wherefore 
of  every  point  brought  out ;  it  is  sufficient  to  state  that  every  state- 
ment made  is  the  result  of  study,  observation,  and  experience. 


34  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

The  art  of  horseshoeing'  is  simple,  and  not  complicated.  It  mainly 
consists  in  the  removal  of  the  wall,  at  the  lower  or  bearing  surface, 
which  has  grown  since  the  previous  shoeing,  the  foot  rasped  to  a 
proper  level  all  around,  the  shoe  adjusted  to  its  entire  circumference 
and  applied.  No  other  manipulation  of  the  foot  should  be  allowed, 
except  for  therapeutical  or  surgical  reasons  and  under  proper  authority. 
There  is  an  excellent  order  published,  which  I  herewith  submit  for 
your  information : 

"G.  O.  No.  16,  A.  G.  O.  1888.  In  preparing  the  horse's  foot  for  the 
shoe  do  not  fouch  with  the  knife,  the  frog,  sole,  or  bars. 

'Tn  removing  surplus  growth  of  that  part  of  the  foot  which  is  the 
'seat  of  the  shoe'  use  the  cutting  pinchers  and  rasp  and  not  the  knife. 
The  shoeing  knife  may  be  used  if  necessary  in  fitting  the  toe  clip. 
'Opening  the  heels'  or  making  a  cut  into  the  angle  of  the  wall  at  the 
heel  must  not  be  allowed.  The  rasp  may  be  used  upon  this  part  of  the 
foot  when  necessary,  and  the  same  applies  to  the  pegs.  No  cutting 
with  a  knife  is  permitted ;  the  rasp  alone  is  used  when  necessary. 
'Flat-footed  horses'  should  be  treated  as  the  necessity  of  each  case 
may  require.  'In  forging  the  shoe  to  fit  the  foot'  be  careful  that  the 
shoe  is  fitted  to  and  follows  the  circumference  of  the  foot  clear  around 
to  the  heels ;  the  heels  of  the  shoe  should  not  be  extended  back  straight 
and  outside  of  the  walls  at  the  heels  of  the  horse's  foot,  as  is  frequently 
done.  Care  must  be  taken  that  the  shoe  is  not  fitted  too  small,  the 
outer  surface  of  the  walls  being  then  rasped  down  to  make  the  foot 
short  to  suit  the  shoe,  as  often  happens.  Heat  may  be  used  in  pre- 
paring and  shaping  the  shoe,  but  the  hot  shoe  must  not  be  applied 
to  the  horse's  foot  under  any  circumstances.  Make  the  upper  or  foot 
surface  of  the  shoe  perfectly  flat  so  as  to  give  a  level  bearing.  A  shoe 
with  a  concave  ground  surface  should  be  used." 

The  only  rasping  of  the  wall  that  can  be  allowed  is  in  the  removal 
of  the  fringes  which  are  left  after  levelling  the  surface  for  the  shoe, 
and  the  only  cutting  of  the  sole  that  can  be  permitted  is  the  removal 
of  the  loose  flakes.  A  slight  impression  of  a  hot  shoe  to  the  foot  may 
be  used  to  determine  an  uneven  surface  and  level  accordingly,  but 
nothing  beyond  .this  use  of  the  hot  shoe  should  be  allowed.  As  the 
bars  are  part  of  the  wall,  it  goes  without  saying  that  their  bearing  sur- 
face should  be  maintained  and  never  cut  beyond  the  level  of  the  wall. 

In  proper  shoeing  the  frog  should  be  flush  with  the  shoe,  with  no 
nails  driven  close  to  the  heel.  In  flat  feet,  accompanied  with  low 
broad  heels,  "swelling"  of  the  shoe  at  the  heel  may  be  allowed  to  avoid 
excessive  frog  pressure. 

In  contracted  feet  brought  on  from  any  cause,  except  navicular  dis- 
ease,^ tips  should  be  used  to  develop  the  frogs  and  heels  till  normal 
shoeing  can  again  be  restored.  "To  maintain  a  level  foot  bearing, 
tips  should  be  counter-sunk." 

The  practice  of  hoof-dressing  with  oily  substances  or  hoof-stuffing 
with  clay  or  other  material  is  not  to  be  recommended  when  the  foot 
is  sound  and  in  normal  condition,  even  if  it  should  happen  to  be  hard. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  3^ 

Such  practices,  when  once  started,  have  to  be  kept  up  and  it  then  be- 
comes a  nuisance. 

In  garrison  a  shoeing-  list  should  be  kept  on  the  table  bulletin  board 
showing  the  name  and  hoof  number  of  each  horse,  the  date  of  last 
shoeing,  and  the  class  of  shoes  then  used.  The  corresponding  entries 
should  be  made  daily,  and  at  each  "stables"  the  horses  appearing  on 
the  list  as  shod  since  the  last  prior  "stables"  should  be  carefully  in- 
spected by  the  responsible  officer.  In  general,  horses  should  be  shod 
every  four  or  five  weeks. 

Shoeing:  All  officers  must  understand  the  principles  of  proper  shoe- 
ing and  be  able  to  supervise  the  work  of  the  horseshoers. 

A  trooper  should  know  how  to  put  on  a  shoe  in  an  emergency.  The 
following  extracts  from  the  manual  The  Army  Horseshoer,  IQ12  are 
therefore    here   incorporated. 

"The  foot  should  be  prepared  so  that  it  will  approximate  as  nearly 
as  possible  to  a  state  of  nature,  and  only  such  trimming  as  necessary. 

"(h)  Does  the  shoe  rest  evenly  on  the  wall,  covering  the  buttress 
and  showing  no  air  space  at  any  point? 

"(i)  Is  the  shoe  properly  concaved  so  as  to  avoid  pressure  on  the 
shoe?  I  I    _    yi  U 

"(j)   Has  the  knife  been  used  on  the  bars,  sole  or  frog? 

"(k)Are  the  nails  well  seated  and  of  the  proper  size? 

"(1)  Are  the  heels  of  the  shoe  correct  in  width  and  thickness,  and 
are  they  properly  rounded  without  sharp  edges  or  points?  Is  their 
leng^th  even  with  the  bulb  of  the  frog?" 


-J 

O 
O 


c 

o  >-• 


p;    "    y    a;    JH 

C  C   ^  <u  rt 


.S"5  o-^Xx 


O  aj 


O    O 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


%1 


INSPECTION  OF  SHOEING 


R.  P.,  L.  P.,  R.  H.,  L.  H.     STUDENT'S  REMARKS     INSTRUCTOR'S  REMARKS 


Pastern  &  foot  axes . 
Outline  of  shoe .  . . . , 

Toe  clip 

Clinching , 

Nailing 

Size  of  shoe 

Nails 

Level  of  foot 

Is  the  foot  down 

Use  of  knife 

Bearing  surface 

Concaving 

L.  &  P.  of  heels 


Student's  Signature 


Instructor's  Signature 


NUMBER  OF 
HORSE 

JAN. 

FEB. 

MAR. 

APR. 

MAY 

JUNE 

JULY 

AUG. 

SEPT. 

OCT. 

NOV. 

DEC. 

4 

)T( 

i^ 

QX 

® 

5 

® 

SI 

& 

M 

6 

^ 

0 

ni 

M 

7 

M 

xn 

0 

K 

8 

o 

o 

o 

O 

Key  to  Chart.    On  January  3,  Horse  No.  4  was  shod  all-round.    On 
March  8,  Horse  No.  7  was  shod  right  foot  front  and  left  hind  foot. 
Every  horse  should  he  shod  at  least  once  a  month. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 
PASTERN  CONFORJ^IATION, 


39 


Pl^BPAl^ATION  OF  TffB  HOOF. 


PASTERN  CONTORmTION. 


PREPAI^TION  OF   THD    HOOF. 


Shoeing  Correction  for  Faulty  Pasterns 

CARE  OF  THE  FEET 

This  is  a  most  important  but  often  neglected  part  of  animal  manage- 
ment. The  old  saying  ''No  foot,  no  horse,"  always  has  been  and  al- 
ways will  be  true.  A  horse  is  no  better  than  his  feet,  and  they  require 
constant  and  intelligent  care  to  keep  them  in  condition. 

Every  officer  in  charge  of  animals  must  continually  watch  the  con- 
dition of  their  feet  and  see  that  they  receive  proper  care.  Every  man 
that  rides  or  drives  an  animal  must  do  the  same,  reporting  promptly 
to  his  Squad  Leader  or  Stable  Sergeant  any  need  for  attention,  no 
matter  how  slight.  A  loose  shoe  if  reported  at  once  may  be  quickly 
tightened,  while  if  neglected  it  will  probably  be  lost,  and  very  possibly 
cause  lameness. 

The  principles  and  methods  of  horseshoeing  are  given  in  the 
Manual  for  Army  Horseshoers,  and  only  a  few  points  will  be  considered 
here. 

Every  mounted  unit  should  have  one  or  two  trained  horseshoers, 
and  one  or  two  understudies  in  training. 

Any  unit  which  finds  itself  without  a  competent  horseshoer  is  in  a 
pitiful  plight,  for  it  will  not  be  mounted  long. 


40  AIOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

A  shoeing"  roster  should  be  kept  showing  when  and  what  shoeing 
was  done  for  each  animal. 

An  average  day's  work  of  thorough  shoeing  is  about  eight  feet  shod 
with  new  shoes.  If  many  old  shoes  can  be  reset,  i.  e.,  the  shoes  pulled 
off,  feet  trimmed  down  and  shoes  replaced,  considerably  more  than 
eight  can  be  done.  If  many  special  or  pathological  shoes  are  required, 
not  so  many  can  be  expected. 

No  shoe  should  be  allowed  to  remain  on  an  animal's  foot  longer 
than  thirty  days.  The  wear  on  the  shoe  depends  upon  the  nature 
and  the  amount  of  work  and  the  kind  of  roads  or  terrain  over  which 
it  is  performed. 

Macadam  roads  and  rocky  soil  will  cause  the  shoes  to  wear  much 
faster  than  soft  roads  and  turf.  But  the  growth  of  horn  is  approxi- 
mately the  same  for  all  cases,  and  after  a  month's  growth  the  horn 
is  too  long  and  needs  taking  down. 

The  resetting  of  old  shoes  whenever  it  is  justified  by  the  amount  of 
wear  left  in  them,  is  recommended  as  an  economical  measure. 

The  horseshoer  knows  from  his  shoeing  roster  exactly  when  each 
animal  must  be  shod  to  conform  to  the  thirty-day  requirement.  He 
should  inspect  the  feet  of  all  animals  daily,  preferably  at  "Stables," 
and  attend  to  any  that  need  it,  also  attend  to  any  that  are  specially 
reported  to  him. 

When  the  soil,  the  nature  of  the  work,  and  the  condition  of  the  feet 
permit,  it  is  advisable  to  remove  the  shoes  and  allow  the  animals  to 
go  barefooted.  Going  barefooted  rests  the  feet,  favors  freer  expansion, 
toughens  the  horn,  and  assists  nature  in  restoring  the  foot  to  its  natural 
condition.  However,  the  feet  must  have  sufficient  horn  to  allow  for 
wear. 

On  removal  of  shoes  the  feet  must  be  trimmed  slightly  to  prevent 
chipping  or  splintering  of  the  horn. 

It  is  only  very  rarely  that  animals  can  be  permitted  to  go  barefooted 
in  the  field,  as  there  is  too  much  uncertainty  as  to  what  work  troops 
may  be  called  upon  to  do  on  short  notice. 

On  going  into  the  field  troops  should,  whenever  possible,  start  out 
freshly  shod,  and  each  man  should  have  one  extra  fitted  front  and  hind 
shoe  with  sufficient  nails,  for  each  horse.  The  field  shoeing  kit  should 
never  be  left  behind  unless  absolutely  unavoidable. 

Any  animal  losing  a  shoe  on  the  march  must  be  attended  to  then. 
If  neglected,  lameness  will  almost  surely  result. 

Organization  Commanders  and  Platoon  Leaders  should  inspect  all 
animals  under  their  command  daily.  At  stables  they  should  inspect 
the  animals  freshly  shod,  the  Stable  Sergeant  and  Horseshoer  being 
present  for  this  inspection. 

The  horse  should  be  examined  on  a  level  f^oor,  as  otherwise  it  is 
impossible  to  determine  whether  he  is  standing  correctly  or  not. 

The  following  points  should  be  carefully  noted  and  any  improper 
or  carelessly  shod  animals  returned  to  the  shop  the  next  day : 

(a)  Pastern  and  foot  axes.  View  the  foot  from  the  front  and  side 
to  determine  whether  the  axes  are  correct. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  41 

(b)  The  fit  of  the  outline  of  the  shoe.  Does  it  correctly  follow  the 
outline  of  the  wall  to  the  last  nail  hole,  and  from  there  extend  outward, 
allowing^  proper  space  for  expansion?  Note  particularly  whether  the 
wall  has  been  rasped  to  fit  the  shoe. 

(c)  The  toe  clip.  Is  it  in  the  center?  Is  it  of  sufficient  strength. 
height,  properly  finished  and  seated? 

(d)  The  nails.  Are  they  evenly  driven,  the  proper  height  and  dis- 
tance apart?    Have  any  old  nail  stubs  been  left  in  the  wall? 

(e)  The  clinches.  Are  they  of  proper  size?  Are  they  well  turned 
and  set  in?  Are  they  smoothed  ofif  and  not  rasped  sufficiently  to 
weaken  them? 

The  foot  should  then  be  raised  and  the  examination  continued  in 
the  following  manner: 

(a)  The  shoe.  Is  it  the  proper  size  and  weight?  The  last  nail 
hole  not  farther  back  than  the  bend  of  the  quarter? 

(b)  The  preparation  of  the  foot.  Has  enough  horn  been  removed? 
Has  too  much  been  removed?    Is  the  foot  level? 

(c)  Bearing  surface  of  the  foot.  Does  the  shoe  rest  evenly  on  the 
wall,  covering  the  buttress  and  showing  no  air  spaces  at  any  point? 

(d)  Concaving  the  shoe.  Is  the  shoe  properly  concaved.^  .No  sole 
pressure  at  any  point? 

(e^  Use  of  the  knife.  Has  the  knife  been  used  on  the  bars,  sole,  or 
frog? 

(f)  The  nails.  Are  they  well  seated  in  the  crease?  Are  they 
the  correct  size?    Are  they  all  of  the  same  size? 

(g)  The  heels  of  the  shoe.  Are  they  the  correct  width  and  thick- 
ness, properly  rounded,  without  sharp  edges  or  points?  Is  their 
length  even  with  the  bulb  of  the  frog? 

In  cases  where  animals  have  been  shod  with  calk  shoes  the  follow- 
ing should  so  be  noted: 

(a)  Toe  calk.  Is  it  properly  secured  and  of  proper  height  and 
length? 

(b)  Heel  calk.  Are  they  of  same  height  as  the  toe  calk?  Are  they 
properly  turned  and  finished? 

After  becoming  accustomed  to  making  the  daily  inspection  the  time 
necessarv  should  not  exceed  five  minutes  for  each  horse. 


EXERCISE  AND  CONDITIONING 

Exercise  and  conditioning  are  very  closely  related,  as  conditioning 
is  largely  dependent  upon  the  exercise  and  feed  given.  Condition 
means  much  more  than  looking  well.  Animals  are  considered  to  be 
in  fit  condition  when  the  body  and  muscular  organs  are  in  a  condition 
to  perform  without  injury  the  work  required.  Hence  conditioning 
depends  upon  the  degree  of  fitness  required  of  the  animal  for  the 
class  of  work  to  be  done.  In  the  service  it  means  the  ability  to  do 
ordinary  work  satisfactorily  with  a  minimum  of  strain  and  at  the  same 
time  to  be  able  to  meet  any  reasonable  special  demand.    This  is  accom- 


42  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

plished  by  systematic  exercise  and  feeding',  which  must  be  continued 
even  after  the  condition  has  been  attained. 

The  exercise  must  be  regular  and  graduated  and  always  within  the 
limits  of  the  animal's  strength.  Working  tired  animals  when  unfit 
is  very  apt  to  cause  accidents  or  disease.  This  is  the  time  when 
they  are  most  likely  to  sustain  bad  falls  and  sprains.  But  once  they 
are  put  in  fit  condition,  any  work  within  reason  will  not  only  be  per- 
formed without  great  effort,  but  will  add  to  the  quality  of  the  condi- 
tion already  attained. 

If  animals  are  thrown  out  of  work  for  any  considerable  time  the 
process  of  conditioning  will  have  to  be  repeated.  The  minimum 
amount  of  systematic  exercise  necessary  to  maintain  animals  in  work- 
ing condition  is  two  hours  daily,  and  those  responsible  for  the  care 
of  animals  must  see  that  that  amount  is  given. 

Ordinarily  animals  regularly  exercised  will  not  suffer  by  resting  on 
Sunday,  but  the  ration  must  be  reduced  accordingly. 

The  kind  and  amount  of  exercise  given  to  animals  depends  upon  the 
work  they  are  to  perform,  the  condition  of  the  animals  and  number 
of  men  .available  to  give  it.  When  there  is  one  man  available  to 
exercise  one  or  two  animals,  as  in  a  troop  of  Cavalry,  the  most  satis- 
factory exercise  can  be  had,  for  each  man  can  give  his  animals  the  kind 
and  amount  they  need.  But  when  there  are  many  animals  and  very 
few  men  as  at  Remount  Depots  and  Veterinary  Hospitals,  exercise 
becomes  a  more  difficult  matter  and  special  means  must  be  adopted 
to  get  the  animals  exercised  at  all. 

When  individual  exercise  can  be  given,  as  in  the  first  case,  the 
animals  can  be  ridden,  driven,  led.  or  longed.  In  leading,  one  man 
should  lead  but  one  animal.  When  the  proportion  of  men  to  horses  is 
small  the  lead  line  is  recommended.  This  consists  of  a  rope  either  of 
one  piece  or  jointed,  to  which  animals  are  fastened  in  pairs.  The  for- 
ward end  of  the  line  attaches  to  a  single  or  double  tree  of  the  harness 
on  the  lead  horse  or  horses.  Neck  straps  will  serve  almost  as  well  as 
the  breast  strap  harness  as  there  is  very  little  pulling  required.  Two 
short  tie  ropes  about  a  foot  long  with  snaps  are  spliced  or  secured  to 
the  line  at  intervals  of  eleven  or  twelve  feet.  The  rear  end  of  the  line 
is  attached  to  the  harness  of  one  or  two  horses  with  breeching.  Horses 
are  snapped  to  each  tie  rope. 

These  lines  can  be  made  for  any  number  of  animals,  but  experience 
has  proven  that  lines  of  from  20  to  30  animals  are  the  best  all  around. 
Twenty-four  animal  lines  are  recommended.  They  require  but  four 
men  to  operate,  or  one  man  to  six  animals.  One  man  rides  a  lead  horse, 
one  the  rear  horse  of  a  middle  pair  and  one  a  rear  horse.  The  fourth 
man  is  an  outrider  and  rides  whenever  he  may  be  needed.  Care  must 
be  taken  in  starting  and  stopping  to  keep  the  line  taut  or  else  tangles 
will  result.  In  long  marches  the  rear  horses  must  be  reHeved  two  or 
three  times  a  day  as  the  work  on  them  is 
horses  should  be  selected  for  this  purpose. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  43 

Exercise  tracks,  or  rings,  are  probably  the  most  economical  means 
of  exercise  considering  man  power,  but  there  is  more  danger  of 
accidents  than  when  using  the  lead  line.  A  circular  or  oval  track  about 
fifteen  feet  wide  with  fences  five  feet  or  more  in  height  and  a  well 
drained,  springy  track  surface  is  all  that  is  necessary. 

Animals  should  be  let  onto  the  track  in  lots  of  not  more  than  twenty- 
four  at  a  time,  and  there  must  be  a  rider  to  lead  and  one  to  follow 
the  lot.  By  this  means  the  gait  can  be  regulated  and  stamping 
or  crowding  eliminated.  If  done  carefully  and  quietly  very  few 
accidents  will  occur.  Turning  animals  loose  in  corrals  and  driving 
them  around  is  not  recommended  as  too  many  a'ccidents  usually  occur. 

In  any  form  of  exercise,  it  should  always  be  begun  at  a  walk,  for 
ten  or  fifteen  minutes,  so  that  the  animals'  feet  and  legs  may  have  good 
circulation  established  before  more  violent  exercise  is  taken  up.  It 
should  always  end  in  the  same  way,  at  the  walk,  so  that  the  animals 
may  be  returned  to  the  stable  dry  and  breathing  normally.  No  fast 
exercise  should  be  given  on  hard  roads.  When  one  man  is  exercising 
two  horses,  he  should  ordinarily  ride  one  out  and  the  other  in,  and  he 
should  lead  each  horse  partly  on  one  ride  and  partly  on  the  other. 
Playful  or  vicious  animals  should  be  led  with  very  short  rein  to  prevent 
accidents.  A  lead  rein  consisting  of  a  single  rein  with  a  snap  which  is 
passed  through  the  snaffle  ring  nearest  the  rider,  under  the  jaw,  and 
snapped  to  the  opposite  snaffle  ring  is  excellent. 

■  Ordinarily  the  greatest  part  of  the  exercise  should  be  at  the  walk. 
A  fair  proportion  for  the  average  troop  horse  in  normal  condition  would 
be  for  a  two  hour  period ;  walk  7,  trot  2,  gallop  1.  Of  course  this  varies 
greatly  w^ith  the  conditions. 

The  routes  selected  for  exercise  should  be  varied  from  day  to  day, 
to  avoid  monotony.  And  it  is  best  to  return  by  a  diflferent  route  from 
the  one  taken  going  out  so  that  the  animals  will  not  fret  when  they 
are  headed  towards  stables. 

Draft  and  pack  animals  should  do  a  considerable  part  of  their  exercise 
drawing  leads  and  carrying  packs  so  that  their  muscles  may  be  hard- 
ened to  the  work. 

The  quality  and  quantity  of  sweat  are  generally  taken  as  an  indica- 
tion of  condition.  Thirst  and  sweat  are  to  be  expected  in  animals  under 
exercise.  Some  sweat  profusely  from  purely  nervous  causes.  Such 
causes  should  be  avoided  as  far  as  possible,  as  a  great  deal  is  taken 
out  of  the  animal  unnecessarily.  The  weather  has  considerable  in- 
fluence on  sweating  and  must  be  taken  into  consideration.  Warm 
or  damp,  muggy  days  will  cause  abnormal  sweating  while  on  cool  days 
it  is  often  difficult  to  get  up  a  sweat. 


CARE,  CONDITIONING  AND  TRAINING  OF  HORSES 

It  is  essential  that  the  Field  Artillery  Officer  have  a  thorough  and 
practical  knowledge  of  how  to  care  for,  condition  and  train  the  horses 
under  his  charge.     Herein  lies  his  chief  value  as  a  horseman.     De- 


44  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

ficiency  in  this  knowledge  will  result  in  needless  and  avoidable  wast- 
age of  horses  in  time  of  war. 

A  horse  requires  intelligent  care  in  order  that  his  health  and  strength 
may  be  preserved ;  he  must  be  in  hard  and  physically  fit  condition,  else 
the  amount  of  useful  work  he  is  able  to  perform  will  be  greatly  reduced 
and  his  power  of  resistance  to  injury  and  disease  lowered;  and  he 
requires  careful  training  in  order  that  he  ma}^  work  intelligently  and 
obediently  and  with  the  minimum  expenditure  of  muscular  and 
nervous  energy. 

Officers  should  make  themselves  thoroughly  acquainted  with  the 
natural  history  and  physiology  of  the  horse,  and  with  the  effects  of 
different  methods  of  treatment,  changes  of  diet,  etc.,  upon  his  system 
and  powers  of  endurance. 

They  should  have  a  familiar  knowledge  of  the  symptoms  and 
methods  of  treatment  of  diseases  that  are  common  to  horses,  what  to 
do  in  emergencies,  and  a  good  knowledge  of  the  effects  of  medicines 
issued..  They  should  also  possess  a  practical  understanding  of  the 
principles  of  horseshoeing. 

An  officer  in  charge  of  horses  must  carefully  instruct  his  men  in 
the  treatment,  stabling,  management,  watering,  feeding,  grooming 
and  exercising  of  the  horses,  and  by  continuous  supervision  and 
inspection  assure  himself  that  his  instructions  are  thoroughly  under- 
stood and  fully  carried  out. 

The  horse  is  a  creature  of  habit.  Even  in  his  native  state,  as  well 
as  when  domesticated,  if  left  to  his  own  resources  he  forms  habits  that 
become  more  or  less  fixed  and  the  matter  of  eating  and  drinking 
influence  to  a  great  extent  his  physical  welfare.  A  sudden  departure 
from  his  accustomed  way  of  living  will  have  a  decidedly  detrimental 
eft'ect  upon  his  health.  These  facts  have  been  borne  out  by  recent 
experiments  by  the  Department  of  Agriculture  and  must  be  considered 
in  the  proper  care  and  feeding  of  animals. 

For  the  above  reasons  the  method  of  feeding  and  water  in  garrison 
should  be  regulated  and  as  near  to  normal  field  condition  as  possible. 


CARE  AND  CONDITIONING  OF  HORSES 

Section  1.     Rules  for  the  Care  of  Horses 

All  drivers  and  all  individually  mounted  men  will  be  taught  and 
must  thoroughly  understand  the  following  rules  for  the  care  of  horses. 

Horses  are  nervous  animals,  and  for  that  reason  require  gentle 
and  quiet  treatment.  Docile  but  bold  horses  are  apt  to  retaliate  upon 
those  who  abuse  them,  while  persistent  kindness  often  reclaims  vicious 
animals. 

Before  entering  a  horse's  stall  and  when  coming  up  behind  them, 
speak  to  them  gently,  then  approach  quietly  and  without  sudden  or 
abrupt  movement. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  45 

A  horse  must  never  be  struck  or  threatened  about  the  head.  Such 
treatment  quickly  makes  him  head-shy  and  renders  his  proper  control 
difficult  and  exasperating. 

Never  kick,  strike,  or  otherwise  abuse  a  horse.  On  rare  occasions 
punishment  may  be  necessar}',  but  it  must  be  administered  immediately 
after  the  offense  has  been  committed,  and  then  only  in  a  proper 
manner  with  whip  or  spur  and  never  in  the  heat  of  anger. 

In  cold  weather  warm  the  bit  by  blowing-  on  and  rubbing  it  before 
putting  the  bit  into  the  horse's  mouth. 

In  taking  a  horse  out  always  walk  him  the  first  mile  to  start  the 
circulation  in  his  legs.  Habitual  disregard  of  this  rule  leads  to  foot 
and  leg  troubles  that  will  render  the  horse  unserviceable  before 
his  time. 

Alwa3's  walk  the  last  mile,  or  farther  if  necessary,  to  bring  the  horse 
in  cool  and  breathing  naturally. 

To  be  certain  of  no  ill  effects,  a  horse  brought  to  the  stable  in  a 
heated  condition  must  be  cooled  out  and  dried  before  he  is  left  tied 
up  in  his  stall.  To  cool  the  horse  w^alk  him  about  slowly  under  a 
blanket  if  the  air  is  chilly.  Occasionally  interrupt  the  w-alking  by  giv- 
ing him  a  good  brisk  riib-dow'n  and  two  or  three  swallows  of  water. 
AA^alking  is  especially  valuable,  because  this  gentle  exercise  keeus  the 
muscles  moving  slowly  and  so  assists  in  working  any  excess  of  blood 
out  of  them  and  out  of  his  vital  organs.  The  brisk  rubbing  dries  him 
and  assists  in  bringing  the  blood  back  to  the  skin,  and  so  aids  in 
restoring  the  circulation  to  the  normal.  If  the  surface  of  the  body 
becomes  chilled  or  if  the  cooling  out  is  too  sudden  the  congestion  exist- 
ing in  the  lungs  or  in  the  feet  may  not  be  relieved,  and  pneumonia, 
laminitis.  or  other  troubles  will  then  result.  A  sudden  stoppage  of 
hard  work  is  always  bad  for  the  feet  and  is  very  liable  to  result  in 
laminitis.  The  water  given  in  small  quanities  slowdy  cools  the  horse 
internally  and  so  aids  in  sending  the  blood  back  to  the  surface  and 
restoring  the  normal  circulation  and  temperature.  The  cooling  out 
process  must  always  be  a  gradual  one.  To  throw  water  on  any  part 
of  a  heated  horse  is  particularly  dangerous. 

Never  allow  stocks  to  be  used  for  shoeing  or  for  any  except  veteri- 
nary purposes.  It  never  gentles  a  horse  nor  in  itself  teaches  him 
to  stand  for  shoeing.  You  cannot  have  it  in  the  field  and.  after  all. 
efficiency  in  the  field  is  the  goal  of  all  our  training. 

Except  as  directed  in  the  preceding^  paragraph,  never  w^ater  a  horse 
when  heated  unless  the  exercise  or  march  is  to  resume  immediately ;  if 
the  exercise  or  march  is  to  be  resumed  at  once,  w-ater  wmII  be  of  the 
greatest  benefit  to  the  horse,  no  matter  how  heated  he  may  be.  But 
a  horse  should  not  be  called  UDon  to  do  hard  or  fast  w^ork  for  at  least 
a  half  an  hour  after  a  big  drink. 

■  Never  feed  grain  to  a  horse  wdien  heated  or  fatigued.  Grain  is  a 
highly  concentrated  food  that  requires  high  digestive  power.  Ab- 
normal temperature  impairs  the  powder  of  the  digestive  organs.  If 
the  animal  has  been  worked  to  the  point  of  fatigue,  all  bodily  functions 


46  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

are  for  a  time  injuriously  affected.  For  that  reason  he  must  be  rested 
and  his  normal  dig'estive  power  restored  before  concentrated  food  of 
any  kind  is  given  to  him.  On  the  other  hand,  hay,  being"  a  bulky  food, 
will  not  hurt  a  horse  however  heated  or  fatigued  he  may  be. 

Never  remove  the  saddle  and  blanket  in  such  a  way  as  to  expose  a 
wet  back  either  in  the  hot  rays  of  the  sun  or  to  a  sudden  cooling.  The 
pressure  of  the  saddle  restricts  the  blood  supply  and  so  weakens  the 
tissues  of  the  back.  In  this  condition  a  hot  sun  more  readily  burns 
or  inflames  the  skin,  while  a  sudden  cooling  contracts  the  blood  vessels 
and  prevents  the  proper  return  of  the  blood  to  nourish  the  tissues; 
in  either  case  sores  and  swellings  may  result. 

When  the  saddle  is  removed  the  back  should  be  promptly  rubbed 
and  massaged  to  dry  it  and  restore  the  circulation.  If  this  is  impos- 
sible the  next  best  thing  is  to  replace  the  blanket  with  the  dry  sides 
next  to  the  skin  and  again  put  on  the  saddle,  girthing  it  loosely. 

After  a  long  or  hard  march  it  is  necessary  to  restore  the  circulation 
in  the  back  gradually,  or  sores  and  swellings  are  liable  to  result.  To 
do  this  the  girth  should  be  slightly  loosened  and  the  saddle  should  re- 
main on  the  back  for  fifteen  or  twenty  minutes.  The  more  gradually  the 
circulation  can  be  restored  the  less  severe  will  be  the  pain  and  swelling. 

In  hot  weather,  especially  on  the  march,  it  is  very  refreshing"  to  the 
horse  to  have  his  eyes,  nostrils,  dock,  and  the  inside  of  his  hind  quarters 
sponged  with  cool  water. 

When  the  horse  comes  in  wet  with  rain  he  should  be  scraped,  then 
blanketed  and  his  head,  neck,  loins,  and  legs  rubbed.  If  the  weather 
is  cold  an  extra  blanket  should  be  put  on  for  twenty  minutes.  The 
wet  blanket  should  be  changed  when  the  horse  dries. 

Do  not  wash  the  legs.  This  practice  is  one  of  the  surest  means  of 
causing  scratches.  The  legs  should  be  rubbed  dry  and  bandaged 
loosely  with  thick  bandages.  vStrips  of  gunny  sacks  are  satisfactory 
for  this  purpose.  It  is  far  more  important  to  have  the  legs  warm  and 
dry  than  clean.  The  best  method  of  treating  muddy  legs  in  order  to 
avoid  scratches  is  to  bandage  them  to  keep  them  warm  until  they  are 
dry  and  then  brush  them  clean. 

Never  leave  a  horse  for  the  night  until  he  is   thoroughly  clean, 
especially  around  his  legs,  pasterns,  and  feet.    Individual  men  return-' 
ing  from  mounted  duty  or  pass  will  report  their  return  to  the  stable 
sergeant,  who  will  inspect  each  horse  and  see  that  he  is  properlv  cared 
for. 


STABLE   VICES   AND   THEIR   PREVENTION 

Stable  vices  are  objectionable  habits  of  horses,  practiced  while  idle, 
as  in  the  stable  or  on  the  picket  line,  and  are  caused  usually  by  nervous- 
ness and  restlessness,  but  not  infrequently  by  poor  stable  management. 

As  a  general  preventive  to  their  contraction,  the  animal  should 
be  kept  occupied  and  out  of  the  stables  as  much  a's  possible  during 
the  day. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  47 

The  most  common  ones  are : 

Weaving,  windsncking,  cribbing,  biting,  kicking  against  the  stall, 
gnawing  the  woodwork,  eating  dung,  greedy  feeding,  tearing  blankets, 
and  halter  pulling.  Most  of  these  when  once  acquired  are  incurable, 
but  they  may  be  partially  or  wholly  prevented  temporarily  at  least. 

Weaving:  A  nervous  habit  in  which  the  animal  rocks  to  and  fro 
continually,  similar  to  a  bear  kept  in  confinement.  Such  animals 
should  be  kept  tied  short  and  out  of  sight  of  other  animals  which  might 
contract  the  habit.    Weaving  is  incurable. 

Windsucking  and  Cribbing:  Nervous  habits,  closely  related.  In 
windsucking  an  animal  swallows  air  by  arching  the  neck,  drawing  the 
head  towards  the  chest  and  giving  a  gulp.  The  cribber  or  crib  biter 
accomplishes  the  same  end  by  catching  hold  of  the  manger  with  his 
teeth  to  obtain  a  pull,  and  as  he  gulps  emits  a  grunt.  Both  of  these 
vices  are  incurable  and  are  apt  to  be  acquired  by  other  horses  stabled- 
nearby.  They  may  be  prevented  by  the  use  of  a  broad  strap  fitted 
tightly  around  the  neck  with  a  small  wooden  or  leaden  gullet  plate 
stitched  on  so  that  it  projects  on  each  side  and  sticks  into  the  throat 
when  the  neck  is  bent.  Another  method  which  often  succeeds  is  to 
buckle  a  narrow  leather  strap  around  the  neck  rather  tightly.  Neither 
of  these  will  efifect  a  cure,  only  a  temporary  prevention. 

Cribbers  always  show  by  the  wear  on  their  incisors  the  effects  of 
the  habit.     Indigestion  and  colic  frequently  result  from  these  vices. 

Biting:  Biting  is  a  vicious  habit  seen  most  frequently  in  stallions. 
It  is  usually  the  result  of  animals  being  teased  by  men  in  a  playful 
way,  but  once  acquired,  a  dangerous  vice.  As  a  preventative,  the 
teasing  must  be  stopped,  and  if  an  animal  is  dangerous  only  one  man 
should  handle  him,  his  regular  groom  who  must  be  unafraid  of  him. 
The  danger  may  be  lessened  by  the  ''use  of  a  leather  muzzle,  or  a 
thick  wooden  bit,  or  a  side  stick.  The  side  stick  is  a  short  stick  attached 
at  ends  to  the  headstall  and  surcingle. 

Kicking  Against  the  Stall:  Kicking  against  the  stall  is  a  habit 
usually  acquired  through  lack  of  w^ork.  Animals  with  the  habit  are  apt 
to  injure  themselves  and  others.  The  danger  of  injury  may  be  lessened 
by  padding  the  stalls  and  providing  kicking  boards.  It  may  be  cured 
by  using  a  short  chain,  one  end  of  which  is  attached  to  a  hobble  place 
around  one  rear  pastern,  the  other  end  attached  to  a  small  wooden  ball. 

Gnawing  the  Woodwork :  Gnawing  the  woodwork  is  a  restless  habit 
of  animals  kept  tied  up  without  work,  or  when  deprived  of  hay.  The 
cure  is  plenty  of  hay.  The  prevention  is  to  wrap  the  woodwork  with 
wire  or  cover  it  with  tin.  When  used  the  wire  or  tin  must  be  watched 
carefully  to  guard  against  injury  to  animals  from  loose  ends. 

Eating  Dung:  Eating  dung  is  habitual  with  some  animals  and  may 
be  classed  as  a  vice.  It  is  a  morbid  appetite  resulting  from  poor  con- 
dition caused  by  chronic  indigestion.  Animals  in  fit  condition  seldom 
form  the  habit.  The  only  prevention  is  to  keep  the  animal  tied  so  that 
he  cannot  reach  his  own  or  other  animals'  droppings. 


48  .  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  '      ' 

Greedy  Feeding:  Greedy  feeding  is  caused  by  natural  greed  or  ner- 
vousness. A  greedy  feeder  eats  as  fast  as  he  can,  grasping  huge  mouth- 
fuls  at  a  time  and  throwing  his  feed  with  his  muzzle  out  of  the  box  onto 
the  ground,  and  eating  it  from  the  ground.  This  results  in  indigestion, 
the  bolting  of  feed,  eating  dirt  and  trash,  and  is  wasteful  on  account 
of  the  large  amount  of  forage  lost. 

llie  preventions  are  :  To  place  several  stones,  the  size  of  a  goose  egg, 
in  the  feed  box;  to  feed  the  grain  as  chop;  to  place  a  wire  screen  with 
half-inch  mesh  inside  of  the  box  and  resting  on  the  grain ;  or  to  feed  in 
a  wide  bottomed  feed  box  or  manger.  Any  of  these  will  make  it  diffi- 
cult for  the  animal  to  take  large  mouthfuls  of  grain  or  to  throw  it  out. 

Tearing  Blankets:  Tearing  blankets  is  an  expensive  habit.  The  only 
pre\'ention  is  the  use  of  a  leather  muzzle. 

Halter  Pulling:  Halter  pulling  is  also  an  expensive  habit,  and  a 
troublesome  one.  The  vice  is  usually  contracted  by  the  use  of  weak 
halters  and  tie  ropes,  and  animals  becoming  frightened  so  that  they 
break  away.  Tying  with  the  reins  is  apt  to  have  the  same  effect. 
The  animal  soon  learns  that  he  can  do  it,  and  then  it  is  very  likely 
to  become  habitual.  Once  a  confirmed  puller  it  is  usually  a  per- 
manent vice. 

As  a  prevention,  use  box  stalls,  or  else  a  very  heavy  neck  strap  and 
tie  rope.  It  is  sometimes  cured  by  tying  a  piece  of  rope  around  the 
animal's  barrel  just  in  rear  of  the  forelegs,  from  which  is  run  the  tie 
rope,  up  between  the  legs  through  the  halter  ring  and  to  manger  or 
picket  line.  After  a  few  attempts  to  pull  away  he  will  probably  give  up. 
This  should  be  applied  for  several  days,  and  then  for  a  time  use  just 
a  light  cord  tied  around  the  barrel  as  a  reminder. 

STABLES     AND     STABLE    MANAGEMENT 

A  lieutenant  of  the  battery  is  responsible  to  the  captain  for  all  duties 
in  connection  with  the  care  of  the  horses,  with  the  stables,  and  with 
the  stable  management.  He  is  assisted  by  the  stable  sergeant  who 
takes  immediate  charge  of  the  stables,  picket  lines  and  paddock,  for- 
age and  stable  property  in  general.    This  is  Department  B.  Lieutenant. 

The  stable  sergeant  is  responsible  that  the  stables  and  their  sur- 
roundings are  kept  at  all  times  thoroughly  policed  and  free  from  odors  ; 
he  is  usually  assisted  by  one  or  more  stable  orderlies. 

Sufficient  men  are  detailed  as  stable  police  to  perform  the  general 
police  and  to  remove  all  manure  as  it  is  dropped,  either  in  stables, 
on  the  picket  line,  or  in  the  paddocks,  during  the  day.  The  stable 
police  also  assist  in  the  feeding,  watering  and  bedding  of  the  horses. 

STABLE  MANAGEMENT 

The  officer  in  charge  of  Department  "B"  is  in  charge  of  the  stable 
and  is  assisted  by  the  stable  sergeant  who  in  turn  has  a  stable  orderly 
to  care  for  the  sick  and  injured  animals. 

Daily  a  stable  police  of  four  to  six  men  is  detailed  to  perform  the 
necessary  work  around  the  stable,  such  as  feeding,  watering  and 
cleaning. 


MOUNTED   INSTRUCTIOM  49 

STABLE  HYGIENE 

Ventilation 

The  two  purposes  in  ventilation  are  getting  fresh  air  with  its  oxygen 
into  a  stable,  and  getting  impurities  out,  and  these  are  equally 
important. 

Impurities:  The  common  impurities  of  air,  disease  germs  and  their 
products,  carbon  dioxide  gas,  various  volatile  matters  from  the  lungs, 
together  with  the  various  excretions  and  the  products  which  result 
from  their  chemical  decompositions. 

Necessity  of  Ventilation:  To  illustrate  the  effect  of  poor  sanitary 
conditions,  particularly  lack  of  ventilation,  it  is  only  necessary  to  call 
attention  to  the  common  experience  of  moving  an  animal  affected  with 
a  chronic  type  of  glanders  or  tuberculosis  from  a  well-lighted  and 
well-ventilated  stable  to  one  where  the  conditions  are  the  opposite. 
Under  the  latter  conditions  there  is  rapid  development  of  a  disease 
which  has  been  mild.  Sick  animals  especially  need  free  ventilation. 
This  is  particularly  true  in  certain  diseases,  e.  g.  tetanus  and  diseases 
of  the  lungs,  and  respiratory  tract.  A  moderately  warm  stable  in  a 
cold  climate  is  not  objectionable,  providing  sanitary  conditions,  such 
as  abundant  air,  sunlight,  good  food  and  water,  are  provided.  But 
making  a  stable  warm  and  tight  may  very  easily  establish  an  ideal 
place  for  the  propagation  of  germs  and  the  spread  of  disease. 

Natural  Forces:  The  factors  that  operate  in  natural  ventilation. are : 

1.  The  force  of  the  wind. 

2.  Weight  of  air,  as  varied  by  its  temperature. 

3.  Dift'usion  of  gases  in  obedience  to  a  natural  law. 

Wind :  The  force  of  the  wind  is  probably  the  most  important  one 
of  these  factors,  and  must  always  be  taken  into  consideration  in  plan- 
ning ventilation.  It  is,  of  course,  irregular,  but  variations  can  be 
made  in  the  ventilation  facilities  to  compensate  for  this.  A  funda- 
mental point  in  using  this  factor  is  to  see  that  the  incoming  air  does 
not  pass  over  or  through  any  contaminating  course,  over  a  manure 
pile,  or  strike  the  body  of  the  horse. 

Temperature  and  Weight:  The  second  factor,  difference  in  weight 
between  the  lighter  warm  and  heavier  cold  air,  is  not  so  important  in 
natural  as  in  artificial  ventilation,  and  yet  it  is  a  factor  of  considerable 
importance.  The  heat  which  warms  the  air  in  the  lower  levels  is  that 
which  comes  from  the  bodies  of  confined  animals  as  it  is  radiated 
from  the  surface  or  warmed  in  passing  through  the  lungs. 

Diffusion  of  Gases:  Carbonic  gas  is  considerably  heavier  than  air, 
and  the  lower  levels  usually  contain  a  slightly  higher  percentage  than 
the  higher  ones  in  a  stable,  but  the  difference  is  not  so  great  as  one 
would  suppose,  on  account  of  the  diffusion  which  takes  place  in 
response  to  the  law  of  diffusion  of  gases — which  operates  independ- 
ently of  relative  weights.  This  force  is  so  strong  in  its  action  that 
some  diffusion  takes  place  through  unpainted  lumber  and  through  ordi- 


so  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

nary  brick,  but  to  a  very  slight  extent  if  at  all  through  painted  surfaces 
or  paper.  h      I 

Fresh  air,  no  matter  how  cold,  does  not  hurt  a  horse,  provided  it  is 
not  caused  by  a  draft.  Foul  air  is  most  harmful.  For  this  reason 
all  properly  built  stables  have  ventilation  at  the  ridge  or  highest  point. 

Foul  air  and  dampness  are  the  causes  of  many  diseases  of  the  horse; 
hence  the  importance  and  economy  of  spacious,  clean,  dry  and  well- 
ventilated  stables. 

It  is  impossible  to  give  the  horse  too  much  fresh  air  even  in  the 
coldest  weather.  Stable  windows  should  be  closed  only  when  it  is 
necessary  to  prevent  rain  or  snow  from  beating  in  on  the  animals. 
The  stables  should  be  considered  as  merely  a  shelter  from  storms. 
The  more  nearly  the  air  of  the  stables  approaches  the  purity  and 
temperature  of  the  outside  air,  the  more  nearly  are  the  stables  adapted 
to  the  health  and  comfort  of  the  animals. 

A  practical  and  satisfactory  test  that  a  stable  is  properly  cleaned 
and  ventilated  is  that,  on  entering  it,  the  sense  of  smell  detects  no 
apparent  change  from  the  air  outside. 

The  picket  line  should  be  established  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of 
the  stables.  The  fioor  of  the  picket  line  should  be  raised  and  trenches 
to  carry  off  the  rain  should  be  provided  so  that  the  ground  upon  which 
the  horses  stand  may  be  kept  dry. 

A  horse  prefers  to  stand  with  his  fore  feet  lower  than  his  hind  feet, 
as  this  rests  and  relieves  his  tendons.  Where  horses  are  required  to 
stand  for  long  periods  on  the  picket  line  the  floor  should  be  constructed 
so  that  this  is  possible. 

CLEANING 

The  stables  and  ground  should  be  kept  clean  at  all  times  and  no 
manure  allowed  to  remain  in  the  stables,  corrals  or  picket  line  for 
more  than  twelve  hours  at  a  time.  Floors  of  stalls  and  aisles  should  be 
thoroughly  cleaned  each  morning  and  swept  again  after  the  noon 
feed.  If  the  horses  are  on  the  picket  line  or  in  the  stables  during  the 
day,  the  sentry  or  sentries  should  keep  the  line  or  stalls  clean  at  all 
times  by  removing  droppings  and  sweeping  urine  to  the  rear.  Water- 
ing troughs  should  be  washed  daily,  feed  boxes  at  least  once  a  week- 
and  always  after  feeding  a  bran  mash.  Equal  parts  of  water  and 
vinegar  should  be  used  for  this  purpose.  Corrals  should  be  cleaned 
daily  after  the  horses  are  tied  in  at  evening  stables.  Keep  stalls  in 
repair  at  all  times  even  if  the  rest  of  the  stable  is  in  bad  condition. 

Manure  or  foul  litter  must  not  be  allowed  to  accumulate  in  or  near 
the  stables  but  must  be  carried  to  the  manure  heap  daily. 

In  the  morning  stalls  are  cleaned  and  the  stables  policed  under  the 
direction  of  the  stable  sergeant,  assisted  by  the  chiefs  of  sections. 

Paddocks,  with  shade  and  water,  should  be  provided  near  the  stables  ; 
if  there  is  no  shade,  shelter  from  the  sun  should  be  extemporized.  The 
picket  line  and  paddocks  should  be  sprinkled  to  keep  down  the  dust ; 
crude  oil  may  be  used  to  advantage.  Racks  for  drying  bedding  should 
be  provided  near  each  stable. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  51 

The  horses  are  assigned  to  stalls  and  placed  on  the  picket  line  by- 
sections,  as  nearly  as  practicable  according-  to  usual  place  in  the  battery. 
The  name  and  hoof  number  of  the  horse  are  posted  over  his  place 
in  the  stall.  Over  the  middle  of  each  double  stall  occupied  by  a 
driver's  pair  are  displayed  the  number  of  the  section,  the  carriage, 
and  the  position  of  the  pair  in  the  team,  as  FIRST,  PIECE,  WHEEL, 
or  FIFTH.  Second  Caisson.  Swing. 

If  practicable,  all  woodwork  within  reach  of  the  horses  should  be 
protected  with  sheet  metal  or  painted  with  a  thin  coat  of  gas  tar; 
other  woodwork  and  brick  should  be  painted  a.  light  shade  and  then 
kept  clean  and  free  from  dust. 

BEDDING 

A  comfortable  bed  is  important  for  all  animals,  but  especially  so 
for  those  whose  energy  must  be  conserved  such  as  animals  in  work, 
sick  or  weak,  and  young  growing  ones.  It  is  possible  for  them  to 
get  a  considerable  amount  of  rest  standing  but  the  natural  way  is 
while  lying  down.  Animals  should  be  encouraged  to  lie  down  as  it 
saves  their  legs  and  thereby  prolongs  their  usefulness. 

A  good  bed  not  only  induces  them  to  lie  but  it  protects  their  elbows, 
hocks,  and  other  exposed  portions  of  the  limbs  from  injury. 

A  good  bed  should  be  level,  dry,  warm,  and  elastic  and  have  a  clean 
surface  for  the  animal  to  lie  upon. 

There  is  no  one  article  which  is  more  suitable  than  good,  bright, 
clean,  coarse  straw,  either  wheat,  oats  or  rye.  It  should  not  be  used 
if  full  of  chafif  or  dust,  or  too  fine,  wet.  or  mouldy. 

Hay  of  poor  quality  is  occasionally  used  and  makes  a  good  bed, 
but  care  must  be  taken  not  to  use  it  when  mouldy  or  very  musty  for 
the  animals  will  eat  it.  Numerous  other  articles  are  used  for  bedding, 
namely  leaves,  shavings,  sawdust,  tanbark  and  even  sand.  They 
make  good  beds,  though  when  using  sand  the  animals  must  be  watched 
as  sand  colic  may  develop.  The  bedding  is  taken  up,  carefully  shaken 
out  and  assorted.  All  parts  of  the  bedding  which  can  be  used  again 
are  taking  to  the  bedding  racks  and  spread  thereon  for  a  thorough 
drying;  parts  which  can  not  be  used  again  are  sent  to  the  manure 
heap.  Special  attention  is  necessary  in  this  matter,  as  the  allowance 
of  straw.  3  1/3  pounds  per  day  per  animal,  is  insufficient  under  most 
favorable  conditions.  In  the  evening  the  dried  bedding,  mixed  with 
such  fresh  bedding  as  may  be  necessary,  is  laid  down.  The  bed  must 
be  soft  and  even  with  the  thickest  part  toward  the  manger. 

It  is  best  to  lay  the  layers  of  bedding  crossways  to  each  other,  form- 
ing a  more  elastic  and  durable  bed.  It  should  not  be  spread  up  to  the 
mangers  as  many  horses  would  be  apt  to  eat  it,  and  the  presence  of 
partially  soiled  bedding  directly  beneath  the  horse's  head  might  prove 
injurious. 


52  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


FEEDS   AND   FEEDING 


General:  There  is  no  snbject  nnder  the  Care  of  Animals  which  is  of 
greater   importance   than    FEEDS    AND     FEEDING. 

The  health  and  condition  of  animals  depends  largely  npon  the  kind 
of  food  given  them,  the  manner  in  which  it  is  prepared,  and  the  hours 
of  feeding. 

It  is  truthfully  said  of  the  race  horse,  that  the  race  is  won  in  the 
stable,  by  the  selection,  preparation  and  administration  of  his  feed. 
Similarly,  in  the  army  battles  and  campaigns  are  to  a  certain  extent 
won  or  lost  in  the  stable. 

To  feed  so  as  to  obtain  the  best  or  even  good  results  requires  a 
knowledge  of:  the  digestive  system  of  animals;  the  food  elements 
or  constituents  required  for  their  sustenance  ;  the  correct  proportions 
of  these  elements  ;  the  ])roper  methods  of  preparation  ;  and  the  best 
hours  for  feeding.  Also  a  knowledge  of  the  characteristics  of  good 
and  poor  qualities  of  foods  is  necessary.  This  knowledge  alone  will 
not  insure  good  results,  as  much  experience  is  required  for  one  to 
know  what  and  how  to  feed  under  the  various  conditions  found  in 
the  service.  It  is  only  by  careful  study  of  the  subject,  and  by  paying 
close  attention  to  the  condition  of  animals  under  different  feeds  that 
one  can  hope  to  become  efficient  in  the  art  of  feeding. 

The  Digestive  System:  The  organs  of  the  digestive  system  form 
what  is  called  the  alimentary  canal,  and  consist  of  the  mouth,  pharynx, 
esophogus,  small  and  large  intestines  and  the  anus. 

The  stomach  is  the  principal  organ  of  digestion.  It  is  very  small 
as  compared  with  the  size  of  the  horse  and  the  amount  of  food  he 
consumes.     Its  capacity  is  from  three  to  four  gallons. 

The  intestines  are  also  organs  of  digestion  but  have  a  much  greater 
capacity  than  the  stomach,  being  some  ninety  feet  in  length. 

Food  is  taken  into  the  mouth  and  masticated.  It  passes  through  the 
pharynx  and  esophogus  into  the  stomach  where  it  is  partially  digested, 
and  prepared  for  complete  digestion  in  the  intestines.  In  the  intes- 
tines digestion  is  complete  and  the  nutriment  and  moisture  extracted. 
The  residue  is  discharged  through  the  anus  as  dung. 

The  time  required  for  stomach  digestion  varies  with  the  class  of 
food.  Grain  being  a  concentrated  diet  requires  approximately  twice 
as  long  as  hay,  and  as  they  do  not  mix  during  the  process,  they 
should  not  be  in  the  stomach  at  the  same  time,  except  when  fed 
together  as  chop. 

For  this  reason,  hay  being  the  more  quickly  digested,  should  pre- 
cede the  grain  ration,  or  else  follow  it  by  an  hour.  The  latter  is  best 
when  a  large  hay  feed  is  given  as  in  the  evening. 

A  small  feed  of  loose  hay  shortly  before  the  grain  is  advisable 
since  it  greatly  stimulates  the  saliva  and  stomach  secretions  and  is 
an  aid  to  digestion  in  furnishing  the  bulk  necessary  for  the  best 
action  of  the  stomach. 

Water  remains  in  the  stomach  for  only  a  short  time.  It  is  passed 
qm'ckly  into  the  intestines  where  it  is  collected  in  a  part  of  the  large 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  S3 

intestine  called  the  coecuni.  If  i^■i^'en  soon  after  feeding-  it  will  Husii 
a  considerable  portion  of  the  food  from  the  stomach  before  it  is 
snfRciently  dii^ested  and  into  the  intestines,  cansing-  indigestion. 
Watering-  should  therefore  be  done  before  feeding  or  not  until  an 
hour  or  two  afterwards. 

E\-ery  precaution  should  be  exercised  in  the  manner  of  feeding  and 
watering  so  as  to  insure  the  proper  action  of  stomach  digestion. 

Food  Constituents:  They  are  classified  according  to  the  function 
they  perform  in  the  animal  system;  as  follows: 

(a)  Flesh  making;  such  as  linseed  meal,  oats,  peas,  beans,  etc. 

(b)  Fat,  heat,  and  energy  producing;  such  as  corn,  wheat,  rye,  o^ts. 

(c)  Bone  making;  such  as  grass,  hay.  bran,  bone  meal,  milk,  etc.. 
(b)    Bulk    supplying,    necessary    to   digestion    (fibrous    and    woody 

material)  ;  such  as  hay,  grass,  bran,  oats,  etc. 

(e)   Watery;  such  as  carrots,  potatoes,  green  grass,  etc. 

There  is  no  one  food  containing  all  of  the  required  constituents 
hence  two  or  more  must  be  combined  to  obtain  the  desired  ration. 

Natural  grasses  come  nearer  to  serving  this  purpose  than  any  other 
food  when  animals  are  at  pasture.  Similarl}^  for  stabled  animals, 
oats  are  the  best  grain  feed.  Other  grains  which  more  or  less  closely 
approximate  oats  in  food  value  and  which  may  be  substituted  if  neces- 
sary are  barley,  corn,  wheat,  rye,  and  rice,  all  of  which,  though,  must 
be  fed  sparingly  when  first  used. 

The  Proportions  of  Various  Food  Components  in  a  Ration:  The 
components  of  any  ration  depend  upon  :  the  class  and  condition  of  the 
animals  and  M^ork  required  of  them  ;  the  variety  of  valuable  foods ; 
the  kind  of  shelter  afYorded  ;  the  climate  ;  the  season  ;  etc. 

They  must  be  selected  in  such  proportions  as  to  form  a  balanced 
ration  and  fed  in  such  quantities  at  such  hours  as  to  enable  the 
animal  to  obtain  the  greatest  possible  aniount  of  nutrition  from  them. 

The  army  ration  of  twelve  pounds  of  oats  and  fourteen  pounds  of 
hay  with  its  permissible  substitutes  as  prescribed  in  Army  Regu- 
lations, furnishes  a  ration  which  will  generally  be  found  to  be  sufB- 
ciently  balanced  for  the  service. 

Methods  of  Preparation  of  Feed:  Object:  The  object  of  special 
preparation  of  feed  is  to  enable  the  animal  to  get  the  maximum  amount 
of  nutriment  from  it,  and  for  the  sake  of  economy. 

Grain:  Grain  must  be  fed  clean  and  free  from  sticks,  stones,  and 
other  litter.  If  necessary  it  should  be  fanned  or  screened,  or  both. 
Screening-  is  easily  accomplished  by  the  use  of  a  sieve  made  by  fasten- 
ing wire  screening  to  a  frame.  Fanning  can  be  done  by  dropping  loose 
grain  and  subjecting  it  to  a  draft  while  falling. 

Crushed  of  rolled  grain  is  recommended  as  being  much  more  easily 
digested  and  economical  than  whole  grain.  It  should  be  fed  whenever 
it  is  practicable  to  have  the  grain  crushed. 

Steamed  or  boiled  grain  is  an  excellent  conditioner  and  is  used 
to  build  up  convalescent  or  poor  animals.  It  can  be  used  to  good 
advantage  also  for  strong,  healthy  animals,  immediately  preceding  a 


54  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

day  of  rest  or  light  exercise.  In  effect  it  is  appetizing,  affords  a  variety 
in  diet,  has  a  mechanical  laxative  effect,  and  as  proven  by  experience 
animals  improve  and  pick  up  very  rapidly  on  it. 

It  should  be  thoroughly  cooked  and  fed  lukewarm  with  a  little 
salt  added. 

A  cooker  can  be  easily  improvised  from  old  buckets,  boilers,  g.  i. 
cans,  etc. 

Bran:  Bran  is  an  excellent  food  for  growing  horses.  Bran  mashes 
have  the  same  general  effect  as  the  cooked  feeds  and  are  frequently 
used.  In  preparing  them  bran  is  saturated  with  boiling  water  and  al- 
lowed to  steam.    Bran  is  frequently  fed  uncooked,  mixed  with  the  chop. 

Hay:  The  hay  should  be  shaken  out  over  a  screen  on  a  paulin  or 
clean  hard  floor.  The  mesh  of  the  screen  should  be  about  two  inches. 
That  part  which  falls  through  the  mesh,  called  the  screening,  con- 
tains leaves,  seeds,  flowers,  and  other  small  particles  of  hay  which 
would  otherwise  be  lost,  and  dirts.  This  hay  screening  is  the  most 
nutritious  part  of  the  hay  and  except  in  the  case  of  prairie  hay  which 
has  practically  no  flowers,  represents  about  ten  per  cent  of  the  nutri- 
ment in  the  hay.  This  is  separated  from  the  dirt,  or  cleaned  by  col- 
lecting and  immersing  in  water,  and  is  then  added  to  the  grain  feed  to. 
help  form  the  chop. 

About  30%  (10%  at  each  grain  feed)  of  the  loose  hay  should  be 
chopped  (to  about  one-inch  lengths)  and  added  to  the  grain  to  form  the 
chop. 

Hay  must  always  be  dampened  before  mixing  with  grain,  in  order 
to  lay  the  dust  and  so  that  the  grain  and  hay  will  mix  and  stay 
mixed. 

The  balance  of  the  hay  is  fed  long,  preferably  in  hay  nets,  otherwise 
in  mangers  or  hay  racks. 

Chop:  Chop,  as  has  been  seen,  is  grain  mixed  with  screened  and 
chopped  hay.  Any  other  available  food  that  can  be  added  to  it.  such 
as  carrots,  or  other  edible  green  plant,  will  increase  its  palatability, 
digestibility  and  nutriment.  A  little  salt  added  also  increases  its  pal- 
atability. 

Due  to  its  bulk  it  is  eaten  much  more  slowly  than  grain  alone,  and  is 
consequently  digested  more  thoroughly. 

Hours  of  Feeding:  Small  feeds  fed  at  short  intervals  are  preferable 
to  large  ones  fed  at  long  intervals.  This  is  shown  by  the  physiology 
of  digestion  and  is  proven  by  experience ;  also  it  approximates  more 
closely  the  natural  way  of  feeding  of  animals  at  liberty. 

Small  feeds  are  easier  on  the  digestive  system  and  more  economical 
as  more  nutriment  is  obtained  from  the  same  amount  of  food. 

The  following  feed  schedule  based  on  the  normal  ration  of  the  twelve 
pounds  of  oats  and  fourteen  pounds  of  hay  will  afford  an  example 
of  feeding  which  under  normal  conditions  enables  the  animals  to  obtain 
the  maximum  food  value  from  the  ration. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  55 

Hours  Feed 

Reveille  2  lbs.  long  hay 

Yz  Hour  after  Reveille  3  lbs.  oats,  1  lb.  chaff  (4  lbs.  chop) 

1/2  Hour  before  Noon  2  lbs.  long  hay 

Noon  4  lbs.  oats,  V/z  lbs.  chaff  (5>^  lbs. 

\  chop) 

5  :00  p.  m.  5  lbs.  oats,  ly^  lbs.  chaff  (6i/^  lbs. 

chop) 

7  :00  p.  m,  6  lbs.  long  hay 

The  above  hours  are  intended  simply  as  an  example  which  carries 
out  the  principle  of  correct  feeding.  It  can  be  follov^^ed  or  departed 
from  according  to  circumstances.  If  the  animals  are  not  on  full  ration 
the  feeds  should  be  reduced  proportionately.  If,  in  exceptional  cases 
they  are  getting  a  larger  ration,  it  is  preferable  to  give  a  fourth  grain 
feed  than  to  increase  the  size  of  the  above  feeds.  The  morning  and 
noon  feeds  might  be  increased  by  one  pound  each,  but  the  additional 
feed  is  much  preferable. 

Animals  should  be  grazed  whenever  the  opportunity  occurs.  Green 
and  even  dried  grasses  form  a  valuable  addition  to  the  ration.  Green 
grass  assists  greatly  in  conditioning  animals,  being  a  natural  food 
and  acting  as  a  laxative  and  tonic  for  both  sick  and  healthy  animals. 

CHARACTERISTICS  OF  FOODS 

Oats:  Good  oats  should  be  plump,  short,  of  good  color  (preferably 
white),  without  odor,  breaking  sharply  when  bitten,  of  agreeable 
taste,  of  uniform  size,  and  weighing  not  less  than  thirty-four  pounds 
to  the  bushel.  There  should  be  but  few  beards,  and  when  grasped 
firmly  in  the  hand  and  squeezed  should  give  imperceptibly.  They  vary 
in  color  from  white  to  red  and  black,  but  the  red  and  black  are  not 
desirable.  The  best  oats  are  naturally  good  and  have  not  been  bleached 
or  kiln  dried.  Bleached  oats  may  be  detected  by  the  odor  of  sulphur 
when  rubbed  together.  Other  defective  oats  are  sprouted,  mouldy, 
light  weight,  foxy  (foul  odor),  damp,  new,  and  dirty.  These  can 
be  detected  upon  careful  examination,  and  excepting  mouldy  oats,  may 
be  fed  in  an  emergency,  although  the  rule  should  be  to  feed  only  the 
best. 

Other  Grains:  Other  grains  should  have  the  same  general  charac- 
teristics. They  should  be  clean,  free  from  foul  odor,  of  healthy  color, 
firm,  plump,  short,  of  uniform  size  and  of  good  weight.  They  should 
not  be  sprouted,  mouldy,  damp,  new,  or  objectionable  in  any  other 
way. 

Bran:  The  quality  of  bran  depends  almost  entirely  upon  the  amount 
of  flour  it  contains.  It  should  be  flakey,  sweet,  and  pleasant  to  the 
taste,  free  from  dirt  and  impurities  and  not  finely  ground.  The  hand 
when  thrust  into  it  and  withdrawn  should  be  covered  with  flour. 

Hay:  Hay  consists  of  grasses  and  certain  plants  cut  and  cured 
before  ripening.     There  are  many  kinds  of  hay  which   are  valuable 


56  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

as  foods  for  animals.     Those  commonly  used  are  timothy,  unripened 
grains,  prairie,  red  clover,  and  alfalfa. 

Hay  of  good  quality  should  have  a  sweet  aromatic  odor,  be  pleasant 
to  the  taste,  of  greenish  or  natural  color,  have  stems  of  medium  size 
and  should  have  natural  blossoms.  It  should  not  be  dusty,  musty, 
mouldy,  caked  or  mowburnt.  Mouldy  hay  should  never  be  fed  to 
horses. 

FEEDING  MAXIMS 

1.  Water  before  feeding  or  not  until  at  least  one  hour  afterwards. 

2.  Feed  in  small  quantities  and  often. 

3.  Never  feed  grain  to  heated  animals  ;  hay  will  not  harm  them. 

4.  Put  at  least  a  double  handful  of  chaff  in  every  grain  feed. 

5.  If  expecting  hard  work  immediately  after  feeding,  give  only  a 
half-feed. 

6.  When  practicable  have  the  oats  crushed. 

7.  Shake  out  the  hay  and  saAe  the  shakings  for  feed. 

8.  Use  hay  nets. 

9.  AVhen  practicable  give  a  small  feed  of  hay  before  each  grain  feed. 

10.  Xever  feed  a  large  hay  feed  immediately  before  grain. 

11.  Give  a  bran  mash  or  cooked  grain  feed  at  least  once  a  week,  pref- 
erably before  a  day  of  rest. 

12.  Salt  your  horses.  If  cakes  are  supplied,  always  have  one  in  each 
container  or  feed  box.  If  granulated,  feed  the  ration  in  the  chop 
and  cooked  feeds. 

13.  Never  feed  hay  on  the  ground  if  it  can  be  avoided. 

14.  When  feeding  in  feedbags,  remove  them  as  each  animal  finishes. 
1.5.     Keep  feeding  utensils  clean. 

16.  Feed  clean  food. 

17.  AVatch  your  horses  feeding  and  know  which  are  the  slow  and 
the  shy  feeders. 

18.  ^^^atch  their  condition  and  fix  the  ration  for  each  horse  according 
to  his  needs. 

19.  Graze  whenever  the  opportunity  occurs. 

20.  Encourage  men  to  bring  handfuls  of  grass  or  other  food  to  their 
horses. 

21.  Be  economical  in  feeding,  waste  nothing,  let  the  horse  get  the 
full  value  of  his  ration  just  as  you  want  it  of  yours. 

WATERING  MAXIMS 

1.  Never  water  your  horse  while  in  heated  condition. 

2.  It  is  desired  that  horses  have  free  access  to  water  at  all  times, 
and  if  not  before  feeding  do  not  water  until  two  hours  after 
feeding. 

3.  A  horse  requires  from  five  to  fifteen  gallons  of  water  daily,  de- 
nending  upon  temnerature. 

4.  Except  in  very  cold  weather  horses  should  be  watered  at  least 
three  times  daily;  in  the  morning,  two  hours  after  feeding,  before 
the  noon  feeding,  and  before  the  evening  feeding. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  57 

5.  In  warm  weather  chilled  water  must  be  allowed  to  stand  before 
watering". 

6.  A  horse  should  be  allowed  am])le  time  to  drink  his  fill  and  not 
he  led  away  the  first  time  he  raises  his  head  from  the  water. 

7.  On  the  march  the  oftener  the  animals  are  watered  the  better. 

8.  Horses  must  be  w^atered  quietly,  without  confusion.  The  man- 
ner of  performing-  this  duty  is  a  good  test  of  the  discipline  of  a 
mounted  organization. 

9.  Horses  are  always  led  at  a  walk  from  and  to  the  watering  place, 
and  no  horse  should  be  led  away  until  all  have  had  their  fill. 


HINTS  ON  STABLE  MANAGEMENT 

Do  the  officers  and  chiefs  of  sections  know  the  following: 

1.  Do  you  know  what  your  horse's  forage  ration  is  and  do  you  see 
that  they  get  full  weight?  Do  you  know  good  oats  or  hay  from  bad 
oats  or  hay? 

2.  Do  you  attend  "Stables"  as  often  as  possible,  and,  if  in  charge. 
do  you  see  that  the  grooming,  watering,  and  feeding  are  well  regulated? 

3.  Do  you  see  that  your  horses  are  in  good  condition  and  comfort- 
able— i.  e.,  that  their  shelters  are  good  and  water-tight ;  that  there 
are  no  drafts  of  cold  air;  the  standings  are  in  good  order  and 
out  of  the  mud  and  water;  that  the  horse  covers  and  nosebags  are 
kept  in  good  order? 

4.  Do  you  examine  each  horse  at  stable  hour  to  see  that  he  is  clean, 
free  from  vermin,  and,  particularly,  that  his  feet  and  heels  are  in  good 
condition  ? 

5.  Do  you  understand  the  shoeing  of  horses,  and  do  you  see  that 
your  horses  are  properly  shod ;  that  spare  shoes  are  in  their  proper 
place ;  and  that  the  horseshoer's  tool  bags  are  properly  equipped? 

6.  Do  you  know  the  various  grains  and  seeds  which  can  be  used 
for  fodder  in  the  absence  of  oats,  equivalent  amounts,  and  their  efifects? 

7.  Have  you  seen  whether  the  entrances  to  your  horse  lines  are  well 
metalled  and  dry,  and  that  the  approaches  to  and  surroundings  of 
water  troughs  are  similarly  treated? 

8.  Do  you  understand  the  symptoms  and  cure  of  simple  ailments, 
and  has  your  battery  instructions  regarding  the  prevention  of  the 
spread  of  infectious  diseases,  such  as  mange? 

9.  Do  you  know  who  your  veterinarian  is  and  where  he  can  be 
found?  Do  you  know  what  the  farrier's  equipment  is,  what  the  articles 
are  for,  and  where  they  can  be  found? 

10.  If  horses  are  out  late  at  night,  have  you  a  noncommissioned 
officer  detailed  to  see  them  come  in  and  properly  cared  for  at  once? 

11.  Do  you  inspect  your  harness  frequently  to  see: 

(a)  That  the  leather  work  is  well  cleaned  and  oiled,  and  espe- 
cially that  w^orking  parts,  such  as  breast  collars,  girths,  sweat 
flaps,  are  kept  soft  and  pliable? 


< 

P5 

J 

! 
1 

I 

! 

1 

1 

1 

1 
1 

C/2 

Q 

:^; 
2 

pq 

G 

3 

1 
1 

en 

C 

■s 
1 

1 

pi, 

CO 

< 

8 

. 

^3 

H 

1 

1 

MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  59 

(b)  That  the  steelwork  is  thoroughly  cleaned  and  then  rubbed 
Hg-htly  over  with  clean  oil? 

(c)  That   every  article  of  harness   fits   its   wearer  properly,   as 
laid  down  ? 

12.  Have  you  got  good  covers  for  your  harness?  Is  the  cover  large 
enough  to  enable  the  drivers  to  clean  their  harness  under  shelter? 

13.  Do  you  ever  inspect  the  drivers'  "kits."  and  do  you  know  what 
each  should  contain? 

14.  Do  you  inspect  all  battery  vehicles  frequently  to  see  that 
nothing  is  wrong  with  them?    "A  stitch  in  time  saves  nine." 

15.  If  on  the  march  and  a  horse  goes  so  sick  that  it  has  to  be  left 
behind,  do  you  know  what  (h's-^osition  you  should  make  of  it? 

16.  .  How  often  are  your  horses  fed?  "Little  and  often"  should 
be  your  policy.  Never  less  than  three  feeds  a  day,  first  feed  as  early 
as  possible,  and  the  last  (and  biggest)  as  late  as  possible. 

17.  Do  you  appreciate  that  in  cold  weather  a  cover  is  as  good  as 
an  extra  2  pounds  of  oats? 

18.  Do  you  know  the  regulations  regarding  clipping,  trimming, 
and   plucking? 

19.  Do  you  realize  how  much  a  horse's  condition  denends  on  good 
water,  and  plenty  of  it?     Always  water  from  troughs  if  possible. 

20.  Do  your  men  really  work  hard  when  grooming?  Short  stable 
hours  and  hard  work  while  at  it  should  be  the  rule. 

21.  Remember  that  the  essence  of  horse  mastership  is  the  "master's 
eye." 

INDICATIONS  OF  HEALTH  AND  OF  DISEASE 

Health:  The  indications  are  as  follows:  head  and  ears  alert;  eyes 
bright ;  appetite  and  spirit  good  ;  body  well  filled  out ;  muscles  firm  and 
standing  out ;  skin  elastic  ;  coat  bright ;  the  animal  standing  on  all  four 
legs  or  resting  a  hind  one;  droopings  moderately  firm  and  not  slimy; 
urine  bright  yellow,  thick,  and  passed  in  moderate  amounts,  and  no 
undue  fatigue  or  profuse  sweating  after  ordinary  exercise. 

Diseases  and  Lack  of  condition:  The  indications  are  as  follows: 
head  and  ears  drooping;  eyes  dull,  partly  closed,  or  watering;  coat  dull 
or  staring;  partial  or  total  loss  of  appetite  ;  temperature  elevated  ;  easily 
fatigued  ;  loss  of  flesh  ;  dung  hard,  coated  or  very  soft  and  sometimes  of 
ofifensive  odor;  urine  excessive  or  insufficient  and  passed  with  diffi- 
culty ;  profuse  sweating  without  cause  ;  pointing  of  a  fore  foot ;  stiffness 
of  gait;  limping;  excessive  stumbling;  labored  or  accellerated  breath- 
ing; abnormal  color  of  mucous  membrane;  local  heat  or  tenderness 
of  certain  parts;  skin  eruptions;  itching;  uneasiness  or  distress;  un- 
usual nasal  discharge  ;  suspicious  sores,  etc. 

Troopers  and  drivers  should  watch  their  animals  carefully  and  report 
any  suspicious  indication  to  the  .Stable  Sergeant.  Two  very  good 
indications  may  be  observed  in  the  stable.  If  any  animal  is  Passing 
a  considerable  amount  of  whole  grain  in  his  droppings,  and  if  he  fails 


60  ■  ^  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

to  clean  up  his  feed,  he  usually  has  something-  out  of  order  about  him 
and  should  be  carefully  examined  and  watched. 

The  early  detection  of  indications  of  disease  and  the  necessary 
action  promptly  taken  is  of  far  greater  importance  than  any  treatment 
that  can  be  given  once  the  disease  has  developed.  Often  the  detection 
and  isolation  of  one  animal  sufifering  from  a  communicable  disease 
means  the  saving  of  thousands  of  dollars  in  horse  flesh  and  the  pre- 
vention of  an  animal  shortage  v^hich  would  have  disastrous  results. 


CAUSES  AND  PREVENTION  OF  DISEASE 

Definition:  Li\ing  germs  constitute  the  specific  and  primary  cause 
of  certain  diseases  and  may  be  transmitted  from  one  animal  to  another. 

Description:  Bacteria  are  vegetable  microorganisms.  Each  indi- 
vidual consists  of  a  sing'le  cell.  They  are  of  almost  infinite  number  of 
species  and  varieties,  and  are  present  in  the  atmosphere  in  particles  of 
room  dust,  in  drinking  water,  in  the  soil,  and,  in  fact,  almost  every- 
where in  great  abundance. 

Size:  They  are  extremely  small,  recpiiring  the  highest  powers  of  the 
microscope  to  make  them  distinctly  visible.  It  is  estimated  that  mil- 
lions mav  live  comfortablv  in  a  single  drop  of  fluid.  An  average  bacil- 
lus is  from  1-25.000  to  2-25,000  of  an  inch  long-. 

Nutrition:  Hacteria  use  for  their  food  compound  formed  from  the 
chemical  elements,  oxyg'en,  nitrogen,  carbon,  hydrogen,  phosphorus, 
and  sulphur.  Like  higher  beings,  thev  vary  in  their  likes  and  dislikes. 
What  is  wholesome  for  one  may  be  very  injurious  to  another.  Each 
species  has  its  certain  conditions  of  moisture,  temperature,  and  chemi- 
cal reaction  which  are  most  favorable. 

How  Scattered:  Germs  of  diseases  are  scattered  by  a  very  great 
many  agencies.  Germs  are  disseminated  by  means  of  diseased  car- 
casses, stock  cars,  and  they  may  be  easily  transferred  by  the  shoes  or 
clothing  of  persons  who  walk  through  an  infected  area.  Dogs  un- 
doubtedly serve  to  scatter  diseases  over  wide  areas,  and  possibly  birds. 
It  is  possible  also  for  the  germs  to  be  scattered  by  particles  of  dust  and 
litter  in  high  winds.  Watering  troug^hs,  tanks,  ponds,  and  sluggish 
streams  are  all  common  courses  for  spreading  infectious  diseases. 

Development  of  Outbreaks:  It  seems  to  be  true  of  several  and  pos- 
sibly so  of  a  great  many  diseases,  that  the  germs  may  be  present 
with  the  animal  or  his  surroundings  but  not  virulent  enough  to  produce 
disease.  Under  favorable  conditions  and  perhaps  after  passing  through 
the  bodies  of  several  susceptible  animals  in  succession  they  may  in- 
crease in  virulence  sufficiently  to  produce  disease. 

Some  of  the  germs  producing  diseases  of  domestic  animals  are  be- 
lieved to  live  for  very  long  periods  of  time  and  even  vegetate  outside 
the  animal  body,  possibly  upon  or  within  the  tissues  of  plants.  Some 
germs,  especially  in  the  resting  or  spore  stage,  may  live  for  very  long- 
periods  of  time,  and  under  very  unfavorable  conditions  and  retain 
virulence. 


62  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Some  outbreaks  of  infectious  diseases  appear  very  suddenly,  with 
the  most  virulent  and  rapidly  fatal  cases  appearing  earliest  in  the  out- 
break. The  outbreak  then  gradually  loses  virulence,  the  last  cases  be- 
ing of  a  decidedly  chronic  nature,  and  some  of  them  possibly  recover- 
ing. It  is  possible  however,  that,  before  the  virulent  form  was  noticed, 
there  may  have  been  a  series  of  very  mild  cases,  the  animals  not  being 
appreciably  sick ;  but  the  germs  in  passing  through  susceptible  bodies 
greatly  increased  in  virulence  until  they  were  able  to  produce  a  rapidly 
fatal  type  of  the  disease. 

Body  Entrance:  Germs  gain  entrance  through  the  respiratory  or- 
gans with  the  inspired  air;  through  the  digestive  organs  ;  through  cuts 
or  scratches  in  the  skin  and  mucous  membranes. 

Method  of  Injury:  Germs  cause  injury  and  disease  in  at  least  two 
different  ways :  First,  by  rapid  multiplication  and  direct  attack  in  in- 
conceivable numbers  upon  the  tissue.  As  an  example  of  condition 
caused  by  germs  in  this  way,  we  have  fistulous  withers.  Second,  germs 
which  by  chemical  action  may  produce  intensely  poisonous  substances 
in  the  blood  and  body  tissues.    As  an  example  of  this  we  have  tetanus. 

How  Disposed  of  in  Nature:  Nature  disposes  of  disease  germs  in  a 
variety  of  ways,  principally  by  oxidation,  by  the  devitalizing  effect  of 
sunlight,  and  by  scattering  them  over  wide  areas  by  means  of  wind 
and  water. 

Bacteria  or  germs  usually  require  very  favorable  conditions  for  exist- 
ence, and  especially  for  retaining  disease-producing  power.  Make  con- 
ditions unfavorable  for  them  by  vigorous  health,  by  high  resisting 
power  on  the  part  of  the  animal,  and  by  sunshine  and  ventilation. 
Bear  in  mind  that  germs  are  actual  substances,  tiny  particles  of  living 
matter,  and  may  be  carried  about  in  any  way  that  very  fine  particles 
of  dust  may  be  scattered. 

The  beginning  of  an  outbreak  may  come  in  two  ways :  First,  by 
recent  introduction  of  germs ;  or  second,  an  outbreak  of  infectious 
disease  may  be  caused  by  increased  virulence  in  case  of  germs  already 
present,  but  not  previously  capable  of  producing  disease.  This  in- 
crease of  virulence  may  be  due  to  surrounding  conditions  especially 
favorable  to  germ  life. 

Apparently  it  makes  great  difference  in  many  diseases  as  to  the  num- 
ber of  germs  taken  into  the  body, — hence  the  necessity  of  sunshine  to 
reduce  virulence  and  destroy  germs  and  of  ventilation  to  carry  as  many 
of  them  as  possible  out  into  the  open  air. 

DISINFECTION  AND  DISINFECTANTS 

Causes  of  Infection:  In  any  process  of  disinfection  it  is  important 
to  know  something  concerning  the  nature  of  the  infecting  germ  and  the 
sources  from  which  it  comes.  Germs  of  diseases  are  spread  in  a  great 
variety  of  ways ;  for  instance  with  the  body  fluids  of  sick  animals,  by 
soiled  water  or  food,  or  by  any  contaminated  matter.  Air  may  be  con- 
taminated from  the  skin  and  lungs  of  diseased  animals.  Thesoil  may 
be  contaminated  by  the  burial  of  diseased  animals  or  by  the  deposit 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  63 

of  any  infectious  material  upon  the  surface.  In  any  such  case,  germs 
may  be  washed  to  ponds,  sluggish  streams,  or  shallow  wells,  thus 
contaminating  the  water.  Hides,  offal  and  even  the  hair  of  a  diseased 
animal  may  be  the  source  of  spreading  disease. 

Bearing  in  mind  now  what  has  been  said  of  germs,  it  is  easy  to  see 
how  glanders  with  infection  left  in  feed  boxes  or  water  pails  may  be 
spread  from  horse  to  horse;  how  disease  with  infection,  especially  in 
the  manure  may  be  easily  and  rapidly  spread;  or  how  disease  may  be 
spread  with  its  germs  in  the  pus  scattered  from  abscesses. 

Must  Be  Thorough:  Disinfection  is  not  reliable  and  should  not  be 
depended  upon  unless  done  most  thoroughly.  A  small  area  may  be 
disinfected  by  having  straw  burned  over  it.  or  the  earth  may  be  removed 
to  a  depth  of  at  least  four  inches  and  replaced  with  fresh  earth.  Paved 
flooring  may  be  disinfected  by  burning  over  it  any  inflammable  materi- 
al. Cracks  should  be  disinfected  by  free  use  of  corrosive  sublimate  so- 
lution. Food  which  may  have  been  contaminated  should  ordinarily  be 
destroyed.  Drinking  places,  feed  boxes  and  mangers  are  cleaned  and 
disinfected.  Manure  and  bedding  must  be  removed,  piled  up  on  the 
outside,  and  burned.  All  equipment, — bridles,  halters,  harness, 
blanket,  grooming  utensils,  attendants'  clothing,  forks,  brooms,  etc., 
should  be  washed  with  soap  and  water,  then  scrubbed  with  a  disin- 
fectant. Do  not  use  bichloride  of  mercury  as  a  disinfectant  on  bits, 
curb-chains,  etc. ;  it  will  corrode  them. 

Attendants:  Attendants  for  sick  animals  should  be  very  careful 
about  their  clothing,  particularly  trousers  and  shoes.  It  is  well  to  use 
special  overalls  and  overshoes,  which  should  be  left  at  the  infected  stall 
or  building.  Dogs.  rats,  and  any  of  the  smaller  animals  which  are  liable 
to  convey  the  disease  should  be  guarded  against. 

Fire:  The  most  reliable  disinfectant,  and  the  one  that  should  be  in- 
variably used  where  an  article  may  be  destroyed. 

How  to  Burn  a  Carcass:  Dig  a  cross-shaped  trench,  about  twelve 
inches  deep  in  the  center,  becoming  shallow  toward  the  edges,  about 
seven  feet  long  each  way.  The  earth  is  thrown  in  the  angles  ;  two  bars 
of  iron  are  placed  across  for  a  bridge,  and  upon  them  the  fuel  is  placed. 
The  trunk  of  the  carcass  is  placed  upon  the  fuel,  then  another  layer  of 
fuel,  then  the  internal  organs  and  limbs  of  the  carcass,  and  finally 
another  layer  of  wood.  The  cross-shaped  trench  gives  a  draft — no 
matter  which  way  the  wind  may  be  blowing. 

By  Burying:  When  burning  is  impracticable,  carcasses  should  be 
buried.  The  grave  should  be  at  least  eight  feet  deep  and  the  carcass 
should  be  well  covered  with  unslacked  lime,  after  which  the  grave  is 
filled  in  and  the  earth  well  packed.  Earth  which  has  been  soiled  by 
blood,  manure,  nasal  discharges,  etc.,  should  be  scraped  up  and  thrown 
into  the  bottom  of  the  grave.  Wagons,  etc.,  in  which  animals  dead  of 
contagious  disease  are  hauled,  should  be  cleaned  and  disinfected. 

Moist  Heat:  More  active  and  reliable  than  dry  heat  at  same  temper- 
ature. Boiling  for  an  hour  is  probably  sufficient  to  destroy  any  known 
disease-producing  germs. 


64  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Sunshine:  Destroys  germs.  Whenever  sufficient  time  may  be  had, 
infected  clothing  or  any  article  to  be  disinfected,  especially  where  the 
infection  is  on  the  surface,  can  be  rendered  safe  by  long-  exposure  to 
sunshine.  The  germs  of  some  diseases  cannot  lurk  and  produce  in  sun- 
light or  in  the  presence  of  oxygen,  but  indefinitely  in  dark,  damp  places. 

Chemical :  There  are  a  number  of  chemical  agents  that  are  frequently 
used  and  most  of  them  are  coal  tar  products.  These  are  supplied  by  the 
veterinary  with  directions  for  using  same. 

Isolation:  Is  a  preventative  measure  wherein  an  animal  affected  with 
contagious  disease,  or  one  suspected  of  such  disease,  is  separated 
from  the  healthy  animals  and  placed  by  itself. 

Each  isolated  animal  must  be  provided  with  a  separate  feed  box, 
water  bucket,  blanket,  and  grooming  outfit,  none  of  which  should  be 
removed  from  the  place  of  isolation  until  properly  disinfected.  Atten- 
dants should  have  no  duties  which  bring  them  in  contact  with  other 
animals.  No  animal  carcass,  forage,  bedding  or  manure  should  be 
removed  from  the  place  of  isolation  without  proper  authority.  After 
an  animal  has  been  removed  from  the  place  of  isolation,  his  entire 
equipment,  watering  bucket,  feed  box,  etc.,  should  be  disinfected. 

Care  of  the  Corral:  Manure,  soiled  bedding,  and  refuse  about  the 
feed  boxes  and  mangers  should  be  removed  daily  and  hauled  to  the 
dump.  Feed  boxes  and  mangers  should  be  swept  or  brushed  out 
daily,  and  once  a  week  the  feed  boxes  and  a  portion  of  the  wood  work 
immediately  surrounding  them  should  be  well  scraped  and  washed 
clean  with  boiling  water.  The  doors  and  windows  should  be  kept 
open  at  all  times,  excepting  during  storms,  and  bales  of  hay  or  straw, 
and  empty  sacks  or  sacks  filled  with  grain  that  may  have  become  wet 
by  rain  blowing  through  open  windows  or  doors  should  be  scattered 
about  and  allowed  to  dry.  The  corrals  and  picket  lines  should  be 
swept  daily,  and  special  attention  must  be  paid  to  the  ground  beneath 
the  watering  trough  to  see  that  it  is  kept  clean  and  dry.  If  the  floor 
of  picket  line  should  be  of  soft  earth,  it  should  be  sprinkled  once  a 
week  with  crude  oil.  Horse  covers  and  saddle  blankets  that  have 
been  used  and  which  for  any  reason  are  to  be  stored  away  in  the 
stable  should  be  thoroughly  dried  before  storing. 

COMMON   DISEASES,  WOUNDS  AND   LAMENESS 

In  control  of  infectious  diseases  ])re\ention  is  the  most  important 
procedure.  The  isolation  of  healthy  animals  from  infected  animals 
should  be  primarily  considered,  and  if  at  any  time  an  animal  shows 
the  symptoms  of  an  infectious  disease  it  is  essential  to  protect  the 
others  from  such  a  source  of  danger.  In  some  of  the  infectious  diseases 
it  is  of  may  become  advisable  to  kill  the  infected  animals  in  order  to 
avoid  the  spread  of  the  disease. 

INFLUENZA 

The  term  influenza  is  apjjlied  to  a  contagious  disease  of  horses, 
which  is  characterized  by  a  blood  infection,  causing  inflammation  of 
the  mucous  membranes  and  frequently  involving  the  lungs. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  65 

In  order  to  prevent  the  intrdduction  of  tlic  disease  it  is  advisable 
to  isolate  animals  that  are  issued  to  organizations  for  at  least  one 
week.  Furthermore,  the  stabling  of  healthy  horses  in  feed  stables 
should  be  guarded  against.  At  the  beginning  of  an  outbreak  the 
disease  may  be  checked  by  immediate  isolation  of  the  infected  horses, 
and  later  by  the  segregation  of  those  showing  a  marked  increase  in 
temperature.  Contagious  pneumonia  is  an  acute  inflammation  of 
the  lungs.  The  same  procedure  as  gi\-en  for  influenza  should  be  car- 
ried out  in  the  prevention  of  this  infection. 

GLANDERS  AND  FARCY 

Let  it  be  understood  at  the  outset  that  the  glanders  and  farcy  are 
one  and  the  same  disease,  differing  only  in  that  the  first  is  usually  ap- 
plied to  the  disease  when  the  local  lesions  predominate  in  the  internal 
organs,  especially  in  the  nostrils,  lungs,  and  air  tubes,  and  that  the 
second  term  is  applied  to  it  when  the  principal  manifestation  is  an 
outbreak  of  the  lesions  on  the  exterior  or  skin  of  the  animal.  The 
term  glanders  is  sometimes  applied  to  the  disease  in  both  forms,  while 
the  term  farcy  is  limited  to  the  visible  appearance  of  the  external 
troubles  only ;  but  in  the  latter  case  internal  lesions  always  exist, 
although  they  may  not  be  evident.  It  is  characterized  by  the  forma- 
tion of  nodules  of  connective  tissue  which  degenerate  into  ulcers, 
from  which  exudes  a  neculiar  discharge. 


THICK  WIND  AND  ROARING 

Horses  afifected  with  a  clironic  disease  that  causes  a  loud  unnatural 
noise  in  breathing  are  said  to  have  thick  wind,  or  to  be  roarers.  Their 
class  does  not  include  those  afifected  with  severe  sore  throat,  as  in 
these  cases  the  breathing  is  noisy  only  during  the  attack  of  the  acute 
disease.  Thick  wind  is  caused  by  an  obstruclion  to  the  free  passage 
of  the  air  in  some  part  of  the  respiratory  tract. 

The  conifort  and  surrounding  of  the  patient  must  be  attended  to 
first.  The  quarters  should  be  the  best  that  can  be  provided.  Pure 
air  is  essential.  Avoid  placing  the  animal  in  a  stall  where  he  may 
be  exposed  to  drafts  of  cold  air  and  sudden  changes  of  temnerature. 
It  is  much  better  for  the  animal  if  the  air  is  cold  and  pure  than  if  it 
is  warm  and  foul.  It  is  better  to  make  the  animal  comfortable  with 
warm  clothing  than  to  make  the  stable  warm  by  siuitting  off  the 
ventilation.  From  the  start  the  animal  should  have  an  imlimited 
supply  of  fresh,  cold  drinking  water.     Blanket  the  body. 


HEAVES,  BROKEN  WIND 

Heaves  is  usually  associated  uith  digestive  disorders  or  an  error 
in  the  choice  of  feed.  Feeding  on  clover  hay  or  damaged  hay  or  straw. 
too  bulky  and   innutritions   feed,  and  keeping  the  horse   in   a   dusty 


66  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

atmosphere  or  a  badly  ventilated  stable  produce  or  predispose  heaves. 
Horses  brought  from  a  high  to  a  low  level  are  predisposed.  When 
the  disease  is  established  there  is  no  cure  for  it. 

Proper  attention  paid  to  the  diet  will  relieve  the  distressing  symp- 
toms to  a  certain  extent,  but  they  will  undoubtedly  reappear  intensified 
the  first  time  the  animal  overloads  the  stomach  or  is  allowed  food 
of  poor  quality.  Clover  hay  or  bulky  feed  which  contains  but  little 
nutriment  is  a  common  cause  of  the  disease,  and  therefore  should  be 
entirely  omitted  from  the  diet.  It  has  been  asserted  that  the  disease 
is  unknown  where  clover  hay  is  never  used.  The  diet  should  be  con- 
fined to  feed  of  the  best  quality  and  in  the  smallest  quantity.  The  bad 
effect  of  moldy  or  dusty  hay,  fodder,  or  feed  of  any  kind  can  not  be 
overestimated.  A  small  quantity  of  the  best  hay  once  a  day  is  suf- 
ficient. This  should  be  cut  and  dampened.  The  animal  should  be 
watered  before  feeding;  never  directly  after  a  meal.  Exertion  when 
the  stomach  is  full  invariably  aggravates  the  symptoms. 

MENINGITIS,  CEREBRITIS 

Exposure  to  extreme  heat  or  cold,  sudden  and  extreme  changes  of 
temperature,  excessive  continued  cerebral  excitement,  too  much  nitro- 
genous feed,  direct  injuries  to  the  brain,  such  as  concussion,  or  from 
fracture  of  the  cranium,  overexertion,  sometimes  sequel  to  influenza, 
pyemia,  poisons  having  a  direct  influence  upon  the  encephalic  mass, 
extension  of  inflammation  from  neighboring  structures,  food  poison- 
ing, tumors,  parasites,  metastatic  abscesses,  etc. 

TETANUS,  OR  LOCKJAW 

The  disease  is  characterized  by  spasms  afl^ecting  the  muscles  of 
the  face,  neck,  body,  and  limbs  and  all  muscles  supplied  by  the  cerebro- 
spinal nervous  system.  The  spasms  or  muscular  contractions  are 
rigid  and  persistent,  yet  mixed  with  occasional  convulsions. 

This  disease  is  caused  by  a  bacillus  that  is  often  found  in  dust.  This 
germ  forms  spores  which  grow  only  in  the  absence  of  oxygen.  It 
produces  a  powerful  nerve  poison,  which  causes  the  symptoms  of 
tetanus.  The  germ  itself  multiplies  at  the  first  point  where  it  is  intro- 
duced, but  its  poison  is  absorbed  and  is  carried  by  the  blood  to  all 
parts  of  the  body,  and  thus  the  whole  nervous  system  is  poisoned. 
Deep  wounds  infected  by  this  germ  are  more  dangerous  than  super- 
ficial wounds,  because  in  them  the  germ  is  more  remote  from  the  oxy- 
gen of  the  air.  Hence,  nail  pricks,  etc.,  are  especially  dangerous. 
In  the  majority  of  instances  the  cause  of  tetanus  can  be  traced  to 
wounds,  especially  pricks  and  wounds  of  the  feet  or  of  the  tendinous 
structures.  It  sometimes  follows  castration,  docking,  the  introduc- 
tion of  setons,  inclusion  of  a  nerve  in  a  ligature,  etc.  It  may  break 
out  three  or  four  months  after  the  wound  is  healed.  Horses  with  a  ner- 
vous, excitable  disposition  are  predisposed  to  infection. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  67 

When  a  valuable  horse  has  sustained  a  wound  that  is  feared  may 
be  followed  by  tetanus,  it  is  well  to  administer  a  dose  of  tetanus  anti- 
toxin. This  is  injected  beneath  the  skin  with  a  hypodermic  syringe. 
A  very  high  degree  of  protection  may  in  this  way  be  afforded.  This 
antitoxin  should  be  administered  by  a  veterinarian. 

LAMINITIS 

Laminitis  is  a  simple  inflammation  of  the  sensitive  laminae  of  the 
feet.  Causes  of  laminitis  are  many  and  varied.  The  most  common  are 
concussion,  overexertion,  exhaustion,  and  rapid  changes  of  tempera- 
ture. (First)  Concussion  produces  this  disease  by  local  overstimu- 
lation. (Second)  Overexertion,  as  heavy  pulling  or  rapid  work,  even 
when  there  is  no  immoderate  concussion,  occasionally  results  in  this 
disease.  (Third)  Exhaustion  causes  those  cases  where  the  disease 
follows  a  hard  day's  work,  physical  strength  being  impaired.  (Fourth) 
Rapid  changes  of  temperature  are  exciting  causes  of  laminitis,  by  im- 
pairing the  normal  blood  supply.  (Fifth)  Certain  kinds  of  grain  will 
cause  laminitis  though  the  reason  does  not  seem  to  be  clearly  under- 
stood. 

AZOTURIA 

A  disease  of  the  liver  and  blood  forming  functions,  with  a  loss  of  con- 
trol of  the  hind  limbs  and  the  passage  of  soapy  and  dark  colored  urine. 
It  is  directly  connected  with  high  feeding,  especially  on  highly  nitro- 
genous feed  (oats,  peas,  etc.)  followed  by  idleness  in  the  stall. 

Restrict  diet  and  give  daily  exercise  when  the  animal  is  not  at  work. 
A  horse  that  has  had  one  attack  should  not  be  left  idle  for  a  single  day 
in  the  stall  or  on  the  picket  line. 


LYMPHANGITIS 

Special  inflammation  of  the  lymphatic  structures  usually  affecting 
the  hind  legs ;  very  seldom  a  fore  leg. 

Usually  attacks  well-fed  animals,  and  in  such  cases  may  be  due  to 
an  excess  of  nutritive  elements  in  the  blood.  Sudden  changes  in  work 
or  in  habits  of  the  animal  may  induce  an  attack.  Prevention  same  as 
in  azoturia. 

COLIC 

An  excessive  accumulation  of  gas  in  stomach,  contraction  of  small 
intestines,  sand  in  stomach  and  small  intestines,  or  infection  of  the 
large  intestines. 

Sudden  changes  of  feed,  too  long  fasting,  feeding  while  animal  is 
exhausted,  and  giving  feed  that  has  been  in  the  manger  for  some  time 
and  has  become  sour;  anything  that  produces  indigestion,  such  as 
watering  when  the  animal  is  warm,  driving  a  heated  horse  through 
streams,  and  feeding  on  sandy  picket  lines. 


68  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

LAMENESS 

Usually  tlTe  discovery  that  the  animal  is  becoming  lame  is  a  com- 
paratively easy  matter  to  the  careful  observer.  Such  a  person  will 
readily  note  any  changes  in  movements  which  will  have  taken  place  in 
the  animal  he  has  been  accustomed  to  ride  or  drive,  unless  they  are  very 
slight.  But  what  is  not  always  so  easy  after  having  discovered  the 
fact  of  an  existing  irregularity,  is  the  locality  of  its  point  of  origin,  and 
whether  its  seat  be  in  the  near  or  off  leg,  in  the  fore  or  hind  leg,  or  some 
other  part  of  the  body.  These  are  questions,  too  often  wrongly  decided, 
notwithstanding  the  fact  that  with  a  little  careful  scrutiny  the'  point 
may  be  easily  settled.  The  error,  which  is  too  often  committed,  of  pro- 
nouncing the  leg  upon  which  the  animal  travels  soundly  as  the  seat  of 
the  lameness,  is  the  result  of  a  misinterpretation  of  the  physiology  of 
locomotion  in  the  crippled  animal.  Much  depends  upon  the  gait  with 
which  the  animal  moves  while  under  examination.  The  act  of  walking 
is  unfavorable  for  making  an  accurate  observation,  though  the  decision 
is  easy  to  reach  if  the  animal  walks  on  three  legs.  The  action  of  gallop- 
ing will  often  by  the  rapidity  of  the  muscular  movements  and  their 
quick  succession,  interfere  with  an  accurate  study  of  their  rhythm,  and 
it  is  only  under  some  peculiar  circumstances  that  the  examination  can 
be  safely  conducted  while  the  animal  is  moving  with  that  gait.  It  is 
while  the  animal  is  trotting  that  the  investigation  is  made  with  the  best 
chances  of  an  intelligent  decision,  and  it  is  while  moving  with  that  gait, 
therefore,  that  the  points  should  be  looked  for  which  must  form  the 
elements  of  the  diagnosis.  The  causes  for  lameness  are  taken  up  in 
Instruction  Memorandum  No.  t'/-G,  on  Soundness. 

WOUNDS 

A  wound  is  an  injury  to  any  part  of  the  body  caused  by  violence, 
with  or  without  laceration  of  the  skin.  An  accidental  wound  is  a  sim- 
ple cut  made  with  a  sharp  instrument,  such  as  a  knife,  producing  merely 
a  division  of  the  tissue.  In  a  cut  wound  the  edges  are  even  and  definite, 
while  those  of  a  lacerated  wound  are  irregular  and  torn.  The  check- 
ing of  the  flow  of  blood  may  be  accomplished  by  several  methods,  such 
as  compress  bandages,  hot  iron,  and  ligatures.  The  heat  from  a  hot 
iron  will  cause  the  immediate  clotting  of  the  blood  in  the  vessels  and 
this  clot  is  further  supported  by  the  production  of  a  scab,  or  crust,  over 
the  portion  seared.  The  iron  should  be  at  a  red  heat.  If  at  a  white 
heat  the  tissue  is  charred,  which  makes  it  brittle  and  the  bleeding  is 
liable  to  be  renewed.  If  iron  is  at  black  heat,  the  tissue  will  stick  to 
the  iron,  and  will  pull  away  from  the  surface  of  the  wound.  Cold  water 
and  ice  bags  will  quickly  stop  capillary  bleeding,  while  hot  water  is 
preferable  in  more  excessive  bleedings  or  hemorrhages.  Some  drugs, 
called  styptics,  possess  the  power  of  contracting  the  walls  of  blood  ves- 
sels and  "also  of  clotting  the  blood.  A  solution  of  chloride  of  iron  placed 
on  the  wound  alone  or  by  means  of  cotton  drenched  in  the  liquid  pro- 
duces a  rapid  and  hard  clot.     Tannic  acid,  alum,  acetic  acid,  alcohol, 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  69 

and  oil  of  turpentine  are  all  more  or  less  acti\-e  in  this  respect.  To 
check  rapid  and  dani^erons  bleedint^  from  lars^c  vessels  compression 
may  be  adopted.  When  it  is  from  an  artery,  the  fing^ers  may  be  used 
for  pressing-  between  the  wound  and  the  heart,  but  if  from  a  vein,  the 
pressure  should  be  exerted  on  the  other  side  of  the  wound. 

Bruises:  Are  nothing'  but  wounds  wdiere  the  skin  has  not  been  rup- 
tured. 

Punctured  Wounds:  Are  produced  by  the  penetration  of  a  sharp  or 
blunt-pointed  instrument,  such  as  a  thorn,  fork,  nail,  etc..  and  the  orifice 
of  these  wounds  is  always  small  in  proportion  to  their  depth.  In  veter- 
inary practice  punctured  wounds  are  very  much  more  common  than 
the  others.  They  involve  the  feet  most  frequently,  next  the  legs  and 
often  the  face  and  head  from  nails  protruding  through  the  stalls  and 
troug^h.  They  are  not  only  the  most  frequent,  but  they  are  also  the 
most  serious,  owing  to  the  difficulty  in  obtaining  thorough  disinfection. 
Another  circumstance  rendering  them  serious  is  the  lack  of  attention 
that  they  receive  at  first.  The  external  wound  is  so  small  that  but 
little  or  no  importance  is  attached  to  it,  yet  in  a  short  time  swelling, 
pain,  and  acute  inflammation,  often  of  a  serious  character,  are  mani- 
fested. Considering  the  most  common  of  puncture  wounds,  we  must 
give  precedence  to  those  of  the  feet.  The  animal  treads  upon  nails, 
pieces  of  iron  or  screws,  forcing  them  into  the  soles  of  the  feet.  If  the 
nail  or  whatever  it  is  that  has  punctured  the  foot  is  attached  to  some 
heavier  body  and  is  withdrawm  as  the  horse  lifts  his  foot,  lameness  may 
last  for  a  few  steps  only,  but  unless  properly  attended  to  at  once  the 
horse  will  be  found  in  a  day  or  two  to  be  very  lame  in  the  injured  mem- 
ber. If  the  foreign  body  remains  in  the  foot,  he  gradually  grows  worse 
until  the  cause  is  discovered  and  removed. 

From  the  construction  of  the  horse's  feet  and  from  the  elasticity  of 
the  horn  closing  the  orifice,  punctured  wounds  of  the  feet  are  almost 
always  productive  of  lameness.  Inflammation  results,  and  as  there  is 
no  relief  afforded  by  swelling  and  no  escape  for  the  product  of  inflam- 
mation, this  matter  must  and  does  burrow^  between  the  sole  or  wall 
and  the  sensitive  parts  within  it  until  it  generally  opens  "between  hair 
and  hoof."  From  the  fact  that  the  pain  is  so  much  more  severe,  and 
that  tetanus  more  frequently  follows  w^ounds  in  the  feet,  and  from 
the  extensive,  or  at  times  complete,  separation  and  "casting"  of  the 
hoof,  these  Avounds  must  alw^ays  be  regarded  with  grave  apprehension. 

The  practice  of  picking  up  each  foot,  cleaning  the  sole,  and  thorough- 
ly examining  the  foot  each  and  every  time  the  horse  comes  into  the 
stable  will  enable  us  to  reduce  to  the  minimum  the  serious  consequen- 
ces of  punctured  w^ounds  of  the  feet.  If  the  wound  has  resulted  from 
pricking,  lameness  follows  soon  after  shoeing;  if  from  the  nails  being 
driven  too  close,  it  usually  a|)pears  from  four  to  five  days  or  a  week 
afterwards.  We  should  always  inquire  as  to  the  time  of  shoeing,  ex- 
amine the  shoe  carefully,  and  see  whether  it  has  been  partially  pulled 
and  the  horse  has  stepped  back  upon  some  nails  or  the  clip.  The  horse 
is  seen  to  raise  and  lower  the  limb  or  hold  it  from  the  ground  alto- 


7U  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

gether;  often  he  points  the  foot,  flexes  the  leg,  and  knuckles  at  the  fet- 
lock. Swelling  of  the  fetlock  and  back  tendons  is  also  frequently  seen 
and  is  liable  to  mislead  us.  The  foot  must  be  carefully  examined,  and 
this  cannot  be  properly  done  without  removing  the  shoe.  The  nails 
should  be  drawn  separately  and  carefully  examined.  If  there  is  no 
escape  of  pus  from  the  nail  holes,  or  if  the  nails  themselves  are  not 
moist,  we  must  continue  our  examination  of  the  foot  by  carefully  pinch- 
ing or  tapping  it  at  all  parts.  With  a  little  practice  we  can  detect  the 
spot  where  the  pain  is  the  greatest  or  discover  the  delicate  line  or  scar 
left  at  the  point  of  entrance  of  the  foreign  body. 

Punctured  Wounds  of  Joints,  or  Open  Joints:  These  wounds  are 
more  or  less  frequent.  They  are  always  serious,  and  often  result  in 
anchylosis  of  the  joint  or  the  death  of  the  animal.  The  joints  mostly 
punctured  are  the  hock,  fetlock  or  knee,  though  other  joints  may,  of 
course,  suffer  this  injury.  Probably  the  most  common  injury  is  the 
stab  from  the  fork,  but  it  may  result  from  the  kick  of  another  horse 
that  is  newly  shod  or  in  many  other  ways. 

Gunshot  Wounds:  Vary  in  size  and  character,  depending  on  the  size 
and  quality  of  the  projectile  and  also  the  tissue  injured.  Oftentimes 
a  ball  may  be  so  lodged  that  it  can  not  be  removed,  and  it  then  may 
become  encysted  and  remain  for  years  without  giving  rise  to  any  incon- 
venience. It  is  often  difficult  to  locate  a  bullet,  as  it  is  very  readily 
deflected  by  resistance  met  with  after  entering  the  body.  The  enter- 
ing wound  is  the  size  of  the  projectile,  the  edges  being  inverted  and 
often  scorched.  The  wound  produced  in  case  of  the  bullet's  exit  is 
larger  than  the  projectile,  the  edges  are  turned  out  and  ragged.  A 
bullet  heated  by  the  friction  of  the  barrel  or  air  often  softens  and  be- 
comes flattened  on  striking  a  bone  or  other  tissue.  Modern  bullets  that 
have  an  outer  steel  layer  may  pass  through  bone  without  splintering 
it.  Lead  bullets  may  split,  producing  two  exit  wounds.  Spent  bullets 
may  only  produce  a  bruise.  Should  bones  be  struck  by  a  ball  they  are 
sometimes  shattered  and  splintered  to  such  an  extent  as  to  warrant  us 
in  having  the  animal  destroyed.  A  gunshot  wound,  when  irreparable 
injury  has  not  been  done,  is  to  be  treated  the  same  as  punctured 
wounds,  i.  e.,  stop  the  hemorrhage,  remove  the  foreign  body  if  possible 
and  apply  hot  fomentations  or  poultices  to  the  wound  until  suppuration 
is  fairly  established.  Antiseptic  and  disinfectant  injections  may  then 
be  used.  Should  pus  accumulate  in  the  tissue,  openings  must  be  made 
for  its  escape. 

Harness  Galls:  Are  wounds  of  the  skin  frequently  caused  by  ill- 
fitting  harness  or  saddles.  When  a  horse  has  been  resting  from  steady 
work  for  some  time,  particularly  after  being  idle  in  a  stable  on  a  scanty 
allowance  of  grain,  as  in  winter,  he  M'ill  be  soft  and  tender  and  will 
sweat  easily  when  put  to  work  again.  In  this  condition  he  is  liable  to 
sweat  and  chafe  under  the  harness,  especially  if  it  is  hard  and  poorly 
fitted.  This  chafing  is  likely  to  cause  abrasions  of  the  skin,  and  thus 
pave  the  way  for  an  abscess  or  for  a  chronic  blemish,  unless  attended  to 
very  promptly.    Besides  causing  the  animal  considerable  pain,  chafing, 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  71 

if  long:  continued,  leads  to  the  formation  of  a  callosity.  This  may  be 
superficial,  involving  only  the  skin,  or  it  may  be  deepened,  involving; 
the  subcutaneous  fibrous  tissue  and  sometimes  the  muscles  and  even 
the  bone.  This  causes  a  dry  sloug"h  to  form,  which  is  both  inconvenient 
and  unsightly.  Sloughs  of  this  kind  are  commonly  called  "sitfasts" 
and,  while  they  occur  in  other  places,  are  most  frequently  found  under 
the  saddle. 

Abrasions  are  best  prevented  by  bringing'  the  animal  gradually  into 
working  shape  after  it  has  had  a  prolonged  rest,  that  the  muscles  may 
be  hard  and  the  skin  tough.  The  harness  should  be  well  fitted,  neither 
too  large  nor  too  small,  and  it  should  be  cleaned  and  well  oiled  to  re- 
move all  dirt  and'  make  it  as  pliable  as  possible.  Saddles  should  be 
properly  fitted  so  as  to  prevent  direct  pressure  on  the  spine,  and  the 
saddle  blankets  should  be  clean  and  dry.  Parts  of  the  horse  where 
chafing  is  likely  to  occur,  as  on  the  back  under  the  saddle,  should  be 
cleaned  and  brushed  free  of  dirt.  The  remedies  for  simple  harness  galls 
are  numerous.  Among  them  may  be  mentioned  alcohol  one  pint,  in 
which  are  shaken  the  whites  of  tw^o  eggs ;  a  solution  of  nitrate  of  silver, 
ten  grainy  to  the  ounce  of  water,  sugar  of  lead  or  sulphate  of  zinc, 
twenty  grains  to  an  ounce  of  water,  carbolic  acid,  one  part  in  fifteen 
parts  of  glycerin,  and  so  on  almost  without  end.  Any  simple  astringent 
or  powder  will  effect  a  cure,  provided  the  sores  are  not  irritated  by 
friction.  Tf  a  sitfast  has  developed,  the  dead  hornlike  slough  must  be 
carefully  dissected  out  and  the  wound  treated  carefully  with  anti- 
septics. During  treatment  it  is  always  best  to  allow  the  animal  to  rest 
but  if  this  is  inconvenient,  care  should  be  taken  to  prevent  injury  to  the 
abraded  or  wounded  surface  by  padding  the  harness  so  that  the  chafing 
cannot  occur. 

Fistulas :  This  word  is  applied  to  any  ulcerous  lesion  upon  the  exter- 
nal surface  of  the  body  which  is  connected  by  ducts,  or  passages,  with 
some  internal  cavity.  Because  of  this  particular  formation  the  term 
fistulous  tract  is  often  used  synonymously  with  the  word  fistula.  Fis- 
tula may  exist  in  any  part  of  the  body,  but  the  name  has  come  to  be 
commonly  accepted  as  applicable  only  to  such  lesions  when  found  upon 
the  withers.  Poll  evil  is  a  fistula  upon  the  poll,  and  in  no  sense  differs 
from  fistulous  withers  except  in  location.  The  description  of  fistula 
will  apply,  then,  in  the  main,  to  poll  evil  equally  well.  Quittor  presents 
the  characteristic  tubular  passages  of  a  fistula  and  may,  therefore,  be 
considered  and  treated  as  fistula  of  the  foot. 


72  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


COMMON  MEDICINES,  ACTION,  USES  AND  METHODS  OF 
ADMINISTRATION 

DEFINITIONS 

Antiseptics:  Agents  used  on  or  in  the  body  in  the  treatments  of 
wounds  or  diseases  which  prevent  the  growth  and  development  of 
germs.  Example:  Carbonic  acid,  bichloride  of  mercury,  iodine,  creo- 
lin,  etc. 

Astringents:  Agents  which  contract  tissues  and  check  secretions. 
Example :    Alum,  zinc,  tannic  acid,  etc. 

Carminatives:  Agents  which  aid  in  the  expulsion  of  gas  from  the 
stomach  and  intestines.  Example:  Ginger,  turpentine,  aromatic 
spirits  of  ammonia. 

Disinfectants:  Agents  which  destroy  the  germs  that  cause  infec- 
tious diseases.  Example :  Chloride  of  lime,  carbolic  acid,  creolin, 
formalin. 

Deodorants:  Agents  which  disguise  or  destroy  odors.  Example: 
Creolin,  carbolic  acid. 

Laxatives:  Mild  cathartics.  Example:  Small  doses  of  oil,  bran 
mash,  green  foods. 

Purgatives:  (Cathartics).  .Argents  which  empty  the  bowels.  Exam- 
ple: Aloes,  salts  and  linseed  oil. 

Parasiticides:  Agents  which  kill  animal  and  vegetable  parasites 
infesting  the  skin.     Example:    Carbolic  acid,  creolin,   salicylic  acid. 

Stimulants:  Agents  which  promptly  but  temporarily  increase  ner- 
vous vigor.     Example:    Alcohol,  aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia,  ether. 

Styptic:  Agents  which  check  hemorrhage.  Example:  Tincture 
of  iron. 

COMMON  MEDICINES 

Aloes  Barbados:  Purgative  dose,  six  to  eight  drams.  This  is  a  slow 
but  powerful  acting  cathartic  taking  about  twenty-four  hours  to  oper- 
ate. Of  value  whenever  an  active  purge  is  desired.  May  be  given  in 
the  form  of  a  ball  or  in  solution  in  hot  water.  It  should  not  be  given 
when  there  is  great  weakness,  a  tendency  to  diarrhoea,  or  in  respira- 
tory diseases.  Ginger  is  generally  given  with  aloes  to  overcome  the 
griping  which   it   causes. 

Ammonia,  Aromatic  Spirits:  Stinmlant  and  carminative.  Dose  one 
to  two  ounces  diluted  with  pint  of  water.  Of  great  value  in  exhaustion, 
and  in  the  treatments  of  colics. 

Charcoal:  A  mild  antiseptic  and  deodorant.  Used  as  a  dry  dressing 
for  foul  smelling  wounds,  either  alone  or  in  combination  with  other 
drugs. 

Acid,  Boracic  (boric  acid) :  Nonirritant  antiseptic.  Used  in  all 
strengths  up  to  a  saturated  solution  as  a  mild,  soothing  antiseptic  in 
diseases  of  the  eyes,  and  a  wet  or  dry  dressing  for  wounds.  Also  in 
the  form  of  an  ointment  for  burns,  etc,  Strength  ten  per  cent  or  in 
combination  with  other  drugs. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  7Z 

Acid  Tannic — Astringent:  Dose  one-half  to  two  drams.  Used  inter- 
nally in  the  treatment  of  diarrhrea  and  dysentery,  given  alone  or  in 
combination  with  other  drugs.  Externally  it  is  used  to  check  bleed- 
ing from  raw  surfaces.  In  solution  with  alcohol  or  witch  hazel,  it 
may  be  used  to  harden  tender  shoulders.  It  is  also  useful  in  the  form 
of  an  ointment,  one  to  four  for  scratches,  etc. 

Formalin :  Antiseptic,  disinfectant,  and  deodorant.  Used  externally 
only.  It  is  ver}^  irritating  and  should  not  be  used  stronger  than  one 
dram  to  a  quart  of  water  approximately  one-two  hundredth  for  ordi- 
nary purpose. 

Iodine:  Disinfectant  and  antiseptic.  Used  externally  iodine  is  a 
powerful  antiseptic.  Either  the  tincture  or  the  solution  is  valuable 
in  the  treatment  of  Avounds,  sores,  ulcers,  curies,  splints,  enlarged  ten- 
dons, etc.  For  such  purpose  it  must  be  applied  once  or  twice  daily 
with  a  small  cotton  swab. 

Leau  Acetate  of  Sugar  (sugar  of  lead)  :  Astringent.  Used  externally 
in  the  form  of  white  lotion  for  its  cooling  and  soothing  action  in  the 
treatment  of  sprains,  bruises,  itching  skin  diseases,  cuts,  burns,  and 
scratches.  All  local  conditions  v/ith  heat,  pain  and  swelling  are  bene- 
fited by  its  use.     White  lotion  is  made  as  follows : 

Lead Ounce  one. 

Zinc-sulphate  Ounce  one. 

Water  to  make   Quart  one. 

Shake  well  and  apply  twice  daily. 

Lime,  Chloride  of:  Disinfectant  and  deodorant.  Must  be  fresh  and 
kept  in  sealed  jars.  Use  six  ounces  to  the  gallon  of  water  to  disinfect 
stables. 

Oil,  Linseed:  Laxative.  Dose  one  to  two  pints.  Much  used  in 
treatments  of  colics.    Raw  oil  should  always  be  used. 

Oil,  Turpentine:  Stimulant,  antiseptic,  carminative,  and  vermicide. 
Dose  one  to  two  ounces,  well  diluted  with  oil.  This  is  a  most  useful 
drug  and  of  great  value  in  the  treatment  of  colics,  especially  flatulent 
colics.  Used  externally  in  stimulating  liniments  and  to  disinfect  nail 
wounds.  Given  as  an  inhalation  in  respiratory  diseases,  one  to  two 
ounces  in  a  pint  of  boiling  water. 

Potassium  Permanganate:  Antiseptic,  disinfectant,  and  deodorant. 
Used  externally  as  an  antiseptic  in  the  treatment  of  wounds,  one  to 
two  drams  to  a  pint  of  water.     Full  strength  is  mildly  caustic. 

Epsom  Salts:  Causes  a  large  secretion  of  fluids  from  the  intestinal 
walls,  thus  rendering  the  bowel  contents  very  fluid.  Epsom  salts  is 
useful  in  small  doses  given  to  horses  in  feverish  condition.  Will  dis- 
solve in  its  own  weight  of  water. 

Soap,  Castile:  A  cleaning  agent  used  in  removing  grease  and  dirt 
from  the  skin  surrounding  the  margin  of  w^ounds.  Should  not  be  ap- 
plied to  raw  surfaces.    Also  used  in  making  soap  liniment. 


74  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Zinc,  Sulphate:  Antiseptic  and  astringent.  Used  externally  in  the 
form  of  white  lotion,  for  the  treatment  of  bruises,  collar  sores,  sore 
shoulders,  saddle  sores,  etc. 

BANDAGES 

Flannel:    Use  chiefly  on  the  legs  for  warmth,  support,  protection. 

Cotton :  Used  for  the  retention  of  bandages  and  the  protection  of 
wounds. 

Zince  Oxide:  Mildly  astringent  and  antiseptic.  Used  as  a  dry  dress- 
ing for  wounds,  either  alone  or  in  combination  with  other  drugs. 

DRESSINGS 

Absorbent  Cotton:  Used  as  a  substitute  for  sponges  in  the  cleaning 
of  wounds ;  to  make  packs  by  soaking  in  medical  solutions ;  and  to 
retain  dry  dressings  in  contact  with  the  surface  of  wounds. 

Antiseptic  Gauze:  A  light,  loosely  woven  variety  of  cloth  which 
has  been  saturated  with  an  antiseptic  and  dried.  Used  as  a  covering 
for  wounds.  Gauze  must  be  kept  clean  and  the  part  that  is  to  come 
in  contact  with  the  wound  should  never  be  touched  with  the  fingers 
or  hands. 

Oakum:  Prepared  fiber  from  old  ropes.  Used  principally  in  packing 
horses'  feet.  It  may  also  be  used  as  a  substitute  for  sponges,  and  in  the 
absence  of  cotton  and  gauze  as  a  covering  for  wounds. 

Packs:  Packs  are  made  by  soaking  cotton  gauze,  oakum  or  simi- 
lar material  in  hot  or  cold  medical  solutions,  after  which  they  are  ap- 
plied to  the  part  with  a  bandage. 

Poultices:  Poultices  are  a  preparation  for  the  local  application  of 
heat  and  moisture.  They  are  made  usually  of  flaxseed  meal  and  bran, 
but  other  substances,  such  as  oatmeal  and  bread,  may  be  used.  The 
material  from  which  they  are  to  be  made  is  stirred  up  in  hot  water 
until  thick  and  pasty.  This  mass  is  then  spread  on  a  piece  of  sacking 
or  cloth  of  any  kind  and  applied  while  hot,  directly  to  the  part  and 
held  by  bandages  or  other  appliances.  When  poultices  are  intended 
for  use  on  wounds,  such  as  punctures  of  the  foot,  etc.,  from  two  to 
four  drams  of  carbolic  acid  or  creolin  should  be  added  to  the  mass  to 
render  it  antiseptic. 

Poultices  are  most  useful  about  the  feet.  They  should  be  changed 
twice  daily  and  immersed  in  hot  water  to  keep  them  fresh  and  to  pre- 
vent drying.  Their  application  should  not  be  continued  for  more 
than  three  or  four  days  at  a  time. 

METHODS  OF  ADMINISTERING  MEDICINES 

By  the  mouth:  Medicines  can  be  given  by  the  mouth  in  the  form 
of  solids,  as  powders  or  pills,  liquids  and  pastes,  or  electuaries. 

Powders:  Solids  administered  as  powders  should  be  as  finely  pul- 
verized as  possible,  in  order  to  obtain  rapid  solution  and  absorption. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  75 

Their  action  is  in  this  way  facilitated  and  intensified.  Those  that  are 
without  any  disagreeable  taste  or  smell  are  readily  eaten  with  the 
feed  or  taken  in  the  drinking  water.  When  placed  with  the  feed  they 
should  first  be  dissolved  or  suspended  in  water  and  thus  sprinkled  on 
the  food.  If  mixed  dry,  the  horse  will  often  leave  the  medicine  in  the 
bottom  of  his  manger. 

Balls  are  preferred  to  drenches  when  the  medicine  is  extremely  disa- 
greeable or  nauseating;  when  the  dose  is  not  too  large ;  when  the  horse 
is  difficult  to  drench  or  when  the  medicine  is  intended  to  act  slowly. 
Always  loose  the  horse  before  attempting  to  give  a  ball ;  if  tied,  he  may 
break  his  halter  and  injure  himself  or  the  one  giving  the  ball. 

The  tongue  must  be  firmly  grasped  with  the  left  hand  and  gently 
pulled  forward ;  the  ball,  slightly  moistened,  is  then  to  be  placed  with 
the  tips  of  the  fingers  of  the  right  hand  as  far  back  in  the  mouth  as 
possible.  As  the  tongue  is  loosened  it  is  drawn  back  mto  the  mouth 
and  carries  the  ball  backward  with  it. 

The  mouth  should  be  kept  closed  for  a  minute  or  two.  We  should 
always  have  a  pail  of  water  at  hand  to  ofifer  the  horse  after  balling. 
This  precaution  will  often  prevent  him  from  coughing  up  the  ball  or 
its  becoming  lodged  in  the  gullet. 

Pastes:  They  are  intended,  chiefly,  to  act  locall}^  upon  the  mouth 
and  throat.  They  are  given  by  being  spread  upon  the  tongue,  gums, 
or  teeth  with  a  wooden  paddle  or  strong,  long  handled  spoon. 

Liquids :  Liquids  may  be  given  as  drenches  when  the  dose  is  large, 
or  they  may,  when  but  a  small  quantity  is  administered,  be  injected 
into  the  mouth  with  a  hard  rubber  syringe  or  be  poured  upon  the 
tongue  from  a  small  vial.  When  medicine  is  to  be  given  as  a  drench  we 
must  be  careful  to  use  water  or  oil  enough  to  dissolve  or  dilute  it 
thoroughly.  Insoluble  medicine,  if  not  irritant  or  corrosive,  may  be 
given  simply  suspended  in  water,  the  bottom  to  be  well  shaken  immedi- 
ately before  given  the  drench. 

The  bottle  used  for  drenching  purposes  should  be  clean,  strong,  and 
smooth  about  its  neck ;  it  should  be  without  shoulders,  tapering,  and 
of  a  size  to  suit  the  amount  given. 

If  the  dose  is  a  small  one  the  horse's  head  may  be  held  up  by  the  left 
hand,  while  the  medicine  is  poured  into  the  mouth  by  the  right.  The 
left  thumb  is  to  be  placed  in  the  angle  of  the  lower  jaw,  and  the  fingers 
spread  out  in  such  a  manner  as  to  support  the  lower  lip.  Should  the 
dose  be  large  and  the  attendant  unable  to  support  the  head  as  directed 
above,  the  halter  strap  or  rope  may  be  fastened  to  the  nose  band  and 
thrown  over  a  limb  or  beam.  Another  way  of  supporting  the  head  is 
to  place  a  loop  in  the  end  of  a  rope  and  introduce  this  loop  into  the 
mouth  just  behind  the  upper  front  teeth  or  tusk  of  the  lower  jaw,  the 
free  end  to  be  run  through  a  pulley,  as  before  described,  and  held  by  an 
assistant.  It  is  never  to  be  fastened,  as  the  horse  might  in  that  case  do 
himself  serious  injury.  The  head  is  to  be  elevated  just  enough  to  pre- 
vent the  horse  from  throwing  the  liquid  out  of  the  mouth.  The  line  of 
the  face  should  be  horizontal  or  only  the  least  bit  higher.    If  the  horse 


76  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

is  drawn  too  high  the  animal  cannot  swallow  with  ease  or  even  with 
safety. 

The  person  giving  the  drench  should  stand  on  some  object  in  order 
to  reach  the  horse's  month  on  a  level,  or  a  little  above  it.  The  bottle  is 
then  to  be  introduced  at  the  side  of  the  mouth  in  front  of  the  molar 
teeth,  in  an  upper  direction.  This  will  cause  the  horse  to  open  his 
mouth,  then  the  base  of  the  bottle  is  elevated,  and  about  four  ounces  of 
the  liquid  allowed  to  escape  on  the  tongue  as  far  back  as  possible,  care 
being  taken  not  to  get  the  neck  of  the  bottle  between  the  back  teeth. 
The  bottle  is  to  be  immediately  removed,  and  if  the  horse  does  not 
swallow,  this  can  be  encouraged  by  rubbing  the  neck  of  the  bottle 
against  the  roof  of  the  mouth,  occasionally  removing  it.  As  soon  as  it 
is  swallowed  repeat  the  operation  until  he  has  taken  all  the  drench.  If 
coughing  occurs,  or  if,  by  any  mishap,  the  bottle  should  be  crushed  in 
the  mouth,  lov^^er  the  head  immediately. 

In  drenching,  swallowing  may  be  hastened  by  pouring  into  the  nose 
of  the  horse,  while  the  head  is  high,  a  few  teaspoonfuls  of  clear  water, 
but  drenches  must  never  be  given  through  the  nose.  Large  quantities 
by  pouring  into  the  nose  are  liable  to  strangle  the  animal ;  if  the  medi- 
cine is  irritating,  it  sets  up  an  inflammation  of  the  nose,  fauces,  wind- 
pipe, and  sometimes  the  lungs. 

Medicated  vapors  are  to  be  inhaled  by  placing  a  bucket  containing 
hot  water  to  which  carbolic  acid  or  any  other  coal  tar  product  has  been 
added.  The  horse's  nose  is  to  be  inserted  into  the  top  of  the  bag,  and 
he  thus  inhales  the  medicated  steam.  Care  must  be  taken  not  to  have 
it  hot  enough  to  scald  the  animal.  The  vapor  from  scalding  bran  or 
hay  is  often  thus  exhaled  to  favor  discharges  in  sore  throat  or  "distem- 
per." 

By  the  Rectum:  Medicines  may  be  given  by  the  rectum  when  they 
cannot  be  given  by  the  mouth  or  when  they  cannot  be  retained  in  the 
stomach ;  when  we  want  a  local  action  on  the  last  gut ;  when  it  is  de- 
sired to  destroy  the  small  worms  infesting  the  large  bowels  or  to  stimu- 
late the  peristaltic  motion  of  the  intestine  and  cause  evacuation.  Medi- 
cines are,  in  such  case,  given  in  the  form  of  liquid  injections.  Foods 
may  also  be  given  this  way. 

Enemas:  When  given  for  absorption  they  should  be  small  in  quan- 
tity, neutral  or  slightly  acid  in  reaction,  and  of  a  temperature  of  from 
90°  to  a  100°  F.  These,  like  feeds  given  by  the  rectum,  should  be  intro- 
duced only  after  the  last  bowel  has  been  emptied  by  the  hand  or  by 
copious  injections  of  tepid  water.  Enemas,  or  clysters,  if  to  aid  the  ac- 
tion of  physics,  should  be  in  quantities  sufficient  to  distend  the  bowel 
and  cause  the  animal  to  eject  them.  Simple  water,  salt  and  water,  or 
soap  and  water,  in  quantities  of  a  gallon  or  more'  may  be  given  every 
half  hour.  It  is  best  that  the  horse  retain  them  for  some  little  time,  as 
a  liquid  serves  to  moisten  the  dung  and  favor  a  passage.  Stimulating 
enemas,  as  glycerine,  should  be  administered  after  those  already 
mentioned  have  already  emptied  the  last  bowel,  with  the  purpose  of 
still  further  increasing  the  motion  of  the  intestines  and  aiding  the  purg- 
insf  medicine. 


DATE  OF  ENTRY  ON  DESCRIP- 
TIVE CARD  (Initial  of  the  entering 
officer) 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 
1 

Q 

H 

ca 
in 
Q 
Pi 
O 

< 

ii 
11 

DATE 

TAKEN 

SICK 

1 

1 
1 

1 

78  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Ordinary  cold  water  or  even  ice  cold  water  is  highly  recommended 
by  many  as  a  rectal  injection  for  horses  overcome  by  the  excessive  heat 
of  summer. 


A  FEW  USEFUL  "CASUALTY"  HINTS  AND  THINGS  WORTH 

KNOWING 

1.  It  is  absolutely  essential  that  the  horses  of  every  unit  should  be 
hard  and  fit,  and  free  from  galls,  cracked  heels,  sore  withers,  and  back 
sores. 

2.  An  irritable  harness  or  saddle  mark  may  be  prevented  from  be- 
coming a  sore  or  gall  if  attended  to  in  its  initial  stages,  as  either  pres- 
sure or  chafing  are  always  the  origin  of  this. 

3.  The  cause  must  be  sought  for  and  removed  as  soon  as  possible. 

4.  With  a  saddle  gall  the  blanket  or  numnah  may  be  so  adjusted 
that  no  pressure  is  put  upon  the  part,  or  it  may  be  necessary  to  cut  a 
piece  out  directly  over  the  spot.  An  extra  blanket  folded  to  relieve 
pressure  often  gives  relief. 

5.  For  BREAST  COLLAR,  BREECHING  AND  TRACE  GALLS 
there  is  nothing  better  than  a  piece  of  sheepskin.  The  caisson  corpor- 
al should  always  have  some  sheepskin  in  his  saddlebag.  As  soon  as 
the  gall  is  discovered  he  can  cut  out  a  piece  just  larger  than  the  gall  and 
splice  it  to  the  piece  of  harness  with  strong  khaki  cotton.  If  time  does 
not  permit  of  this  he  should  put  on  a  sheepskin  pad  already  made  up 
with  tapes  sewed  to  each  corner  and  in  the  middle ;  he  should  always 
have  a  few  of  these  handy  as  well  as  some  wither  pads.  Cotton  band- 
age is  indispensible. 

6.  If  a  horse  starts  KICKING  (e.  g.,  as  in  an  accident)  hold  his  head 
UP  as  high  as  you  can  ;  in  this  position  he  loses  the  power  of  kicking. 

7.  If  a  horse  PL^LLS.  loosen  the  curb  chain  ;  also  try  to  ride  him  with 
a  lighter  rein.  This  sounds  contrary  to  what  one  would  expect  ought 
to  be  done,  but  it  is  a  very  sound  "tip,"  because  the  more  you  pull  the 
horse  the  more  he  will  pull  you. 

8.  Always  LEAD  A  HORSE  by  the  collar  or  bridle,  not  by  the  bit. 
Do  not  look  back  at  horse  when  leading.  Remember  Lot's  wife,  and 
your  horse  won't  follow  you  either. 

9.  A  horse  drinks  from  8  to  12  gallons  of  water  a  day. 

10.  Wet  bran  acts  as  a  laxative  on  horses ;  on  most  horses  it  is  bind- 
ing when  dry. 

11.  Teach  your  horse  that  raising  his  feet  will  do  him  no  harm.  Start 
this  lesson  at  the  first  grooming.  Encourage  the  horse  to  surrender 
his  foot  and  when  he  does,  lower  it  again  quietly  and  pat  him.  Later 
use  the  brush  on  the  soles  of  his  feet ;  next  tap  the  soles  lightly  with  a 
currycomb ;  finally  take  the  shoer's  position  and  go  through  the  same 
steps.  By  following  these  instructions  carefully  and  using  the  neces- 
sary amount  of  patience,  the  feet  of  even  a  comparatively  vicious  horse 
can  be  handled  with  the  greatest  ease  and  safety. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  79 

12.  Teach  your  horse  to  stand  without  being  tied  when  you  are  dis- 
mounted. Feed  whenever  and  wherever  you  are  able  to.  If  you  use 
hobbles,  be  sure  they  are  soft  and  will  not  injure  the  legs.  Be  sure 
that  your  horse  is  well  shod.  When  you  camp,  always  tie  your  horse 
in  as  sheltered  a  spot  as  possible. 

13.  Remember  the  cause  of  all  bruises  and  sores  on  march  is  direct- 
ly due  to  negligence  in  proper  fitting  of  harness  and  saddlery,  or  neg- 
lect of  care  of  team  at  halts  or  lack  of  knowledge  in  riding  and  driv- 
ing and  from  no  other  causes. 

14.  The  driver  must  report  at  once  to  his  section  chief  the  slightest 
rubbing  or  galls  so  that  it  may  be  remedied  in  time,  and  if  discovered 
on  march,  he  should  be  replaced  and  dismounted.  The  chief  of  sec- 
tion is  responsible  for  condition  of  every  horse  in  his  section. 

15.  Cold  applications,  such  as  a  wet  cloth  bound  over  a  swelling  is 
best  treatment  to  reduce  swelling  and  fever  in  part.  Frequent  hand 
rubbing,  stimulation  of  circulation  in  back  and  legs  is  the  golden  rule 
for  all  drivers  to  follow  on  the  march.  You  cannot  accomplish  a  long, 
continued,  successful  march  without  hand  massaging  at  practically 
all  halts. 

16.  Continually  watch  the  barrels  and  loins  of  your  team  for 
"thumps"  (rapid  breathing  due  to  fatigue).  Examine  your  horse's 
feet  at  all  halts  for  stones,  nails,  bruises,  etc. 

MISCELLANEOUS  SUGGESTIONS 

1.  Be  sure  and  get  your  horses  shod  once  a  month.  If  you  keep 
the  shoes  on  longer  than  a  month  you  may  set  up  foot  troubles  and 
cause  lameness  through  concussion  and  strain.  See  that  the  horse- 
shoer  does  not  use  his  hammer  too  roughly  on  your  horse's  feet  as  it 
bruises  the  leg  above.  If  through  sickness  an  animal  cannot  be  used 
for  two  weeks  or  more,  always  pull  the  shoes  and  allow  the  bare  foot 
to  get  ground  pressure ;  this  keeps  the  foot  healthy  and  strengthens  it. 

2.  Keep  your  watering  troughs  clean.  How  would  you  like  to  drink 
out  of  a  dirty  cup?  Feed  animals  in  as  clean  a  way  as  possible,  for  grit 
and  sand,  when  swallowed,  cause  colic  and  inflammation  of  the  bowels. 
Feed  boxes  should  be  rinsed  with  vinegar  after  feeding  bran. 

3.  Do  not  tie  your  animals  with  too  long  a  halter  shank,  18  in.  on 
line;  they  are  liable  to  get  it  caught  round  a  hind  pastern,  causing 
what  is  called  "a  rope  burn."  This  is  a  painful  wound,  that  takes  a 
long  time  to  heal,  and  leaves  a  permanent  scar.  Do  not  tie  to  fences 
or  hitching  posts  that  are  not  strong  and  secure,  otherwise  you  may 
ruin  good  horses  by  your  carelessness. 

4.  Tie  kicking  animals  by  themselves. 

5.  Tie  sick  animals  by  themselves. 

6.  The  well  animals  must  be  exercised  regularly  every  day,  to  pro- 
mote proper  assimilation  of  the  food  and  aid  digestion,  to  prevent  stock- 
ing (swelling)  of  the  legs,  and  stimulate  circulation  in  the  feet,  which 
is  so  necessary  to  promote  a  normal  and  healthy  growth  of  the  horn. 


80  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

7.  When  a  horse  is  tired  or  cold  pull  his  ears  and  hand-rub  his  legs, 
it  refreshes  him  and  he  will  appreciate  it. 

8.  The  loins  are  the  most  vital  parts  of  the  horse  to  protect  against 
cold. 

9.  Never  upset  a  horse  by  constant  irritation  with  the  whip ;  it  puts 
him  off  his  feed. 

10.  Name  your  horses:  regard  them  as  pals;  "Dixie"  sounds  bet- 
ter than  "137." 

11.  Sick  or  injured  animals  should  be  placed  on  half  rations  of  grain 
until  such  time  as  they  can  again  be  exercised,  at  which  time  the  ra- 
tions can  be  gradually  increased  to  full  feed,  depending  on  the  individ- 
ual. 

12.  Thorough  grooming  daily  is  very  necessary.  It  increases  cir- 
culation in  the  skin,  removes  dandruff  and  old,  wornout  and  cast-off 
cells.  It  makes  the  horse  feel  good.  The  currycomb  should  be  used 
with  caution,  being  careful  not  to  scratch  the  skin  with  it. 

13.  The  feet  should  be  cleaned  thoroughly  with  a  foot  hook,  pay- 
ing particular  attention  to  the  removal  of  dirt  and  filth  which  collect 
daily  in  the  depressions  on  either  side  and  in  the  middle  of  the  frog, 
and,  when  left,  cause  thrush  and  lameness.  Always  hook  towards 
the  toe.    Never  toward  the  heel. 

14.  If  a  horse  starts  to  rub  himself  against  posts,  etc.,  examine  him 
carefully  for  lice  or  mange,  put  him  oft'  by  himself,  and  report  the  case 
immediately. 

15.  A  horse's  gums  sometimes  swell  from  indigestion.  A  few  days' 
feeding  with  bran,  salt,  or  corn  on  the  cob,  or  cutting  his  grain  allow- 
ance in  half  will  most  likely  cure  it.  Consult  veterinarian  when  pos- 
sible, 

16.  If  a  horse  has  a  cut  or  open  wound  of  any  kind  you  must  keep 
it  clean  by  antiseptic  washing.  This  should  be  done  by  filling  a  cloth 
or  oakum  full  of  water  and  then  squeezing  it  above  the  wound,  so  that 
the  water  flows  across  the  injured  surface  Do  not  apply  the  cloth  or 
sponge  directly  to  the  wound,  for  that  will  only  irritate  the  flesh. 
Never  use  the  same  rag  or  sponge  to  wash  the  sores  on  different  ani- 
mals. Use  clean  water,  boiled  if  possible.  An  antiseptic  of  some  kind 
should  be  applied.  A  weak  solution  of  salt  is  better  than  nothing. 
The  wound  should  also  be  protected  from  flies  and  dirt,  if  possible. 
If  the  flies  get  at  a  wound  it  will  become  "fly  blown"  and  lead  to  very 
serious  results.  If  an  animal  has  sore  eyes,  caused  b}^  dust  or  flies, 
wash  them  with  a  ten  to  fifteen  per  cent  solution  of  boracic  acid  and 
use  an  eye  covering.  If  the  eye  is  sore  from  a  blow  or  scratch,  be  sure 
and  keep  the  eye  covered  with  a  cloth,  as  the  light  causes  great  pain 
and  retards  recovery.  Eyes  and  nostrils  should  be  washed,  or  care- 
fully wiped,  very  frequently  if  they  are  running  from  distemper  or 
other  causes. 

17.  If  animals  eat  dirt  or  lick  trees  it  is  because  they  are  craving 
salt.  They  should  have  it  at  least  three  times  a  week  and  preferably 
free  access  to  salt  at  all  times.  Put  daily  ration  of  salt  in  salt  boxes 
every  day. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  81 

18.  If  an  animal  stops  at  its  work  do  not  ascribe  it  to  balking  until 
you  are  positive  that  it  is  not  sick.  To  find  out  if  a  horse  is  feverish, 
place  hand  behind  an  ear.  The  normal  pulse  of  a  horse  is  between  50 
to  60  beats  per  minute. 

DON'TS 

Don't  use  strong  antiseptic  on  deep  wounds. 

Don't  give  heart  depressants,  unless  in  case  of  high,  bounding  i)ulse. 

Don't  give  irritating  drugs  without  proper  dilution  either  in  water 
or  oil. 

Don't  allow  a  wound  to  heal  too  rapidly  on  the  outside. 

Don't  overdose. 

Don't  give  an  animal  boiled  linseed  oil. 

Don't  drench  a  horse  through  the  nostril. 

Don't  feed  heavily  when  not  at  work. 

Don't  feed  musty,  dusty  food. 

Don't  work  horse  hard  for  first  hour  after  i^eriod  of  a  day's  rest. 

Don't  treat  a  decayed  tooth  ;  knock  it  out.  When  a  veterinary  can 
be  reached  get  him  ;  his  job  is  to  treat  sick  horses  and  he  knows  how. 
Don't  take  a  chance. 

CARE  OF  SADDLERY 

The  saddlery  and  equipment  must  always  be  cleaned  after  use.  This 
duty,  like  the  care  of  the  horse,  is  to  be  regarded  as  part  of  the  mounted 
duty  itself;  thus  a  drill  is  not  over  until  horse,  saddlery,  arms  and 
equipments  have  been  put  again  in  condition.  According  to  need,  the 
leather  is  simply  wiped  ofl^  with  a  damp  sponge  or  fully  taken  apart 
and  well  soaped  and  cleaned.     In  no  case  must  it  be  soaked  in  water. 

If  the  soap  used  does  not  contain  a  sufticent  amount  of  free  oil,  the 
leather  must  be  oiled  to  keep  it  pliable.  A  mixture  of  one-half  neats 
foot  oil  and  one-half  mutton  tallow,  well  rubbed  in,  keeps  leather  in 
good  condition.  Special  care  is  taken  to  keep  the  underside  of  the 
skirts  of  the  saddle  and  the  parts  which  do  not  come  in  contact  with 
the  clothing  well  oiled.  The  seat  and  outside  of  the  skirts  will  rarely 
require  oil. 

Metal  parts  are  kept  clean  and  free  from  rust;  they  may  require  oil- 
ing if  not  regularly  used. 

The  saddle  blanket  must  be  kept  clean  and  soft  and  free  from  wrin- 
kles. After  use  it  must  be  dried  and  then  well  shaken  (unfolded).  It 
must  never  be  folded  wet  and  left  thus  with  the  saddles.  Provision 
will  be  made  in  the  saddle  room  or  stables  for  hanging  up  to  dry. 

When  necessary  the  blanket  should  be  thoroughly  cleaned  by  repeat- 
ed immersions  in  tepid  soapsuds  and  hung  over  a  pole  or  line  to  dry 
without  wringing  or  pressing  it. 

THE  CARE  AND  PRESERVATION  OF  LEATHER 

Attention  is  invited  to  the  following:  'Tt  is  forbidden  to  use  any 
dressing  or  polishing  material  on  the  leather  accoutrements  or  equip- 


82  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

merits  of  the  soldier,  the  horse  equipments  for  cavalry,  or  the  artillery 
harness  except  the  preparations  supplied  by  the  Ordnance  Depart- 
ment for  that  purpose."  (A.R.  293) 

REASON  FOR  OILING  OF  LEATHER 

Leather,  as  it  comes  from  the  tannery  in  manufacture,  is  hard,  rough, 
brittle,  inflexible,  and  readily  absorbs  water.  To  remove  these  unde- 
sirable qualities  and  render  the  leather  soft,  pliable,  flexible,  and  imper- 
vious to  water,  to  increase  the  strength  and  toughness  of  the  fiber,  and 
to  give  the  leather  such  a  surface  color  and  finish  as  will  make  it  most 
sightly  and  suitable  for  the  purpose  for  which  intended,  the  manufac- 
ture is  continued  by  hand-stuffing  it  with  a  dubbing  made  of  pure  cod 
liver  oil  and  tallow,  which  the  experience  of  curriers  has  shown  to  be 
the  best  material  for  this  purpose.  This  dubbing  is  thoroughly  ab- 
sorbed by  the  leather,  penetrating  it  completely,  and  is  not  merely 
limited  to  the  surface. 

The  russet  leather  now  used  by  the  Ordnance  Department  in  the 
manufacture  of  all  leather  equipments  is  pure  oak  tanned,  of  No.  1  tan- 
nage and  finish,  hand-stuffed  with  a  light  dubbing  made  of  pure  cod 
liver  oil  and  tallow  to  preserve  the  leather,  the  dubbing  being  so  spar- 
ingly used  that  the  oil  will  not  exude.  This  leather  as  it  comes  from 
the  manufacturer  contains  enough  oil  to  materially  improve  its  quality 
and  prolong  its  life,  but  not  enough  to  soil  the  clothing  if  the  equipment 
is  properly  cared  for.  No  oil  whatever  is  added  to  the  leather  in  the 
manufacture  at  the  Government  arsenals. 

CARE  OF  RUSSET  LEATHER 

Leather  equipments  which  have  become  wet  should  be  dried  in 
the  shade.  Wet  leather  exposed  to  the  direct  rays  of  the  sun  or  to  heat 
of  stove  or  radiator  becomes  hard  and  brittle. 

When  russet-leather  equipments  become  soiled  in  service  they 
should  be  cleaned  by  carefully  washing  the  leather  with  a  .sponge 
moistened  with  a  heavy  lather  made  of  clean  water  and  Castile  or 
Frank  Miller's  soap,  and  then  rubbing  vigorously  with  a  dry  cloth  un- 
til the  leather  is  completely  dry.'  They  should  then  be  oiled  and  the 
oil  well  rubbed  in. 

If  the  leather  becomes  harsh,  dry  and  brittle  from  exposure  to  water 
or  other  causes,  clean  as  above  described,  and  while  the  leather  is  still 
moist  apply  an  exceedingly  light  coat  of  neats  foot  oil  by  rubbing  with 
a  soft  cloth  moistened  (not  saturated)  with  the  oil.  If  it  is  found  that 
too  much  oil  has  been  used,  the  surplus  can  readily  be  removed  by 
rubbing  with  a  sponge  moistened  with  naptha  or  gasoline  But  these 
oils  are  not  issued  for  this  purpose. 

Where  a  polish  is  desired,  the  leather  should  first  be  thoroughly 
cleaned  and  the  leather  polish  or  dressing  supplied  by  the  Ordnance 
Department  should  be  applied  sparingly  and  thoroughly  rubbed  in 
with  a  soft  drv  cloth.     Scars,  cuts,  or  abrasions  of  the  leather  may  be 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  83 

improved  in  appearance  but  not  obliterated  by  similar  use  of  the  leather 
polish. 

Russet  leather  may  be  cleaned,  oiled  and  polished  as  described  above, 
but  it  should  be  noted  if  more  than  a  light  coat  of  oil  be  given  the 
leather  will  be  greatly  darkened  and  will  quickly  soil  the  clothing.  No 
method  of  cleaning  will  restore  the  original  light  color  of  the  leather  or 
remove  stains  or  discolorations. 

CARE  OF  BLACK  LEATHER 

To  clean  and  dress  black  leather,  wash  it  in  water  (lukewarm  pre- 
ferred) with  Castile  soap.  An  old  horse  brush  will  be  found  very  satis- 
factory for  applying  the  soap  and  water.  Dry  in  the  shade ;  when  al- 
most dry,  apply  the  blacking,  rubbing  it  in  thoroughly. 

Dry  in  the  shade  and  then  apply  neats  foot  oil  with  a  sponge  or  rag, 
rubbing  it  in  well  until  the  leather  is  soft  and  pliable. 

When  dry,  a  certain  amount  of  oil  and  blacking  will  exude  from  the 
leather;  this  should  be  rubbed  off  with  a  dry  cloth. 

CARE  OF  HARNESS 

For  steel  work  ALWAYS  HAVE  AN  OILY  RAG;  no  driver  or 
mounted  soldier  is  complete  without  it ;  it  is  one  of  his  best  friends ; 
use  it  at  halts,  especially  in  wet,  damp  and  showery  weather.  The  oil 
on  the  steel  will  save  hours  of  work.  On  active  service  keep  your  steel 
work  in  oil ;  if  harness  is  not  in  use  wipe  off  the  old  oil  and  renew  it. 

Always  wipe  the  oil  off  the  bit  before  putting  it  into  the  horse's 
mouth  as  the  horse  dislikes  the  taste  of  it  as  much  as  you  do.  To  clean 
steel  use  oil  and  silver  sand  (or  better  still  brick  dust),  or  you  can  sub- 
stitute water  for  oil  and  oil  the  steel  after  it  is  clean.  Use  a  good  rag 
and  place  one  end  of  the  article  to  be  cleaned  on  a  fixed  hook,  the  other 
end  on  the  hook  on  your  belt  and  draw  taut. 

LEATHER  WORK 

(Especially  girths,  breast  collars  and  breechings)  must  be  kept  soft 
and  supple :  sponge  it  with  clean  COLD  water  and  then  soap  it.  Dub- 
bin should  be  used  extensively. 

LEATHER  AND  METAL 

Leather:  Leather  equipment  should  always  be  kept  in  the  best  pos- 
sible condition  in  order  to  obtain  the  greatest  amount  of  service  from  it. 
When  leather  is  in  proper  condition  it  is  clean,  soft,  and  pliable,  and 
will  stand  severe  strain.  It  can  only  be  kept  in  that  condition  by  con- 
stant care. 

New  leather  is  usually  stiff,  dry.  and  hard,  and  requires  frequent 
dressings  of  neats  foot  or  other  oil  to  make  it  pliable.  Once  it  has 
been  put  in  proper  shape,  oiling  once  a  \yeek  will  ordinarily  suffice  to 
keep  it  so. 


84  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Before  oiling  leather  equipment  it  should  be  taken  apart  and  each 
piece  thoroughly  cleaned. 

The  proper  method  of  cleaning  and  oiling  new  leather  is  as  follows : 
Take  a  bucket  of  clean  warm  water,  a  sponge  and  a  can  of  saddle  soap. 
There  should  be  a  rack  of  some  sort,  to  hang  the  leather  parts  on.  The 
wagon  pole  in  the  field  will  answer.  Wet  the  sponge,  scjueeze  out 
most  of  the  water,  and  work  up  a  lather  with  the  saddle  soap.  Xow 
squeeze  all  the  water  possible  from  the  sponge  and  proceed  to  work 
on  a  piece  of  leather,  cleaning  it  thoroughly,  both  sides.  Clean  the 
sponge  and  make  a  fresh  lather  as  often  as  may  be  necessary.  Change 
the  water  in  the  bucket  frequently.  Having  cleaned  a  piece  of  leather, 
work  in  the  remaining  lather  with  the  hands,  until  it  is  all  absorbed. 
The  piece  is  now  ready  for  oiling.  Put  a  little  oil  (neats  foot  prefer- 
ably) on  a  rag  and  apply  it  to  the  flesh  side  of  the  leather,  rubbing 
quickly  over  the  whole  surface  so  that  it  will  be  evenly  distributed  and 
too  much  will  not  be  absorbed  in  any  one  spot.  The  piece  is  again 
worked  with  the  hands  until  no  oil  remains  on  the  surface.  This  hand 
working  is  most  beneficial  as  it  insures  even  distribution  of  the  oil  and 
makes  the  leather  soft  and  pliable.  Light  applications  of  oil  are  much 
preferable  to  heavy,  as  they  are  absorbed  more  evenly  and  gradually 
and  men's  clothing  is  not  ruined. 

If  the  oil  is  applied  to  dry  leather  it  is  absorbed  almost  as  if  by  blot- 
ting paper,  and  it  is  impossible  to  make  an  even  distribution.  The  pres- 
ence of  the  saddle  soap  and  moisture  in  the  leather  partialh'  fills  up 
the  pores  and  thus  makes  absorption  slower  and  more  even. 

If  oil  is  applied  to  the  hair  side  of  the  leather  it  is  sure  to  leave  spots, 
and  nice  even-colored  leather  cannot  be  had,  besides  the  danger  of 
spoiling  any  clothing  which  comes  in  contact  with  it. 

Those  parts  which  have  collected  an  unusual  amount  of  dirt,  such  as 
in  and  around  buckles  and  keepers,  mav  be  best  cleaned  with  a  soft, 
smooth  stick  of  wood,  used  when  the  dirt  has  been  softened  by  soap. 

The  inside  face  of  collars  must  never  be  washed  as  it  would  make 
them  harden  and  wrinkle,  which  would  tend  to  produce  injuries  to  the 
neck  and  shoulders.  They  can  be  kept  clean  by  thorough  hand  rub- 
bing. If  additional  cleaning  is  found  to  be  necessary  it  can  be  accom- 
plished with  the  sponge  and  saddle  soap.  A  paddle  of  soft  wood  may 
be  used  to  remove  excess  sweat  and  dirt.  Particular  care  must  be  taken 
to  squeeze  all  the  water  out  of  the  sponge  when  using  it  for  this  pur- 
pose. 

For  use  on  black  leather  add  one  teaspoonful  of  lamp  black  to  a 
pint  of  oil.  and  mix  thoroughly. 

Each  piece  of  leather,  excepting  the  collar,  should  be  treated  as  above 
and  hung  up  to  dry.  The  parts  are  then  assembled  and  put  away  in 
their  proper  places. 

This  oneration  should  be  repeated  daily  until  the  leather  is  in  shape, 
after  which  it  should  be  cleaned  thoroughly  and  oiled  lightly  at  least 
once  a  week.  All  leather  must  be  wiped  off  with  sponge  and  saddle 
soap  after  each  use.  Leather  equipment  when  not  in  use  should  be 
kept  hung  on  pegs  or  racks.    It  should  never  be  allowed  to  lie  around 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  85 

on  the  floor  or  i^rouiul.  When  leather  is  to  be  stored  (jr  shipped,  it 
shonld  be  thorou.^hly  cleaned  and  lightly  oiled  on  both  sides. 

Metal:  The  metal  parts  of  horse  equipment  should  be  kept  clean 
and  free  from  rust.  The  manner  of  cleaning-  and  removing  the  rust 
dei)ends  upon  the  metal  and  the  finish. 

Bronzed  metal  should  not  have  its  finish  disturbed.  .\ny  cleaning- 
material  such  as  emery,  sand,  or  brick  dust,  which  cuts  the  surface  will 
destroy  the  bronze  finish  and  hence  should  not  be  used.  A  soft  i)ine 
stick,  comoline  and  elbow  grease  will  remove  rust  without  damaging 
the  finish. 

White  metals  are,  generally,  corrosive  and  non-corrosive.  The  non- 
corrosive  are  easily  cleaned  and  kept  clean,  but  do  not  take  so  high  a 
polish  as  do  the  corrosive.  The  corrosive,  such  as  steel  and  nickel- 
plated,  are  freed  from  rust  in  ^^rious  ways.  The  simplest  way  is  by 
hand  with  emery  cloth  or  i^owder,  or  with  oil  and  fine  sand  or  brick 
dust,  then  burnished  with  the  chain  burnisher  to  remove  scratches  and 
restore  the  smooth  polished  surface.  This  however  is  not  recommend- 
ed for  nickel  plate  as  the  plating  will  soon  be  worn  ofif.  It  is  best  to 
treat  it  in  the  same  way  as  bronze. 

Other  methods  of  removing  rust  are  used  and  when  much  metal  has 
to  be  cleaned  they  will  save  much  labor.  A  number  of  pieces  can  be 
fastened  together  in  a  bunch  and'  dragged  through  sand,  or  they  may 
be  placed  in  a  sack  and  simply  shaken,  the  difTerent  pieces  cleaning 
each  other.  An  excellent  device  for  this  purpose  is  a  barrel  or  keg 
mounted  on  an  eccentric  axle,  with  crank  handle  on  the  end  of  axle  to 
revolve  it.  As  the  barrel  revolves  the  ends  are  raised  and  lowered  alter- 
nately and  the  metal  within  is  constantly  churning  about.  Fine  sand  or 
brick  dust  in  the  barrel  will  greatly  hasten  the  cleaning.  .\11  the  harness 
chains  of  a  section  of  a  battery  of  Field  Artillery  can  be  freed  from  rust 
in  this  manner  within  from  a  quarter  to  half  an  hour.  The  same  means 
can  be  used  to  burnish  and  polish,  if  soft  material  such  as  leather  scraps, 
sawdust,  or  small  pieces  of  paper  are  used  in  place  of  the  sand.  If  there 
is  much  cleaning  to  be  done  it  is  preferable  to  have  two  barrels,  one  for 
cleaning-  and  one  for  polishing.  Brass  is  treated  similarly  to  white 
metal.  It  can  be  given  a  high  finish  by  the  use  of  almost  any  kind  of 
polish. 

Painted  metal  requires  occasional  removal  of  the  old  i)aint  and  re- 
painting. The  paint  can  be  removed  by  the  same  means  as  rust  and 
requires  less  labor.  All  metal  should  be  cleaned  after  use  and  then 
wiped  off  with  an  oily  rag. 

EXTRACTS  FROM  INFORMATION  BULLETIN 
NO.  23,  A.  E.  F. 

(From  Memorandum  No.  8,  November  1,  1918) 
3.     Care  Of  Animals. 

(Following-  are  slightlv  edited  notes  of  the  Comiuanding  General  of  a 
Field  Artillery  Brigade,  based  on  ob-^ervation  of  4  brigades  in  training, 
on  command  of  3  brigades  and  on  service  in  4  divisions.) 


86  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

During  the  movement  of  active  operations,  the  animals  are  kept  as 
near  the  battery  positions  as  possible.  As  soon  as  stabilization  becomes 
apparent  they  should  be  moved  to  the  rear  where  fewer  losses  will  be 
sustained,  where  horses  and  men  can  secure  more  rest  and  better  care, 
and  where  harness  and  material  can  be  overhauled,  etc. 

Notwithstanding  constant  instruction,  supervision,  and  all  other  pre- 
cautions the  condition  of  the  animals  during  operations  and  especially 
during  cold  wet  weather  is  far  from  satisfactory.  This  is  due  in  most 
part  to  the  unavoidable  demands  made  upon  the  animals  but  also  to  the 
lack  of  proper  standard  in  some  of  the  units  and  failure  to  live  up  to  the 
standard  in  others.  There  is  no  more  important  duty  performed  by 
any  artillery  officer  than  that  of  looking  after  the  echelon ;  it  requires 
unremitting  attention  to  details,  cheerfulness,  and  ingenuity.  Some 
of  the  principal  faults  noted  are  the  following: 

(a)  Inadequate  grooming,  both  as  to  time  and  thoroughness ; 

(b)  Unnecessary  changes  among  personnel  at  horse  lines ; 

(c)  Oats   and   hay   being   fed    at  the   same  time,   the   hay   being 

trampled  underfood  while  the  oats  was  being  eaten  ; 

(d)  Feeding  hay  on  muddy  picket  lines  instead  of  having  a  picket 

line  especially  for  this  purpose,  or,  in  its  absence,  having  the 
horses  held  by  the  drivers  while  they  feed. 

(e)  Use  of  hay  as  bedding  for  men ;  this  requires  watching ; 

(f)  Failure  to  take  advantage  of  every  opportunity  to  graze  ani- 

mals ; 

(g)  Too  ready  acquiescence  in  the  amount  of  forage  furnished, 

rather  than  insisting  on  obtaining  a  pro  rata  amount; 

(h)   Leaving  horses  standing  in  harness  unnecessarily; 

(i)    Not  enough  men  at  echelons; 

(j)    Harness  and  material  inadequately  cared  for; 

(k)  Unsanitary  conditions  surrounding  both  men  and  horses  not 
given  proper  attention. 

(1)     Inadequate  supply  of  medicines,  etc.,  especially  for  mange; 

(m)  Poor  choice  of  roads,  etc.,  and  poor  road  discipline,  resulting 
in  unnecessary  hard  pull,  avoidable  traffic  jams,  and  ensuing 
long  waits. 

(n)  In  some  cases  no  experienced  officer  in  actual  charge  and  con- 
sequently no  coordination  or  complete  utilization  of  the  men 
and  means  available. 

(o)  Insufficient  supervision  by  battery  commanders  and  field  offi- 
cers, including  Colonels. 

For  all  batteries  not  motorized  animal  conservation  is  vital  to 
mobility.  When  the  number  of  animals  is  reduced  below  a  certain 
minimum  some  vehicles  must  be  abandoned.  In  view  of  the  great 
scarcity  of  horses  and  the  difficulty  of  resupply  other  expedients  for 
transporting  ammunition  must  be  found  as.  aside  from  the  causes 
above  enumerated,  it  is  primarily  the  excessive  transporting  of  ammu- 
nition, that  wears  the  horses  out.  A  satisfactory  solution  cannot  be 
found  in  trucks,  even  those  of  four  wheel  drive,  since  much  terrain  has 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  87 

been  encountered  over  which  they  could  not  transport  ammunition  to 
the  guns.  I  beh'eve  that  for  all  classes  of  horse-drawn  artillery  operat- 
ing under  present  conditions  the  number  or  caissons  could  be  reduced 
to  one  per  gun  if  trailers  drawn  by  small  caterpillar  tractors  could  be 
provided  to  carr}^  an  additional  200  rounds  per  gun  for  light  artillery 
and  100  for  heavy  artillery.  Under  such  conditions  arrangements 
could  be  made  by  which  even  the  guns  could  be  drawn  by  tractor.  This 
would  eliminate  a  large  percentage  of  the  horse  supply  problem  and 
reduce  greatly  the  labor  and  worry  of  keeping  the  guns  supplied. 


Saddle  7-{or5e 


S/?raA 


iCh/s/i 


•Su//b/k 


S/?i> 


fbrcZ/c/^z)^ 


Standan}2rec> 

4 


onrtesy  of  the  Horse  Association  of  America 


PART  II 


RIDING 


Saddling  and  bitting. 

Horsemanship. 

Equitation. 


SADDLES  AND  SADDLE  FITTING 

The  object  of  the  saddle  is  lo  gWt  comfort  and  security  to  the  rider, 
to  protect  the  animal's  back  from  injury  by  making  an  even  distribu- 
tion of  the  load  over  that  portion  of  the  back  which  should  bear  weight, 
and  to  provide  means  for  the  attachment  of  packs. 

There  are  many  and  varied  types  used  in  dififerent  countries  and  for 
different  purposes.  The  basic  principle  in  design  is  however  the  same 
for  all,  that  of  having  two  bearing  surfaces  called  side  bars,  to  rest 
upon  the  back,  connected  and  held  in  place  by  two  arches,  pommel  and 
cantel,  and  with  a  seat  for  the.  rider,  above  the  bars  and  between  the 
arches.  To  secure  the  saddle  on  the  back,  a  girth  passes  under  the 
barrel  and  attaches  to  each  side  bar.  To  give  security  to  the  rider, 
stirrups  are  suspended  from  the  side  bar  on  each  side.  Xo  part  of  the 
saddle  should  touch  the  back  exceot  the  side  bars. 


^  (From  F.  A.  C.  O.  T.  >.   '■  ;r     /      - 

Assembling  Stirrup  Strap 

"Figure  25.  Method  of  assembling-  stirrup  and  stirrup  strap.  Stand  on  the 
side  on  which  the  stirrup  is  to  be  placed,  facing  the  horse's  head.  Assemble 
the  stirrup  as  shown  in  this  view,  giving  the  buckle  end  one-half  turn  from  the 
horse  in  order  to  bring  the  standing  loop  up.  Having  run  the  end  of  the  strap 
through  the  standing  loop,  put  it  through  the  stirrup  staple  on  the  saddle, 
being  careful  to  enter  it  from  the  top.  The  picture  shows  the  assembling  of 
the  near  stirrup. 


All  saddles  have  certain  requisites  peculiar  to  the  work  for  which 
they  are  intended. 

Military  saddles  must  be  strong,  durable,  comfortable  to  both  horse 
and  rider,  with  long  wide  side-bars  to  distribute  the  weight  over  as 


Cavalry  Saddle 

M^CltLLAN  PaTTEITN 


anTS'e^f!  fv/1/ia 


,Yaejr/u/p  m£/a 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  93 

large  an  area  as  is  possible  without  interfering-  with  locomotion,  and 
be  as  light  as  possible.  Numerous  types  have  l)een  experimented  with 
and  used  from  time  to  time  m  the  I'nited  States  Army,  but  none  has 
yet  been  designed  so  satisfactory  for  general  military  use  as  the 
McClellan  saddle.  The  principle  of  the  adjustable  side-bars  is  undoubt- 
edly correct,  but  so  far  all  efforts  have  failed  to  produce  a  saddle  em- 
bodying this  feature  which  is  as  satisfactory  as  the  McClellan.  No 
doubt  in  time  one  will  be  produced. 

The  back  may  be  defined  as  that  portion  of  the  upper  surface  of  an 
animal's  body  which  is  limited  by  the  withers  in  front  and  the  loins  in 
rear.  The  sjiinal  column  forms  the  center  of  the  back,  and  should  be 
free  from  jjressure.  The  ribs  which  spring  from  the  spinal  column  are 
covered  with  muscle  and  appear  to  have  been  specially  designed  to 
carry  loads.  In  fitting  a  saddle  then,  our  effort  should  be  to  choose  one 
and  so  adjust  it,  that  it  will  cover  this  bearing  surface  evenly,  without 
extending  so  far  to  the  front  as  to  interfere  with  the  play  of  the  should- 
er blades,  nor  so  far  to  the  rear  as  to  bear  upon  the  loins.  Our  guide 
is  to  leave  at  least  an  inch  between  the  forward  end  of  the  side-bar 
and  the  point  of  the  shoulder  blade,  and  not  to  permit  the  rear  end  of 
the  side-bar  to  extend  beyond  the  last  true  rib. 

Sore  backs  are  probably  the  greatest  cause  of  disability  amongst 
cavalry  mounts.  They  are  caused  in  many  ways,  though  it  is  seldom 
that  they  cannot  be  avoided.  The  common  causes  are :  improper 
saddling;  poorly  fitting  saddles  ;  dirty  or  improperly  folded  saddle  blan- 
kets ;  careless  riding,  such  as  lounging  in  the  saddle ;  unevenly  placed 
loads  ;  and  poor  conformation. 

Saddles  must  fit  and  be  properly  placed  and  adjusted.  Saddle 
blankets  soften  the  load  on  the  animals  back  and  serve  to  distribute 
it  more  evenly.  They  must  be  kept  clean  and  alw^ays,  in  saddling,  put 
on  smooth  and  without  wrinkles. 

Riders  must  sit  erect  in  the  saddle.  "Riding  the  cantel"  or  standing 
in  one  stirrup  are  sure  to  bring  sores.  The  pack  and  equipment  must 
be  evenly  distributed  and  snugly  secured.  Poor  conformation  is  the 
hardest  cause  to  overcome,  but  it  is  only  very  rarely  that  a  horse  is 
found  with  such  a  conformation  that  it  cannot  be  saddled  and  ridden 
without  sores.  If  one  bears  in  mind  the  principles  of  correct  saddling 
and  then  uses  intelligence  to  conform  to  them,  sore  backs  can  usuall}^ 
be  prevented.  The  saddle  blanket  can  be  folded  in  such  a  way  as  to 
overcome  almost  any  defect.  Small  pads  made  from  old  blankets,  grass 
or  hay.  will  take  the  place  of  lost  flesh.  There  is  no  mystery  about 
it,  just  plain  common  sense. 

FITTING  THE  SADDLE 
(Six  Axioms) 

1.  The  withers  must  not  be  pinched  nor  pressed  upon. 

2.  The  central  line  of  the  back  must  have  no  pressure  upon  it. 

3.  The  shoulder  blades  must  have  full  and  unhampered  movement. 

4.  The  loins  must  not  carry  weight. 


94  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

5.  The  weight  must  be  put  upon  the  ribs  through  the  medium  of  the 
muscles  covering  them. 

6.  The  weight  must  be  evenly  distributed  over  a  surface  which  ex- 
tends from  the  play  of  the  shoulders  to  the  last  true  rib. 

BITS  AND  BITTING 

There  are  many  varieties  of  bits  for  different  kinds  of  riding  and 
driving.  They  are  used  singly  or  in  combination.  The  common 
varieties  are  the  curb,  the  snaffle,  the  bar  and  the  pelham.  They  vary 
widely  in  principle  and  effect,  but  there  is  one  essential  principle  com- 
mon to  all,  that  of  having  a  mouth  piece  to  bear  upon  the  bars  of  the 
mouth  by  which  pressure  from  the  rider  or  driver's  hands  through  the 
medium  of  the  reins  is  transmitted  to  the  mouth.  This  pressure  causes 
pain,  more  or  elss  severe  depending  upon  the  type  of  bit  used,  the 
amount  of  force  applied,  and  the  sensitiveness  of  the  mouth.  Much 
unnecessary  and  harmful  pain  to  mouths  can  be  saved  by  proper  bitting 
and  riding  and  driving.  The  best  rule  is  to  use  the  mildest  bit  and  the 
least  amount  of  force  which  will  accomplish  the  object  of  controlling 
and  directing  the  animal. 

The  snaffle,  plain  bar,  and  pelham,  are  the  bits  generally  found  on 
driving  animals. 

The  SnafBe  is  a  mild  bit,  though  not  so  mild  as  the  plain  bar. 
It  has  a  pincer  action  on  the  bars  of  the  mouth  due  to  the  joint  in  the 
middle  of  the  mouthpiece.  Its  effect  is  a  direct  pressure  on  the  bars 
though  at  an  upward  angle.  It  should  be  selected  to  fit  the  mouth, 
without  pinching  or  having  much  play  outside  the  mouth,  and  it  should 
be  adjusted  as  high  up  as  possible  without  drawing  up  the  corners  of 
the  mouth.  It  is  the  regulation  driving  bit  in  our  service,  and  is  the 
proper  bit  to  use  in  riding,  in  training  remounts,  in  training  recruits 
to  ride,  and  for  nervous  or  excitable  horses. 

The  Curb  is  the  most  powerful  bit  and  is  capable  of  inflicting 
great  pain.  It  should  therefore  be  used  very  carefully,  and  only  by 
riders  and  drivers  who  are  capable  of  using  it  properly.  Its  great 
power  is  obtained  through  a  lever  action  produced  by  a  chain  or  strap 
attached  to  its  upper  branches  and  passing  under  the  jaw.  The  chain 
rests  and  presses  against  the  smooth  flat  surface  of  the  jaw,  just  below 
the  junction  of  the  two  branches,  called  the  chain  groove.  When  the 
reins  are  tightened  the  upper  branches  revolving  around  the  mouth- 
piece as  a  fulcrum,  move  forward  and  draw  the  curb  chain  tightly 
against  the  chain  groove  forcing  the  mouthpiece  down  against  the  bars 
of  the  mouth.  The  pressure  applied  by  the  reins  is  thus  considerably 
increased. 

Great  care  should  be  taken  in  the  selection  of  the  proper  type  and 
size  of  curb  bit,  its  proper  adjustment,  and  proper  use.  The  type 
selected  should  be  the  mildest  which  will  accomplish  the  purpose. 
A  large  mouthpiece  with  medium  sized  port  and  length  of  branches  is 
desirable.  It  should  be  just  long  enough  to  fit  comfortably  in  the 
mouth  without  pressure  from  the  branches  and  with  but  little  play 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  95 

between  them  and  the  mouth.  It  should  rest  evenly  across  the  bars 
and  about  one  inch  above  the  tusk,  if  present,  and  so  that  it  will  not 
touch  or  knock  against  any  teeth.  The  chain  should  be  adjusted  so 
that  it  rests  in  the  chain  groove  and  so  that  when  the  reins  are  tightened 
sufficiently  to  take  up  all  slack  in  the  chain,  the  lower  branches  will 
make  an  angle  of  about  45°  with  the  line  of  the  lips. 

The  chain  must  always  be  twisted  flat  or  it  will  inflict  pain.  Any 
pain  caused  other  than  by  the  mouthpiece  of  the  bit  acting  upon  the 
bars  of  the  mouth  is  wrong  and  should  be  corrected. 

The  Pelham  has  a  straight  curved  mouthpiece  with  branches 
and  rings  for  the  attachment  of  reins  at  the  ends  of  the  mouthpiece 
and  on  the  lower  branches.  Hence  it  can  be  used  either  as  a  plain  bar 
bit  or  a  curb.  It  is  very  commonly  used  for  both  riding  and  driving, 
and  for  many  reasons  is  an  excellent  bit,  though  not  issued  to  our 
service. 

It  is  fitted  and  adjusted  similary  to  the  curb. 

THE  BAR  BIT  is  adjusted  to  the  mouth  as  the  mouthpiece  of  the 
curb.  It  has  the  mildest  action  of  any  bit  and  is  recommended  for 
either  driving  or  riding  whenever  its  use  is  possible. 

THE  COMBINATION  of  curb  and  snaffle,  which  is  our  regulition 
bitting  for  riding  animals  is  the  best  for  all  round  use.  When  used, 
the  snaffle  is  above  the  curb  in  the  mouth  so  as  not  to  interfere  with  the 
curb  action. 

The  bridle  should  fit  the  head  comfortably  and  be  capable  of  the 
adjustments  necessary  to  proper  bitting.  The  throat-latch  should 
never  be  buckled  tightly ;  there  should  always  be  room  to  thrust  the 
whole  hand  between  it  and  the  throat. 


THE   BEST   NATURAL   RIDER   IS   HE   WHO    RIDES   WITH 
THE  LEAST  EFFORT 

A  primary  object  of  this  book  is  to  train  the  rider  in  horsemanship, 
so  that  he  rides  as  an  infantryman  walks,  by  habit.  A  good  rider  will 
always  make  a  good  driver. 

The  Instructor:  It  is  essential  that  the  instructor  be  a  skilled  and 
experienced  horseman,  ]:)roDerly  mounted.  He  should  always  sui:)ple- 
ment  the  original  explanation  of  a  movement  by  executing  it  himself. 
so  that  the  riders  may  actually  see  the  result  that  is  desired  and  the 
means  by  which  it  is  efifected. 

NOTES  FOR  INSTRUCTORS 
Riding 

Instructor  will  ride  with  the  same  horse  equipment  as  the  enlisted 
men.  This  is  so  that  they  may  be  able  at  any  time  to  show  the  men, 
through  demonstration,  just  what  is  wanted  of  them.  Never  allow 
your  horses  to  be  treated  other  than  kindly.  Impress  on  your  men  th"e 
fact  that  99  out  of  100  horses  are  always  willing  to  do  what  is  wanted 


96  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

of  them  if  they  are  made  to  understand  what  it  is  that  is  wanted.  This 
requires  patience  and  a  certain  amount  of  thought  and  calculation  on 
the  part  of  the  rider  as  to  the  best  way  to  convey  his  wishes  to  his 
mount.  Wherever  possible,  equitation  instructors  should  work  in 
pairs ;  one  to  conduct  the  ride,  that  is,  give  all  commands,  regulate  the 
gait,  check  up  on  distances,  etc.,  and  the  other  occupy  himself  entirely 
with  riding  back  and  forth  along  the  column,  making  individual  correc- 
tions, in  an  ordinary  conversational  tone.  Where  necessary  this  in- 
structor should  demonstrate  his  point,  by  himself  assuming  the  desired 
position  and  then  requiring  the  rider  to  do  the  same.  Riding  classes 
should  not  exceed  30  men. 

Particular  attention  should  be  ])aid  to  supijling  the  man's  waist.  To 
this  end,  never  let  him  ride  at  a  trot  with  his  body  leaning  forward  of 
the  perpendicular.  It  is  well  at  the  first  to  require  the  man  to  lean  back, 
or  rather  roll  back  on  the  buttocks,  even  to  an  exaggerated  degree, 
straightening  the  entire  body,  legs  in  prolongation  of  the  upper  body, 
and  then  relax  all  muscles  and  cave  in  the  stomach  in  order  that  the  jolt 
of  the  horse  will  be  taken  up  through  the  flexibility  of  the  waist.  This 
position  requires  that  the  knees  shall  be  well  down.  The  rider  keeps 
his  seat  by  balance  rather  than  by  a  grip  of  the  legs  or  knees.  The 
flexibility  of  the  waist  is  absolutely  necessary  to  a  good  seat — this 
means  relaxed  muscles.  Where  the  rider  is  in  the  position  spoken  of 
above  with  the  body  leaning  back  from  the  vertical,  the  waist  acts  as 
a  hinge,  and  so  long  as  the  hinge  is  working,  the  jolt  of  the  horse  is  not 
transmitted  to  the  spine  and  upper  body,  but  is  taken  up  by  the  move- 
ment t>f  the  hinge,  thus  permitting  the  buttocks  and  thighs  to  retain 
their  contact  with  the  horse.  If  the  hinge  is  not  working  (i.  e.,  the 
waist  muscles  are  set)  the  jolt  of  the  horse  is  transmitted  to  the  rigid 
spine  and  the  rider  is  jounted  up  and  down  ;  he  is  unable  to  retain  con- 
tact with  the  horse  and  is  made  very  uncomfortable  by  the  successive 
blows  to  the  spine,  which  blows  are  transmitted  at  once  to  the  head 
and  brain. 

As  the  man's  waist  limbers  up.  he  may  be  permitted  to  sit  more  erect 
until  finally  after  some  days  of  riding  he  should  be  able  to  sit  the  trot 
with  his  body  practically  erect. 

Much  time  should  be  spent  principally  in  giving  the  rider  a  seat. 
Enough  of  the  rein  aids  (Par.  290,  F.  A.  D.  R.)  should  be  taught  to 
enable  the  man  to  guide  his  horse  and  where  the  classes  make  sufficient 
progress  to  warrant  it,  the  leg  aids  (Pars.  295  and  289,  F.  A.  D.  R.)  may 
also  be  taken  up.  The  object  of  this  particular  part  of  the  course  must 
not  be  lost  sight  of  however ;  To  supple  the  rider  and  give  a  seat.  \\'ith 
this  will  come  an  increase  of  confidence  to  the  rider  which  will  aid  him 
in  all  later  mounted  work. 

Riding  cannot  be  learned  from  lectures  or  demonstrations,  it  must  be 
learned  by  practice.  Instructors  must  see  that  the  time  allotted  to 
equitation  is  all  spent  in  actual  riding  and  largely  at  a  trot,  preferably 
a  slow  trot.  Corrections  should  be  individual  and  made  while  the  ride 
is  in  progress  rather  than  stopping  the  ride  to  give  general  instructions. 
Each  man  is  interested  to  know  just  how  to  solve  his  own  particular 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  97 

troubles  but  rarely  pays  much  attention  to  tlu)se  of  others,  or  to  instruc- 
tions given  in  a  general  way  as  he  is  inclined  to  assume  that  the  re- 
marks are  of  course  in  no  way  aimed  at  him. 

Equitation  instructors  can  increase  the  efficiency  of  their  work  by 
getting  their  classes  out  on  ihe  drill  field  promptly.  Remember  that, 
given  good  instructions,  a  man's  ability  to  ride  is  pretty  nearly  in 
direct  proportion  to  the  amount  of  time  spent  on  the  horse — and  the 
time  we  have  with  these  men  is  \ery  sliort.  Don't  keep  a  whole  class 
waiting  at  the  stables  while  you  show  .some  late  arrival  how  to  fold  his 
blanket  and  bridle  his  horse;  leave  an  X.  C.  O.  to  do  that  and  let  them 
join  you  later. 

One  of  the  best  means  of  getting  the  "limber  waist"  is  the  use  of 
suppling  exercises  (Pars.  261  to  J83,  F.  A.  D.  R.).  These  exercises 
should  be  given  just  as  well  without  the  saddle  as  with  it.  These 
exercises  should  last  only  a  few  minutes,  and  be  given  several  times 
during  the  ride.  They  will  bring  excellent  results  in  limbering  up  the 
rider  and  giving  him  confidence  and  also  serve  to  break  the  monotony 
of  the  ride. 

Teach  the  man  to  keej)  the  moxement  of  his  body  entirely  inde- 
pendent of  any  movement  of  his  hands.  As  an  aid  to  this,  the  men  may 
be  required  for  a  time  to  keep  their  hands  in  light  contact  with  the 
horses  withers,  each  trying  to  keej)  at  all  times,  and  regardless  of  the 
movements  of  the  horse,  the  same  light  feel  of  the  withers. 

Don't  shotit  at  your  men  or  "bawl  them  otit.""  ]\Iost  of  your  men 
are  anxious  to  learn  and  simply  need  help  here  and  there.  Take  an 
interest  in  each  man's  case,  especially  the  more  backward  ones  ;  make  a 
point  of  remembering  Smith's  tendenc}^  to  lean  forward  and  Jones' 
inability  to  relax  his  muscles  and  the  next  day  tell  them  that  you  are 
expecting  considerable  improvement  today  from  th.em  and  3^ou  will 
probably  get  it.  Your  own  interest  will  arouse  theirs.  .\n  interested 
man  makes  fast  progress.  And  right  there — in  speeding  up  that  {pro- 
gress by  your  own  energy  and  ingenuity — is  where  your  part  in  this 
game  comes  in.  Don't  mistake  the  route — real  progress  will  not  come 
by  hurr3nng  the  instruction  but  by  making  it  doubly  thorough 

The  correct  seat  is  a  very  natural  one  and  is  not  forced  in  any  way, 
except  that  the  lower  leg  is  prevented  from  swinging  and  is  ke^t  in 
light  but  firm  contact  with  the  horse's  side  at  all  times  The  rider 
should  take  in  the  saddle  a  sitting  position  with  the  thighs  inclined 
downward,  not  forced,  but  stretched  only  by  their  own  weight,  the 
buttocks  being  as  far  forward  and  as  deep  in  the  saddle  as  possible. 
In  the  average  horse  and  rider  the  slope  of  the  horse's  shoulder  and  the 
inclination  of  the  rider's  thigh  should  be  approximately  parallel.  The 
stirrup  straps  should  hang  vertically  and  never  inclined  forward  by 
thrusting  the  feet  forward  ''on  the  dashboard."  The  ball  of  the  foot 
maintains  a  light,  firm,  constant  pressure  on  the  tread  of  the  stirruo 
which  pressure  is  secured,  not  by  transmitting  some  of  the  weight  of 
the  body  to  the  stirrui).  but  by  flexibility  of  the  ankle.  Xext  to  the 
supple  waist,  the  flexibility  of  the  ankle  is  most  desirable.  The  heels 
are  always  lower  than  the  toes,  which  are  not  permitted  to  turn  out 


98  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

excessively.  The  stirrup  straps  are  of  the  proper  length  when,  the  rider 
being  properly  seated,  the  legs  falling  naturally  and  the  stirrup  straps 
vertical,  the  tread  of  the  stirrup  comes  to  the  ankle  bone.  The  foot  is 
then  placed  in  the  stirrup  by  simply  elevating  the  toe,  the  leg  not  being 
moved.  The  leg  position  is  correct  when,  being  properly  seated  and 
body  erect,  a  line  from  the  rider's  shoulder  dropped  vertically  would 
just  touch  the  heels,  or  when  the  rider,  glancing  over  his  knees  finds 
his  toes  just  hidden  from  view,  or  when  the  line  bisecting  the  angle 
made  by  the  thigh  and  lower  leg  is  approximately  horizontal. 

The  back  is  never  arched  but  is  slightly  bowed  to  the  rear  and  the 
stomach  caved  in  to  insure  a  supple  waist.  Care  must  be  taken  that 
breaking  over  the  belt  and  bowing  ihe  back  does  not  degenerate  into 
a  hump  backed  slouch  in  the  saddle.    Head  and  shoulders  are  held  erect. 

Elbows  hang  naturally  and  close  in  to  the  body.  Plands  are  held  low 
over  the  withers  and  about  eight  inches  apart,  backs  of  hands  are  out 
and  vertical,  upper  and  lower  arms  making  with  each  other  an  angle 
of  about  90  degrees.  When  reins  are  in  one  hand,  the  other  hand  falls 
naturally  at  the  side,  behind  the  thigh.  Additional  pressure  is  exerted 
on  the  reins  by  moving  the  elbows  to  the  rear  or  by  turning  the  hands 
in,  flexing  the  wrists,  never  by  raising  the  hands. 

Cautions  to  Instructors:  The  instructor  must  first  develop  the 
confidence  of  the  rider,  give  him  a  proper  seat,  and  make  him  supple  on 
the  horse.  Progress  should  be  suited  to  his  capacity  and  exempt  him 
as  far  as  practicable  from  falls  or  other  accidents.  In  case  of  a  fall 
recruit  should  double  up,  relax  and  roll  away  from  horse.  First  in- 
struct the  soldier  in  the  use  of  the  aids.  Men  should  be  taught  then 
the  means  employed  to  train  the  horse  to  obey  them. 

Instruction  is  given  individually;  every  new  movement  is  made  the 
object  of  a  particular  lesson  given  to  each  driver  in  turn. 

During  the  exercises  the  instructor  AVOIDS  GENERAL  RE- 
MARKS and  (in  so  far  as  possible)  unfamiliar  terms;  in  the  correc- 
tion of  faults  he  addresses  by  name  those  committing  them. 

He  passes  frequently  from  one  rider  to  another  repeating  advice  and 
endeavoring  to  impress  upon  the  riders  the  principles  embodied  in  the 
regulations.     In  doing  this  he  need  not  use  the  language  of  the  text. 

The  instructor  may  be  on  foot  or  mounted.  For  the  first  lesson  it  is 
advantageous  to  remain  on  foot  so  as  better  to  explain  movements  and 
correct  faults.  Mounted  commands  should  be  in  a  long  drawn  steady 
quiet  tone  of  voice. 

Steady,  well-trained  horses  are  selected  for  the  first  lessons.  The 
riders  exchange  horses  from  time  to  time  during  the  lesson  on  indica- 
tion from  the  instructor. 

There  should  be  frequent  rests,  especially  with  recruits.  During 
these  rests  advantage  may  be  taken  of  the  opportunity  to  question  the 
riders  respecting  the  instruction  they  have  received. 

In  all  exercises  the  instructor  varies  the  gait  so  as  not  to  weary  the 
riders  or  the  horses.  The  instruction  is  conducted  without  hurry.  The 
daily  work  begins  and  ends  at  the  walk. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTIOM  00 

The  standard  required  of  riders. —  To  be  a  good  military  horseman 
each  rider  should — 

(a)  Have  a  strong  seat. 

(b)  Be  able  to  apply  correctly  the  aids  by  which  a  horse  is  controlled. 

(c)  Be  capable  of  covering  long  distances  on  horseback  with  the 
least  possible  fatigue  to  his  horse  and  to  himself, 

(d)  Be  capable  of  riding  across  country. 

(e)  Under  proper  directions,  be  able  to  train  an  unbroken  horse  in 
garrison  and  in  the  field,  understand  how  to  detect  and  treat  the  minor 
ailments  to  which  the  horse  is  liable,  and  be  a  good  groom. 

All  officers,  in  addition  to  being  good  military  horsemen  and  instruct- 
ors in  riding,  must  be  able  to  train  remounts  and  to  direct  their  training. 

TO  FOLD  THE  SADDLE  BLANKET 

The  blanket,  after  being  well  shaken,  will  be  folded  into  six  thick- 
nesses, as  follows ;  Hold  it  well  up  by  the  two  corners,  the  long  way  up 
and  down ;  double  it  lengthwise  (so  the  fold  will  come  between  the  "U" 
and  "S"),  the  folded  corner  (middle  of  blanket)  in  the  left  hand;  take 
the  folded  corner  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand, 
thumb  pointing  to  the  left ;  slip  the  left  hand  down  the  folded  edge  two- 
thirds  its  length  and  seize  it  with  the  thumb  and  second  finger;  raise 
the  hands  to  the  height  of  the  shoulders,  the  blanket  between  them  ex- 
tended ;  bring  the  hands  together,  the  double  fold  falling  outward  ;  pass 
the  folded  corner  from  the  right  hand  into  the  left  hand,  between  the 
thumb  and  forefinger,  slip  the  second  finger  of  the  right  hand  between 
the  folds  and  seize  the  double  folded  corners  ;  turn  the  left  (disengaged) 
corner  in  and  seize  it  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand, 
the  second  finger  of  the  right  hand  stretching  and  evening  the  folds ; 
after  evening  the  folds  grasp  the  corners  and  shake  the  blanket  well  in 
order  to  smooth  the  folds;  raise  the  blanket  and  place  it  between  the 
chin  and  breast ;  slip  the  hands  down  half  way,  the  first  two  fingers  out- 
side, the  other  fingers  and  thumb  of  each  hand  inside,  seize  the  blanket 
with  the  thumbs  and  first  two  fingers  and  let  the  part  under  the  chin 
fall  forward ;  hold  the  blanket  up,  arms  extended,  even  the  lower  edges, 
seize  the  middle  points  between  the  thumbs  and  forefingers,  and  flirt  the 
outside  part  over  the  right  arm ;  the  blanket  is  thus  held  before  placing 
it  on  the  horse. 

While  retaining  the  general  method  of  folding  the  blanket  as  above 
indicated,  riders  will  be  required  to  refold  the  blanket  frequently  with  a 
view  to  equalizing  the  wear  on  the  dii¥erent  sections  of  the  blanket. 

TO  PUT  ON  THE  BLANKET 

The  instructor  commands:   BLANKET. 

Approach  the  horse  on  the  near  (left)  side,  with  the  blanket  folded 
and  held  just  described;  place  it  well  forward  on  his  back  by  tossing 
the  part  of  the  blanket  over  the  right  arm  to  the  off  (right)  side  of  the 
horse,  still  keeping  hold  of  the  middle  points,  slide  the  blanket  once  or 


lUU  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

twice  from  front  to  rear  to  smooth  the  hair,  bein,!:^'  careful  to  raise  the 
blanket  in  bringing-  it  forward,  place  the  blanket  with  the  forefinger  of 
the  left  hand  on  the  withers  and  the  forefinger  of  the  right  hand  on  the 
backbone,  the  blanket  smooth ;  it  should  then  be  well  forward  with  the 
edges  on  the  left  side ;  remove  the  locks  of  the  mane  that  ma^^be  under 
it. 

TO  PUT  ON  AND  TAKE  OFF  THE  WATERING  BRIDLE 

The  instructor  commands  :     BRIDLE. 

Take  the  reins  in  the  right  hand,  the  bit  in  the  left;  approach  the 
horse  on  the  near  side,  slip  the  reins  over  the  horse's  head  and  let  them 
rest  on  the  neck;  reach  under  and  engage  the  snap  in  the  right  halter 
ring;  insert  the  left  thumb  in  the  side  of  the  horse's  mouth  above  the 
tush  and  jiress  open  the  lower  jaw  ;  insert  the  bit  and  engage  the  snap 
in  the  left  halter  ring.  The  bit  should  hang  so  as  to  touch,  but  not  draw 
up,  the  corners  of  the  mouth.  At  the  command  unbridle,  pass  the  reins 
over  the  horse's  head  and  disengage  the  snaps. 


TO   SADDLE 

(a)  (McClellan  saddle.)  For  instruction  the  saddle  may  be  placed 
four  yards  in  the  rear  or  front  of  the  horse.  The  stirrups  are  crossed 
over  the  seat,  the  right  one  uppermost ;  then  the  cincha  and  cincha  strap 
are  crossed  above  the  stirrups,  the  strap  uppermost.  The  blanket  hav- 
ing been  placed  as  pre^•iouslv  explained,  the  instructor  commands, 
SADDLE. 

Seize  the  pommel  of  the  saddle  with  the  left  hand  and  the  cantle  with 
the  right,  approach  the  horse  on  the  near  side  from  the  direction  of  the 
crou]i  and  place  the  center  of  the  saddle  on  the  middle  of  the  horse's 
back,  the  end  of  the  side  bar  about  three-fingers  width  behind  the  point 
of  the  shoulder  blade ;  let  down  the  cincha  strap  and  cincha,  pass  to  the 
off  side,  adjust  the  cincha  and  straps,  and  see  that  the  blanket  is 
smooth ;  return  to  the  near  side,  raise  the  blanket  slighth'  under  the 
pommel  arch  so  that  the  withers  ma}"  not  be  compressed  ;  take  the 
cincha  strap  in  the  right  hand,  reach  under  the  horse  and  seize  the 
cincha  ring  with  the  left  hand,  pass  the  end  of  the  strap  through  the  ring 
from  underneath  (from  inside  to  outside),  then  up  and  through  the 
upper  ring  from  the  outside  ;  if  necessary,  make  another  fold  in  the  same 
manner. 

The  strap  is  fastened  as  follows:  Pass  the  end  through  the  upper 
ring  to  the  front;  seize  it  with  the  left  hand,  place  the  fingers  of  the 
right  between  the  outside  folds  of  the  strap,  pull  from  the  horse  with 
the  right  hand  and  take  u])  the  slack  with  the  left ;  cross  the  strap  over 
the  folds,  pass  the  end  of  it  with  the  right  hand  underneath  and  through 
the  upper  ring  back  of  the  folds,  then  down  and  under  the  loop  that 
crosses  the  folds  and  draw  it  tightly;  weave  the  ends  of  the  strap  into 
the  strands  of  the  cincha. 


MOUNTED  INSTRIX:TT0N  101 

Another  method  oi  lasteninj;-  the  cincha  strap  is  as  follows :  Pass  the 
end  throiij^h  the  u[)per  ring-  to  the  rear;  seize  it  with  the  right  hand; 
l)laee  the  lingers  ol  the  left  hand  between  the  outer  folds  of  the  straj) ; 
pull  from  the  horse  with  the  left  hand  and  take  u])  slaek  with  the  right ; 
pass  the  end  of  the  strap  underneath  and  draw  it  through  the  up])er  ring 
until  a  loop  is  formed ;  double  the  loose  end  of  the  strap  and  push  it 
through  the  loop  and  draw  the  loop  taut.  The  free  end  should  be  long 
enough  to  be  seized  conveniently  with  the  hand. 

Having  fastened  the  cincha  strap,  let  down  the  right  stirrup  and  then 
the  left. 

The  surcingle  is  then  buckled  over  the  saddle,  and  should  be  a  little 
looser  than  the  cincha. 

The  cincha  when  first  tied  should  admit  a  finger  between  it  and  the 
belly.  After  exercising'  for  a  while  the  cincha  will  be  found  too  loose 
and  should  be  tightened. 

To  approximate  the  length  of  the  stirrup  straps  before  mounting, 
they  are  adjusted  so  that  the  length  of  the  stirrup  strap,  including  the 
stirrup,  is  about  1  inch  less  than  the  length  of  the  arm.  fingers  extended. 
To  obtain  RIGHT  LENGTH  OF  STIRRUP  LEATHER  let  the  legs 
hang  freely  at  the  side  of  the  saddle;  let  the  stirrup  touch  the  inside  of 
the  boot ;  arrange  length  of  leather  so  that  the  bottom  of  the  stirrup 
just  hits  against  the  bottom  of  the  ankle  joint.  To  obtain  proper  twist 
of  stirrup  straps,  stand  opposite  flank  facing  croup  and  twist  leather 
towards  horse.  The  foot  which  should  be  inserted  from  outside  of  stir- 
rup will  easily  and  naturally  be  inserted  properly. 


TO  UNSADDLE 

The  instructor  commands:   UNSADDLE. 

(a)  (McClellan  saddle.)  Stand  on  the  near  side  of  the  horse;  un- 
buckle, then  remove  the  surcingle;  cross  the  left  stirrup  over  the  sad- 
dle; loosen  the  cincha  strap  and  let  down  the  cincha  ;  pass  to  the  ofT 
side,  cross  the  right  stirrup,  then  the  cincha  ;  pass  to  the  near  side,  cross 
the  cincha  strap  over  the  saddle ;  grasp  the  pommel  with  the  left  hand, 
the  cantle  with  the  right,  and  remove  the  saddle  over  the  croup  and 
place  it  in  front  or  rear  of  the  horse  as  may  be  directed,  pommel  to  the 
front ;  grasp  the  blanket  at  the  withers  with  the  left  hand  and  at  the  loin 
Avith  the  right  remove  it  in  the  direction  of  the  croup,  the  edges  falling- 
together,  wet  side  in.  and  place  it  on  the  saddle,  folded  edg^e  on  the 
pommel. 

If  in  the  stable,  place  the  saddle  on  its  peg  when  taken  ofif  the  horse. 

The  Service  saddle,  model  1912,  should  be  hung  on  a  bracket  suffi- 
ciently wide  for  the  saddle  to  rest  on  its  side  bars.  If  a  narrower  sup- 
port is  used,  the  saddle  will  rest  on  the  low  point  in  the  leather  seat  and 
become  misshapen. 


102 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


TO  PUT  ON  AND  TAKE  OFF  THE  BIT  AND  CURB  BRIDLE 

Before  bridling,  the  curb  chain  is  unhooked  on  the  near  side.  The 
instructor  commands :    BRIDLE. 

Take  the  reins  in  the  right,  the  crownpiece  in  the  left  hand;  approach 
the  horse  on  the  near  side,  passing  the  right  hand  along  his  neck;  slip 
both  reins  over  his  ears  and  let  them  rest  on  his  neck ;  take  the  crown- 
piece  in  the  right  hand  and  the  lower  left  branch  of  the  curb  bit  in  the 
left  hand,  the  forefinger  against  the  mouthpiece,  the  snaffle  bit  above 
and  resting  on  the  mouthpiece  of  the  curb  bit;  bring  the  crownpiece  in 
front  of  and  slightly  below  its  proper  position  ;  insert  the  thumb  into 
the  side  of  the  mouth  above  the  tush ;  press  open  the  lower  jaw  and 
insert  the  bits  by  raising  the  crownpiece ;  with  the  left  hand  draw  the 
ears  gently  under  the  crownpiece,  beginning  with  the  left  ear;  arrange 
the  forelock,  secure  the  throat-latch,  and  hook  up  the  curb  chain  on  the 
near  side  below  the  snaffle  bit.  The  throat-latch  should  admit  four 
fingers  between  it  and  the  throat. 


Reins  and  Bridle 


Figure  26.  Method 
of  supporting  the  bit 
in  bridHng  and  unbrid- 
ling. This  will  prevent 
tlie  bit  from  striking 
against  the  tushes. 

Figures  27-32.  Meth- 
ods of  holding  reins  of 
single  and  double  bridle 
in  either  or  both  hands. 

Fig.  27.  Single  reins 
held  in  right  hand.  Ofif 
rein  enters  beneath  lit- 
tle linger,  near  rein, 
between  little  finger 
and  third  finger.  Both 
reins  leave  the  hand  be- 
tween the  thumb  and 
forefinger.  Bight  falls 
to  near  side. 


Figure  29.  Single  reins  held  in  both  hands.  Each  rein  enters  the  hand 
beneath  little  finger  and  comes  out  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger.  Bight 
falls  to  the  ofif  side. 

Figure  31.  Single  reins  held  in  left  hand.  Near  rein  enters  the  hand  be- 
neath little  finger,  ofif  rein  between  the  little  finger  and  third  finger.  Both 
reins  leave  the  hand  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger.  Bight  falls  to  the 
ofif  side. 

Figure  28.  Double  reins  held  in  right  hand.  The  reins  enter  the  hand  as 
follows:  Ofif  snafifle  beneath  little  finger;  off  curb  between  little  finger  and  third 
finger;  near  curb  between  second  and  third  fingers:  near  snafifle  between 
forefinger  and  second  finger.  All  reins  leave  the  hand  between  the  thumb  and 
forefinger,  bight  falling  to  the  near  side. 

Figure  30.  Double  reins  held  in  both  hands.  The  reins  enter  the  hands 
as  follows:  curb  beneath  the  little  finger;  snafifle  between  the  little  finger  and 
third  finger,  both  reins  leave  the  hands  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger, 
bight  falling  to  the  ofif  side. 


Bohrlrne. 


Tying  to  Picket  Line 


104  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Figure  32.  Double  rein  held  in  left  hand.  The  reins  enter  the  hand 
as  follows:  near  snaffle  beneath  the  little  linger;  near  curb  between  little  linger 
and  third  ringer;  off  curb  between  second  and  third  fingers;  off  snafflle  between 
foreringer  and  second  finger.  x\ll  reins  leave  the  hand  between  the  thumb  and 
forefinger,  bight  falling  to  the  off  side. 

IN  THE  STABLES 

Before  taking  your  liorses  out,  carefully  examine  them  to  make  sure 
that  they  are  fit  for  work. 

1.  Note  whether  their  dro])ping"s  are  normal. 

2.  See  if  their  breathing  is  normal  ;  that  is.  quiet  and  without  dis- 
tended nostrils. 

3.  Look  them  o^'er  especially  on  the  back  and  shoulders,  to  see  that 
there  are  no  sores,  lumps,  or  injuries  to  be  rubbed  and  irritated  by 
harness  or  saddlery. 

4.  See  that  they  are  not  resting  a  fore  leg,  a  sure  indication  that  some- 
thing is  wrong  with  it. 

5.  See  if  they  have  eaten  their  food,  especially  their  grain. 

6.  Clean  out  their  feet ;  see  that  there  are  no  stones  or  nails  in  them  ; 
and  see  that  their  shoes  are  tight.  A  loose  shoe  greatly  increases  the 
concussion  on  the  foot. 

7.  See  if  your  horses  go  lame  on  leading  them  out.  Give  your  horses 
an  opportunity  to  drink  before  leaving  the  picket  line  or  stable  and 
before  putting  the  bit  in  their  mouth. 

TO  PUT  ON  AND  TAKE  OFF  THE  BIT  AND  CURB  BRIDLE 

Simple  Hints:  A  simple  way  to  learn  to  i)Ut  the  CURB  CHAIN  on 
correctly  is:  Take  hold  of  the  end  link  with  the  forefinger  and  thumb 
of  right  hand  and  twist  it  round,  from  left  to  right,  as  if  driving  in  a 
screw,  until  it  is  flat;  then  place  the  end  link  on  the  hook  THUMB 
NAIL  UP;  slide  the  thumb  down  the  chain,  and  after  shaking  free, 
say,  three  links,  place  the  fourth  link  on  the  hook  THl^iNIB  NAIL 
DOWN.  You  will  never  go  n  rong  if  you  accustom  yourself  to  this 
simple  hint. 

If  the  BIT  touches  the  corner  of  the  horse's  mouth  it  is  about  right. 
Great  care  should  be  taken  that  the  THROAT-LATCH  is  not '  too 
tight ;  it  is  common  to  find  it  too  tight  (because  it  is  generally  tighter 
when  the  horse  is  tied  U]5  than  when  in  draft)  ;  the  proper  fitting  is  laid 
down  above.  A  horse  can't  work  properly  with  a  tight  strap  round  his 
throat  any  more  than  a  driver  can  work  with  a  tight  collar. 

Don't  have  the  curb  chain  tight ;  horses  dislike  it  and  often  will  not 
start  because  the  curb  chain  is  too  tight.  Very  few  liorses  really  need 
a  curb  chain  ;  it  upsets  them  and  many  are  not  used  to  it  at  all.  Should 
allow  two  fingers  breadth-palm  down. 

At  the  discretion  of  the  instructor,  the  halter  may  be  taken  ofif  before 
bridling,  the  reins  being  first  passed  over  the  neck  ;  the  hitching  strap, 
if  not  left  at  the  manger  or  picket  line,  is  tied  around  the  horse's  neck; 
if  the  horse  be  saddled,  in  the  near  pommel  ring. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  1U5 

The  instructor  commands:    L'NURIDLE. 

Stand  on  the  near  side  of  the  horse  ;  jkiss  the  reins  o\er  the  horse's 
head,  phiciniJ-  them  on  the  bend  of  the  left  arm  ;  unhook  the  curb  chain 
on  the  near  side;  unbuckle  the  throat-latch,  grasp  the  crownpiece  with 
the  ri.e:ht  hand  and.  assistin.^-  with  the  left  hand,  gently  disengage  the 
ears ;  gently  disengage  the  bits  from  the  horse's  mouth  with  the  left 
hand  by  lowering  the  crownpiece ;  i)lace  the  crownpiece  in  the  palm  of 
the  left  hand,  take  the  reins  in  the  right  hand,  jjass  them  together  over 
the  crowni)iece.  make  two  or  three  turns  around  the  bridle,  then  ]kiss 
the  bit  between  the  browband  and  crowni)iece  and  draw  it  snug. 

The  bridle  is  hung  up  by  the  reins  or  placed  across  the  saddle  on  the 
blanket. 

If  the  horse  has  no  halter  on,  unbridle  and  push  the  bridle  back  so 
that  the  crownpiece  will  rest  on  the  neck  behind  the  poll  until  the  halter 
is  replaced. 

Stand  to  Horse:  At  this  command  each  rider  places  himself,  fac- 
ing to  the  front,  on  the  neaj-  side  of  the  horse,  opposite  his  head,  and 
takes  the  position  of  attention,  except  that  the  right  hand,  nails  down, 
grasps  the  reins,  the  forefinger  separating  them,  about  6  inches  from 
the  bit.  The  bights  of  the  reins  rest  on  the  neck  near  the  pommel  of  the 
saddle. 

To  Lead  Out:  The  riders  being  at  stand  to  horse,  to  leave  the  stable 
or  picket  line,  the  instructor  commands:    LEAD  OL'T. 

Each  rider,  holding  his  right  hand  well  up  and  firm,  leads  his  horse, 
without  looking  at  him.  to  the  place  designated  by  the  instructor. 

Upon  entering  the  riding  hall  or  inclosure  the  instructor  disposes  the 
riders  upon  a  line  at  intervals  of  3  yards,  the  riders  at  stnnd  to  horse, 
the  horses  correctly  disposed  and  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  riders. 

A  horse  is  correctly  disposed  when  he  stands  squarely  on  all  four 
feet,  having  his  head,  neck  and  body  in  line. 

Stirrups:  The  stirrups  are  properly  adjusted  when  the  rider  being 
properly  seated  with  the  feet  remo\'ed  from  the  stirruns  and  the  legs 
falling  naturally,  the  tread  of  the  stirrups  is  about  1  inch  above  the  top 
of  the  heel  of  the  shoe. 

The  stirrups  should  bear  only  the  weight  of  the  lower  leg:  about 
one-third  of  the  foot  should  be  inserted  in  the  stirrup  so  that  the  ball 
of  the  foot  rests  on  the  tread,  the  heel  lower  than  the  toe. 

The  flat  of  the  stirrun  strap  should  rest  against  the  leg  of  ihe  mount- 
ed rider.  To  accomplish  this  the  rider's  toe  should  be  so  inserted  in 
the  stirrup  as  to  place  the  front  branch  of  the  latter  on  the  outside.  By 
the  front  branch  of  the  stirrup  is  meant  the  forward  branch  as  the  stir- 
ruD  hangs  before  the  rider  mounts. 

Placing  too  much  weight  on  the  stirrup  disturbs  the  seat  and  con- 
tracts the  leg.  hindering  its  freedom  of  action. 

If  the  toe  is  not  inserted  far  enough  the  rider  risks  losing  his  stirrups  : 
if  inserted  too  far  suppleness  is  diminished. 

The  heel  is  carried  naturally  lower  than  the  toe  if  the  ankle  joint  is 
not  rigid. 


106  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

To  Mount:  Being-  at  stand  to  horse,  Mount. 

(a)  Face  to  the  right,  drop  the  right  rein,  grasp  the  left  rein  in  the 
right  hand,  take  two  steps  to  the  right,  sHding  the  hand  along  the.  left 
rein,  make  a  half  face  to  the  left  when  opposite  the  girth;  with  the  aid 
of  the  left  hand  take  both  reins  in  the  right,  forefinger  between  the 
reins,  the  right  hand  on  the  pommel,  the  reins  coming  into  the  hand  on 
the  side  of  the  forefinger,  and  held  so  as  to  feel  lightly  the  horse's 
mouth,  the  bight  falling  on  the  off  side.  Place  the  left  foot  in  the  stir- 
rup, assisted  by  the  left  hand  if  necessary,  and  bring  the  left  knee 
against  the  saddle ;  grasp  a  lock  of  the  mane  with  the  left  hand,  lock 
coming  out  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger. 

(b)  Spring  from  the  right  foot,  keeping  the  hands  firmly  in  place, 
the  left  knee  bent  and  pressed  against  the  saddle,  bring  the  right  foot 
by  the  side  of  the  left,  pausing  a  moment,  body  inclining  slightly  for- 
ward ;  pass  the  right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  croup  without  touching 
it,  sit  down  lightly  in  the  saddle;  let  go  of  the  mane;  insert  the  right 
foot  in  the  stirrup,  assisted  by  the  right  hand  if  necessary;  take  a  rein 
in  each  hand,  the  rein  coming  into  the  hand  under  the  little  finger  and 
passing  out  over  the  second  joint  of  the  forefinger,  the  thumbs  closed 
on  the  reins,  the  bight  of  the  reins  falling  to  the  right. 

The  reins  should  be  so  held  that  the  rider  feels  lightly  the  horse's 
mouth,  the  fingers  closed  until  the  nails  lightly  touch  the  palms  of  the 
hands ;  the  reins  well  up  in  the  crotch  of  the  fingers ;  the  backs  of  the 
hands  vertical  and  in  prolongation  of  the  reins ;  the  hands  about  9 
inches  apart. 

The  instructor  takes  care  that  the  recruit  in  adjusting  the  reins 
provokes  no  movement  of  the  horse  and  deranges  in  no  manner  the 
position  of  the  horse's  head. 

The  instructor  cautions  the  rider  to  avoid  touching  the  horse  with 
the  left  toe  in  mounting;  this  fault  begets  nearly  all  the  resistance  of 
horses  to  standing  quietly  while  being  mounted. 

To  Dismount:   Being  halted.  Dismount. 

(a)  Seize  the  reins  with  the  right  hand  in  front  of  and  near  the  left, 
forefinger  between  the  reins,  the  reins  entering  the  hand  from  the  side 
of  the  forefinger,  drop  the  reins  with  the  left  hand ;  place  the  right 
hand  on  the  pommel ;  grasp  a  lock  of  the  mane  with  the  left  hand,  the 
lock  coming  out  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger;  take  the  right 
foot  out  of  the  stirrup. 

(b)  Rise  upon  the  left  stirrup,  pass  the  right  leg.  knee  bent  over 
the  croup  without  touching  the  horse,  and  bring  the  right  foot  by  the 
side  of  the  left,  pausing  a  moment,  the  left  knee  against  the  saddle, 
the  upper  part  of  the  body  inclined  slightly  forward  ;  descend  lightly  to 
the  ground  and  take  the  position  of  stand  to  horse. 

The  riders  are  also  trained  to  dismount  on  the  right  side.  Command- 
ing officers  may  authorize  the  following  alternative  method  of  mount- 
ing and  dismounting  by  officers  and  enlisted  men  on  all  occasions 
except  those  when  it  is  required  that  mounting  and  dismounting  be 
executed  in  unison  at  the  corresponding  command.  Instruction  in 
the  methods  authorized  in  this  paragraph  is  optional. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  107 

Being  at  stand  to  horse,  at  the  command  MOUNT,  face  to  the  right, 
drop  the  right  rein,  take  a  step  to  the  right  to  be  opposite  the  shoulder 
of  the  horse;  at  the  same  time  seize  the  bights  of  the  reins  in  the  right 
hand  and  pull  them  taut  enough  to  give  a  gentle,  even  bearing  on  the 
horse's  mouth;  grasp  the  reins  with  the  left  hand,  with  the  little  finger 
between  them,  and  the  bight  coming  out  between  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger, which  also  hold  a  lock  of  the  mane.  Place  the  left  foot  in  the 
stirrup,  assisted  by  the  right  hand  if  necessary,  and  bring  the  left  knee 
against  the  saddle.  The  riders  are  also  trained  to  dismount  on  the 
right  side. 

Place  the  right  hand  upon  the  cantle,  rise  by  an  effort  of  the  right 
leg,  aided  by  the  arms,  the  left  knee  bent  and  pressed  against  the  saddle, 
the  upper  part  of  the  body  inclined  slightly  forward  to  keep  the  saddle 
from  turning;  bring  the  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left;  change  the 
right  hand  to  the  pommel,  pass  the  right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  croup 
without  touching  it,  and  sit  down  lightly  in  the  saddle.  Put  the  right 
foot  in  the  stirrup,  assisted  by  the  right  hand  if  necessary. 

At  the  command  DISMOUNT,  pass  the  right  rein  into  the  left  hand 
and  grasp  with  this  hand  a  lock  of  the  mane,  place  the  right  hand  on  the 
pommel,  and  remove  the  right  foot  from  the  stirrup ;  pass  the  right  leg, 
knee  bent,  over  the  croup  without  touching  the  horse  and  bring  the 
right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left,  the  left  knee  against  the  saddle,  the 
upper  part  of  the  body  inclined  slightly  forward,  right  hand  on  the 
cantle.  Descend  lightly  to  the  ground  and  take  the  position  of  stand 
to  horse. 

TO   MOUNT  WITHOUT  SADDLE 

Being  at  stand  to  Horse,  at  command  MOUNT,  face,  to  the  right, 
drop  right  rein,  grasp  the  left  rein  in  the  right  hand,  take  two  steps  to 
the  right,  sliding  hand  along  left  rein.  Make  a  half  face  to  left  when 
opposite  girth,  and  with  the  aid  of  the  left  hand  take  both  reins  in 
right  hand,  forefingers  between  reins.  Right  hand  well  back  on 
withers,  reins  coming  into  hand  on  the  side  of  the  forefinger,  held  so 
as  to  feel  lightly  the  horse's  mouth.  Bight  falling  on  the  off  side. 
Grasp  a*  lock  of  mane  with  the  left  hand,  springing  up  to  the  position  of 
"Leaning  Rest"  arms  extended,  body  inclined  slightly  forward,  rest- 
ing weight  on  right  hand,  pass  right  leg,  knee  bent  over  horse's  croup. 
Sit  down  lightly  on  horse's  back. 

TO  DISMOUNT  WITHOUT  THE  SADDLE 

Grasp  the  reins  with  the  right  hand  in  front  of  and  near  the  left  hand, 
forefinger  between  the  reins,  the  reins  entering  the  hand  from  the  side 
of  forefinger.  Drop  the  rein  with  the  left  hand.  Place  the  right  hand 
well  back  on  withers.  Grasp  lock  of  the  mane  with  left  hand,  raise  the 
right  leg,  knee  bent  over  the  croup.  Take  position  of  Leaning  Rest ; 
arms  extended,  body  bent  slightly  forward,  legs  and  body  on  near  side 
of  horse.    Lower  body  lightly  to  ground.    Stand  to  horse. 


1U8  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

To  take  the  reins  in  one  hand  and  to  separate  them  ;  at  the  command 
IN  LEFT  HAND  TAKE  REINS,  place  the  left  hand  opposite  the 
middle  of  the  body,  pass  the  right  rein  into  the  left  hand,  separating  it 
from  the  left  rein  by  the  little  finger;  let  the  right  hand  fall  by  the  side. 

At  the  command  IX  f^OTli  HANDS  TAKE  RELNS,  grasp  the  right 
rein  with  the  right  hand  and  replace  the  hands  9  inches  apart. 

The  reins  are  taken  in  the  right  hand  and  again  separated  in  a  similar 
manner. 

To  adjust  the  reins  the  driver  brings  the  wrists  together  and  grasps 
with  one  hand,  above  and  near  the  opposite  thumb,  the  rein  that  he 
desires  to  shorten. 

The  instructor  causes  the  reins  to  be  dropped  and  retaken  by  the 
commands  DROP  REINS  and  REINS. 

At  the  first  command,  the  rider  drops  the  reins  behind  the  pommel 
and  lets  the  hands  fall  by  the  side. 

The  reins  are  dropped  as  an  exceptional  measure,  and  always  with 
precaution  against  accident. 

POSITION    OF  THE   RIDER,   OR   ATTENTION    (MOUNTED) 

The  position  described  below  should  be  considered  a  standard  toward 
which  all  riders  should  gradually  approximate. 

The  buttocks  bearing  equally  upon  and  well  forward  in  the  middle 
of  the  saddle. 

The  thighs  turned  without  constraint  upon  their  flat  side,  clasping 
the  horse  evenly  and  stretched  only  by  their  own  weight  and  that  of 
the  lower  legs. 

The  knee  bent  and  flexible. 

The  lower  legs  falling  naturally,  the  calves  in  contact  with  the  horse 
without  pressure,  the  toes  dropping  naturally  when  the  driver  is  with- 
out stirrups. 

The  back  supple  and  never  hollowed. 

The  upper  part  of  the  body  easy,  free,  and  erect. 

The  shoulders  thrown  back  evenly. 

The  arms  free,  the  elbows  falling  naturally. 

The  head  erect  and  turned  to  the  front,  but  without  stiffness. 

Eyes  alert,  well  up,  and  directed  to  the  trooper's  front. 

The  reins  in  left  hand  opposite  the  middle  of  the  body,  separated  by 
the  little  finger,  the  bight  coming  out  between  thumb  and  forefinger, 
back  of  hand  vertical,  thumb  up.  The  hand  low  over  withers;  let 
the  right  hand  fall  by  the  side. 

This  position  may  be  modified  by  the  instructor  to  suit  varying  con- 
ditions and  unusual  conformations.  \\'hen  not  at  attention,  the  head 
and  eyes  are  directed  so  as  best  to  favor  alertness  and  observation. 
In  other  respects  the  position  should  be  practically  unchanged. 

The  body  and  lower  legs  are  movable  and  should  be  under  the  con- 
trol of  the  rider,  either  acting  intermittently  as  aids  for  guiding  the 
horse  or  as  a  means  for  binding  the  rider  to  the  horse  while  following 
his  movements. 


MOUNTED  INSTRL'CTION  109 

The  thighs,  on  the  other  haiul,  should  remain  fixed  immovably  to 
the  saddle,  except  while  posting-  at  the  trot.  This  fixity  should  be  ob- 
tained not  by  the  pressure  of  the  knees  but  by  the  clinging  of  the  but- 
tocks, which  are  secured  by  the  suppleness  of  the  loins,  and  the  relaxa- 
tion of  the  thights.  It  is  ac(juired  very  ra])idly  by  daily  ''rotation  of 
thig'lis,"  which  gradually  presses  the  large  thigh  muscles  to  the  rear 
and  permits  the  femur  to  rest  solidly  against  the  saddle. 

The  rider  should  sit  with  his  buttocks  well  under  the  ui)per  j^art  of 
his  body,  and  especially  avoid  bowing  the  back  by  thrusting  the  but- 
tocks to  the  rear  and  the  lower  part  of  the  spine  to  the  front.  Sitting 
well  forward  in  the  middle  of  the  saddle  will  tend  to  assist  the  rider 
in  avoiding  the  defect  just  referred  to.  If  the  buttocks  are  thrust  back 
too  much,  the  rider  can  not  conform  to  the  movements  of  the  horse 
and  carries  forward  the  upper  part  of  his  body. 

If  the  thigh  is  too  nearly  horizontal,  the  rider  is  doubled  u])  and  his 
power  of  action  diminished  ;  if  the  thigh  is  too  nearly  vertical,  the 
rider  is  on  the  crotch  and  lacks  ease. 

To  sum  up:  The  rider  should  take  a  relaxed  sitting"  position, 
squarely  on  his  buttocks,  with  the  thighs  inclined  downward. 

The  various  defects  of  positions  are  overcome  by  suitable  sui)])ling 
exercises. 

The  aids:  The  legs,  the  reins,  and  the  weight  are  the  means  of  con- 
trolling" the  horse  in  riding.    They  are  called  aids. 

The  legs:  The  legs  serve  to  urge  the  horse  forward  to  increase  his 
pace  or  gait,  and  to  engage  the  hind  quarters  or  move  them  laterally. 
The  legs  act  by  the  pressure  of  the  calves.  If  pressure  alone  is  in- 
sufficient the  rider  increases  the  action  by  blows  with  his  calves. 

It  is  essential  to  obtain  from  the  horse  perfect  obedience  to  the 
action  of  the  legs.  He  should  respond  to  the  simultaneous  and  equal 
action  of  both  legs  by  engaging  his  hindquarters  and  moving  forward  ; 
to  the  predominant  action  of  one  leg  by  moving  his  haunches  to  the 
opposite  side. 

The  reins :  The  reins  serve  to  prepare  the  horse  to  move,  to  decrease 
or  increase  his  pace,  to  change  the  gait,  or  to  change  direction. 

Contact  is  a  light  bearing  of  the  mouth  of  the  horse  on  the  hand  of 
the  rider.    It  should  be  constantly  maintained. 

The  reins  are  held  in  the  full  hand,  the  thumb  i^ressing  them  lightly 
upon  the  second  joint  of  the  forefinger.  l^)y  means  of  closing  and 
relaxing  the  finger  and  flexing  the  wrist,  arm,  and  shoulder  the  rider 
while  maintaining  contact  and  keei)ing  the  reins  taut,  follows  easily  the 
movements  of  the  head  of  the  horse  without  anticipating  or  interfering 
with  these  movements.  The  hand  is  then  said  to  be  passive.  It  is  kent 
so  as  long  as  the  rider  is  not  required  to  change  the  pace,  gait  or  di- 
rection. 

The  direct  rein:  \\'hen  the  rider,  with  the  hands  senarated  and  the 
reins  adjusted,  closes  his  fingers  upon  the  reins  without  raising  the 
hands  he  exercises  an  action  from  front  to  rear,  called  the  effect  of  the 


110  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

direct  reins.  This  effect,  when  on  one  rein  only,  is  called  that  of  the 
right  (or  left)  direct  rein. 

The  leading  rein :  When  the  rider  carries  the  right  hand  to  the  right 
and  forward  in  a  manner  to  preserve  contact  but  not  to  increase  pres- 
sure on  the  bit  the  effect  is  called  that  of  the  right  leadhig  rein. 

The  back  of  the  hand  should  remain  vertical,  the  wrist  in  prolonga- 
tion of  the  forearm,  the  elbow  remaining  near  the  body. 

The  horse's  head  and  neck  are  drawn  to  the  right,  the  shoulders  fol- 
low, and  he  turns  to  the  right. 

The  bearing  rein:  When  the  rider  carries  the  right  hand  forward, 
upward,  and  to  the  left  in  a  manner  to  preserve  contact,  but  not  to  in- 
crease pressure  on  the  bit,  the  effect  is  said  to  be  that  of  the  right 
bearing  rein. 

The  back  of  the  hand  should  remain  vertical,  the  wrists  in  prolonga- 
tion of  the  forearm. 

The  horse's  head  is  turned  slightly  to  the  right,  but  the  effect  is  to 
the  left.  The  neck  bends  and  is  convex  to  the  left  and  is  followed  by 
the  shoulders.    The  horse  turns  to  the  left. 

The  action  of  the  bearing  rein  is  much  more  powerful  than  that  of 
the  leading  rein,  and  is  used  to  the  exclusion  of  the  latter  to  turn  the 
horse  when  riding  with  the  reins  in  one  hand. 

The  indirect  rein  of  opposition:  Its  effect  may  be  produced  in  front 
of  the  withers  if  the  hand  be  slightly  raised ;  in  rear  of  the  wither  if  the 
hand  be  slightly  lowered.  It  is  frequently  used  by  the  driver  when 
riding  and  its  effect  should  be  studied  and  practiced  from  the  be- 
ginning. 

Manner  of  applying  the  aids:  The  action  of  the  reins  and  legs  and 
weight  should  not  be  continuous.  The  rider  alternately  closes  and 
relaxes  the  fingers,  the  hands  preserving  contact  in  the  intervals 
between  the  actions.  In  the  same  manner  he  uses  the  legs,  neither 
gripping  nor  releasing  altogether,  but  preserving  light  contact  in  the 
intervals  between  the  gripping  with  the  calves.  The  weight  likewise 
is  used  in  a  similar  manner,  being  quickly  applied  to  the  front,  to  the 
rear,  or  to  a  side,  alternating  with  returns  to  the  normal  position. 

If  an  action  of  the  aids  is  prolonged  the  horse  has  opportunity  to 
establish  the  corresponding  resistance,  but  if  produced  by  repeated 
applications  the  effect  is  very  marked. 

All  action  of  the  aids  should  diminish  in  intensity  when  obedience 
begins  and  cease  entirely  as  soon  as  the  desired  result  is  secured. 

Riders  must  be  thoroughly  trained  in  riding  with  the  reins  in  one 
hand. 

The  instructor,  in  teaching  riders  to  avail  themselves  of  their  legs 
and  reins,  is  governed  by  the  preceding  considerations,  and  from  the 
first  watches  vigilantly  the  action  of  the  aids. 

The  hand  should  always  be  kept  low.  The  most  thoughtful  care 
should  be  exercised  in  the  combined  application  of  the  aids,  so  that 
they  may  not  he  opposed  to  each  other  in  their  action  ;  that  is,  one 
favoring  the  intended  movement,  the  other  opposing  it. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  111 

The  instructor  impresses  upon  the  riders  that  their  hands  must  be 
kept  still ;  that  is,  free  from  bobbing  up  and  down,  and  pulling-,  and  from 
giving  and  taking  when  there  is  no  reason  therefore. 

Likewise  their  legs  should  remain  in  light  contact  with  the  horse's 
sides  and  the  heels  not  be  used  to  kick  the  horse  constantly  in  a  nervous 
manner. 

Moreover,  that  the  effects  of  the  aids  may  be  perfectly  clear,  and  that 
there  may  be  no  contradiction  between  them,  there  should  never  be 
simultaneous  action  of  the  direct  reins  demanding  slowing  up  or  halt- 
ing and  of  the  legs  provoking  a  forward  movement.  This  condition  is 
essential  for  preserving  the  composure  indispensable  to  the  horses  of 
the  Battery. 

Suppling  exercises:  Before  the  suppling  exercises  are  given  at  the 
various  gaits  they  should  be  thoroughly  explained  and  practiced  at  the 
halt. 

These  exercises,  if  understood  and  intelligently  applied,  produce 
rapid  results. 

They  are  given  daily  throughout  the  entire  course  of  instruction  of 
the  rider  with  a  view  to — 

(a)  Strengthening  the  muscles  used  in  riding. 

(b)  Assuring  the  correct  seat. 

(c)  Giving  the  rider  balance  and  inspiring  him  with  confidence  in 
his  ability  to  maintain  his  seat  while  inducing  general  suppleness  and 
relaxation  of  the  body. 

(d)  Accustoming  him  to  keep  the  thighs  constantly  pressed  against 
the  horse. 

(e)  Leading  him  to  acquire  independence  in  the  use  of  the  aids. 

The  exercises  herein  indicated  are  recommended  as  the  most  useful, 
but  they  are  not  the  only  ones  in  which  the  riders  may  be  exercised. 
They  should  first  be  taught  dismounted. 

Instructors  may  add  other  suitable  exercises  for  the  purpose  of  vary- 
ing the  work  and  adding  to  its  interest. 

To  execute  the  suppling  exercises  a  movement  is  announced  and 
begun  without  further  command.  The  movement  is  then  continued 
and  repeated  until  the  command:   x'VS  YOU  WERE. 

The  riders  take  the  reins  in  one  or  both  hands,  drop  and  retake  them, 
as  necessary,  without  command. 

Flexion  of  the  loins:  At  the  command  BEND  TO  THE  RIGHT 
AND  LEFT,  the  rider,  without  deranging  the  position  of  the  hands  or 
of  the  part  of  the  body  below  the  waist,  slowly  declines  the  upper  part 
of  the  body  to  the  right ;  then,  returning  slowly  through  the  initial  posi- 
tion, makes  a  corresponding  movement  to  the  left. 

At  the  command  STROKE  YOUR  HORSE  ON  THE  RIGHT 
FLANK,  sit  dowm  in  the  saddle  by  pushing  the  buttocks  forward,  turn 
the  body  at  the  hips,  w^ithout  deranging  the  position  of  the  legs  and, 
leaning  backward  but  not  to  the  side,  place  the  right  hand  as  low  as 
possible  on  the  horse's  flank. 

Rotation  of  the  loins:  At  the  command  STROKE  YOUR  HORSE 
ON  THE  LEFT  HAUNCH  WITH  THE  RIGHT  HAND,  turn  in  the 


112  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

saddle  without  deranging  the  seat  or  the  position  of  the  thighs  and 
stroke  the  horse  on  the  left  haunch  with  the  right  hand,  taking  care  to 
avoid  opening  out  the  left  elbow  or  pulling  on  the  reins. 

Rotation  of  the  arm:  At  the  command  ROTATE  THE  RIGHT 
ARM  VERTICALLY,  extend  the  arm  upward,  palm  to  the  front;  then 
drop  the  arm  to  the  rear  and  describe  slowly  and  with  uniform  move- 
ment a  vertical  circle,  keeping  the  head  erect  and  high  while  the  arm  is 
descending. 

Rotation  of  the  thigh:  At  the  command  ROTATE  THE  RIGHT 
THIGH,  remove  the  knee  from  the  saddle  and  carry  it  back,  straighten- 
ing the  leg;  turn  the  knee  in  as  much  as  possible  and  then,  replacing 
the  thigh  flat  upon  the  saddle,  draw  it  forward  to  its  normal  position 
with  much  friction  in  order  to  press  the  thick  muscles  to  the  rear  and 
to  permit  the  femur  to  rest  solidly  against  the  saddle. 

Raising  the  thighs:  At  the  command  RAISE  THIGHS,  raise  the 
knee  only  so  much  as  is  necessary  to  detach  the  thighs  and  lower  legs 
from  the  saddle,  and  incline  the  upper  part  of  the  body  slightly  back- 
ward. If  the  rider  is  sitting  too  far  back  in  the  saddle,  the  instructor 
directs  him  to  draw  himself  forward  by  gras])ing  the  pommel. 

This  position  compels  the  rider  to  supple  his  body  in  order  to  keep 
his  seat. 

When  his  equilibrium  is  well  established  the  rider  gently  replaces  his 
thighs  upon  the  saddle,  being  careful  to  keep  his  loins  in  the  same  posi- 
tion as  during  the  movement. 

This  exercise  fixes  the  loins  in  place  and  puts  them  in  proper  position 
to  maintain  the  balanced  seat.  It  is  executed  only  at  a  walk,  slow  trot 
or  canter. 

Flexion  of  the  leg:  At  the  command  ELEX  THE  RIGHT  LEG, 
bend  the  leg  slowly  without  deranging  the  position  of  the  knee  or  that 
of  the  body. 

Flexion  of  the  ankle:  At  the  command  CIRCLE  THE  RIGHT 
FOOT,  trace  with  the  toe  of  the  designated  foot,  by  a  slow  and  uniform 
movement,  a  vertical  circle  from  outward  inwardly,  and  from  below 
upward,  without  disturbing  the  position  of  the  leg.  The  circle  with  the 
right  foot  is  made  clockwise  ;  with  the  left  foot  contraclockwise. 

To  vault  into  the  saddle  and  to  the  ground:  At  the  command 
VAULT  INTO  THE  SADDLE,  take  position  (Prepare  to  Alount). 
except  that  the  left  foot  is  not  inserted  in  the  stirrup;  spring  upward 
and  forward,  bearing  the  weight  uj)on  the  extended  arms;  remain  a 
moment  in  this  position  then  throw  the  right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the 
croup  without  touching  it  and  sit  down  lightly  in  the  saddle.  Take  a 
rein  in  each  hand. 

To  vault  to  the  ground:  At  the  command  VALTLT  TO  THE 
GROUND,  take  position  (Prepare  to  Dismount).  Rise  upon  the  ex- 
tended arms  ;  pass  the  right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  croup  without 
touching  it.  carry  it  to  the  side  of  the  left;  remain  a  moment  in  this 
position  and  come  lightly  to  the  ground,  the  heels  joined,  the  knees 
bent.    Take  the  position  of  stand  to  horse. 


MOITNTKD   INSTkl^CTlOM  113 

To  vault  to  the  ground  and  into  the  saddle  without  pause  the  in- 
structor commands :  \\ll  r  TO  THE  (iKOlXl)  AXl)  INTO  THE 
SADDLE. 

The  drivers  are  frequently  exercised  in  vanltini;'  into  the  saddle  and 
to  the  ground,  and  to  the  ground  and  into  the  saddle  from  both  sides. 

During  the  early  lessons  these  movements  are  to  be  executed  only 
at  the  halt. 

When  the  instruction  is  well  advanced  the  riders  will  be  trained  to 
vault  into  the  saddle  and  to  the  ground  while  the  horse  is  in  motion, 
worked  on  the  longe  by  the  instructor.  During  the  exercises  at  the 
trot  and  gallop,  the  rider  when  dismounted  keeps  pace  with  the  horse 
at  the  shoulder  by  means  of  the  gallo])ing  step,  which  he  executes 
(keeping  one  hand  on  the  withers)  by  a  succession  of  leaps,  rising  and 
alighting  with  the  rise  and  fall  of  the  forehand  of  the  horse,  keeping 
the  left  or  right  foot  in  advance,  according  as  he  is  on  the  left  or  right 
side  of  the  horse,  and  supporting  his  weight  on  the  balls  of  the  feet. 
Frequent  short  rests  should  be  given  in  order  not  to  strain  or  unduly 
fatigue  men  who  are  not  accustomed  to  the  exercises. 

The  vault  into  the  saddle  while  the  horse  is  in  motion  is  executed  as 
prescribed  from  the  halt,  except  that  the  rider  is  at  the  galloping  step; 
that  he  springs  forward  faced  to  the  front,  and  that  as  he  drops  into 
his  seat  he  catches  against  the  side  with  his  legs  to  avoid  passing  over 
the  horse. 

Vaulting  to  the  ground  is  executed  as  prescribed  from  the  halt,  ex- 
cept that  when  the  legs  are  joined  the  rider  presses  the  leg  against  the 
side  of  the  horse  to  push  his  body  clear  and  alights  on  the  ground  faced 
to  the  front  and  takes  the  galloping  step. 

To  rest :  Being  at  stand  to  horse,  the  command  rest  is  executed  as  in 
the  school  of  the  rider  dismounted,  except  that  the  riders  hold  the  reins 
and  keep  their  horses  in  place. 

Being  mounted,  at  the  halt,  at  the  command  REST,  or  being  in 
march,  at  the  command  ROUTE  ORDER,  the  men  are  permitted  to 
turn  their  heads,  to  talk,  and  to  make  slight  changes  of  position,  but 
not  to  lounge  on  their  horses  or  to  lose  their  relative  places. 

Being  at  stand  to  horse,  the  command  AT  EASE  is  executed  as  in 
the  school  of  the  rider  dismounted. 

Being  mounted,  at  the  command  AT  EASE  the  men  are  permitted  to 
turn  their  heads  or  to  make  slight  changes  of  i)osition,  but  preserve 
silence. 

To  resume  the  attention :   1    .SQUAD.    2  ATTENTION. 

Each  rider  if  dismounted  takes  the  position  of  stand  to  horse  ;  if 
mounted,  he  takes  the  position  of  the  rider  mounted. 

To  dismiss:  The  riders  being  dismounted,  in  column  of  riders,  at  the 
command  FALL  OUT  the  leading  rider  leads  his  horse  directly  to 
the  stable  or  picket  line.  The  other  riders  follow  in  their  existing  order 
at  4  feet  distance  until  near  their  places  in  the  stable  or  on  the  line, 
when  they  leave  the  column  and  move  directly  to  their  respective 
places. 


114  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

The  riders  being  dismounted,  in  line  with  intervals  at  the  commands : 
1.  BY  THE  RIGHT  (LEFT).  2.  FALL  OUT,  the  right  rider  leads 
directly  to  the  stable  or  picket  line.  The  other  riders  follow  and  com- 
plete the  execution  of  the  command  as  indicated  above.  If  the  riders 
are  facing  their  respective  positions  on  the  picket  line,  the  command 
FALL  OUT  may  be  given.  Each  rider  then  moves  directly  to  his 
place.  Under  the  directions  of  the  instructor  each  rider  removes  his 
equipment,  cares  for  and  secures  his  horse,  cleans  his  equipment,  and 
places  the  latter  as  prescribed. 

The  instructor  satisfies  himself  by  inspection  that  the  horses  and 
equipments  are  properly  cared  for  and  that  the  precautions  required  on 
the  return  from  exercise  have  been  observed.  The  men  are  then  or- 
dered to  fall  in,  marched  to  the  rider  parade,  and  are  there  dismissed 
as  prescribed,  in  the  school  of  the  rider  dismounted. 

To  gather  the  horse:  Having  a  light  pressure  of  the  bit  against  the 
horse's  mouth  and  a  light  feel  of  the  lower  legs  against  the  sides, 
increase  the  pressure  of  the  lower  legs,  heels  well  down,  and  slightly 
increase  the  pressure  of  the  bit  against  the  bars  by  squeezing  the 
fingers  on  the  reins. 

This  is  called  gathering  the  horse.  It  serves  as  a  signal  to  attract 
the  attention  of  the  horse  and  to  prepare  him  to  respond  promptly  to 
the  subsequent  application  of  the  aids.  The  gather  should  be  employed 
at  the  preparatory  command  whenever  the  corresponding  command  of 
execution  is  to  involve  response  on  the  part  of  the  horse  to  the  applica- 
tion of  the  aids.  This  preparatory  signal  to  the  horse  should  always 
be  the  same  whatever  may  be  the  movement  that  is  to  be  executed,  and 
whatever  the  gait  at  which  the  horse  may  be  moving. 

To  move  forward :  Being  at  a  halt,  at  the  command  :  1.  FORWARD, 
gather  the  horse  by  slight  pressure  of  rein  and  leg  aids  sufficient  to 
bring  horse  to  collected  "attention."  At  command:  2.  MARCH,  close 
the  legs  (already  in  contact  with  the  horse)  with  a  quick,  sharp  pres- 
sure, the  hand  remaining  passive.  If  the  horse  does  not  respond  at 
once  by  moving  forward  continue  until  the  horse  moves  forward  at  a 
walk.  A  succession  of  similar  leg  pressures  each  quick,  distinct  and 
should  be  given  with  a  degree  of  force  graduated  to  the  sensitiveness  of 
the  horse.  A  long  continued  squeezing  efifect  with  the  legs  is  particu- 
larly to  be  avoided. 

To  halt:  Being  at  the  walk,  at  the  command  :  1.  SQUAD  gather  the 
horse.  At  the  command :  2.  HALT,  sit  well  down  in  the  saddle  and 
carry  the  weight  of  the  body  backward  and  alternating  act  by  the 
direct  reins  until  the  horse  stops. 

By  the  right  flank:  1.  BY  THE  RIGHT  FLANK,  2.  MARCH.  At 
the  first  command  gather  the  horse.  At  the  second  command  carry 
both  hands  to  the  right  until  the  horse  has  turned  through  an  arc  of  90 
degrees,  and  then  replace  the  hands  and  move  straight  in  the  new  direc- 
tion. During  the  movement  the  legs  maintain  impulsion  and  hold  the 
horse's  body  so  that  it  follows  the  curve  on  which  he  is  turning ;  that  is, 
if  the  horse  tends  to  carrv  his  haunches  to  the  inside  of  the  curve,  the 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


115 


action  of  the  inside  lei^'  should  predominate;  if  he  tends  to  carry  his 
haunches  to  the  outside  of  the  curve,  then  the  action  of  the  outside  leg 
should  predominate. 

When  the  driver  holds  the  reins 
in  both  hands  he  makes  use  simul- 
taneously of  the  leading-  reins  and 
the  bearing  rein.  With  the  reins 
in  one  hand  he  makes  use  of  the 
bearing  rein  only. 

The  action  of  the  reins  in  turn- 
ing is  governed  by  the  principles 
explained  in  the  preceding  para- 
graph. The  rider  carries  the 
hands  in  the  direction  tow^ard 
which  he  wishes  to  turn  and  dis- 
places them  only  to  the  extent 
necessary.  Eventually  the  turn 
should  be  made  on  the  arc  of  n. 
circle  whose  radius  is  2  yards  at 
the  walk,  4  yards  at  the  trot  and 
6  yards  at  the  gallop. 

The  oblique  by  driver  involves  a 
change  of  direction  of  45  degrees 
to  the  right  or  left,  executed  by 
each   rider.     The  commands   are : 

1.  RIDERS     RIGHT     (LEET) 
OBLIQUE,  2.  AIARCTT. 

The  movement  is  executed  as  in 
preceding  paragraph  except  that 
each  rider  turns  his  horse  through 
an  arc  of  only  45°.  To  resume  the 
original  direction  of  march  by 
similar   means:     1.    FORAVARD, 

2.  MARCH. 
Provision    regarding    work    on 

the  track:  The  rider  is  said  to  march  to  the  right  hand  or  to  the  left 
hand  according  as  he  has  the  right  side  tow^ard  the  inner  side  of  the 
track. 

At  the  command  TAKE  THE  TRACK  TO  THE  RIGHT  HAND, 
each  rider  directs  his  horse  straight  toward  the  track,  and  arriving 
there  turns  toward  the  right. 

The  riders  are  distributed  over  the  whole  circumference  of  the  track. 
They  endeavor  to  keep  their  horses  collected  and  moving  straight  to 
the  front,  and  to  preserve  a  free  and  even  gait. 

The  instructor  observes  that  the  riders  maintain  the  gait  ordered 
while  turning  at  the  corners  and  that  they  approach  the  corners  closely 
at  the  walk  and  trot ;  he  permits  a  larger  radius  at  the  gallop. 


116 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


To  give  oral  instruction  to  all  the  riders  at  the  same  time  the  in- 
structor may  command:  RTDE  IX.  The  riders  moving  at  the  gait 
at  which  they  were  riding-,  or  at  the  designated  gait,  and  by  the  short- 
est line,  gronp  themselves  about  the  instructor.  To  resume  the  ride, 
the  instructor  commands:  CLOSE  ON  (SUCH  RIDER).  The  rider 
designated  (by  name)  takes  the  track  and  a  gait  as  indicated  by  the 
instructor.  The  other  riders  move  by  the  shortest  line  and  place  them- 
selves on  the  track,  one  behind  the  otlier.  with  4  feet  distance  from 
head  to  croup. 

As  soon  as  the  collective  instruction  is  sufficiently  advanced  the 
commands  and  methods  indicated  in  t!ie  school  of  the  scpiad  may  be 
employed  to  group  the  riders  near  the  instructor  and  to  cause  them  to 
take  the  track  again. 

A  As     soon     as     the     riders 

understand  the  principles  of 
controlling  their  horses  the 
instructor  frequently  com- 
mands: RIDE  AT 'will. 
The  riders  scatter  out  in  the' 
interior  of  the  riding  hall  or 
rectangle  or  over  a  larger 
designated  area  out  of  doors, 
and  riding  at  the  g^ait  ordered 
execute  the  exercises  on  their 
own  initiative. 

When     riders    meet    each 
keeps  to  the  right. 

There  should  be  much 
work  on  the  track  without 
regard  to  distance  between 
riders  in  which  the  riders  are 
absolutely  independent  of 
each  otlier,  the  onl}^  oblig'a- 
tion  being  to  maintain  the 
gait  and  to  march  to  the 
hand  directed  Avhen  on  the 
track.  If  the  column  be- 
comes crowded  individual 
riders  are  permitted  to  turn 
out  at  will  and  take  the.  track 
at  a  convenient  nlace  on  the 
()l)posite  side.  They  should 
move  straight  across  the  hall, 
maintaining  the  gait. 
The  connnands  do  not  inxohe  innnediate  compliance.  Each  rider 
conforms  to  them  when  his  place  on  the  track  and  the  state  of  prepara- 
tion of  his  horse  puts  him  in  proper  position  to  execute  steadily  the 


HAUNCHES-IN,  UNIFORM  BCND  FROM  POLL  TO  CROUP. 
HAUNCHES-OOT,  UNIFORM  BEND  PROM  POa  TO  CROUP. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


117 


movement  directed.     Each  sliould  choose  his  gTound  so  as  to  avoid 
interfering"  with  his  neighbors. 

Marching  upon  fixed  points  and  upon  a  designated  objective:  The 
instructor  also  exercises  tlie  riders  in  riding  horses  at  a  designated 
g"ait  upon  a  distant  object.  This  exercise  is  begun  as  soon  as  possible 
and  is  continued  (hiring-  the  whole  course  of  instruction  and  combined 
progressively  with  the  jumping  of  obstacles  and  the  use  of  arms.  To 
assist  in  the  earlier  phrases  of  this  instruction  distinctive  marks  are 
placed  on  the  walls  of  the  riding  hall  or  outside  the  rectangle  to  serve 
as  points  of  direction.  Proficiency  in  this  exercise  is  essential  to  the 
satisfactory  execution  of  collective  movements,  and  instruction  in  it 
must  be  correspondingly  thorough. 

Circling:  The  riders  being  on  the  track  at  the  command  IN  CIR- 
CLE the  leader,  followed  by  the  other  drivers  rides  on  a  circle  between 
two  tracks,  radius  6  yards. 

At  the  command  TAKE  THE  TRACK,  the  leader  takes  the  track 
to  the  hand  toward  which  he  is  marching,  and  is  followed  by  the  other 
riders. 

BY  THREES— BY  THE  RIGHT  (LEFT)  FLANK 


The  riders  being  in  column  on 
the  track,  on  the  right  hand.  At 
the  command  of  execution 
(March),  the  three  riders  at  the 
head  of  the  column  each  make  an 
individual  turn  to  the  right  of 
ninety  degrees;  they  then  march 
on  a  straight  line  across  the  hall ; 
succeeding  threes  continue  the 
march  and  turn  to  the  right  on  the 
same  ground  traversed  by  the 
corresponding  numbers  of  the 
leading  three.  Upon  reaching  the 
individually '.  turn  to  the  right, 
far  side  of  the  hall  the  threes 
marching  in  column  on  the  track 
to  the  right  hand.  In  marching 
across  the  hall  the  riders  exercise 
care  to  keep  their  alignment  and 
to  preserve  the  distances  and 
intervals,  number  two  of  each 
three  being  the  guide.  While  thus 
formed  the  instructor  may  cause 
all  gaits.  Satisfactory  execution 
of  this  work  requires  that  each 
rider  shall  keep  his  place  exactly 
with  reference  to  the  others,  and 
that  the  movements  shall  be  exe- 
cuted with  precision  and  unison. 


o 

— ~-- 

•    CUCU        MOtt. 

\     ^ 

U 

LJ 
■j 

CClUffl 

HMJ              U7T.I 

\    ■ 

•1 

s 

\ 

!• 

' 

\ 

' 

1   " 

TKf«Ct 

,i 

I                 BT 

IW 

,      r.ot 

TUMK.         » 
J 

.k. 

k. 

1 

118 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


Changes  of  gait  are  habitually  made  progressively,  the  walk  being 
taken  from  the  halt,  the  trot  from  the  walk,  the  gallop  from  the  trot, 
and  vice  versa.  For  instruction  purposes  and  when  necessary  in  service 
an  increase  or  decrease  of  gait  may  be  made  more  abruptly. 

A  change  from  the  halt  to  the  walk,  from  the  walk  to  the  trot,  from 
the  trot  to  the  gallop,  or  vice  versa,  is  to  be  understood  when  reference 
is  made  in  these  regulations  to  a  change  of  gait  of  one  degree-. 


nc\ 

""^ 

-W/" 

•a- 

A.  HORSE  PROPERLT  BENT  ON  TURN 

B.  HAUNCHES  RIGHT,  STRAIGHT  f  ROM  POLL  TO  CROUP. 
C  HAUNCHES  LEFT,  STRAIGHT  FROM  POLL  TO  CROUP. 
D.  SIDE  STEP  TO  THE  RIGHT.  ' 


To  change  hands:  At  the  command  CHANGE  HANDS,  each  rider 
after  having  passed  the  corner  and  marched  a  horse  length  on  the  long 
side  directs  himself  toward  the  diagonal  corner  so  as  to  take  the  track 
to  the  opposite  hand  and  at  about  two  horse  lengths  from  the  corner. 
Pass  those  going  in  an  opposite  direction  by  keeping  to  the  right. 

Suppling  exercises  with  the  horse  in  motion:  The  exercises  which 
have  been  haught  at  the  halt  are  repeated  at  the  difil'erent  gaits,  except 
as  indicated. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  119 

To  put  the  squad  in  march  the  instructor  designates  a  driver  to  act 
as  leader  and  causes  him  to  take  the  track ;  he  then  causes  the  riders 
to  take  their  places  in  column  of  riders  behind  the  leader. 

The  instructor  limits  his  explanations  to  the  essential  principles 
for  putting  the  horse  in  motion  and  stopping  him. 

The  riders  are  restricted  to  letting  their  horses  follow  those  in 
front. 

The  instructor  is  especially  careful  that  the  movement  of  one  part  of 
the  body  does  not  react  on  any  other  part ;  for  example,  that  an  exer- 
cise of  the  right  arm  does  not  disturb  the  left  arm  nor  the  position  of 
loins  or  legs. 

Any  movement  is  proper  which  engages  the  driver's  attention  and 
leads  him  to  forget  that  he  is  on  horseback  and  thereby  brings  about 
relaxation. 

The  end  desired  is  attained  by  the  frequency  and  variety  of  the 
exercises ;  the  instructor  must  carefully  avoid  prolonging  a  movement 
to  weariness,  which  inevitably  brings  on  rigidity. 

He  must  likewise  avoid  any  movement  that  would  result  in  lifting 
the  buttocks  from  the  saddle  or  in  sinking  the  loins  and  hollowing  the 
back. 

At  first  the  gait  should  be  the  walk  or  the  slow  trot.  The  8  mile  trot 
should  not  be  used.  The  gallop  should  be  employed  very  early  in  the 
instruction ;  it  is  the  most  favorable  gait  for  suppling  the  loins. 

As  soon  as  the  riders  have  acquired  a  fair  security  of  seat  at  the 
trot  and  have  grown  accustomed  to  a  fast  gait  the  instructor  begins 
to  train  them  at  the  first  gallop.  The  first  lessons  are  given  on  a  large 
circle  so  that  the  horses  will  have  less  tendency  to  pull.  The  riders 
retain  their  stirrups  until  they  have  gained  confidence.  The  instructor 
causes  them  to  abandon  the  stirrups  when  he  believes  that  sufficient 
progress  has  been  made. 

As  soon  as  the  instructor  causes  the  rider  to  take  the  reins  he 
teaches  him  to  keep  touch  with  the  mouth  of  the  horse,  while  leaving 
the  horse  the  free  use  of  his  neck.  To  do  this  it  is  necessary  for  the 
rider  to  follow  with  his  hands  the  movements  of  the  horse's  neck. 

The  cadence  at  the  increased  gaits  is  easy  to  follow  with  the  reins 
lightly  held.  In  a  short  time  the  hand  follows  instinctively  the  move- 
ment of  the  neck. 

Constant  effort  should  be  made  to  overcome  stififness  of  the  arms 
and  shoulders,  which  is  the  usual  cause  for  the  heavy  hand. 

GAITS 

Three  gaits  are  recognized  in  military  equitation,  drill,  and  maneuver, 
as  follows:  The  WALK,  TROT  and  GALLOP.  These,  however, 
are  subject  to  difl'erent  rates  of  speed.  Those  usually  considered  are 
as  follows : 

Slow  walk:  2><  to  3  miles  per  hour,  66  to  88  yards  per  minute. 

Walk  (regulation)  :  4  miles  per  hour,  118  yards  per  minute. 

Walk  out:  4  to  5  miles  per  hour,  118  to  147  yards  per  minute. 


120  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Slow  trot  (a  jog  trot)  :  6  to  6y2  miles  per  hour,  176  to  190  yards  per 
minute. 

Trot  (regulation)  :   8  miles  i)er  hour,  235  yards  per  minute. 

Trot  out:    10  miles  per  liour.  29.S  yards  per  minute. 

Extended  trot:    12  miles  per  hour.  352  yards  per  minute. 

Slow  gallop:    9  to  10  miles  per  hour,  265  to  295  yards  per  minute. 

Gallop  (regulation)  :   12  miles  per  hour,  352  yards  per  minute. 

Extended  gallop:    16  miles  per  hour,  470  yards  per  minute. 

The  Slow  Trot  and  Slow  Gallop  are  the  gaits  most  used  in  the  early 
training  for  riders.  They  are  especially  valuable  for  riding  without 
reins  or  stirrups  and  for  the  supi^ling"  exercises.  The  Slow  Walk  is 
used  when  marching  with  dismounted  troops ;  it  is  used  but  little  in 
training"  the  rider. 

INCREASING  AND  DECREASING  THE  PACE 

To  increase  or  decrease  the  speed  of  the  gait,  the  rider  employs  the 
means  prescribed  for.passing  from  the  halt  to  the  walk  or  from  the  walk 
to  the  halt  to  the  extent  necessary  to  obtain  the  desired  result. 

The  horse,  in  extending  the  walk,  increases  the  amplitude  of  the 
movement  of  the  head  and  neck  as  he  increases  the  cadence  of  his  step. 

The  rider  aids  these  movements  by  yielding  the  hand  and  giving  the 
horse  greater  freedom  of  movement.  He  maintains  contact  with  the 
bit  so  that  he  can  exercise  a  gradual  restraining  influence  with  the 
direct  reins  when  he  feels  the  horse  is  about  to  spring  into  the  trot. 

To  decrease  the  pace  at  a  walk  the  rider  makes  use  of  the  same  aids 
as  in  coming  to  the  halt.  The  step  is  shortened  and  the  cadence 
decreased. 

To  increase  or  decrease  the  pace  at  the  trot  the  same  means  are 
used.  The  exercises  in  increasing  and  decreasing  the  pace  afford  ex- 
cellent practice  for  the  rider  in  the  use  of  the  aids  and  good  training 
for  the  horse  in  obeying  them  :  but  the  rider  out  of  ranks  should  use 
only  the  regulation  gaits. 

Changes  of  pace  are  executed  at  the  cautions  : 
1 .  Slow  Walk ;  1 .  Slow  Trot ;  1 .  Slow  Gallop ;  1 .  Walk  Out ;  1 .  Trot  Out ; 
1.  Extended  Gallop.     2.  March.    The  normal  pace  is  taken  at  the  com- 
mands:  1.  Walk,  1.  Trot,  1.  Gallop.    2.  March. 

At  the  regulation  or  maneuver  gaits  experience  has  shown  that  the 
speed  is  such  as,  on  the  average,  to  render  the  horse  capable  of  longer 
sustained  action  without  waste  of  energy,  and  that  his  endurance  and 
useful  work  are  accordingly  greater  than  at  the  other  speeds.  Ex- 
tended speed  at  any  gait  rapidly  exhausts  a  horse  and  should  therefore 
be  avoided,  while  a  slow  speed  at  any  gait  does  not  work  the  horse  to 
his  limit  of  greatest  efficiency.  The  regulation  gaits  are  therefore  used 
habitually  when  riding  out  of  doors.  The  work  in  the  extended  area 
during  the  third  period  must  be  such  as  thoroughly  to  impress  the 
cadence  or  tempo  of  these  gaits  on  the  minds  of  the  men. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  121 

THE  WALK 

The  walk  is  a  gait  in  which  the  feet  are  lifted  in  succession  and  put 
down  in  the  order  of  their  lifting.  If  the  right  front  foot  begins  the  gait, 
the  other  feet  are  lifted  in  the  following  order:  Left  hind,  left  front, 
right  hind.    The  walk  should  be  free,  easy,  and  elastic. 

THE  TROT 

The  trot  is  a  gait  at  which  the  horse  springs  from  one  diagonally- 
disposed  pair  of  feet  to  the  other ;  between  the  beats  all  the  feet  are  in 
the  air.  The  right  front  and  hind  left  are  called  the  right  diagonal,  the 
left  front  and  the  right  hind  are  the  left  diagonal. 

THE  GALLOP 

The  gallop  is  the  most  rapid  of  gaits.  It  must  not  be  used  unneces- 
sarily over  long  distances,  particulary  on  hard  roads,  where  the  concus- 
sion on  the  feet  is  severe,  nor  when  the  saddle  is  packed.  However, 
when  the  rapidity  of  the  normal  trot  is  not  sufficient,  the  rider,  when 
out  alone,  should  take  the  gallop  preference  to  increasing  the  speed  of 
the  trot. 

The  horse  is  said  to  lead  right  when  the  feet  on  the  right  side  are 
more  advanced  than  the  corresponding  feet  on  the  left  side.  W^hen  feet 
are  advanced  in  the  inverse  order  the  horse  is  said  to  lead  left. 

The  gallop  is  marked  by  three  beats  and  a  period  of  suspension.  If 
the  horse  be  leading  right,  the  first  beat  is  marked  by  the  left  hind  foot, 
and  the  third  by  the  placing  of  the  right  front  foot.  The  horse 
then  leaps  into  the  air  from,  and  advances,  the  right  front  foot.  In  lead- 
ing left  the  beats  are  right  hind,  left  hind,  and  right  front,  left  front. 

A  horse  gallops  true  when  he  leads  right  in  turning  to  the  right,  and 
leads  left  turning  to  the  left. 

He  gallops  false  when  he  leads  left  in  turning  to  the  right,  or  con- 
versely. The  gallop  should  be  begun  on  the  circles,  because  the  feet 
are  then  favorably  placed  for  taking  and  maintaining  the  proper  lead. 
The  horses  thus  start  off  more  calmly  and  the  rider  is  enabled  to  regu- 
late the  pace  by  describing  a  circle  of  greater  or  less  circumference. 

As  soon  as  the  horse  breaks  into  the  gallop  the  rider  should  move 
in  cadence  with  his  horse.  The  back  and  legs  unite  in  the  rhythm  of  the 
gait,  the  hands  accompany  gently  and  without  exaggeration  the  move- 
ments of  the  head  and  back. 

During  the  gallop  the  command  at  ease  is  frequently  given.  The 
riders  execute  the  su])pling  exercises  which  have  been  indicated  as 
necessary  in  each  case :  they  abandon  themselves  completely  to  the 
motion  of  the  horse  and  thus  acquire  ease  and'  flexibility.  Prolonged 
periods  at  the  gallop  on  calm  and  free  moving  horses  are  most  favorable 
for  easily  obtaining  this  result. 

The  gallop  should  be  begun  on  a  circle  because  the  horse  thus  starts 
ofT  more  calmly  and  the  driver  is  enabled  to  regulate  the  pace  by 
describing  a  circle  of  greater  or  less  radius. 


122  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

THE  FALSE  GALLOP 

This  exercise,  of  so  mnch  value  in  training  remounts,  and  so  con- 
stantly used  in  drill  and  service,  should  be  practiced  from  the  beginning 
on  wide  turns  at  first,  and  at  last  on  serpent,ines,  large  circles  and 
figures  of  eight  of  small  dimensions.  The  false  gallop  is  maintained 
by  the  same  aids  as  produce  the  gallop  with  that  lead. 

If  the  gallop  becomes  disunited  the  rider  must  return  to  the  trot  and 
then  again  to  the  gallop  true. 

WORK  ON  VARIED  GROUND 

The  work  on  varied  ground  has  for  its  object  the  training  of  the  men 
in  riding  their  horses  over  any  terrain,  in  making  them  familiar  with 
difficult  routes  and  crossings  which  they  might  encounter  in  campaign, 
and  in  regulating  their  gaits  so  as  to  husband  the  strength  of  their 
horses. 

The  instructor  conducts  his  class  across  fields,  through  woods,  and 
in  general  over  the  most  varied  terrain  at  his  disposal. 

He  may  divide  the  squad  into  small  groups,  each  under  non-com- 
missioned officer,  who  conducts  the  group  and  regulates  the  gait  over  a 
route  designated  by  the  instructor. 

The  instructor  inculcates  in  the  drivers  the  principles  which  govern 
them  when  left  to  their  own  devices,  such  as  the  following : 

On  leaving  the  stable  move  at  a  walk  for  at  least  a  mile  in  order  to 
get  the  blood  circulating  in  the  horse's  legs. 

Vary  the  gait,  but  in  training  do  not  depart  from  the  regulation  speed 
prescribed  for  each  gait. 

Choose  for  the  rapid  gaits  nearly  level  ground,  going  uphill;  rapidity 
necessitates  great  effort  on  the  part  of  the  horse,  but  it  is  better  than 
going  downhill  at  a  rapid  gait  which  exposes  him  to  injuries  from  the 
saddles  and  equipment,  and  is  hard  on  the  forelegs. 

Extend  progressively  the  periods  at  the  faster  gaits. 

Regulate  the  periods  spent  at  the  intermediate  gaits  by  the  degree 
of  rapidity  with  which  the  total  distance  must  be  covered. 

Seek  under  all  circumstances,  good  and,  if  possible,  soft  footing  to 
save  the  horse's  legs,  and  keep  him,  therefore,  along  the  edge  of  met- 
alled roads  rather  than  on  them. 

Choose  hard  ground  when  smooth  and  level  in  preference  to  ground 
that  is  heavy,  uneven,  or  sloping  to  one  side,  as,  for  instance,  the  sides 
of  a  high  crowned  metalled  road. 

Finish  at  a  walk,  more  or  less  prolonged  as  the  journey  has  been 
more  or  less  long  and  trying",  so  that  the  horse  shall  always  come  in 
with  a  dry  skin  and  normal  respiration. 

To  these  general  principles,  which  must  be  practically  demonstrated, 
the  instructor  adds  such  counsel  as  his  experience  dictates  and  such 
remarks  as  the  nature  and  state  of  the  terrain  may  render  advisable. 

The  following  rules  cover  the  majority  of  circumstances  that  will 
arise : 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  123 

To  check  a  horse  who  is  running-  out  of  hand,  never  exert  steady  pres- 
sure on  bars  of  mouth,  but  intermittently  "give  and  take"  with  leg  and 
rein  aids,  leaning  weight  back,  and  turn  horse  in  circle. 

To  ascend  a  steep  slope,  yield  the  hand  as  soon  as  the  horse  has  been 
given  his  direction,  carry  forward  the  upper  part  of  the  body,  and  seize 
a  lock  of  the  mane  near  the  middle  of  the  neck  under  the  reins. 

To  descend  a  steep  slope  let  the  reins  slip  through  the  hand  suffi- 
ciently to  give  the  horse  complete  liberty  of  action.  If  necessary,  grasp 
the  cantle  of  the  saddle  with  the  right  hand  and  maintain  the  body  in 
a  position  about  perpendicular  to  the  horses  back. 

Riders  should  be  practiced  in  crossing  a  V-shaped  ditch,  about  18 
feet  wide  and  10  feet  deep,  so  that  they  go  down  one  side  and  up  the 
other.  This  is  a  valuable  exercise,  as  no  horse  will  face  the  opposite 
bank  viuless  his  head  is  left  free. 

Long  steep  slopes  should  be  ascended  slowly  and  quietly  and  when 
the  top  is  reached  the  rider  should  dismount  and  permit  his  horse  to 
-blow. 

All  slopes  should  be  descended  directly;  short,  steep  slopes  should  be 
ascended  directly ;  long  slopes  may  be  ascended  obliquely  if  the  surface 
is  not  slippery. 

In  difficult  ground  the  horse  should  be  allowed  to  take  the  initiative; 
his  instincts  are  a  more  reliable  guide  than  the  aids  of  the  rider. 

If  marshy  ground  must  be  crossed,  go  slowly  and  avoid  following 
in  trace.  If  the  horse  goes  down  and  becomes  nervous  and  begins  to 
plunge,  dismount  and  lead. 

The  driver  must  learn  to  seek  every  means  to  spare  his  horse,  es- 
pecially when  carrying  a  pack.  In  particularly  difficult  places  dismount 
and  lead. 

The  instructor  gives  the  men  much  practice  in  riding  across  ditches 
and  ravines,  such  as  might  be  encountered  in  draft.  He  impresses  them 
with  the  necessity  of  confirming  the  horses  in  crossing  such  places 
willingly,  quietly,  with  even  gait,  and  with  no  tendency  to  jump. 

In  riding  over  broken  ground  or  across  country,  let  your  horse  have 
rein  so  that  they  can  use  their  head  as  a  counter  poise  in  a  natural  man- 
ner.    In  jumping  never  allow  reins  to  jerk  bit  in  horse's  mouth. 

Advantage  is  taken  of  the  work  during  this  period  to  teach  the  men 
how  to  cover  the  distances  at  the  different  rates  of  s])eed  as  employed 
by  couriers  and  artillery  scouts  and  agents.  The  rates  of  sijeed  pre- 
scribed for. this  duty  are  ordinary,  about  5  miles  per  hour;  rapid,  7  to  8 
miles  per  hour;  urgent,  the  highest  speed  consistent  with  certainty  of 
arrival  at  destination.  Then  men  must  be  taught  that  the  condition  of 
the  horse,  the  weather,  and  the  state  of  roads  may  make  it  necessary  to 
diverge  considerably  from  the  speed  ordered.  The  messenger  must  get 
his  horse  through.  In  peace  this  must  be  done  without  injury  to  the 
animal ;  in  war  it  may  be  necessary  to  do  it  at  the  cost  of  fatally 
exhausting  him. 

The  messenger  rides  the  regulation  gaits  unless  these  are  manifestly 
unsuited  to  his  horse,  in  which  case  he  rides  at  each  gait,  the  tempo 
best  suited  to  reserve  the  animal's  strength. 


124  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

The  following  variations  are  suggested  as  affording  guides  by  which 
the  various  rates  of  speed  may  l)e  ridden.  In  each  case  it  is  assumed 
that  the  horse  is  in  condition,  and  that  he  has  been  warmed  up  by  gentle 
exercise,  and  is  therefore  ready  for  increased  effort. 

Ordinary:  Alternate  5  minute  walk  periods,  and  rest,  with  10  minute 
trot  periods,  and  rest  for  the  last  10  minutes  in  each  hour.  This,  at 
the  regulation  gaits,  gives  5  1/3  miles  per  hour  and  with  alternate  walk 
and  trot  periods  of  these  lengths,  the  number  of  travel  (minutes)  al- 
ways closely  approximates  the  number  of  tenths  of  miles  covered. 
Thus  after  riding  18  minutes  the  messenger  has  covered  1.8  miles. 

Rapid:  Alternate  5  minute  walks  with  10  minute  gallop  periods,  and 
rest  for  the  last  10  minutes  each  hour.  This  at  the  regulation  gaits, 
gives  7  1/3  miles  per  hour. 

Urgent:  Combine  walk,  trot,  gallop,  or  extended  gallop  periods  as 
the  particular  case  demands  and  as  seem  best  adapted  to  save  the  horse. 
The  longer  the  distance  to  be  covered,  the  less  must  be  the  rate  in  miles 
per  hour.  Thus  a  horse  of  good  breeding  and  in  hard  condition  may  be 
expected  to  cover  15  miles  in  one  hour,  while  if  the  distance  to  be  tra- 
versed is  30  miles,  he  should  be  given  at  least  four  hours  if  injury  is  to 
be  avoided. 

Similarly,  the  horse  should  not  be  puslied  to  his  extreme  speed  unless 
the  distance  is  very  short.  Whether  the- speed  be  ordinary,  rapid,  or 
urgent,  the  messenger  at  all  halts  must  dismount  and  slightly  loosen  the 
girth  to  relieve  the  pressure  from  the  back  and  to  facilitate  easier  and 
deeper  breathing.  Unless  scouring,  the  animal  should  be  permitted  to 
graze. 

Frequently  when  trot  periods  and  always  when  gallop  periods  are 
used  the  driver  should  make  it  a  rule  to  dismount  and  lead  his  horses 
during  the  walk  periods.  Gallop  periods  or  trot  periods  when  the  rate 
is  ordinary  or  rapid,  should  not,  even  for  a  horse  in  hard  condition,  be 
prolonged  for  more  than  25  minutes  without  alternating  with  a  walk 
period.  When  using  the  posting  trot  it  is  of  little  or  no  advantage  to 
change  diagonals  during  a  trot  period.  It  is  easier  on  the  horse  to  wait 
until  the  next  trot  period,  and  then  to  post  on  the  other  diagonal.  The 
messenger  must  endeavor  to  water  his  horse  with  sufficient  frequency 
to  preclude  his  taking  at  any  one  time  a  big  heavy  drink.  Whenever 
it  is  possible  or  practicable  to  do  so,  the  messenger  should  leave  behind 
unnecessary  articles  of  clothing  or  equi[)ment  so  as  to  lighten  to  the 
utmost  the  load  which  his  horse  will  have  to  carry.  In  many  cases, 
however,  it  may  be  necessary  for  him  to  ride  with  full  pack  ancl  also  to 
carry  food  for  himself  and  grain  for  his  horse.  The  rider  himself  must 
be  physically  fit.  A  tired  rider  fatigues  his  horse  very  much.  Distance 
rides,  which  tax  to  the  utmost  the  endurance  of  both  horse  and  driver, 
are  the  su])reme  and  final  tests  of  horsemanship. 

POSTING 

Drivers  must  be  taught  to  ]^ost  equally  on  left  or  right  shoulder  when 
at  the  trot  to  prevent  wear  and  tear  on  hf)rse  and  man. 


AIOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  125 

Posting",  or  rising'  to  the  trot,  greatly  diminishes  the  concussion  pro- 
duced by  the  driver's  weight  on  tlie  back  and  joints  of  the  horse.  It 
also  makes  breathing  easier  and  facilitates  the  im])ulsion  from  the 
engagement  of  the  hintl  feet.  It  is  also  less  fatiguing  to  the  driver  than 
sitting"  down  to  the  trot.  I'osting  is  habitually  employed  by  the  Field 
Artillery  driver  and  should  be  learned  during"  this  period  of  the  instruc- 
tion. 

It  is  executed  as  follows :  The  horse  moving  at  a  trot,  rider  inclines 
the  upper  part  of  his. body  forward,  then  supporting  himself  on  the 
stirrups  wdiile  maintaining  the  grip  of  the  knees,  he  rises  under  the 
impulsion  of  the  horse,  maintaining  his  position  detached  from  the 
saddle  while  the  succeeding"  impulse  is  produced,  again  sits  down  in  the 
saddle  shoving  his  buttocks  forward  in  doing  so,  and  continues  in  this 
w^ay,  always  avoiding  every  other  impulse. 

At  the  beginning  the  mechanism  of  posting  is  made  easier  to  the 
driver  by  causing  him  to  stroke  the  horse's  neck  or  to  grasp  a  lock  of 
the  mane  or  the  pommel  with  either  hand,  thus  determining  the  for- 
ward inclination  of  the  body. 

Its  proper  execution  requires  that  the  seat  shall  be  raised  moder- 
ately; that  contact  with  the  saddle  shall  be  resumed  gently  and  without 
shock;  that  the  full  support  of  the  stirrup  is  obtained,  while  keeping 
the  lower  leg  steady;  that  the  ankle  joint  shall  be  supple ;  and  that  the 
heel  shall  be  kept  lower  than  the  toe.  Above  all,  the  driver  must  be 
supple  in  the  loins  and  convex  them  backward. 


CHANGING  THE  DIAGONAL  IN  POSTING 

In  posting  the  driver  is  said  to  post  on  the  right  diagonal  when  after 
rising"  he  sits  down  in  the  saddle  at  the  instant  the  right  fore  foot  comes 
to  the  ground. 

It  is  important  to  instruct  the  driver  to  post  for  a  time  on  one  diago- 
nal and  then  change  to  the  other,  so  that  the  horses  legs  will  each  per- 
form the  same  amount  of  work  and  the  chance  of  injury  from  the  equip- 
ment will  be  reduced. 

In  the  riding  school  the  rider  should  always  rise  on  the  inside  hind 
foot,  because  this  foot,  in  response  to  the  inner  leg  aid,  is  the  only  one 
that  can  properly  place  itself  under  the  mass  of  the  horse  and  support 
the  w^eight  during  the  ghange  of  direction  in  the  corners:  hence  to  in- 
sure automatically  that  the  posting  is  done  as  much  on  one  diagonal  as 
on  the  other,  the  riders  may  be  required  to  post  on  the  left  diagonal 
when  riding  to  the  left. 

The  instructor  occasionally  requires  each  driver  to  inform  him  on 
which  diagonal  he  is  posting. 

To  teach  the  driver  to  change  the  diagonal  the  instructor  directs  him 
to  diminish  the  weight  borne  on  the  stirrups  and  to  retain  his  seat  in 
the  saddle  for  two  successive  beats  of  the  horse's  feet  instead  of  one, 
then  to  rise  as  before. 


126  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  __ 

The  driver  will  then  find  himself  posting  on  the  diagonal  opposite  to 
the  one  on  which  he  was  posting  before. 

JUMPING  OBSTACLES 

The  jump  is  made  as  follows :  On  arriving  near  the  obstacle  grasp 
the  horse  with  the  legs,  keeping  the  body  upright,  the  hands  low  and 
passive;  at  the  moment  the  horse  rises  bend  the  upper  part  of  the  body 
forward  at  the  waist,  the  buttocks  remaining  in  the  saddle  without  dis- 
placing the  hands. 

During  this  work  the  suppling  exercises  may  be  practiced  with  excel- 
lent results. 

In  general,  the  horse  should  jump  at  the  gait  at  which  he  approaches 
the  obstacle. 

On  approaching  the  obstacle  the  rider  selects  the  point  at  which  he 
wishes  to  jump  and  conducts  his  horse  straight  toward  it,  the  reins 
separated,  the  legs  close  to  maintain  the  forward  movement. 

If  horse  hesitates  on  approaching  the  obstacle,  anticipate  his  resist- 
ance by  stimulating  him  vigorously  with  the  legs. 


Jumping  the  Trail 

If  he  avoids  it,  quiet  him,  and  place  him  directly  in  front  of  it,  and 
urge  him  with  the  legs. 

If  he  stops,  ride  back  and  put  him  at  it  again. 

The  reins  should  be  long  but  taut  before,  during,  and  after  the  jump. 

Among  the  principle  errors  in  jumping,  the  following  are  mentioned  : 

(a)  A  strong  pull  on  the  reins  about  ten  yards  in  front  of  the  hurdle. 

(b)  Lower  legs  to  the  front,  or  not  close  in  to  the  saddle. 

(c)  Balk  stifif  and  weight  of  body  on  cantle  of  saddle. 

(d)  Standing  in  stirrups. 

(e)  Legs  flying  loose  at  the  moment  the  horse  lands. 

(f)  Bending  the  body  forward  at  the  hips  and  pivoting  at  the  knees. 

(g)  Reins  too  short,  and  stififness  in  shoulders,  arms  and  wrists. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  127 

In  all  riding  instruction,  watch  candidates  to  see  that  they  keep  their 
knees  down,  and  keep  their  proper  seat.  At  the  slow  trot  try  to  make 
them  overcome  the  tendency  most  riders  have  of  clinging-  with  their 
lower  legs  and  not  with  their  thighs.  The  lower  leg,  at  the  slow  trot, 
should  be  loose,  the  toes  hanging  naturally  (when  without  stirrups). 

Try  above  all  to  get  men  loose  in  the  waist  so  they  can  go  with  the 
horse  without  disturbing  their  seat.  In  the  early  instruction,  work  con- 
stantly towards  settling  men  down  in  the  saddle,  get  their  knees  down 
and  their  waists  loose. 


PART  III 

DRIVING 


The  Driver. 
Principles  of  Draft. 
Mounted  Instruction. 
Hints  to  Drivers. 


PRELIMINARY  FOR  THE  BATTERY  MOUNTED 

To  prepare  recruits  for  their  work  with  teams  it  is  advantageous 
during  this  period  frequently  to  form  the  section  in  a  number  of  squads 
each  composed  of  six  or  eight  men  in  column  of  twos  simulating  six  or 
eight  horse  teams.  Such  a  formation  is  favorable  for  teaching  the  men 
the  evolutions  encountered  in  the  battery  mounted  and  for  teaching 
them  to  obey  signals  and  bugle  calls.  It  is  especially  favorable  fo'' 
teaching  the  relative  position  of  the  various  horses  of  a  team  during  a 
turn  such  as  is  involved  in  an  about  or  a  movement  by  the  flank  of  an 
Artillery  carriage. 

THE  DRIVER 

Section  1. — Object  and  Sequence  of  the  instruction. 
The  object  of  this  instruction  is  the  training  of  the  Field  Artillery 
driver : 

(a)  In  harnessing  and  unharnessing  and  in  the  proper  fitting  clean- 
ing and  care  of  harness. 

(b)  In  managing  and  maneuvering  a  single  pair. 

(c)  In  managing  and  maneuvering  the  dififerent  pairs  of  a  team  in 
draft.  In  the  instruction  of  recruits  quiet,  well-trained  horses  will  be 
used. 

In  order  to  secure  and  maintain  interest,  and  in  order  that  the  work 
may  completely  cover  the  subject  it  is  of  importance  that  the  instructor 
adhere  to  a  systematic  and  progressive  sequence  of  instruction. 

In  all  driver  instruction,  whether  it  pertains  to  the  training  of  recruits 
or  to  the  specialization  of  men  as  drivers,  work  in  equitation 
should  be  continued  as  a  part  of  the  daily  program.  This  instruction 
may  properly  be  a  review  of  that  outlined  under  The  Soldier  Mounted,  or 
it  may  be  more  advanced,  as  indicated  in  paragraph  210,  F.  A.  D.  R. 

The  following  subjects  arranged  in  a  proper  sequence  will  be  covered 
in  the  training  of  the  driver. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  131 


PRELIMINARY  INSTRUCTION 

1.  Terms. 

2.  Nomenclature  of  harness. 

3.  Disposition  of  harness. 

4.  Harnessing  and  unharnessing. 

5.  Adjustment  and  fitting  of  harness. 

TERMS 

The  horses  assigned  to  a  single  driver  are  called  a  pair;  the  horse  on 
the  left  side  is  called  the  near  horse  ;  the  other  the  ofif  horse.  The  driver 
rides  the  near  horse. 

The  pairs  assigned  to  the  traction  of  a  single  carriage  are  termed 
collectively  a  team. 

SPECIAL  DUTY  OF  DRIVERS 
DISPOSITION  OF  THE  HARNESS 

In  garrison:  The  harness  is  arranged  on  two  ])egs  on  the  heel  posts, 
as  follov^s : 

On  the  upper  peg:  Both  bridles  hung  from  the  peg  by  their  head- 
stalls ;  the  traces  of  both  horses  hung  over  the  peg  close  to  the  heel  post ; 
the  off  saddle  with  its  attachments  over  the  seat ;  the  blanket  across  the 
saddle  ;  both  collars  over  the  blanket. 

On  the  lower  peg:  The  near  saddle  and  blanket  arranged  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  ofi  harness. 

The  neck  yoke,  with  martingales  attached,  is  hung  from  a  spike 
driven  into  the  side  of  the  heel  post. 

To  prevent  injury  to  the  off  saddle  when  the  blankets  are  out  drying, 
the  sack  is  put  over  the  harness  and  the  collars  are  then  placed  across 
the  sack. 

If  the  harness  pegs  are  on  the  left  heel  post  as  the  driver  faces  the 
manger,  the  saddles  are  placed  with  the  cantles  against  the  heel  post; 
if  the  pegs  are  on  the  other  side  of  the  stall,  the  pommels  are  placed 
against  the  heel  post. 

In  the  field:  The  pole  prop  is  placed  under  the  end  of  the  pole.  The 
wheel  traces  are  detached  from  the  collars  only  and  laid  back  on  the 
footboards.  The  remainder  of  the  harness  of  the  near-wheel  horse  is 
placed  on  the  pole  next  to  the  double-tree,  arranged  as  follows:  The 
saddle  with  its  attachments  over  it,  the  blanket  across  the  saddle,  the 
bridle  and  collar  over  the  blanket.  The  remainder  of  the  off  wheel  har- 
ness, is  placed  next,  then  the  swing,  and  lead  harness  in  the  same 
order.  The  traces  of  the  swing  and  lead  harness,  folded  once,  are 
placed  across  the  saddle.    The  neck  )^oke  is  placed  on  the  footboard. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


13J 


In  entraining:  1'he  harness  lieloiigins'  i.o  a  single  pair  is  jilaccd  in  a 
harness  sack  in  the  following-  order:  Neck  yoke;  collars,  one  in  each 
end  of  the  sack  ;  bridles,  one  inside  of  each  collar;  traces  looped  around 
and  outside  of  the  collars  :  blankets,  one  on  each  collar  ;  saddles,  one  on 
each  blanket.  The  harness  sack  is  securely  tied  and  is  tag;,g-ed  to  show 
(1)  the  pair  in  the  team,  (2)  the  carriage,  (3)  the  section. 

When  harness  sacks  are  not  taken,  each  horse's  harness  may  be 
packed  in  a  grain  sack  and  appropriately  tag-g-ed. 

THE  ARTILLERY  HARNESS 

The  component  parts  of  the  artillery  harness  are  given  in  the  table 
below. 


Component  parts 


Backstrap  and  crupper,  complete 

Consisting  of — 

Body  and  hip  straps 

Crupper  dock 

Loin  strap 

Trace  loops 

Backstrap  hook 

Belly  band,  complete 

Consisting  of— 

Belly  band 

Holding  down  strap 

Holding  down  strap  hook 

Breast  strap,  complete 

Consisting  of— 

Breast  strap 

Breast-strap  hooks 

Breeching,  complete 

Consisting  of— 

Backstrap  (1)  and  hip  straps  (4) . 

Body. 


Crupper  dock . 
cks: 


Backstrap  hook 

Side  strap  hooks 

Loin  strap 

Side  straps 

Trace  loops 

Bridle  complete  (old  model) 

Consisting  of — 

Brow  band 

Brow-band  ornaments 

Check  pieces 

Coupling  strap 

Connecting  strap 

Crownpiece 

Snaffle  bit* 

Reins  (pairs) 

Throat-latch 

Bridle,  complete  (new  model   

Consbting  of— 

Brow  band 

Brow-band  ornaments 

Crown  piece 

Coupling  strap 

Snaffle  bit* 

Beins. 

Crown  piece  strap 

Collar,  steel 

Hame  tug  (a  part  of  the  collar) . 

Collar  strap 

Halter,  complete 


Near 
horse 


Off 
horse 


Lead 
Near  Off 


Property 
classificatio 


Sec- 
tion 


'  Twenty  curb  bits  with  chains  are  issued  for  use  in  place  of  snaffle  bits  on  fractious  draft  horses. 


134 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


Component  parts 

Wh 

eel 

Lei 

d 

Property 
classification 

Near 
horse 

Off 
horse 

Near 
horse 

Off 
horse 

Class 

Sec- 
tion 

Consisting  of— 

1 
2 

1 

1 
1 
1 
2 

1 
1 

1 
1 

1 

1 

1 
2 

1 
1 
1 
1 

2 
1 

1 

1 
1 
1 

1 

1 
2 

1 

1 

1 
1 

1 
1 
2 

1 

IV 

Cheeli  piece ^ 

Nose  band 

Throat  strap 

Tie  rope 

Consisting  of— 
Martingale 

Saddle,  complete     .    . 

1 

Consisting  of— 
Cinchas,  with  reinforces  and  loops 

2 
2 

2" 

1 

1 

2 

1 

2 

1 
2 

2 
2 
1 
2 
2 

Lead-rein  roller  and  strap     

1 

2 

1 
2 
2 

2 

2 
2 

2 

Quarter  straps,  including  rings,  safes,  and  cincha  straps 
(side) 

2 
1 
1 
2 
3 
1 

Quarter  strap,  cantle 

Cincha  strap  a  part  of  the  saddle  quarter  strap 

Coat  strap,  45-inch  (cantle) 

Saddletree  leather-covered     

1 

2 

Stirrups  (nickel  steel) . . . ; 

Stirrup  straps 

Saddlebag  side  straps 

8 

Traces,  lead,  model  of  1908 

Consisting  of— 
1  trace  body ... 

Slinks 

1  chain 

1  toggle 

2  sockets  . . 

2  filler  pieces 

Traces,  wheel,  model  of  1908 

2 

2 

Consisting  of — 

1  trace  cover 

2  links 

2  toggles .... 

2  filler  pieces 

1  ring  . 

1  locking  strap 

Trace  chain,  body 

2 

1 
2 

1 

2 

i" 

Whip 

1 

? 

i" 

Sweat  leathers 

Blanket* 

•  In  submitting  and  in  filling  requisitions,  unless  it  is  specifically  stated  that  saddle  blankets  are  wanted,  they  will  not  be 
included. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  135 


HARNESSING  AND  UNHARNESSING 

A  g^ood  driver  should  be  able  to  harness  and  unharness  when  blind- 
folded. 

TO  HARNESS  BY  DETAIL  IN  THE  FIELD 

Note — (Details  will  be  completed  on  off  horse  first.  The  following- 
order  will  be  strictly  adhered  to  in  harnessing  and  unharnessing.  After 
the  completion  of  each  detail  candidates  will  stand  to  heel). 

By  Detail  Harness 

1.  Collar:  Breast  collar  (horse  tied  to  wheels)  untie  halter  rope,  slip 
collar  over  horse's  head.  Do  not  try  to  unbuckle  any  of  the  straps  on 
the  collar.  If  wheel  collar,  slip  both  neck  yoke,  neck  strap  and  body  of 
collar  well  up  under  horse's  throat.  This  will  allow  collar  to  slide  on 
easily.    When  collar  is  on,  tie  halter  rope  to  wheel. 

2.  Bridle:  Take  crown  piece  in  left  hand,  end  of  reins  in  right  hand, 
slip  reins  over  horse's  head  with  the  right  hand  and  place  gently  on  his 
neck ;  shift  crown  piece  to  right  hand.  Place  left  hand  from  rear  on  bit, 
between  the  check  pieces  so  as  to  spread  the  bit  apart,  thumb  to  left, 
forefinger  or  middle  finger  to  right,  back  of  hand  down.  Gently  insert 
bit  in  horse's  mouth.  (Do  not  force  it  under  any  circumstances).  If 
horse  does  not  open  mouth,  insert  thumb  in  his  mouth  and  open  it  for 
him.    Buckle  throat-latch,  being  sure  that  it  is  loose. 

3.  Saddle :  Take  blanket  of  the  off  horse  grasping  at  center  of  double 
folded  edge  wuth  left  hand,  forefinger  between  folds,  thumb  on  top 
pointing  to  right,  right  hand  at  other  end  of  blanket,  thumb  on  top 
point  to  left,  forefinger  underneath,  lifting  blanket  from  saddle  hold 
out  in  front,  and  examine  blanket  to  see  that  you  have  it  in  middle. 
Bottom  edges  should  coincide.  With  fingers  in  same  position  toss 
blanket  over  right  shoulder,  one  edge  falling  over  shoulder  and  arm  to 
the  rear,  other  edge  remaining  to  front.  Place  blanket  on  horse  so  that 
forefinger  on  left  hand  is  on  withers  and  forefinger  of  right  hand  on 
center  of  back.  This  insures  that  center  of  blanket  is  in  center  of 
horse's  back.  Slide  to  rear  several  times  to  smooth  out  hair,  last  move- 
ment to  rear  bringing  fold  of  blanket  on  withers.  Smooth  out  all 
wrinkles.  Grasp  pommel  of  saddle  with  left  hand,  cantle  with  right 
hand,  approach  horse  from  left  rear,  lift  saddle  well  up  and  place  gently 
on  horse's  back,  being  careful  that  none  of  harness  remains  between 
the  saddle  and  blanket.  Fasten  collar  straps  (this  is  very  important). 
Pass  to  rear  putting  back  strap  and  crupper  in  place,  fasten  crupper, 
being  careful  to  prevent  hair  getting  caught  between  crupper  and  dock. 
Pass  to  off  side  and  let  down  cincha  and  off  stirrup.  Straighten  out 
saddle  and  blanket.  Pass  to  near  side  and  pass  flat  of  hand  between 
shoulder  blade  and  sidebar  so  that  there  is  a  distance  of  three  fingers 
between  point  of  shoulder  blade  and  end  of  sidebar.  Run  left  hand  back 
up  down  withers  to  raise  blanket  slightly  on  the  pommel  arch,  to  pre- 
vent wither  pressure.  Let  down  cincha  strap.  Fasten  cincha  in  man- 
ner prescribed  in  Par.  2.?8,  D.  &  S.  R.  F.  A.    Let  down  the  near  stirrup. 


136 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


Unharnessing  in  the  Field 
(Figures  3  to  26  inc.  from  F.  A.  C.  O.  T.  S.  Black  Book,  Camp  Taylor,  Ky.) 


Figure  11.     Showing  tlie  pairs  of  a  team,  unharnessed,  tied  on  the  wheels. 


Figure  12.  Off  side  of  pole  showing  arrangement  of  harness  when  un- 
harnessing in  the  field.  Breast  collars  are  placed  hearing  surface  down,  as 
shown,  after  the  harness  has  been  cleaned  and  inspected. 


1 

Le 

.od 

Hear 

o^^^^^W 

■l 

1^ 

m 

:f^^A^ 

~  -  .  ^  ' 

f  ■  ■■ 

Figure    13.     Same   as   figure    12,   showing  near   side.     Note   that  all   trace 
chains  and  bits  hang  on  the  near  side  for  the  sake  of  uniformity. 


MOUNTKl)  INSTRUCTION  137 

4.  Traces:  As  i)rescnl)C(l  in  Par.  411,  D.  &-  S.  R.  F.  A.,  be  sure  that 
the  toggles  are  passed  through  Iiolding  up  and  holding  down  straps,  if 
any. 

5.  Yoke:  This  command  should  follow  immediately  after  TRACES, 
so  that  the  wheel  driver  and  other  drivers  can  all  be  working  at  the 
same  time.    Executed  as  prescribed  in  Par.  411,  D.  &  S.  R.  F.  A. 

6.  Couple:    Executed  as  prescribed  in  Par.  411,  D.  &  S.  R.  F.  A. 

7 .  Teams  to  Carriages  Hitch  and  Hook:  Pairs  are  led  to  their  proper 
place  in  the  team,  wheel  (lri\er  causing  his  off  horse  to  step  over  the 
pole  so  that  he  may  turn  his  i^air  in  i:)lace  and  not  have  to  back  them. 
Wheel  driver  passing  around  to  rear  between  the  pole  and  his  off  horse 
engages  pole  with  neck  yoke  and  hitches  as  prescribed  in  Par.  436,  D. 
&  S.  R.  F.  A. 

Lead  and  swing  drivers,  as  soon  as  Avheel  driver  has  finished  any 
part  of  his  operations,  commence  to  hook  traces  and  hook  as  prescribed 
in  Par.  433,  D   ^  S.'  R.  F.  A.    ^^^^en  finished  thev  all  Stand  to  Horse. 

Reference  Par.  411.  412.  413.  414,  41. S.  D.  ^  S.  R.  F.  A. 

UNHARNESSING  IN  THE  FIELD 

By  Detail  Unharness 

1.  Drivers  Unhook,  Unhitch,  and  Tie  on  the  Wheels:  Lead  and 
swing  dri\ers  unhook  as  prescril^ed  in  Par.  434.  D.  &  S.  R.  F.  A. ;  \\' heel 
drivers  unhitch  as  prescribed  in  Par.  438,  D.  &  S.  R.  F.  A.  All  drivers 
then  tie  on  wheels  as  prescribed  in  Par.  4Lt.  D.  &  S.  R.  F.  A. 

2.  Uncouple:  Executed  as  prescribed  in  Par.  413,  D.  &  S.  R.  F.  A. 

3.  Unyoke:  As  prescribed  in  Par.  413,  D.  &  S.  R.  F.  A.  Caution  men 
to  unhook  sidestrap  from  martingale  D.  ring;  and  not  to  untie  martin- 
gale cincha  strap  from  neck  voke. 

4.  Traces  Off:  As  prescribed  in  Par.  414,  D.  &  S.  R.  F.  A.,  with  the 
exception  that  traces  will  be  laid  aside  on  some  part  of  carriage  tempor- 
arily until  saddle  is  placed  on  pole.  LTave  men  carefully  lift  traces  off 
the  horses  so  as  not  to  hit  horse  with  chain  or  toggles.  This  command 
comes  immediately  after  UNYOKE  so  that  lead,  swing  and  wheel 
drivers  can  all  be  working  at  same  time. 

5.  Unsaddle:  Place  near  stirrup  in  saddle.  Loosen  cincha  strap  and 
put  cincha  strap  in  saddle.  Pass  to  off  side,  place  cincha  and  off  stirrup 
in  saddle,  passing  around  again  to  near  side,  unfasten  crupper  and  place 
backstrap  and  crupper  in  the  saddle,  being  sure  that  all  parts  of  harness 
are  in  well  enough  to  keep  harness  up  off  ground  when  saddle  is  placed 
on  pole.     Unhook  the  collar  strap.     (It  is  important  to  do  this  last). 

Lift  saddle  well  up  and  place  on  the  pole,  saddles  being  placed  on 
pole  from  rear  to  front  in  the  following  order:  Near  wheel,  off  wheel, 
near  swing,  off  swing,  near  lead,  off  lead.  Near  wheel  is  placed  well 
back  on  double  tree  so  as  to  allow  plenty  of  room  for  other  saddles. 
The  pommels  of  all  saddles  Avill  be  towards  the  front  of  the  pole.  It  is 
well  to  let  sidebars  overlap  so  as  to.  keep  saddle  from  falling  off  the 
pole.  The  traces  are  then  placed  over  saddle,  toggles  and  chains  on  left 
or  near  side.    The  blanket  is  next  removed  with  the  hands  in  the  same 


138 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


position  as  when  putting  the  blankets  on.  See  that  you  have  the 
blanket  in  the  middle ;  place  blanket  over  saddle,  folded  edges  to  front 
of  pole,  double  folded  edge  to  the  right  or  ofif  side. 

6.  Unbridle:  Unfasten  throat-latch,  take  bight  of  reins  and  crown 
piece  in  right  hand.  Slip  bridle  over  horse's  head  steadying  the  bit  with 
the  left  hand,  so  that  it  will  not  hit  against  the  horse's  teeth.  Fold  over 
bridle  reins.    Place  bridle  over  blanket,  bit  on  left  or  near  side. 

Breast  Collar:  Slip  over  horse's  head,  and  place  over  blanket,  bear- 
ing surface  up. 

Harnessing  and  unharnessing  in  garrison  is  done  in  a  similar  man- 
ner to  harnessing  and  unharnessing  in  the  field  except  that  order  is; 
By  Detail  Harness.  1.  Collar.  2.  .Saddle.  3.  Traces.  4.  Yoke. 
(Given  immediately  after  Traces).  5.  Bridle.  6.  Couple.  In  Unhar- 
nessing. 1.  Uncouple.  2.  Unbridle.  3.  Unyoke.  4.  Traces  off,  (same 
time  as  Unyoke).  5.  Unsaddle.  6.  Collar  off.  The  Harness  is  dis- 
posed of  as  prescribed  in  Par.  407.  D.  &  S.  R.  F.  A.' 

Harness    Fitting   Tests  _'  


Figure  4.  Place  the  saddle  so 
that  the  front  end  of  the  side  bars 
will  be  three  fingers  width  in  rear 
of  the  shoulder  blade.  This  is 
enough  clearance  to  allow  free  mo- 
tion in  the  shoulder;  placing  the 
saddle  farther  back  would  put  un- 
due weight  on  the  loins. 


Figure  3.  Upon  saddling, 
place  the  blanket  as  shown. 
After  a  short  ride,  the  blanket 
will  work  back  to  equal  dis- 
tribution in  front  and  in  rear 
of  the  saddle. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


139 


P^,     Jl 

^r             ^^9[^^H 

^^^^\ 

i  ''^^ 

m  I  L 

1^ 

Figure    5.     Tlie    backstrap    should    be    put   under    slight    tension   when   the 
hand  is  inserted  between  the  croup  and  backstrap  as  shown. 


Figure  9.  Showing  a  breeching  which  is  correctly  adjusted  for  height  and 
slope.  The  back  part  is  four  inches  below  the  point  of  the  buttock  (indicated 
by  arrow);  front  ends,  where  side  straps  fasten,  is  at  the  height  of  the  stifle. 


140 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


Figure  10.  Test  for  martingale  and  sidestrap  adjustment.  Move  the  horse 
forward  into  the  collar,  pull  the  breeching  body  to  the  rear  as  far  as  the  side- 
straps  and  martingale  will  permit.  The  clearance  should  just  permit  the  hand 
spanned  to  be  entered  between  the  breeching  body  and  the  buttocks. 

ADJUSTMENT  AND  FITTING  OF  HARNESS 

Drivers  will  be  thoroiiohly  impressed  with  the  importance  of  bestow- 
ing constant  and  unremittin.t^-  attention  on  the  adjustment  and  fitting:  of 
harness.  They  must  learn  early  that  a  horse  can  not  properly  perform 
his  work  unless  he  is  made  comfortable  in  well-fitted  harness.  If  the 
harness  pinches,  g'alls,  or  otherwise  causes  discomfort,  his  sole  idea  will 
be  to  escape  from  the  annoyance  or  pain  thereby  occasioned  him,  and 
he  will  become  fretful,  nervous,  and  unsteady  in  his  work.  This  will 
not  only  add  to  his  own  distress  through  a  useless  expenditure  of 
strengfth  and  nervous  energy,  but  by  rendering-  the  draft  of  the  whole 
team  unsteady  it  will  needlessly  increase  the  work  and  fatigue  of  the 
other  horses. 

ADJUSTING  OF  HARNESS 

The  importance  of  the  proper  adjustment  of  the  artillery  harness  can- 
not be  over-estimated.  An  artillery  horse  that  cannot  be  used  in 
draft,  due  to  sore  shoulders  or  neck,  is  of  little  value  to  the  battery. 
The  service  is  now  receiving  breast  collars,  and  it  is  believed  the  breast 
collar  will  give  satisfaction  with  the  large  number  of  inexperienced  men 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  141 

now  in  the  field  artillery.  It  also  has  the  advanta.^e  of  beiii^i"  able  to  be 
adjusted  to  a  horse  within  a  few  seconds,  while  the  steel  collar  required 
twenty  minutes.  A  badly  fitting-  steel  collar  could  ruin  a  horse's  shoul- 
der in  a  few  hours'  hard  draft,  while  the  breast  collar  will  probably 
cause  less  damage. 

In  all  the  adjustment  of  harness,  bear  in  mind  that  any  improperly 
adjusted  part  will  worry  the  horse  and  thus  tend  to  wear  him  out  and 
cause  loss  of  flesh. 

ADJUSTMENT  OF  BREAST  COLLAR 

The  breast  collar  should  be  adjusted  as  high  as  possible  on  the  horse's 
chest  without  there  being-  any  tendency  to  choke  him  by  ])ressing 
against  the  wind-pipe.  This  collar  can  be  lowered  or  raised  within  nar- 
row limits  to  relieve  galls  and  sores  that  may  occur  on  new  horses  when 
put  in  hard  draft  before  the  shoulder  and  breast  have  a  chance  to 
harden. 

Taking  it  reasonably  the  BREAST  COLLAR  cannot  be  too  high; 
if  it  is  put  on  high  to  start  with  there  is  a  much  smaller  chance  of  gal- 
ling. This  is  much  better  than  starting  with  it  low  and  heightening  it 
when  you  have  got  a  gall. 

COLLAR  STRAP 

No  adjustment;  should  be  loose.  It  is  only  there  to  prevent  the 
collar  from  striking-  the  horse  behind  the  ears  when  he  lowers  his  head. 

BLANKET 

The  blanket  should  be  carefully  folded  and  examined  to  see  that  there 
are  no  wrinkles  or  bunches  in  it.  It  should  be  equally  divided  on  both 
sides  of  the  horse  and  placed  far  enough  forward  so  that  when  the 
saddle  is  in  place,  about  one  inch  projects  in  rear  of  the  rear  end  of  the 
side  bars  of  the  saddle.  All  blankets  have  a  tendency  to  Avork  to  the 
rear,  so  that  after  a  short  distance  is  traveled,  blankets  placed  in  this 
position  will  soon  be  evenly  distributed  under  the  saddle. 

It  is  of  great  importance  to  raise  it  well  into  the  fork  of  the  saddle. 
When  the  saddle  is  on  the  horse's  back  be  certain  that  you  can  see  day- 
light through  from  back  of  saddle  to  front. 


142 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 
Holding  Up  and  Holding  Down  Straps 


Figure  22.  Holding  down  strap,  used  on  lead  and  swing  steel  collar 
harness,  to  break  the  line  of  trace  to  the  trace  toggle  of  the  horse  in  rear 
sufficiently  to  place  the  line  of  draft  through  the  hame  tug  normal  to  the  line 
of  shoulder. 


Figure  23.  Holding  up  strap,  used  on  wheel  steel  collar  harness,  to  break 
the  line  of  trace  from  hame  tug  to  mogul  spring,  thus  allowing  tlie  hue  of 
draft  through  the  hame  tug  to  be  normaT  to  the  line  of  shoulder. 


Figure  24.     Holding  up  strap  on 
of  which  is  to  make  the  pull  on  the  collar 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  .    143 

Backstrap:  The  backstrap  shoukl  be  adjusted  so  that  when  the  sad- 
dle and  crupper  are  in  their  proper  places,  the  flat  of  the  hand  can  be 
held  vertically  between  the  backbone  and  the  backstrap. 

Hip  and  Loin  Straps  for  Lead  and  Swing:  The  hip  and  loin  straps  on 
the  lead  and  swin.Li"  horses  should  be  adjusted  so  that  when  the  horses 
are  in  draft  the  trace  loops  will  hang-  about  ^  inch  below  the  traces. 
Their  function  is  to  sup])ort  the  traces  when  the  animals  are  not  in 
draft. 

Breeching:  The  bod}^  strap  of  the  breechin.c:  is  adjusted  so  that  the 
rear  part  (i)art  below  the  tail)  is  about  four  inches  below  the  i)omt  ot 
the  buttocks  ;  the  front  part  wdiere  the  side  straps  fasten,  is  adjusted  to 
hang-  at  the  heig-ht  of  the  stifle.  In  other  words,  the  body  strap  of  the 
breeching  slants  down  toward  the  front.  The  reason  for  this  adjust- 
ment is  so  as  to  interfere  as  little  as  possible  wuth  the  movement  of  the 
hind  legs  when  the  breeching  comes  in  play.  If  the  body  strap  is  too 
low  behind  it  gives  a  greater  lever  arm  on  the  hind  legs,  and  materially 
interferes  with  their  movement.  If  too  high  most  of  the  strain  comes 
on  the  hip  straps  and  not  on  the  body  strap.  Also  the  side  straps  bear 
hard  ag-ainst  the  barrel  of  the  horse  and  cause  sores.  If  too  low,  the 
front  hip  strap  is  always  slack  and  the  body  strap  is  entirely  held  up  by 
the  rear  hip  strap  which  is  not  strong  enough  to  bear  all  the  strain  by 
itself. 

Traces:  The  traces  of  the  lead  and  swing  allow  of  small  changes  of 
length,  but  as  a  general  jiroposition  it  is  believed  best  to  have  all  traces 
shortened  as  much  as  possible.  This  is  the  proper  adjustment  in  all 
but  exceptional  cases  (horses  that  are  very  long)  and  has  the  advantage 
of  not  having,  through  carelessness,  traces  of  difl^erent  lengths  placed 
on  the  same  horse.  The  average  horse  in  a  team  can  exert  a  pull  on 
the  traces  of  about  250  pounds.  If  no  holding-  down  straps  are  used,  the 
force  on  the  traces  is  in  a  nearly  horizontal  direction,  while  the  shoulder 
of  the  avera^ge  horse  makes  an  angle  of  about  16  degrees,  to  the  vertical, 
giving  an  upward  component  of  about  70  pounds  which  causes  the  col- 
lar to  ride  ui^ward  and  the  upward  component  being  transferred  to  his 
belly  through  the  hold  down  straps.  This  pull  with  properly  fitted  col- 
lar will  choke  any  horse  on  a  long  hard  pull.  The  direction  of  drop  of 
the  trace  where  it  fastens  to  the  collar  should  be  perpendicular  to  the 
line  of  the  shoulder  (not  to  the  front  face  of  the  collar).  This  is  accom- 
plished by  putting  the  horse  in  draft  and  regulating  the  length  of  the 
"holding  down  strap"  so  that  this  direction  is  obtained.  The  wheel 
traces,  due  to  the  downward  component  of  the  pull  of  the  swing  traces, 
are  pulling  on  the  wheel  collar  at  an  angle  below  the  perpendicular. 
This  makes  the  wheel  horses  sustain  considerable  pressure  on  their 
necks  when  the  team  is  in  draft,  besides  the  weig-ht  of  the  neck-yoke, 
collar  and  pole.  The  pressure  due  to  the  downward  component  of  the 
pull  of  the  swing-  and  hind  traces  can  be  overcome  as  follow^s  :  Place  an 
extra  strai)  through  the  stirrup  strap  squares  and  the  traces ;  put  the 
team  in  draft  and  adjust  the  length  of  this  strap  so  that  the  tugs  of  the 
wheel  collars  are  pulling  in  a  direction  perpendicular  to  the  slope  of  the 


144 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


!^  M 


la^ 


^ 


^      V  ^ 

'"; 

^ 

^#-^ 
i 

Figures  6  and  7,     Traces  should  clear  trace  loops  by  one-half  inch  when 
horse  is  in  draft. 


FiL^iire  S.  The  crupper  dock  is  adjusted  evenly  on 
either  side  so  that  the  rounded  center  part,  and  not  the 
flat  ends,  will  come  under  the  dock.  Tliis  will  ])revent 
chafing. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  145 

horse's  shoulder.  The  extra  piessure  phiced  upon  the  saddle  by  this 
strap  has  never  been  known  to  produce  sore  backs  and  the  pressure  is 
only  exerted  when  the  lead  and  svvinj;"  ])airs  are  in  draft.  With  breast 
collars  no  "holding  down  strains"  are  needed,  and  the  direction  of  the 
pull  of  the  trace  takes  care  of  itself. 

Neck  Yokes:  In  the  wheel  pair  holding'  uj)  straps  are  needed  and 
should  be  so  adjusted  that  the  chain  from  the  trace  to  the  breast  collar 
pulls  in  a  horizontal  direction.  This  prevents  any  downward  pull  on 
the  neck  and  prevents  the  breaking'  down  of  the  breast  collar  which 
otherwise  will  occur. 

The  breast  straps  should  be  so  adjusted  that  the  pole  is  carried  hori- 
zontally. If  too  low,  the  pole  has  more  tendency  to  thrash,  if  too  high 
the  martingale  rubs  between  the  forelegs  and  produces  sores. 

Side  Straps :  The  length  of  the  martingale  and  side  straps  should  be 
such  that  when  the  wheelers  are  in  draft  and  at  an  extended  trot,  the 
breeching  does  not  interfere  with  the  movement  of  the  hind  legs.  It 
should  be  as  tight  as  possible  under  these  conditions.  The  position  of 
the  safe  above  the  ring  in  the  martingale  must  be  so  adjusted  that  when 
the  horse  is  holding  back,  it  will  not  come  in  contact  with  the  loop  on 
the  cincha.  This  can  be  accomplished  by  the  combined  adjustment  of 
the  side  straps  and  the  martingale  cincha  strap.  If  not  adjusted  in  this 
manner  it  will  pull  the  girth  forward  and  will  also  often  catch  in  the 
cincha  loop  and  cause  constant  pressure  on  the  body  strap  of  the 
breeching. 

To  test  the  FITTING  OF  BRFECHING,  stand  behind  the  horse 
and  pull  the  breeching  so  that  the  breast  collar  comes  against  the 
horse's  shoulders  as  in  draft ;  if  you  can  get  the  breadth  of  your  hand 
JUST  round  between  the  breeching  and  horse  you  will  find  the  fitting 
for  tightness  just  right. 

Bridle,  (Snaffle  Bit)  :  The  crown  piece  and  brow  band  should  be 
long  enough  to  prevent  chafing  of  the  ears.  It  is  often  found  that  with 
large  headed  horses  these  two  pieces  are  not  long  enough  and  in  that 
case  new  ones  should  be  made.  The  cheek  pieces  should  be  so  adjusted 
that  the  snaffle  bit  comes  up  in  the  corners  of  the  horse's  mouth,  but 
does  not  wrinkle  the  lips.  The  throat-latch  should  always  be  loose  so 
that  there  is  no  danger  of  choking  the  horse.  The  coupling  rein  should 
be  long  enough  so  that  when  turning  to  the  right,  when  the  off  horse  is 
ahead  of  the  near  horse,  there  will  be  no  tendency  to  pull  the  head  side- 
ways. An  even  bearing  on  the  horse's  mouth  with  the  LEADING 
REIN  is  important  both  for  driver  and  for  the  comfort  of  the  horse : 
let  the  off  horse's  head  be  straight,  it  is  more  comfortable  for  him  and 
avoid  uneven  draft. 

Traces,  Length:  There  is  no  adjustment  for  length  of  wheel  traces. 
The  lead  and  swing  traces  allow  of  adjustment  in  length,  but  in  order 
to  prevent  traces  of  different  lengths  being  used  on  the  same  horse,  it 
is  found  the  best  results  are  obtained  by  shortening  all  traces  as  much 
as  possible,  so  as  to  fit  length  of  horse. 

TRACES  must  be  horizontal  Tto  allow  "even"  draft). 


146 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


Good  Draft 


PRINCIPLES  OF  DRAFT 

(Acknowledgment  is   made   to   Colonel   Wm.    P.    Ennis,    F.    A.) 

In  the  discussion  of  the  principles  of  draft  as  applied  to  the  artillery 
team,  it  is  necessary  to  consider:  (First)  the  construction  of  the  Artil- 
lery Carriage:  (Second)  the  physical  conformation  of  the  horse  as  a 
mechanical  device. 


THE  CONSTRUCTION   OF  THE  ARTILLERY   CARRIAGE 

In  the  construction  of  field  gun  carriages  it  is  considered  that  seven 
hundred  pounds  dead  weight  is  the  maximum  load  each  horse  can  pull 
under  severe  conditions,  that  two  hundred  and  fifty  pounds  horizontal 
pull  is  the  greatest  average  that  can  be  obtained  from  each  horse  in  a 
six  horse  team. 

Within  limits  the  higher  the  wheel  the  easier  the  draft.  The  width 
of  the  tire  also  has  an  appreciable  eiTect  in  the  resistance  offered  to 
different  kinds  of  roadbed. 

The  length  of  recoil  of  the  gun  and  the  stability  of  the  carriage  during 
firing  are  also  very  important  considerations. 

After  a  series  of  experiments  covering  all  these  subjects  the  Ord- 
nance Department  has  decided  on  a  fifty-six  inch  wheel  with  a  3-inch 
tire  as  the  most  advantageous  for  the  3-inch  field  carriage. 

In  rolling  friction  the  force  applied  should  be  parallel  to  the  direction 
of  motion.  With  the  56-inch  wheel,  the  wheel  trace  by  itself  makes  an 
angle  of  about  8°  with  the  horizontal  but  the  pull  of  the  lead  horses 
ahead  decrease  this  angle  to  about  6°. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  147 


THE  PHYSICAL  CONFORMATION   OF  THE   HORSE, 
AS  A  MECHANICAL  DEVICE 

The  power  of  the  horse  to  move  loads  is  accomplished  by  the  animal 
pushing  against  the  collar  which  is  connected  to  the  carriage  by  the 
traces.  The  greater  part  of  the  force  of  propulsion  comes  from  the 
hind  legs,  through  the  back  to  the  shoulders,  and  a  smaller  amount 
from  the  front  legs  to  the  shoulders. 

A  certain  amount  of  push,  depending  upon  the  weight  of  the  animal, 
acts  through  the  center  of  gravity  by  the  horse  leaning  forward  against 
the  collar.  This  last  force  is  that  due  to  the  animal's  weight  and  is  not 
muscular  force.  We  thus  hav^e  three  forces  acting,  the  hind  legs,  the 
fore  legs,  and  a  component  of  the  animal's  weight  acting  through  the 
center  of  gravity.  The  center  of  gravity  of  the  horse  is  approximately 
at  the  intersection  of  the  vertical  line  passing  through  the  eighth 
dorsal  vertibrae  and  a  horizontal  plane  passing  through  the  points  of 
the  shoulders. 

From  this  we  can  see  that  when  the  horse  leans  forward  in  draft  the 
center  of  gravity  is  in  the  front  of  the  mean  position  of  contact  of  the 
feet  with  the  ground. 

A  line  from  the  mean  position  of  the  hind  legs  with  the  ground  to  the 
center  of  the  shoulder  blade  will  represent  the  direction  of  the  resultant 
force  exerted  by  the  hind  legs  and  a  line  from  the  mean  position  of  the 
fore  legs  to  the  center  of  the  horse's  shoulder  blade,  the  resultant  force 
exerted  by  the  fore  legs.  From  an  inspection  of  the  skeleton  of  the 
horse,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  resultant  direction  of  these  three  forces 
is  approximately  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  the  shoulder  blade. 

Considering  the  horse  alone  the  line  of  draft  should  then  be  perpen- 
dicular to  the  line  of  the  shoulder  at  its  middle  point.  The  shoulder 
blade  rocks  back  and  forth  as  the  horse  moves  his  fore  legs.  The  center 
of  motion  of  the  shoulder  blade  is  about  at  its  center.  If  the  trace  is  at- 
tached above  or  below  this  point,  whenever  that  half  moves  forward 
there  is  a  heavy  pull  trying  to  limit  its  motion.  It  is  the  same  principle 
as  if  you  tried  to  pull  some  object  with  the  strap  around  both  knees. 
When  fastened  to  the  center  of  the  shoulder,  however,  the  pressure  is 
still  there,  but  there  is  nothing  tending  to  limit  the  forward  movement 
of  the  lower  part  of  the  shoulder. 

While  we  see  that  the  construction  of  the  carriage  compels  almost 
horizontal  draft,  the  conformation  of  the  horse  and  the  necessity  of  pro- 
tecting the  shoulders  from  injury  must  control  the  direction  of  pull 
from  the  shoulder.  This  is  accomplished  by  the  "holding  down  strap" 
used  on  swing  and  lead  teams  and  by  the  "holding  up  strap"  on  the 
wheel  horse.  This  applies  to  steel  collar.  Due  to  the  manner  of  mak- 
ing the  breast  collar  and  the  necessity  for  preventing  interference  with 
movement  of  shoulders  and  sore  shoulders  due  to  any  downward  pull, 
the  pull  should  be  horizontal.  The  lead  and  swing  pairs  are  usually 
about  the  same  size,  making  the  pull  on  these  two  pair  practically  hori- 
zontal and  since  this  is  true,  no  holding  down  straps  are  required  on  the 


148  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

lead  and  swings  pair.     The  holding  up  strap  is  necessary  to  make  the 
pull  horizontal  on  wheel  pair. 

A  t-eam  usually  consists  of  not  less  than  three  pairs.  The  leading 
pair  is  called  the  lead  pair ;  the  one  attached  to  the  carriage  the  wheel 
pair;  the  pair  between  these  two  the  swing  pair.  When  there  are  two 
pairs  between  the  lead  and  wheel  pairs,  the  pair  next  behind  the  lead 
pair  is  called  the  lead  swing;  the  other  the  wheel  swing  pair.  When 
there  are  five  pairs  the  one  between  the  lead  swing  and  the  wheel  swing 
is  called  the  middle  swing  pair. 

THE  TEAM 
% 

The  first  horses  to  be  hitched  should  be  the  two  wheel-horses  which, 
up  to  this  point,  have  shown  the  c|uietest  disposition.  A  field  wagon 
with  regular  driving  harness  is  the  best  vehicle  to  hitch  to,  but  if  this  is 
not  available,  any  of  the  carriages  can  be  used,  with  driving  reins  of 
rope.  A  half-inch  rope  should  run  from  the  wagon,  through  a  ring  on 
the  trace  about  two  feet  from  the  collar,  to  a  strap  around  the  fetlock  of 
the  outside  foreleg  of  each  horse.  Each  of  these  ropes  should  be  held 
by  a  man  on  the  wagon.  If  a  horse  misbehaA-es,  the  man  holding  the 
rope  should  pull  hard  on  it,  thereby  raising  the  outer  foot.  Deprived 
of  the  use  of  one  leg,  the  most  unruly  horse  cannot  go  far.  As  soon  as 
the  horse  becomes  quiet  again,  the  tension  is  released  and  he  is  allowed 
to  use  the  leg  unless  he  again  misbehaves,  ^^'hen  one  horse  becomes 
tractable,  he  should  be  used  under  the  saddle  to  break  the  off  horses 
and  the  new  near  horses. 

The  lead  horses  should  now  be  broken,  the  gentlest  ones  being 
tried  first  in  the  off  wheel  and  then  in  the  near  lead.  Wlien  the  near 
leader  works  satisfactorily  the  off  leader  can  be  easily  broken  in  the  off 
lead  position. 

When  the  wheelers  and  leaders  are  working  quietly,  the  swing  ani- 
mals can  be  hitched  in  the  team,  a  near  leader  being  used  for  a  near 
swing  until  the  near  swing  has  been  tried  out  in  the  off  swing  position 
and  is  working  quietly.  The  most  difficult  horse  should  be  the  last  one 
hitched,  and  should  then  l)e  placed  in  the  off  swing  with  five  reliable 
horses  in  the  other  positions.  Tf  he  is  a  very  fractious  animal,  the  leg 
rope  should  be  used  on  him  and  the  ro]ie  han(lled  by  a  man  on  the  car- 
riage. 

A  halter-rope  from  the  halter  of  the  off  horse,  fastened  amund  the 
pommel  of  the  near  saddle,  was  found  to  be  advantageous,  in  that  it 
])revented  the  breaking  of  the  coupling  reins,  and  avoided  injury  to  the 
mouths  of  obstre])erous  horses. 

If  some  of  the  horses  refuse  to  move  when  first  hitched,  men  should 
be  ordered  to  lead  them,  getting  them  to  move  by  gentle  handling,  and, 
if  necessary,  the  carriage  should  be  moved  by  hand  until  the  horses  are 
well  started.  Whipping  or  any  kind  of  roughness  should  not  be  toler- 
ated. Never  forget  that,  if  properly  handled,  about  99  per  cent,  of 
horses  will  willingly  obey  as  soon  as  they  understand  what  is  desired. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  149 

PAIRING  AND  TEAMING  DRAFT  HORSES 

Your  draft  horses  should  be  sized  in  corral,  and  paired  according 
to  weight  and  color  as  far  as  possible. 

Good  practice  is  to  first  work  to  escort  wagon  in  pairs.  Timid  or 
vicious  mounts  can  best  be  broken  alongside  steady  trained  draft 
horses,  and  in  teams  place  such  animals  in  the  swing  pair  where  they 
can  do  least  harm. 

After  pairing,  the  team  can  then  be  matched  up  according  to  rules 
of  pairing,  placing-  heaviest  and  strongest  pullers  from  rear  to  front. 
The  lead  pair  should  be  not  necessarily  light,  but  handy,  mobile 
animals. 

Special  attention  must  be  paid  to  length  of  stride,  disposition  and 
willingness  in  draft  of  animals. 

Drivers  must  be  made  to  appreciate  the  fact  that  every  sore,  every 
injury,  every  abrasion  of  the  skin,  is  due  to  a  certain  definite  cause 
which,  if  removed,  can  produce  no  further  efifect.  If  ill-fitting  harness 
has  escaped  the  notice  of  a  driver  while  his  horses  were  at  work,  any 
injurv  caused  thereby  must  not  escape  his  notice  at  the  next  stables. 
FAILURE  TO  DISCOVER  AND  REPORT  SUCH  INJURY  AT 
ONCE  TO  THE  INSTRUCTOR  OR  TO  THE  CHIEF  OF  SEC- 
TION IS  A  NEGLECT  CALLING  FOR  DISCIPLINARY  COR- 
RECTION. 

Injuries  due  to  the  harness  must  be  discovered  in  their  very  begin- 
ning and  at  once  reported  to  the  ofificer  in  charge  of  the  horses.  That 
officer  then  performs  his  duty  unsatisfactorily  if  he  lacks  ingenuity 
and  skill  to  modify  or  correct  the  fit  of  the  harness  so  as  to  remove  the 
cause  of  the  injury. 

It  is  only  by  constant  attention  on  the  part  of  all  concerned,  drivers, 
chiefs  of  section,  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  horses, 
and  the  captain — that  the  animals  of  a  battery  can  be  kept  up  to  their 
work  without  more  or  less  prolonged  periods  of  enforced  idleness  due 
to  harness  injuries. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

GOLDEN  RULE:  NEVER  LET  YOUR  HORSES  KNOW 
THAT  THEY  ARE  UNABLE  TO  PITLL  ANY  LOAD  ON  ANY 
GRADE. 

Never  let  a  horse  lunge  into  a  collar,  as  this  bruises  his  shoulder  and 
will  probably  make  him  fear  the  collar.  Do  not  expect  the  young  horse 
to  pull  immediately;  if  he  will  walk  along  quietly,  it  is  all  that  can  be 
expected.  At  the  end  of  a  week,  the  average  horse  will  come  to  the 
collar  nicely,  a  little  encouragement  being  all  that  is  required.  Bear  in 
mind  that  it  is  always  easy  to  make  a  horse  pull,  but  that  it  is  very  diffi- 
cult to  prevent  a  too-free  horse  from  working  too  hard.  Each  horse 
must  be  required  to  do  his  share  of  the  work. 


ISO 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 
Driver's  Reins 


w 

\ 

^^b|Lm,   -  «&^BIi^ 

^M 

K 

w 

1) 

Figure  21.  Driver  holding  the  reins. 
Reins  of  near  horse  and  the  end  of  the 
lash  on  off  rein,  in  left  hand.  Right 
hand  grasping  ofif  rein  between  left  hand 
and  lead  rein  roller.  End  of  lash  falls 
on  the  near  side;  bight  of  near  reins  fall 
on  the  off  side. 


DRIVING 


In  considering  driving  it  is  necessary  to  bear  in  mind  that  the  horse 
has  but  one  idea  at  a  time.  This  fact  is  a  great  assistance  in  making 
horses  do  things  that  they  believe  they  cannot  do  or  do  not  want  to  do. 

It  is  also  necessary  to  realize  that  the  horse  is  not  naturally  obstinate 
and  that  90%  of  them  are  willing  to  do  whatever  is  required  of  them  as 
soon  as  they  understand  what  is  wanted.  The  so-called  obstinate  or 
balking  animals  have  been  made  so  by  bad  treatment  or  improper 
training.    The  horse  is  also  one  of  the  easiest  animals  to  t-rain. 

It  cannot  be  too  strongly  emphasized  that  kindness  and  patience  will 
accomplish  your  object  in  much  shorter  time  and  with  infinitely  better 
results  than  by  roughness  and  brutality. 

THE  DRIVER 

Seat:  The  driver  should  sit  squarely  in  the  saddle,  body  erect, 
buttocks  slightly  forward,  not  touching  center  of  saddle,  lower  ex- 
tremity of  the  back  slightly  curved  to  the  rear,  but  this  does  not  mean 
that  the  backbone  is  curved  to  the  rear  throughout  its  length  and  that 
the  driver  is  slouching  in  the  saddle.  Shoulders  should  be  carried  back, 
head  up,  eyes  to  the  front.  The  body  should  be  flexible,  but  this  does 
not  mean  slouching  which  one  so  often  sees  in  riders  who  fail  to  appre- 
ciate the  difference  between  it  and  flexibility. 

It  is  a  lesser  fault  to  be  too  stiff  than  to  be  slouchy  as  in  this  latter 
case  the  buttocks  are  bound  to  rest  against  the  saddle  and  thus  place 
undue  weight  upon  the  rear  end  of  the  saddle  bars.  This  causes  sore 
backs  under  the  rear  part  of  the  saddle.  The  upper  leg  should  hang 
naturally  in  the  position  that  is  most  comfortable  and  in  which  you 
have  the  best  grip  upon  the  horse. 

The  lower  leg  should  be  vertical,  heels  slightly  lower  than  the  ball 
of  the  foot,  calves  pressing  against  the  sides  of  the  horse.  In  other 
words  the  leg  should  grip  the  horse  from  saddle  to  lower  part  of  the 
calf. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  l5l 


MANAGEMENT  OF  PAIR 


Do  not  attempt  to  guide  off  horse  to  left  or  right  with  off  reins. 

The  driver  is  responsible  for  the  proper  handling  of  his  pair.  The 
near  or  saddle  horse  is  controlled  by  the  reins,  spurs,  and  legs  of  the 
driver,  the  off  horse  by  the  reins,  whip  and  voice.  The  near  horse  is 
piade  to  move  to  left  or  right  by  the  neck  rein,  not  direct  rein.  The 
off  horse  will  follow  near  horse.  With  properly  trained  horses  the 
whip  and  spur  are  not  necessary.  And  with  the  number  of  inex- 
perienced men,  it  is  best  to  forbid  their  use  entirely. 

The  gait,  at  which  you  are  traveling,  whether  at  drill  or  marching, 
governs  to  a  large  extent  the  handling  of  your  pair.  The  driver  must 
be  alert  at  all  times,  ready  at  any  moment  to  change  the  gait  of  the 
pair. 

He  must  constantly,  keep  his  eyes  on  the  pair  and  column  ahead 
and  regulate  his  gait  accordingly.  For  instance  if  he  sees  the  column 
slowing  down  ahead  of  him,  he  must  slow  down  his  pair  so  that  he 
will  not  jam  up  on  the  carriage  ahead  of  him.  In  the  same  way  if  the 
column  in  front  is  extending  the  driver  must  increase  the  gait  of  his 
pair  before  he  loses  distance. 

•  It  is  most  important  that  the  leading  driver  of  the  guiding  team 
keep  a  uniform  gait.  The  driver,  at  all  times,  except  when  in  hard 
draft,  or  when  on  road  marches  at  a  walk,  should  have  a  slight  feel  of 
the  mouths  of  his  horses.  When  in  hard  draft  where  the  footing  is  good 
the  horses  should  be  allowed  to  take  their  heads,  (give  them  a  loose 
rein)  as  a  horse  cannot  pull  properly  unless  he  can  put  his  nose  well 
to  the  front.    If  necessary  drop  reins  entirely. 

When  at  a  walk  on  road  marches  the  horses  should  be  allowed  a 
loose  rein  in  order  to  rest  them.  The  exception  to  this  rule  is  when 
in  a  hard  pull  on  slippery  ground  the  horse  needs  slight  support  from 
the   reins. 

The  driver  should  never  keep  a  constant  pull  on  the  reins  as  by  doing 
so  he  will  stop  the  circulation  in  the  bars  of  the  mouth  and  the  bars 
then  become  insensitive  to  pressure  If  necessary  to  keep  a  horse  back, 
do  it  by  give  and  take  on  the  reins  and  not  by  a  constant  pull.  Pulling 
steadily  on  a  horse's  mouth  is  a  common  fault  and  must  always  be 
watched  for  and  corrected. 

The  off  horse,  as  a  general  rule,  should  be  handled  by  the  reins  held 
in  the  right  hand,  the  near  horse  b}'-  the  reins  held  in  the  left  hand.  The 
lash  of  off  horse's  rein  may  be  held  in  left 'hand. 

The  drivers  should  watch  the  amount  of  work  their  animals  are 
doing  and  require  them  to  do  only  their  just  share.  By  watching  the 
traces  ahead  of  him,  the  driver  can  tell  whether  the  pair  ahead  is  pull- 
ing. By  watching  the  tug  on  the  collar  of  his  off  horse  he  can  tell 
whether  that  animal  is  doing  his  part.  In  a  short  experience  a  driver 
can  tell  from  the  movement  of  his  saddle  horse  how  much  he  is  pulling. 
It  requires  constant  supervision  and  instruction  on  the  part  of  the  offi- 
cers and  non-commissioned  officers  to  teach  drivers  to  drive  properly. 


152  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

If  left  alone  one  driver  will  make  his  near  horse  do  all  the  work  while 
another  will  require  his  off  horse  to  do  all  the  pulling  and  his  saddle 
horse  will  loaf.  They  must  all  be  required  to  work  equally.  If  your 
pair  is  pulling  too  much  hold  them  back  until  the  traces  in  front  of  you 
are  taut.  I 

The  whip  and  spur  should  be  used  with  great  caution  and  never 
violently,  the  whip  by  a  wrist  motion  only  and  on  the  off  side  of  the  off 
horse  and  in  rear  of  the  blanket.  The  less  the  whip  and  spur  are  used 
by  the  majority  of  the  drivers  of  field  artillery  the  better  pulling  bat- 
tery you  will  have.  Never  allow  the  whip  to  be  used  on  any  horse  of  a 
stalled  team  as  it  will  only  make  matters  worse  and  make  the  team 
much  more  liable  to  quit  on  the  next  pull.  Remember  to  never  use 
whip,  hand  or  foot  on  near  side  of  off  horse.  Any  such  treatment  will 
cause  the  off  horse  to  pull  away  from  near  horse.  The  best  position 
for  draft  is  with  both  horses  of  a  pair  working  close  together.  The 
voice  is  decidedly  the  best  aid  for  the  off  horse ;  teach  horse  to  move 
when  you  speak  to  him.  If  whip  is  used,  use  voice  at  same  time,  so 
that  horse  will  always  associate  these  two. 

Ditches:  In  driving  down  all  steep  slopes — take  the  slope  at  right 
angles,  otherwise  you  will  surely  turn  over  caisson  or  gun  carriages. 
In  negotiating  a  ditch,  all  drivers  hold  back  until  wheel  horses  are  in 
bottom  of  ditch,  then  lead  and  swing  move  out  at  an  increased  gait  to 
get  out  of  the  wheelers  way  and  to  get  into  collar  in  time  to  help  on 
the  pull  up  the  other  side. 

The  wheel  driver  is  responsible  for  the  movement  and  guidance  of 
his  carriage,  for  except  in  hard  pulls,  he  can  always  increase  the  gait 
of  his  pair  and  slack  the  traces  ahead  thus  obtaining  control  of  his  car- 
riage. In  a  hard  pull  the  wheel  pair  alone  is  not  capable  of  doing  this 
and  in  this  case  the  lead  driver  should  be  held  responsible  for  the 
guidance  of  the  carriage. 

STARTING  THE  TEAM 

Traces  at  all  times  should  be  stretched  when  the  team  is  halted. 
To  move  forward  the  pairs  should  be  gathered  by  their  drivers.  The 
near  horse  is  gathered  by  the  reins  and  legs  of  the  driver,  the  off  horse 
by  the  reins  and  voice.  At  the  command  MARCH  all  pairs  should 
move  out  together.  If  a  team  has  been  stalled  from  any  cause  and  the 
horses  are  more  or  less  up  in  the  air  and  will  not  make  a  fair  effort  to 
pull,  they  can  generally  be  persuaded  to  pull  again  by  the  following 
method  :  Back  all  horses  up  until  they  are  as  close  together  as  possible, 
then  move  the  lead  team  out  quietly  and  at  the  same  time  pass  them 
to  the  right ;  have  the  swing  driver  watch  the  lead  traces  and  as  soon 
as  they  start  to  tighten  he  should  move  his  pair  forward  going  over 
the  same  ground  that  the  lead  pair  passed  over;  the  wheel  driver 
watches  the  traces  of  the  swing  pair  and  moves  out  when  they  tighten. 
As  soon  as  all  traces  tighten  the  horses  must  be  required  to  give  their 
maximum  effort  by  use  of  the  aids  and  voice.     In  some  cases  due  to 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  .  153 

conditions  preventing  movement  to  right,  the  lead  pair  may  be  moved 
to  left,  and  accomplish  same  pnr]:)Ose. 

The  above  method  will  work  for  the  following  reasons — the  lead 
pair  has  taken  six  or  eight  steps  forward  before  any  j^ressure  conies 
on  their  shoulders,  the  swing  pair  three  or  four  and  the  wheel  pair  sees 
the  other  horses  going  to  the  front.  This  conveys  to  the  horse  the 
idea  that  everything  is  all  right  and  he  is  willing  to  try  again.  As  the 
pole,  being  turned  to  the  right,  gives  considerable  leverage  on  the 
hind  wheels,  the  horses  in  passing  to  the  right  come  into  the  collar 
more  gradually.  The  reason  for  going  to  the  right  is  that  it  is  very 
much  easier  to  control  the  ofif  horse  and  keep  him  in  the  collar  than 
it  would  be  in  moving  to  the  left.  It  is  impossible  to  control  the  off 
horse  in  draft  unless  he  is  working  close  to  the  near  horse.  If  there 
is  any  chance  that  the  team  cannot  pull  out  immediately,  use  the  can- 
noneers on  the  wheels  to  assist  the  horses. 

In  stopping  carriages  or  decreasing  their  gait  the  lead  and  swing 
drivers  must  remember  that  the  wheel  pair  have  the  carriage  to  stop 
and  for  that  reason  need  a  longer  distance  to  the  front  to  change  the 
gait  than  the  lead  and  swing  pairs  do.  Never  allow  sudden  changes 
of  gait  where  it  is  possible  to  avoid  it.  The  gait  in  a  hard  pull  should 
be  slow,  from  one  to  one  and  a  half  miles  per  hour.  Do  not  allow 
plunging  or  rushing  any  grade.  In  halting  or  decreasing  gait  of  a  car- 
riage, the  wheel  driver  should  slow  up  before  the  other  drivers  so  as 
to  tighten  traces. 

NECK  REINING 

The  horse  can  be  trained  to  neck-rein  by  the  following  method : 
He  should  be  taught  first  to  turn  on  the  forehand  to  right  and  to  left, 
a  light  tap  of  a  switch  being  used  to  augment  the  pressure  of  the  heel. 
When  the  horse  will  move  his  haunches  by  the  application  of  the  heel, 
the  neck-reining  proper  should  begin.  Turning  to  the  right  is  accom- 
plished by  carrying  the  left  rein  against  the  neck,  the  right  rein  being 
opened  wide,  the  right  heel  tapping  the  right  flank  of  the  horse.  If 
the  horse  fails  to  turn  to  the  right,  a  slight  jerk  should  be  given  to 
the  right  rein,  and  the  action  repeated  until  the  horse  obeys.  Turning 
to  the  left  is  taught  in  the  reverse  manner. 

BACKING 

In  teaching  a  horse  to  back,  the  trainer  mounts  and  takes  a  rein  in 
each  hand,  the  hands  being  placed  near  the  withers.  While  always 
keeping  a  light  pressure  on  the  bit,  the  pressure  should  be  varied  by 
rapid  oscillations  of  the  hands,  the  hands  m.oving  in  unison  so  that 
there  is  no  sawing  of  the  mouth.  The  legs  also  should  be  closed  on 
the  horse,  and  light  taps  of  the  heel  will  be  necessary  if  the  animal 
fails  to  take  a  step  backward  by  the  end  of  a  minute. 

As  soon  as  the  horse  takes  a  step  release  the  reins  and  reward  him, 
then  try  it  again.  When  the  horse  readily  responds  to  the  application 
of  the  reins,  the  oscillations  of  the  reins  must  be  worked  in  unison 


154  .  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

with  the  movement  of  the  forelegs,  the  force  being  applied  just  as  the 
feet  going'  to  the  rear  touched  the  ground  and  the  force  is  released  as 
the  front  foot  leaves  the  ground  on  its  way  to  the  rear. 

When  a  horse  becomes  proficient  in  backing  without  being  hitched, 
he  should  be  hitched.  He  will  probably  refuse  to  back,  due  to  the  pres- 
sure of  the  breediing.  Cannoneers  should  assist  in  backing  the  car- 
riage and  the  horse  gradually  taught  to  do  it. 

TO  STOP  A  CARRIAGE  OR  REDUCE  ITS  SPEED 

To  the  same  degree  that  efifort  is  made  to  avoid  abrupt  or  sudden 
starts,  so  also  should  effort  be  made  to  avoid  abrupt  or  sudden  stops 
or  reductions  of  speed.  In  stopping  the  carriage  the  drivers  hold  their 
horses  out  of  traction  and  stop  with  the  gradual  stopping  of  the  car- 
riage. The  wheel  driver  may,  when  desirable,  assist  in  stopping  the 
carriage  by  holding  his  horses  back  in  the  breeching.  The  brake,  if 
carefully  and  gradually  applied  so  as  not  to  jerk  the  horses,  is  of  great 
use  in  stopping  the  carriage  or  checking  its  speed.  The  lead  and 
swing  drivers  regulate  the  movements  of  their  pairs  by  those  of  the 
wheel  pair,  keeping  out  of  the  way,  but  avoiding  any  strain  on  the 
traces, 

TO  BACK  A  CARRIAGE 

The  wheel  driver  is  responsible  for  backing  the  carriage.  The  other 
drivers  must  give  him  complete  liberty  of  trace.  Both  horses  are 
reined  back  together,  quietly  and  steadily  according  to  the  principles 
outlined  in  TJie  Soldier  Mounted,  Vol.  IT.  F.  A.  D.  R. 

THE  BRAKE  AND  ITS  USE 

The  brake,  when  properly  handled,  is  most  useful  and  a  great  bene- 
fit to  the  wheel  horses.  Wheels  should  never  be  locked,  the  brake 
should  be  used  so  that  the  wheelers  will  not  be  required  to  help  hold 
back  the  carriage,  in  fact  a  very  slight  pull  by  the  wheeler  is  a  benefit 
to  them  in  going  down  hill.  Save  the  wheel  horses  as  much  as  pos- 
sible for  they  have  to  pull  and  hold  back  both,  and  do  considerably 
more  work  than  the  lead  and  swing.  Reason  for  not  locking  wheels  is 
that  if  they  are  locked,  the  wheel  will  be  acted  upon  by  sliding,  friction 
in  one  spot,  and  this  will  wear  out  the  tire  very  quickly. 

GAITS 

The  slow  walk  two  and  one  fourth  to  three  miles  per  hour.  Walk 
four  miles  per  hour.  Slow  trot  six  to  six  and  one-half  miles  per  hour. 
Trot  six  miles  per  hour.  Trot  out  ten  miles  per  hour.  Extended  trot 
twelve  miles  per  hour.     Gallop  twelve  miles  per  hour. 

MARCHES 

Length  of  marches  depends  largely  upon   the   character  of  the 
road,  the  number  and  slope  of  hills,  the  condition  of  the  animals  and  the 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  155 

number  of  hours  in  harness.  Artillery,  with  animals  in  g:ood  condi- 
tion, should  averag'e  twenty  miles  per  day.  Six  hours  in  harness  should 
be  considered  the  average  time  horses  should  be  kept  hitched.  Stand- 
ing: around  in  harness  is  about  as  tiresome  as  actual  marching".  As 
far  as  possible  marches  should  be  conducted  so  as  to  travel  fifty  min- 
utes and  rest  ten  minutes. 

The  drill  regulations  state  that  under  favorable  conditions  the  trot 
and  walk  should  alternate  in  the  ratio  1  to  3  in  regard  to  time.  Large 
horses  should  travel  at  a  slower  trot  than  light  ones.  A  1,300  pound 
horse,  with  g^ood  road  conditions  can  travel  at  a  slow  trot  (six  miles 
per  hour)  for  considerable  length  of  time.  A  slow  trot,  when  the  draft 
is  lig^ht,  does  not  fatigue  an  animal  when  a  normal  or  extended  one 
will  have  a  decided  effect.  Cannoneers  in  field  batteries  should  be 
required  to  walk  on  all  hills,  no  matter  how  slight,  and  only  be  allowed 
to  ride  going  down  hill  or  at  a  gait  faster  than  a  walk.  Do  not  let  them 
hold  on  to  carriag"es  while  walking  as  this  will  increase  the  pull  as  much 
if  not  more  when  ridingf  in  the  carriages. 

Field  batteries  in  good  condition  should  be  able  to  make  one  hundred 
miles  in  two  days  in  forced  marches  with  averag-e  road  conditions. 
They  should  be  rested  two  days  or  only  required  to  make  very  short 
marches  for  the  next  two  days.  In  the  recent  Mexican  trouble  two 
batteries  of  the  Sixth  Florida  Field  Artillery  marched  one  hundred 
and  twenty-six  miles  in  two  days  but  lost  quite  a  few  horses  in  doing 
so.  This  was  probably  due  to  the  fact  that  the  horses  were  not  hard- 
ened. It  is  a  good  illustration  of  the  necessity  for  Battery  Commanders 
to  keep  their  animals  in  condition  at  all  times. 

It  is  always  an  advantage,  conditions  permitting,  to  finish  the  march 
as  soon  as  possible.  This  is  less  fatiguing  for  both  men  and  animals. 
The  drivers  should  be  required  to  walk  for  certain  periods  of  the 
march,  as  this  rests  both  men  and  animals.  The  time  of  departure  or 
start  when  other  conditions  permit,  should  be  regulated  by  climatic 
conditions.  If  the  weather  is  cool  reveille  should  be  at  daylight  and 
the  march  start  one  hour  later.  In  hot  weather  when  the  temperature 
or  sun  have  detrimental  effect  on  both  men  and  animals  the  march 
should  be  completed  before  9:30  A.  M.  This  will  necessitate  a  start 
in  the  dark  but  a  battery  that  cannot  break  camp  Avithout  confusion 
in  the  dark  should  not  be  rated  as  a  battery. 

In  the  southern  states  in  mid  summer  and  in  the  Philippines  the 
sun  effects  animals  greatly.  But  the  same  animals  travel  rapidly  after 
sun  set  and  from  then  on  to  about  9  :30  the  next  morning,  while  in 
the  Philippines  when  permitted  to  do  so  troops  that  commenced  their 
marches  at  4  A.  M.  had  no  difficulty  in  traveling  a  distance  of  twenty 
miles  by  8  A.  M.  They  would  always  make  camp  between  9  and  10 
A.  M.  Troops  that  did  not  start  until  7  A.  M.  or  later,  caused  con- 
siderable suffering  among  their  animals  in  making  a  twenty  mile  march. 
They  could  not  travel  at  a  gait  faster  than  a  walk. 


Photo  by  Wat/ion.  Columbia.  X.  T. 


Rest.    Incorrect 


M 

fiifi 

M 

^ 

ilihi 

li^ 

B.W 

rffr 

vnTn 

rm 

E^ITT 

^w 

p.- 

•**^  If      1 

■- 

/'/lo^v  h,j   ]V„tson,  Columbia,  S.  C. 


Rest.    Correct 


Photo  by  Watfion,  Columbia,  S.  C 


The  Halt.     All  Wrong 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  157 

HINTS  ON  MARCH  DISCIPLINE 

1.  Do  you  realize  that  a  good  discipline  or  the  reverse  shows  up 
more  on  the  march  than  at  any  other  time? 

2.  Do  you  and  your  drivers  dismount  as  a  matter  of  course  when 
halted?  Do  you  realize  the  importance  of  getting  the  weight  off  the 
horse's  back  on  every  possible  opportunity?  All  mounted  men,  officers 
included,  should  walk  and  lead  at  intervals.  Do  you  see  that  drivers 
do  not  quit  their  teams,  but  remain  near  heads  of  their  horses?  Do  you 
allow  drivers  to  smoke  when  at  a  halt  of  not  over  10  minutes  duration? 

3.  Do  you  see  that  your  men  never  slouch  in  the  saddle? 

4.  When  on  the  march,  do  you  supervise  your  command  and  not 
always  ride  at  the  head?  See  that  your  chiefs  of  section  do  the  same. 
You  should  see  that  the  horses  are  being  properly  kept  up  in  draft,  that 
harness  is  properly  fitted  (this  often  becomes  apparent,  only  when  on 
the  march),  carriages  not  overloaded,  the  proper  balance  of  the  pole 
maintained  (this  can  not  be  done  if  the  men  are  allowed  to  ride  except 
in  their  places). 

5.  Do  you  see  that  your  horses  are  watered  and  fed  whenever  pos- 
sible on  the  march  and  that  girths  are  slackened? 

6.  Do  you  realize  that  a  horse  can  not  drink  its  fill  or  even  drink  com- 
fortably with  a  man  sitting  on  its  back,  or  with  a  bit  in  its  mouth? 

7.  Do  you  take  severe  action  in  all  cases  of  ill  treatment  of  horses? 

RESTS 

Drivers  are  required : 

1.  To  raise  the  collars  and  examine  the  shoulders  for  injuries,  report- 
ing any  discovered.  The  collars  may  be  unsnapped  and  laid  back  on 
the  saddle. 

2.  To  rub  the  hand  over  the  bearing  surface  of  the  collar  to  see  that 
it  is  clean  and  smooth. 

3.  With  a  cloth  to  wipe  the  perspiration,  if  any,  from  the  bearing 
surface  of  the  collar  and  from  the  shoulders. 

4.  On  marches,  or  when  the  draft  has  been  such  as  to  cause  steady 
and  constant  pressure  against  the  shoulders,  to  restore  and  stimulate 
the  circulation  in  them  by  hand  rubbing,  being  careful  on  finishing  to 
leave  the  hair  lying  smooth  and  flat. 

5.  To  look  over  and  adjust  such  parts  of  the  harness  as  need  it. 

6.  In  addition,  if  a  wheel  driver,  to  relieve  the  weight  on  the  necks  of 
his  horses  by  properly  placing  the  limber  or  pole  prop  ;  on  muddy  roads 
to  wipe  the  mud  off  the  martingales. 

INTERVALS  AND   DISTANCES 

Intervals  between — 

Pairs  in  line,  1  horse  length,  3  yards. 

Teams  in  line,  1  team  length,  3  yards  for  each  pair. 

Hitched  carriages  in  line,  1  hitched  carriage  length,  17  yards  for  a  3 
pair  team. 


.  \'. 


^^Hi^^i^E 


11 


'  I 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  159 

Distances  between — 

Pairs  in  column,  1  yard. 

Teams  in  column,  2  yards. 

Hitched  carriages,  about  2  yards,  or  such  that,  when  moved  by  the 
flank  the  intervals  will  be  as  above. 

Other  intervals  and  distances  are  as  prescribed  in  llie  Battery 
Mounted,  F.  A.  D.  R. 

TURNS  IN  DRAFT 

In  all  turns  in  draft  each  horse  of  the  team  should  be  doing  his  share 
of  the  work.  Each  pair  of  the  team  should  turn  on  the  same  ground. 
This  means  that  the  team  is  convexed  outward  during  the  turn  and  that 
each  inner  horse  of  a  pair  is  ahead  of  the  outer  horse.  The  traces  in  all 
but  sharp  turns  should  be  taut. 

Each  driver  has  to  keep  his  pair  outward  on  the  turn  and  especially 
the  wheel  driver.  In  order  to  keep  the  pole  outward  the  driver  must 
make  his  inner  horse  do  most  of  the  work  for  the  wheel  pair  during  the 
turn,  as  it  is  comparatively  easy  to  pull  the  pole  around  but  very  hard 
to  push  it  over.  In  making  sharp  turns  to  the  right  where  it  is  neces- 
sary to  keep  the  teams  bowed  outward,  it  is  often  necessary  to  use  the 
coupling  rein  of  the  ofif  horse  in  order  to  lead  the  off  horse  forward  and 
to  the  left.  The  off  horse,  when  very  far  behind,  may  also  be  led  for- 
ward by  the  coupling  rein,  but  as  soon  as  he  is  up  in  place  the  coupling 
rein  should  be  dropped  and  the  reins  taken.  These  are  the  only  two 
instances  in  which  the  coupling  rein  should  be  used.  Do  not  drive  with 
the  coupling  rein. 

Following  teams  must  make  the  turn  on  the  same  ground  as  the  team 
ahead.  This  means  that  the  lead  driver  goes  outside  the  track  of  the 
carriage  ahead  as  the  rear  wheels  of  this  carriage  turn  on  an  arc  of 
much  smaller  radius  than  the  team.  This  also  means  that  the  inner 
horse  of  each  pair  moves  on  an  arc  about  one  yard  outside  of  the  track 
of  the  outside  rear  wheel  of  the  carriage  ahead. 

In  making  sharp  turns  where  there  is  little  room  and  the  pull  is 
severe  the  pairs  will  be  unable  to  move  on  the  same  ground  and  the  turn 
must  be  made  as  follows :  The  lead  driver  moves  straight  to  the  front 
until  the  wheel  driver  arrives  at  the  place  to  turn ;  the  lead  driver  then 
turns  in  the  proper  direction  at  an  increased  gait  in  order  to  keep  the 
traces  taut,  the  swing  driver  follows  the  lead  driver  and  must  keep  his 
traces  in  draft.  The  necessity  for  the  increased  gait  of  the  lead  horses 
in  making-  the  turn  is  that  the  lead  animals  turn  on  an  arc  of  greater 
radius  than  the  wheel  horses  and  therefore  must  cover  greater  distances 
than  the  wheel  horses  and  in  the  same  interval  of  time.  This  applies  to 
sharp  right  angled  turns  where  it  is  necessary  to  go  through  a  very 
narrow  place. 

THE  LIMBER  TURN 

The  limber  turn  should  be  made  as  follows :  As  the  lead  driver 
comes  across  the  trail  he  should  look  back  and  as  soon  as  the  heads  of 
the  wheel  horses  come  opposite  the  end  of  the  lunette,  he  swings  his 


THE  LIMBER  TURN 

Figure  17  shows  the  team 
crossing  the  trail  at  right 
angles,  having  advanced  until 
tlie  withers  of  the  wheel  pair 
are  abreast  the  lunette.  At 
this  time  the  lead  and  swing 
pairs  begin  their  turn  to  the 
left  rear,  the  wheel  pair  ad- 
vancing until  the  hub  cap  is 
abreast  the  lunette,  as  shown 
in  Figure  18.  The  wheel  pair 
is  then  passed  to  the  left  and 
the  team  straightened  out, 
which  places  the  limber  and 
team  in  the  position  shown  in 
Figure  19,  the  pintle  being 
directly  above  the  lunette. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  161 

team  sharply  (more  than  90°)  away  from  the  carriage  and  when  oppo- 
site the  prolongation  of  the  trail,  straightens  his  team  to  the  rear  and 
halts.  The  swing  driver  turns  on  the  same  ground  as  the  lead  driver. 
The  wheel  driver  halts  his  team  at  the  command  UMBER  HALT 
given  by  the  gunner  or  No.  4.  He  then  passes  his  team  in  the  direction 
in  which  the  trail  points  turning"  the  limber  on  an  imaginary  fixed  pivot 
at  the  center  of  the  limber  axle.  This  method  is  easy  to  execute,  the 
horses,  except  the  wheelers,  walk  to  their  positions  and  there  is  no  lost 
time  in  the  movement. 

RECRUITS 

Recruits  can  be  taught  to  ride  by  mounting-  them  on  the  gentle 
horses,  and  fastening  the  reins  in  the  halter  squares  instead  of  the  bits. 
In  this  way,  the  horse's  mouth  wall  not  be  injured,  and  the  animals  will 
not  resent  so  much  having  the  recruits  on  their  backs.  The  riding 
should  take  place  in  a  corral,  which  may  be  improvised  with  carriages. 
I  believe  that  with  a  few  experienced  men  to  form  a  nucleus  for  the 
enlisted  force,  the  horse  part  of  a  battery  can  be  put  in  shape  to  travel 
on  the  ordinary  road  in  a  month. 


TO  CONFIRM  IN  HORSES  A  WILLINGNESS  TO  PULL 

Almost  any  horse  can  be  trained  to  be  an  honest  and  willing  puller. 
Through  ignorance,  lack  of  judgment,  bad  management,  or  laziness  on 
the  part  of  the  driver  he  can  far  more  easily  be  trained  to  be  a  shirker 
and  a  quitter.  A  horse  will  not  pull  freely  or  willingly  if  to  do  so  causes 
him  pain.  It  is  essential,  therefore,  that  his  harness,  especially  his  col- 
lar, fit  him  with  absolute  comfort;  that  his  shoulders  be  hardened 
through  careful  conditioning  and  rational  work  'and  are  therefore  not 
tender  or  sore ;  and  that  he  apply  his  weight  on  the  collar  slowly  and 
gradually,  without  sudden  starts  or  jerks  that  would  pound  and  bruise 
his  shoulders.  Even  though  all  of  the  above  conditions  are  favorable. 
a  horse  will  not  pull  unless  he  is  confirmed  in  the  belief  that  when  he 
applies  his  strength  the  load  behind  him  will  yield.  Thus  a  willing 
horse  may  be  hitched  to  an  immovable  object  and  within  a  few  minutes, 
especially  if  he  be  yelled  at  or  whipped,  be  transformed  into  a  sulker 
and  a  balker  that  onl}^  long,  patient  and  careful  handling  will  cure.  To 
allow  repeated  trials  and  failures  in  pulling  is  the  quickest  and  most 
effective  method  of  ruining  the  draft  efficiency  of  any  team.  It  must 
be  borne  in  mind  that  there  is  a  limit  to  the  draft  power  of  any  Artillery 
team  and  that  this  power,  due  to  the  tandem  method  of  hitching  is  even 
with  perfect  driving,  from  20  to  .SO  per  cent  less  than  the  sum  of  the 
powers  of  the  individual  horses.  A  team  should  never  be  given  deliber- 
ately a  task  that  is  clearly  beyond  its  strength.  It  is  right  and  proper 
in  order  to  train  a  team  and  to  develop  its  draft  power  to  a  maximum, 
to  give  it  from  day  to  day  or  week  to  w^eek  tasks  that  gradually  increase 
in  difficulty.  Such  tasks  will  occasionally  stop  the  team..  No  evil  re- 
sults will  follow  if  the  animals,  when  so  stopped,  are  permitted  to  rest 


162  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

quietly  for  a  few  minutes  and  recover  their  wind.  The  first  tendency 
of  the  inexperienced  noncommissioned  officer  or  driver  when  a  team 
stops  is  to  urge  it  forward  immediately.  This  is  exceedingly  wrong. 
The  horses  are  either  taking  an  absolutely  needed  rest  or  are  showing 
by  their  action  that  they  need  assistance.  While  the  horses  are  resting 
a  sufficient  number  of  cannoneers  with  drag  rope  should  be  brought  up 
so  that  when  the  signal  to  move  is  given  the  carriage  will  certainly 
move.  Such  a  practice  trains  the  horses  that  there  is  no  such  thing  as 
failure  or  defeat  in  a  pull  and  therefore  confirms  a  willingness  to  pull 
whenever  they  are  called  upon  to  do  so.  A  team  so  trained  may,  when 
it  has  become  hardened  to  its  work,  may  be  called  on  to  make  the  at- 
tempt to  pull  out  of  a  difficulty  unaided  unless  such  a  task  is  clearly  be- 
yond its  strength.  However,  if  the  attempt  fails  it  must  be  appreciated 
that  the  team  to  a  certain  extent  has  been  injured  and  that  for  some 
time  to  come  it  must  not  again  be  subjected  to  the  risk  of  failure.  A 
team,  trained  and  managed  in  accordance  with  these  principles,  can  al- 
ways be  counted  on  to  occasion  a  minimum  of  delay  to  a  battery  which 
encounters  difficulties  in  traiisport. 

DRIVING  UP  STEEP  SLOPES  AND  OVER 
DIFFICULT  GROUND 

In  order  to  exert  his  maximum  strength  when  in  a  difficult  pull,  the 
draft  horse  must  get  the  greatest  possible  weight  forward  and  into  the 
collar.  By  maintaining  a  low,  extended,  and  advanced  carriage  of  the 
head  and  neck  he  is  able  to  add  considerably  to  his  power  of  traction. 
He  should,  therefore,  be  allowed  full  freedom  of  rein  when  in  a  heavy 
pull  and  not  be  forced  to  fight  the  driver's  hand.  Because  a  horse  can 
exert  a  greater  power  of  traction  when  ridden,  it  is  often  advantageous 
when  in  a  difficult  pull  to  mount  cannoneers  on  the  off  horse.  When 
pulling  up  a  hill  the  drivers  should  lean  well  forward  and  should  en- 
courage their  horses  by  the  low  and  quiet  use  of  the  voice. 

The  most  favorable  gait  for  heavy  pulling  is  a  steady,  uniform  walk, 
with  every  horse  straight  in  his  collar  and  the  team  straight  from  lead 
to  wheel.  The  tendency  to  rush  a  hill  or  other  difficult  pull  must  be 
avoided.  Any  increase  of  speed  for  such  a  purpose  can  not  be  taken 
up  with  perfect  uniformity  by  all  the  horses  of  a  team  and  the  footing 
for  each  horse  is  rendered  more  uncertain  and  difficult.  This  causes 
undue  weight  to  come  upon  the  shoulders  of  some  while  none  at  all  may 
be  borne  by  others.  Uneven  draft  quickly  results,  often  to  the  point  of 
stalling  a  team.  In  going  over  a  V-shaped  ditch  unusual  effort  should 
be  made  to  keep  the  horses  at  a  steady  walk.  In  such  a  place  the  brake 
must  be  used  with  great  care,  so  that  the  traces  will  be  tight  and  the 
horses  in  draft  during  the  entire  crossing.  The  brake  should  be 
released  a  little  too  late  rather  than  too  soon,  for,  in  the  latter  case,  the 
carriage  rushes  forward  into  the  bottom  of  the  ditch,  where  it  stops,  and 
the  horses  on  again  coming  into  the  draft  are  given  a  violent  jerk. 

When  maneuvering  off  the  road,  steep  ascents  should  be  taken  in 
line,  to  avoid  checks.    When  on  a  road  or  track,  if  circumstances  per- 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  163 

mit,  the  battery  should  be  halted  at  the  foot  of  the  hill  and  carriages  or 
sections  sent  up  at  about  one  minute  intervals.  This  gives  opportunity 
for  the  teams  to  be  halted  to  rest  and  blow  at  the  top,  or,  if  the  hill  be 
a  long  one,  to  be  halted  a  number  of  times  during  the  ascent.  Each  car- 
riage or  section,  after  such  a  halt,  moves  out  in  time  for  the  carriage  or 
section  which  follows  to  halt  on  the  same  ground.  Cannoneers  instruct- 
ed to  follow  and  watch  a  carriage  in  difficult  draft,  may,  by  applying 
their  strength  at  the  moment  a  stop  seems  imminent,  prevent  the  car- 
riage from  stalling. 

When  a  carriage  has  been  stalled  it  may,  in  some  cases,  be  found  best 
to  have  cannoneers  first  back  it  for  a  few  feet,  in  order  to  put  both 
horses  and  carriage  on  more  advantageous  ground  from  which  to  make 
a  start. 

Cannoneers  should  be  instructed  and  regularly  practiced  in  assisting 
the  horses  by  working  at  the  wheel  and  along  ropes  attached  to  the  car- 
riages. Much  delay  and  confusion  on  the  march  may  be  avoided  by 
such  training.  To  avoid  interference  and  to  insure  teamwork,  attention 
should  be  given  to  the  spacing  of  the  men  along  the  rope.  Ropes  may 
be  attached  in  the  following  ways : 

(a)  For  ordinary  pulls  by  running  a  bowline  or  a  clove  hitch 
around  the  trail  of  the  carriage,  well  back  near  the  breech  of  the  gun. 

(b)  For  a  short,  hard  pull,  as  in  lifting  a  carriage  out  of  a  ditch,  by 
a  wheel  purchase.  To  use  a  rope  as  a  wheel  purchase :  With  one  end  a 
turn  is  taken  around  the  felloe  as  near  as  possible  to  the  ground ;  the 
rope  is  placed  over  the  short  end  so  as  to  hold  it  against  the  tire,  and  is 
then  laid  on  the  tire  and  passed  over  the  wheel  to  the  front.  The  rope 
should  be  so  placed  around  the  felloe  that  it  may  be  pulled  clear  of  the 
wheel  when  the  short  end  is  released  by  the  turning  of  the  wheel. 
Should  the  wheel  slip,  a  rope  may  be  wound  around  the  felloe  and  tire, 
with  turns  about  a  foot  apart  to  enable  the  wheel  to  get  a  grip. 

(c)  For  use  without  teams  or  when  it  is  desired  to  use  the  team  in 
advance  of  its  regular  place,  by  passing  the  hook  end  of  one  rope  and 
the  ring  end  of  another  under  the  doubletree  on  opposite  sides  of  the 
pole  and  hooking  together  above  the  pole  in  rear  of  the  doubletree. 
With  each  rope  a  half  hitch  is  taken  around  the  pole  near  its  end. 
These  ropes  may  be  extended  to  any  desired  length  by  others,  and 
either  attached  to  a  limber,  in  case  it  is  desired  to  use  a  team,  or  used 
with  cannoneers.  This  method  is  useful  in  crossing  dangerous  bridges 
and  on  steep  slopes  where  horses  can  not  get  good  footing  or  can  not 
maintain  uniform  draft. 

When  a  carriage  is  mired  it  may  be  pulled  out  by  attaching  it  with 
ropes  to  the  middle  point  of  a  log  or  balk.  Each  end  of  this  balk  is 
attached  to  the  pintle  of  a  limber.  A  full  or  extended  team  is  hitched 
to  each  limber.  The  balk  acts  as  a  giant  doubletree  between  two  lim- 
bers, and  with  careful  driving  the  draft  will  be  very  even. 

The  start  of  a  stalled  carriage  may  at  time  be  facilitated  by  turning 
the  pole  either  to  one  side  or  the  other  as  far  as  it  will  go  and 
straightening  the  team  in  that  direction.  In  this  way  the  first  effort  of 
draft  serves  only  to  turn  the  mass  of  the  weight  about  a  vertical  axis. 


i64 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTlOi^r 


with  the  trail  as  the  lower  arm.  The  yielding  obtained  in  this  way 
encourages  the  horses  and  brings  the  total  weight  into  their  collars 
more  gradually. 

In  a  heavy  pull  a  driver  should  always  watch  the  traces  in  front. 
Should  they  become  loose,  he  very  gradually  holds  his  own  pair  back 
until  they  tighten  up  and  the  horses  to  the  front  again  come  to  draft. 
The  whole  team  may  then,  if  necessary,  be  urged  forward  a  little  faster. 
This  method  insures  all  the  horses  coming  into  draft  without  the  jerk, 
so  disconcerting  to  the  whole  team,  that  frequently  results  when  a  pair 
is  brought  to  draft  by  being  urged  forward  at  increased  speed. 

Carriages  should  be  driven  squarely  across  sunken  roads,  ruts,  nar- 
row ditches,  etc.,  so  as  to  avoid' whipping  the  pole. 

Starting  a  Stalled  Team 


Figure  20.  Starting  a  stalled  team.  The  pole  is  broken  to  the  right  and 
the  team  telescoped  preparatory  to  getting  the  pairs  into  draft  successively. 
Cannoneers  assist  at  the  wheels. 


STALLED  TEAMS 

To  make  a  stalled  team  pull,  back  up  all  the  horses  until  the  traces 
are  as  slack  as  possible,  and  pass  the  pairs  well  to  the  right  or  left. 
Start  the  leaders  quietly,  gradually  moving  them  to  the  front  at  the 
same  time.  The  swing  driver  should  watch  the  lead  traces,  and  when 
they  begin  to  tighten  he  should  move  his  team  forward  as  the  lead 
driver  did.  The  wheel  driver  should  move  his  team  so  that  it  will  get  in 
draft  when  the  swing  traces  tighten.  The  instant  the  traces  tighten, 
the  horses  should  be  required  to  give  their  maximum  eflfort. 

The  advantages  of  this  method  can  be  briefly  summarized : 
Every  horse  moves  one  or  more  steps  to  the  front  before  the  traces 
tighten,  thus  giving  him  the  idea  that  everything  is  all  right.  By  mov- 
ing sidewise  at  the  same  time,  the  tension  in  the  traces  is  taken  up 
gradually,  without  shock  to  the  shoulders.  It  is  much  easier  of  accom- 
plishment than  is  the  moving  of  the  whole  team  at  once.  The  horse  or 
horses  of  a  stalled  teaiu  should  never  be  whipped. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  165 

Whips,  Spurs:  Do  not  allow  whips  or  spurs  to  be  used  on  new 
horses.  Ignorant  application  of  either  will  ruin  more  good  horses  than 
any  other  cause.  If  punishment  is  necessary,  give  it  or  supervise  it 
yourself.  About  99  per  cent  of  all  horses  will  do  their  best  for  you  if 
properly  handled. 

Drivers:  On  a  long,  hard  pull,  if  you  are  careful  not  to  make  your 
horses  walk  fast,  they  will  not  be  winded  or  exhausted  when  they  reach 
the  top.  Let  them  have  their  heads,  as  they  know,  better  than  you  do, 
the  most  comfortable  position  for  them.  Never  allow  a  team  horse's 
head  to  be  held  to  the  side  as  so  many  drivers  do  hold  them  through 
careless  handling  of  the  reins. 

On  Turns:  Emphasize  in  sharp  and  difficult  turns  on  level  ground 
that  the  wheel  driver  controls  carriage  and  that  lead  and  swing  give 
him  slack  traces,  but  keep  moving  to  get  out  of  Wheelers  way. 
Wheeler  can  also  get  control  of  carriage  by  moving  his  horses  forward 
to  slacken  the  traces  in  front  of  him.  Wheeler  controls  pole  by  urging 
near  horse  ahead  if  he  wishes  the  pole  to  go  to  right,  off  horse  if 
to  left.  This  is  the  easiest  way  to  control  pole  because  of  the  chains 
attached  to  the  doubletrees  and  to  the  carriage.  If  carriage  is  caught 
on  an  object,  move  pole  toward  object  and  back  the  carriage,  then 
without  moving  carriage,  bring  pole  over  to  opposite  side  far  enough 
to  clear,  then  move  carnage  out.  This  will  clear  easily  any  object 
you  may  get  caught  on.  Learn  to  guide  the  near  horse.  Off  horse 
will  follow;  neck  rein  near  horse  in  all  cases.  Use  coupling  rein  to 
lead  off  horse  forward  and  to  left. 

On  Hills  drivers  all  lean  well  forward  in  saddles,  apply  legs  in  the 
rear  of  girth.  If  the  horse  is  a  sluggish  one  take  feet  out  of  stirrups  and 
apply  legs  in  rear  of  cincha  on  horse's  sides.  Speak  sharply  to  off 
horse.  Drivers  must  work  and  see  that  both  horses  are  in  collar  at  all 
times.  Be  sure  to  give  botb  horses  their  heads — this  applies  espe- 
cially to  off  horses.  Never  pull  on  reins  of  off  horse.  Let  his  reins 
go  entirely  if  necessary.  Any  pull  in  any  direction  on  reins  of  off  horse 
gives  a  direct  pull  to  the  rear  on  his  mouth.  If  horses  are  pulling  well 
and  fully  doing  their  share,  do  not  try  to  urge  them  to  extra  efforts  by 
continually  applying  the  aids. 

Going  Down  Hills  driver  leans  back,  grips  horse  with  his  legs, 
pulls  straight  to  rear  on  reins,  never  allowing  horse's  head  to  be  pulled 
to  one  side  or  other.  Have  short  reins  so  as  to  be  able  to  control  horse. 
Wheel  driver  controls  carriage.  Lead  and  swing  move  out  steadily 
but  with  slack  traces.  When  carriage  starts,  lead  and  swing  drivers 
look  back  to  see  that  their  traces  are  slack  allowing  wheel  driver  to  get 
control  of  carriage.  Brakes  will  be  applied  in  going  down  hills,  but 
not  so  hard  as  to  lock  the  wheels.  Watch  particularly  position  of 
driver's  legs.  Watch  for  heels  sticking  in  horse's  sides.  See  that  they 
keep  heels  well  down,  and  out  of  horse's  sides. 

Drills:  Instructors  will  watch  particularly  that  distances  are  main- 
tained at  all  times.  No  closing  up  or  lengthening  out  of  column.  Cau- 
tion all  drivers  to  keep  head  and  eyes  up  at  all  times  and  look  ahead  and 


166  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

anticipate  movements.  Watch  for  proper  seat  of  all  drivers,  position 
of  legs  and  see  that  they  keep  ofif  cantle  of  the  saddle.  Watch  handling 
of  reins  (neck  rein)  ;  near  horse  and  ofY  horse  will  follow.  See  that 
the  traces  are  taut  when  starting.  Watch  the  use  of  the  aids.  See 
that  in  all  turns  drivers  keep  to  outside  of  turns,  inner  horse  ahead  of 
outer  horse.  See  that  carriages  turn  on  same  ground,  radius  of  six 
yards,  traces  taut.  In  all  alignments,  watch  to  see  if  all  drivers  dress 
properly.  Insist  upon  exact  performance  in  all  movements.  In  moving 
from  column  into  line,  when  line  is  to  halt,  watch  to  see  that  all  drivers 
execute  right  dress.  Watch  particularly  that  men  at  no  time  slouch  in 
saddle.  If  halting  for  any  length  of  time, — four  (4)  minutes  even,  have 
drivers  dismount  and  put  up  limber  prop  promptly.  Watch  distances 
at  all  times.  If  halted,  on  road  near  grass,  or  on  grass,  allow  horses  to 
graze,  without  however  having  them  get  out  of  column. 

In  controlling  the  horse  remember  the  cardinal  principle,  release  an 
aid  as  soon  as  it  is  sufficiently  obeyed. 

HINTS  TO  DRIVERS 

A  good  draft  horse  can  be  ruined  in  five  minutes  by  an  inexperienced 
driver.  A  team  that  pulls  together  can  accomplish  wonders  under  most 
difficult  draft,  provided  the  drivers  never  let  their  pairs  know  that  they 
cannot  pull  any  load. 

The  most  successful  draft  is  that  which  obtains  the  maximum  pull 
with  the  least  lost  energy  and  wear  and  tear  on  the  team.  To  accom- 
plish its  object,  the  draft  team,  consisting  of  lead,  swing,  wheel  drivers 
and  the  brake  must  be  thoroughly  impressed  with  a  sense  of  team  play, 
just  as  in  an  efficient  gun  squad. 

The  individuals  of  the  draft  team  are  mutually  dependent  one  on  the 
other  and  must  work  together  as  one.  To  accomplish  this  end,  each 
driver  must  fully  understand  not  only  his  own  duties,  but  those  of  the 
other  members  of  the  draft  team.  However  skillfully  trained  in  their 
individual  duties,  drivers  of  a  team  will  not  obtain  that  smooth  pulling, 
equally  distributed  draft  unless  there  is  that  mutual  understanding  or 
liaison  between  each  other  and  with  the  brake.  Independent  individual 
effort,  unless  bent  towards  the  same  direction  at  the  same  time,  w411 
result  in  neutralization  of  efforts  of  pairs  in  team,  one  pull  counteract- 
ing the  other. 

Without  complete  unity  maximum  draft  can  never  be  attained. 

Drivers:  The  lead  driver  must  quickly  learn  that  in  all  turns  he  must 
allow  the  wheel  driver  a  turning  arc  that  will  in  no  case  cramp  or  lock 
the  wheels  of  the  limber.  The  lead  must  move  forward  well  to  the 
front  before  the  turn  and  avoid  "cutting  in."  The  above  is  equally  true 
of  the  swing  driver,  who  takes  his  cue  from  the  lead. 

The  lead  driver  must  glance  back  at  the  wheel  to  measure  the  turn, 
avoid  running  on  obstacles,  and  see  that  the  traction  is  following  the 
least  lines  of  resistance.  He  should  seldom  make  use  of  the  coupling 
rein,  though  occasion  may  necessitate  his  grasping  the  coupling  rein  in 
turns  to  the  flank  to  urge  or  restrain  or  "place"  his  off  horse. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  167 

In  descending  slopes  the  lead  and  swing  drivers  must  keep  their  pairs 
well  reined  back,  assisting  the  wheel  and  brake  to  slow  up  the  carriage. 
The  gait  must  never  be  accelerated,  or  the  pairs  allowed  to  get  out  of 
hand. 

In  ascending  inclines,  the  gait  must  be  kept  slow  and  steady,  avoiding 
rush  and  excitement.  The  off  horses  must  be  urged  quietly  with  the 
voice  and  tap  of  the  reins  to  do  their  full  share,  the  drivers  leaning  well 
forward  in  their  saddles,  and  keeping  all  traces  tight. 

Ditches  or  broken  ground  should  not  be  rushed,  but  crossed  slowly 
and  quietly,  avoiding  jerks  on  the  traces  and , consequent  bruising  of 
shoulders  by  collar. 

The  wheel  driver  is  responsible  for  the  direction  of  the  carriage.  He 
is  also  responsible  for  backing  the  carriage.  In  case  of  necessity  a 
good  wheel  driver  can  take  the  draft  away  from  the  lead  and  swing  by 
urging  forward  his  pair,  slackening  the  forward  traces,  and  swing  the 
pole  as  desired.    This  should  only  be  employed  in  close  quarters. 

In  the  turns,  pressure  of  all  pairs  must  be  exerted  towards  the  outside 
of  the  circle,  which  will  place  the  pairs  tangent  to  the  turning  arc,  the 
heads  of  horses  on  inside  of  turn  between  interval  of  pair  in  front.  In 
turning  avoid  two  tracking,  which  will  only  be  necessary  in  the  limber 
turn,  or  in  a  sharp  ninety  degree  turn,  such  as  at  a  narrow  cross  road 
where  the  lead  and  swing  move  as  far  forward  as  possible  and  then 
quickly  swing  both  pairs  in  traces  to  right  or  left. 

In  starting  carriage  in  motion,  drivers,  after  gathering  their  pairs, 
must  take  up  slack  in  traces  before  moving  out.  When  the  traces  are 
straight  throughout  and  the  horses  are  up  against  their  collars,  jerking 
and  beating  of  the  shoulders  will  be  avoided,  and  the  team  will  move 
out  smoothly  in  unison. 

The  cannoneer  on  brake  must  always  be  on  the  alert,  sizing  up  the 
road  ahead,  and  watching  the  traces.  The  wheel  driver  can  assist  him' 
by  calling  "Brakes"  at  the  proper  time.  Over  difificult  ground  it 
requires  a  skilful,  experienced  man  on  the  brake  to  apply  and  release 
brake  just  at  the  right  moment.  Clever  use  of  the  brake  smooths  out 
the  draft. 

On  the  road  is  the  place  to  correct  errors  in  draft  and  adjustment  of 
harness.  Until  proper  adjustment  of  harness  is  obtained,  it  is  well 
for  the  caisson  corporals  to  carry  a  piece  of  chalk  to  mark  on  collars  and 
harness  any  places  of  defect  and  places  for  readjustment  that  are  noted 
on  halts  along  road.  In  this  way  the  harness  can  be  sized  to  horse  as  a 
tailor  fits  his  cloth  measurement  to  a  man. 

A  close  fitting  collar,  that  is  snug,  with  equal  bearing  surface  and  no 
vacant  air  spaces,  is  to  be  desired.  The  breast  strap  should  be  well  up 
above  points  of  shoulders. 

There  is  a  70-lb.  upward  component  pressure  in  draft  which  is  lost 
energy.,  which  can  be  partially  overcome  by  strapping  traces  at  cincha 
ring  with  a  "holding  down  strap." 

The  pull  against  shoulders  should,  in  all  cases,  be  as  perpendicular  as 
possible  against  bearing  surface  of  shoulders. 

The  traces  in  draft  should  be  fairly  horizontal. 


168  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

It  is  absolutely  important  that  the  load  is  distributed  evenly  between 
the  six  horses.  Some  draft  horses  will  try  to  pull  the  whole  load,  others 
are  laggards.  The  lead  and  sw^ng  must  always  remember  that  their 
pairs  must  by  steady  pulling  keep  the  wheel  team  and  carriage  from 
stalling. 

The  use  of  the  whip,  and  spurs,  or  the  '"twitch,"  is  not  recommended 
for  use  except  for  most  exceptional  cases. 

YOU  CAN  DO  ANYTHING  WITH  YOUR  HORSES  ONCE  YOU  HAVE 
THEIR  CONFIDENCE  IN   YOU 

1.  Impress  thoroughly  upon  the  men  that  the  secret  of  success  in 
handling  horses  is  patience  and  kindness,  which  gains  their  confidence. 
Explain  that  a  horse  is  an  animal  with  very  little  brains  but  an  excellent 
memory,  and  is  extremely  nervous.  Harsh  treatment  or  a  kind  act  are 
never  forgotten.  From  the  very  beginning  instil  a  pride  in  the  men  in 
the  appearance  and  care  of  their  horses  and  their  equipment. 

2.  The  object  of  horsemanship  in  the  army  is  to  enable  the  driver  to 
so  condition  and  ride  his  horse  that  the  animal  will  be  able  to  carry 
both  rider,  and  load  the  required  distance  in  the  required  time,  with 
the  least  injury  to  both  driver  and  horse. 

3.  Horses  require  gentle  treatment.  Docile  but  bold  horses  are  apt 
to  retaliate  upon  those  who  abuse  them,  while  persistent  kindness  often 
reclaims  vicious  animals.  Train  your  horses  by  reward  and  punish- 
ment ;  in  99  cases  out  of  100,  punishment  does  more  harm  than  good. 

4.  Before  entering  a  horse's  stall  and  when  coming  up  behind  him, 
speak  to  him  gently,  then  approach  quietly.  Noise  and  confusion 
excite  a  horse  just  as  much  as  surprise.  A  good  driver  sliould  take 
infinite  interest  in  his  horses  and  study  their  wants  and  peculiarities. 

5.  Never  kick,  strike  about  the  head,  or  otherwise  abuse  a  horse. 
Severe  disciplinary  measures  will  be  used  to  eliminate  any  abuse  of 
this  kind.    A  horse  has  a  good  memory  and  remembers  ill  treatment. 

6.  Never  punish  a  horse  except  at  the  time  he  commits  an  offense, 
and  then  only  in  a  proper  manner.  A  cross  angry  voice  will  stop  a 
horse  kicking  on  the  picket  line,  while  an  encouraging  voice  will  help 
send  a  willing  horse  forward.  A  driver's  reprimand  to  his  horses 
should  be  sharp  and  firm,  but  never  harsh. 

7.  Give  the  horse  an  opportunity  to  drink  before  leaving  the  picket 
line  or  stable,  and  before  putting  the  bit  in  his  mouth.  In  cold  weather, 
warm  the  bit  before  putting  it  in  the  horse's  mouth.  A  horse  cannot 
drink  his  fill  with  someone  on  his  back.  All  the  horses  must  go  up  to 
the  trough  together  and  stay  until  the  last  horse  has  drunk  his  fill. 
Orderly  watering  is  a  sure  indication  of  a  well  disciplined  organization. 

8.  Never  take  a  rapid  gait  until  the  horse  has  been  warmed  by  gentle 
exercise.  A  horse  should  always  walk  the  first  mile  from  stables  and 
the  last  mile  in. 

9.  When  a  horse  is  brought  to  the  stable  or  picket  line  in  a  heated 
condition,  never  allow  him  to  stand  uncovered  :  put  a  blanket  on  him 
and  rub  his  legs,  or  walk  him  until  he  is  cool ;  if  he  is  wet,  put  him  under 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  169 

shelter,  not  in  a  draft,  and  rub  him  with  a  wisp  until  dry.  Hand  rub- 
bing is  invaluable.  The  horse  is  a  trained  athlete,  treat  him  as  such. 
Apply  the  same  general  rules  of  health  and  hygiene  to  your  horse  as 
you  would  to  yourself. 

10.  Never  water  a  horse  when  heated,  unless  the  exercise  or  march 
is  to  be  immediately  resumed.  Sponging  out  the  mouth  and  nostrils 
is  refreshing  to  the  heated  horse  and  will  not  hurt  him.  If  the  water 
has  the  chill  taken  off,  the  horse  may  be  given  a  small  drink.  On  a 
long,  dusty  march,  a  wet  sponge  is  invaluable  to  refresh  your  horses 
by  sponging  muzzles.  For  this  purpose  each  section  should  carry  on  a 
caisson  a  canvas  bucket  filled  with  water  on  a  dry  march. 

11.  Never  allow  a  horse's  back  to  be  cooled  suddenly.  To  cool  the 
back  gradually,  remove  the  pack  and  equipment  from  the  saddle,  loosen 
the  girth,  remove  the  blanket  and  replace  it  with  the  dry  side  next  the 
horse,  replace  the  saddle,  girthing  it  looseh^  Never  allow  the  hot 
sun-rays  on  a  wet  back;  it  is  the  quickest  way  to  blister  it. 

12.  Never  feed  grain  to  a  horse  when  heated.  Hay  will  not  hurt  a 
horse  however  heated  he  may  be.  A  horse  that  has  been  without  feed 
should  be  fed  hay  first  so  as  to  take  the  edge  off  his  appetite. 

13.  Never  throw  cold  water  on  any  part  of  a  horse  when  heated. 

14.  On  leaving  the  stable  move  at  a  walk  for  a  short  time  in  order 
to  get  the  horse's  legs  under  him,  and  circulation  started. 

15.  Vary  the  gaits  but  do  not  depart  from  the  regulation  pace  pre- 
scribed for  each.  A  fast  walk,  a  fast  trot,  and  a  fast  gallop  are  very  tir- 
ing. It  is  better  for  animals  to  take  the  next  higher  gait  than  increase 
the  regulation  gait. 

16.  Choose  for  the  rapid  gaits  nearly  level  ground.  Going  up  hill 
rapidly  necessitates  great  effort  on  the  part  of  the  horse,  and  going 
down  hill  at  a  rapid  gait  exposes  him  to  injuries  from  the  saddle  and 
equipment,  and  is  hard  on  his  forelegs. 

17.  Extend  progressively  the  periods  at  the  faster  gaits.  Be  sure 
your  horse  is  "hard"  before  you  use  the  faster  gaits. 

18.  Regulate  the  periods  spent  at  the  intermediate  gaits  by  the  degree 
of  rapidity  with  which  the  total  distance  must  be  covered. 

19.  Seek  under  all  circumstances  soft  footing  to  save  the  horse's 
legs,  and  keep  him  therefore,  on  the  edge  of  metalled  roads  rather  than 
in  the  middle.     Never  trot  on  macadamized  or  paved  roads. 

20.  Choose  hard  ground  when  smooth  and  level  in  preference  to 
ground  that  is  heavy  or  uneven. 

21.  Finish  at  a  walk,  more  or  less  prolonged  as  the  journey  has  been 
more  or  less  long  and  trying,  so  that  the  horse  shall  always  come  in 
with  a  dry  skin  and  normal  respiration. 

22.  The  rule  is  to  walk  at  least  ten  minutes  before  reaching  the 
stables.  Stable  sergeant  to  be  responsible  for  condition  of  all  mounts 
that  come  in.  Men  riding  on  pass  must  groom  their  horses  and  have 
them  inspected  by  the  stable  sergeant  before  they  can  be  put  up.  This 
rule  must  be  carried  out.  All  horses  that  are  allowed  to  go  out  must  be 
kept  on  record,  so  that  any  injury  or  al:)use  can  be  eliminated  and  the 
offender  denied  the  privilege  of  further  pass. 


170  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

FIELD  MANAGEMENT 

1.  Save  your  horse  as  much  as  possible  in  the  field.  Dismount  when- 
ever the  opportunity  offers.  Never  loll  in  the  saddle,  even  though  it 
happens  to  be  easier  than  resting  on  the  ground.  When  possible  lead 
the  horse  up  an  down  steep  hills.  If  opportunity  offers,  while  resting 
loosen  the  girth,  so  that  the  horse  may  rest  as  well  as  yourself.  Do 
not  girth  your  horse  too  tightly.  This  is  a  very  common  fault  and  a 
very  cruel  thing  to  do.  It  makes  sore  backs  and  sore  sides.  This 
destroys  the  usefulness  of  your  horse.  Remember  that  your  harness, 
well  fitted  in  garrison,  will  be  too  large  once  your  horses  begin  to  lose 
flesh,  as  they  will,  in  the  field.  Have  harness  always  fitted  as  for  field 
service. 

2.  When  riding  do  not  slouch  in  your  saddle ;  sit  straight.  Slouch- 
ing makes  sore  backs  and  causes  the  horse  to  interfere.  Do  not 
ride  too  closely  on  the  heels  of  the  horse  in  front  of  you.  Failure  to 
observe  this  rule  may  inflict  painful  wounds  on  your  horse  and  the  one 
in  front  of  you ;  these  take  a  long  time  to  heal. 

3.  In  driving,  keep  a  steady  gait  with  your  animals.  Do  not  drive 
them  with  your  whip ;  use  your  reins  and  voice.  A  man  who  is  always 
using  his  whip  soon  drives  thin  and  balky  animals.  Select  your  road 
as  carefully  as  you  can  for  guns  and  wagons.  Cavalry  should  march 
at  the  rate  of  four  miles  perhour,  including  halts,  artillery  at  four  miles 
per  hour,  and  wagons  at  three  miles  per  hour.  Keep  out  of  the  dust  as 
much  as  possible  when  on  the  march.  On  a  long  march  carry  enough 
feed  for  the  animals  and  then  be  sure  to  feed  them.  If  your  saddle 
slides  out  of  its  place  while  on  the  march,  dismount  and  straighten  it. 
Always  try  to  water  before  feeding  if  your  horses  are  not  overheated. 
A  ten  gallon  keg  should  be  carried  on  each  wagon  for  watering  the 
animals  attached  to  it.     Grease  your  wagon  every  night. 

4.  On  reaching  camp,  the  saddle  should  not  be  removed  at  once  un- 
less there  is  a  chance  to  wash  off  the  back  with  water  and  dry  the  hair. 
If  the  back  cannot  be  washed  or  rubbed  dry,  the  girth  should  be 
loosened  and  the  saddle  or  blanket  left  on  until  the  horse  is  cool. 
Sponge  or  with  a  clean  white  rag,  wipe  the  eyes,  nostrils,  dock,  and 
underneath  the  hind  legs.  Feed  a  little  as  early  as  possible  upon  ar- 
rival. 


^Ecnof,  CoLU^^ 


Mounted  Evolutions 


^s 


-,> 


^  - 


. — . — r>-^*^- 


-^if 


J_^      5 


4-^ 


"^1 


172 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


ARM  SIGNALS 


® 


.^'^^f.^'^V--. 


\Jy- 


aaimno  or  ^£ct/r/o» 


jtrrrAfTJO// 


■"^3 


\. 


1/- '■     ' 


t//r/>/  //onzertia/ 


=-=•   ...      ■•' 


£^/^  /He  arm  wrtal/  liia/V  /mrr/fi>  the  Aan/at 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


173 


*<K^l  . 


'ixtna  //ir^rm  irrka/^  a^  a^tc^iif  M)K)f  ^h^  /omorB/ C/n:»  ai        Jere/g/  /rt^mof^^/  c//t/fii  tr/^/;  A-  Am^. 


err /i/if  r/i^/>/  jie^  of  mf  ^oae- 


174 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


175 


@ 


/yi>r/  ti<rA/  jec/it»7  or  Off  an  ji^Ar/tv  jfe/t<v? 


//74mA  d/pA)  Of  ejrA>rK/'p<^  I//? />^f  /-/^  M^J  Mic<*»/> 
ar  or?  an //f/enor  jec/ror? 


■-■'  t 


@ 


e/6//r  W7D  L/A/f 
Ji/^/»/.3c/>d/7^e  ofa/rec/,or,  /o  /^  r/^/>/  (/2-}J  fo//t»M/ iy  c^rxr,^,/^ 
3mj//  c/t/ti  n/r/>  /^  A^rxi  n/r//r  ffrfarm  /i  e'"e/7i^faf  A?  f^f  np/zm-sj 


01^/»///lfdr77?lfr/)i^///  OlJ/iaafjcriie  jfirf0/^/^>l!v)fo>/ 
C/K/^  l/zs/ar/ri^f  r/^A/  ji/atr  of  />^f^nf 


iffT  riPo/^r  Avro/j/^r 


j/mf  /i/M/f  /I'/i'. 


>/X//frdrrr/  My/iorrt////  A>  z:^  fit?///.  Jmf 
'  mofe  //  Jivrrd/fimei  Mrva  imt^//  yf/^u/art 


izrr  INTO  Lm£. 


darrv  /b/^  /e/^ , 


176 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


kOUNTED  INSTRUCTION^ 


177 


PART  IV 


MISCELLANEOUS 

Restraint  and  Control  of  Animals. 

Entraining  and  Detraining. 

Drivers'  Rolls. 

Knots. 

Types  of  Stable  and  Picket  Lines  and  Corrals. 

APPENDIX 

(a)  Bugle  Calls. 

(b)  Quiz  for  Drivers. 

(c)  Hints  to  Instructors — Schedules. 


RESTRAINT  AND  CONTROL  OF  ANIMALS 

(Acknowledgment  is  made  to   Colonel   Wm.    P.    Ennis,  F.   A.) 

In  the  management  of  animals  both  in  field  and  in  garrison  restraint 
is  sometimes  necessary.  The  methods  are  varied  and  the  one  to  be  used 
depends  largely  on  the  disposition  of  the  individual  animal  and  what  is 
to  be  accomplished.  Animals  are  restrained  by  the  use  of  the  twitch, 
war  bridle,  blind,  muzzle,  cradle,  side-rod,  cross-tie,  knee  strap,  casting 
rope,  slings,  hobbles,  stocks  and  operating  table. 

Always  select  the  mildest  and  least  dangerous  method  that  will 
accomplish  the  end. 

The  twitch  perhaps  is  the  handiest  and  most  common  method  of 
restraint,  and  is  the  most  effective  in  the  majority  of  cases  as  a  simple 
measure  but  should  always  be  used  with  great  caution  and  only  when 
necessary.  It  is  a  very  powerful  instrument,  capable  of  inflicting  great 
pain,  disfiguring  animals'  faces,  and  causing  even  lasting  injury.  As  it 
shuts  off  circulation  in  the  lip  it  should  never  be  used  for  any  consider- 
able length  of  time  continuously,  and  never  with  greater  force  than  is 
absolutely  necessary.  It  is  easily  made  by  running  a  piece  of  small 
rope  or  rawhide  through  a  hole  in  the  end  of  a  round  piece  of  wood,  2 
to  5  feet  long,  such  as  a  pitch  fork  or  axe  handle,  and  tying  it  into  a 
short  loop. 

The  War  Bridle  is  perhaps  the  one  method  of  restraint  which  is  the 
least  likely  to  do  harm  to  the  animal  or  make  him  afraid  of  its  future 
use.  When  properly  used  its  effects  are  lasting  and  beneficial,  making 
the  animal  quieter,  more  tractable,  and  more  amenable  to  discipline. 
It  is  made  and  applied  as  follows :  Take  about  20  feet  of  5/16  inch  three 
strand  hemp  rope  and  make  a  four  inch  loop  at  one  end.  To  apply, 
stand  on  the  near  side  of  the  horse,  place  the  loop  in  the  mouth  inclos- 
ing the  tongue  and  lower  jaw,  carry  the  rope  up  on  the  oi¥  side,  over 
the  poll  and  down  the  near  cheek  to  about  opposite  the  eye,  then  double 
back  on  the  poll  leaving  a  bight  hanging,  pass  the  running  end  of  the 
rope  through  the  mouth  between  the  upper  lip  and  the  gum,  and  up 
through  the  bight  on  near  cheek,  then  down  through  the  lower  part  of 
the  loop.  Draw  the  end  snug  without  changing  position  of  the  bight. 
A  moderate  pull  on  the  rope  tightens  the  bridle,  producing  pressure  on 
the  poll  and  to  a  lesser  degree  on  the  mouth.  This  has  a  strong  moral 
efifect,  inducing  the  animal  to  stand  quietly. 

The  attendant  should  not  pull  the  rope  unduly  tight  but  always  use 
moderate  tension  and  with  a  little  twitching  to  attract  the  animals 
attention.  Its  use  is  especially  adapted  to  the  training  of  young  ani- 
mals to  be  shod  and  in  handling  the  heads  of  very  nervous  animals. 

The  Blind  is  often  of  value  as  a  means  of  restraint  for  nervous  or 
vicious  animals.  It  may  be  made  in  the  form  of  a  hood  or  a  piece  of 
leather  broad  enough  to  cover  the  eyes,  and  provided  with  leather 
strings  for  fastening  to  the  halter. 


182  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

The  Neck  Cradle  is  useful  in  case  of  a  wound  to  prevent  further  in- 
jury by  the  animal  chewin^^  or  tearing  the  injured  part.  It  is  made  of 
from  eight  to  twelve  pieces  of  hard  wood  about  1  1/3  inches  in  diameter 
and  about  eighteen  inches  long,  pierced  at  each  end  by  a  hole  through 
which  is  passed  a  cord  or  small  rope.  The  rods  are  kept  three  or  four 
inches  apart  by  knots  in  the  rope.  The  ends  of  the  rope  are  tied  on  the 
upper  border  of  the  neck  and  so  adjusted  that  the  upper  ends  of  the  rods 
are  just  back  of  the  lower  jaw,  the  lower  end  resting  on  the  shoulder 
at  the  seat  of  the  collar. 

The  Muzzle  as  a  means  of  restraint  is  useful  to  prevent  an  animal 
eating  bedding  or  chewing  or  tearing  the  dressing  from  a  wound.  They 
are  best  made  out  of  leather  and  attached  to  the  halter  rings,  or 
fastened  by  straps,  attached  to  the  muzzle  and  passing  over  the  poll. 

The  Side  Rod  is  used  for  vicious  animals  while  grooming  or  to  pre- 
\ent  an  animal  doing  injury  to  a  wound.  It  is  made  from  a  round 
wooden  rod  from  3^^  to  4  feet  in  length,  w^ith  a  small  cord  or  strap  at 
each  end,  one  for  attaching  to  the  noseband  of  the  halter,  the  other 
to  the  surcingle. 

The  Cross  Tie  is  useful  to  i)revent  an  animal  from  chewing  a  wound 
or  dressing,  and  from  laying  down  when  it  is  desired  to  keep  him  stand- 
ing. It  consists  of  tying  the  head  in  an  elevated  iposition,  with  two  tie 
ropes,  one  from  either  side,  and  both  tied  on  opposite  sides  of  the  stall. 

Knee  Straps  are  useful  wdien  it  is  necessary  to  fix  a  foreleg  for  an 
operation  or  for  shoeing.  A  strap  or  rope  is" used  to  secure  the  pastern 
to  the  forearm.  The  leg  is  well  bent  at  the  knee  and  the  rope  or  strap, 
with  a  loop  at  one  end,  is  passed  over  the  pastern,  the  free  end  passed 
around  the  forearm  and  back  to  the  pastern,  drawn  tight  and  tied  or 
buckled. 

The  Side  Line  is  a  means  of  restraint  commonly  used  in  securing  a 
hind  leg.  It  is  made  of  y^  inch  rope  about  20  feet  long  and  a  leather 
hobble  provided  with  a  ring.  One  end  of  the  rope  is  secured  around  the 
animal's  neck  by  a  loop  or  non-slip  tie,  the  free  end  passed  through 
the  hobble  ring  or  around  the  pastern,  and  carried  back  through  the 
loop  around  the  neck,  then  the  leg  is  brought  forward  and  held  in  the 
position  desired  by  the  attendant.  If  desired  the  leg  may  be  brought 
backward  and  securely  held  by  fastening  the  free  end  of  the  rope  to  the 
hobble,  and  pulling  the  leg  backward,  one  attendant  grasping  the  leg 
and  holding  it  in  the  desired  position  and  another  keeping  the  rope  taut. 

The  Casting  Rope  is  perhaps  the  most  useful  means  of  restraint,  con- 
sidering the  various  uses  to  which  it  may  be  put.  Often  in  the  field  it 
may  be  necessary  to  secure  an  animal  for  an  operation  or  in  rare  cases 
for  shoeing,  and  no  other  suitable  means  of  restraint  is  available.  It  is 
made  of  34  inch  rope  about  30  feet  long.  This  is  doubled  and  from  3  to 
4  feet  of  the  doubled  end  tied  in  a  non-slip  loop,  Avhich  is  passed  over 
the  horse's  head  and  adjusted  about  the  neck.  The  free  ends  are  passed 
backwards  between  the  forelegs  and  around  the  rear  pasterns  or 
through  the  rings  or  hobbles  if  used,  thence  upward  and  back  through 
the  loop  at  the  neck.  A  strong  man  should  hold  the  horse  by  the  head, 
and  one  or  two  assistants  grasp  the  free  ends  of  the  rope  and  take  the 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  183 

animal  off  his  feet.  Casting-  can  be  done  with  the  least  effort  if  one 
foreleg  is  fixed  off  the  ground  with  a  knee  strap.  If  it  is  desired  to  cast 
on  a  particular  side,  it  can  be  done  by  the  attendant  pulling  in  a  forward 
direction  on  that  side,  the  others  pulling  in  the  opposite  direction. 
When  down  the  man  at  the  head  should  grasp  and  hold  the  head  firmly 
against  the  ground,  while  another  should  draw  the  legs  up  tightly  at  the 
side  and  secure  them  by  a  double  half  hitch  made  of  the  free  ends  of 
rope.  When  one  side  is  secured  the  animal  may  be  rolled  over,  and  the 
other  tied  in  a  similar  manner. 

There  are  various  forms  of  casting  harness  made  from  ropes  and 
leather,  but  the  principles  of  all  are  similar  to  the  one  described  above. 

The  English  Hobble  is  sometimes  used  for  casting.  It  consists  of 
four  leather  hobbles  with  rings.  A  chain  or  rope  is  attached  to  one 
front  hobble,  then  passed  through  the  rings  of  the  others  and  back 
through  the  first  ring.  The  animal  is  cast  by  pulling  the  rope  and  draw- 
ing all  four  legs  together.  When  down  the  rope  is  secured.  This  is 
not  a  popular  method  of  casting  if  work  is  to  be  done  upon  the  feet  and 
limbs,  as  it  does  not  place  them  in  a  suitable  position. 

Stocks  are  built  for  operating  upon  animals,  for  restraint  in  applying 
dressings,  and  shoeing.  Their  use  for  the  latter  purpose  should  be  dis- 
couraged, as  once  an  animal  is  confirmed  to  their  use  he  cannot  be 
shod  any  other  way.  and  there  is  always  danger  of  injuries.  The  War 
Bridle,  if  used  properly,  will  take  the  place  of  the  stocks. 

The  Sling  is  a  useful  means  of  restraint  and  often  a  necessary  one 
in  the  case  of  severe  injury  and  inability  to  support  his  weight  on  all 
four  legs,  and  when  it  is  desired  to  keep  the  animal  in  a  standing  posi- 
tion. It  is  made  of  broad,  strong  canvas  fitted  about  the  animal's  chest 
and  abdomen  and  attached  to  which  are  straps  from  both  a  breast  col- 
lar and  a  breeching.  Ropes  attached  to  the  free  ends  of  the  canvas 
run  to  blocks  and  tackles  and  support  the  weight  of  the  animal.  The 
raising  must  be  effected  so  as  not  to  take  the  feet  from  the  ground,  but 
just  enough  to  ease  the  weight  from  them.  When  this  is  accomplished 
the  pulleys  should  be  locked  or  the  free  end  of  the  rope  securely  tied. 

TRANSPORT  BY  RAIL 

The  transport  of  animals  by  rail  in  the  military  service  is  an  import- 
ant subject  to  be  considered  in  the  care  of  animals.  Experience  has 
demonstrated  that  considerable  losses  of  animals  have  been  due  to  im- 
proper methods  employed  in  transit,  such  as :  long  periods'  without 
water,  feed  or  rest;  and  lack  of  proper  supervision  of  feeding  en  route, 
or  on  arrival  at  destination.  Animals  to  be  shipped  must  be  given  a 
careful  physical  inspection  by  a  Veterinary  officer  for  communicable 
or  other  diseases,  and  tested  with  mallein  to  insure  against  glanders. 

If  animals  are  to  be  worked  immediately  upon  arrival  at  destination, 
they  should  be  newly  shod  without  calks.  Remounts  or  other  animals 
not  for  immediate  use  should  have  the  shoes  removed  and  feet  trimmed 
to  prevent  breaking.  The  grain  ration  should  be  reduced  one  half  on 
the  day  before  loading. 


184  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Before  loading,  cars  must  be  carefully  inspected ;  all  loose  and  pro- 
jecting nails  removed;  broken  slats,  doors  and  floors  repaired;  and 
thoroughly  disinfected  with  some  reliable  agent  such  as  creosol  solu- 
tion, creolin  3%  or  chloride  of  lime  4  ounces  to  a  gallon  of  water. 
Floors  should  be  bedded  down  with  sand,  cinders  or  straw,  depending 
upon  the  available  material  and  kind  of  cars  to  be  used.  The  type  of 
car  to  be  used  depends  upon  various  conditions.  Those  most  com- 
monly used  for  troop  shipment  are  stock  cars.  Occasionally  Arms 
Palace  stock  cars  or  Express  horse  cars  are  provided.  The  latter  are 
by  far  the  most  satisfactory  considering  the  comfort  of  the  animals. 
For  shipping  in  small  lots  (4  to  8),  an  excellent  method  is  to  utilize  a 
box  car,  partitioning  oft  spaces  for  the  animals. 

Loading  animals  is  an  art  only  perfected  by  practice,  and  instruction 
in  it  should  be  given  at  every  opportunity.  Jn  loading  stock  cars  horses 
should  be  led  in  one  at  a  time,  alternately  to  each  end,  placed  alter- 
nately head  and  tail  in  each  end.  and  held  there  by  an  attendant  until 
the  capacity  of  the  car  is  reached. 

Mules  are  loaded  by  leading  the  first  one  and  herding  the  others 
closely  following  one  another.  The  tighter  animals  are  loaded  in  stock 
cars,  the  better  and  safer  they  are  conveyed. 

Cattle  cars  will  hold  18  to  24  animals,  depending  on  their  size  and 
dimensions.  As  a  guide  the  following  is  the  usual  number  to  be  placed 
in  36  and  40  foot  cars  : 

36  foot  cars  :  40  foot  cars  : 

Heavy  draft 18  T Teavv  draft 20 

Light  draft 20  Light  draft 23 

Riding  horses 22  Riding  horses 24 

Draft  mules   21  Draft  mules 23 

Pack   mules 22  Pack    mules 24 

The  above  may  be  varied  according  to  the  size  of  the  animals,  and 
if  the  weather  is  very  warm  it  is  better  to  reduce  the  number  in  each 
case  by  two. 

Halters  should  be  left  on  and  shanks  removed  and  carried  in  sacks. 
If  the  weather  is  severe  one  side,  and  the  ends  of  the  car,  if  open,  should 
be  protected  by  the  use  of  old  canvas  or  heavy  paper.  The  use  of 
blankets  is  permissable  only  in  exceptional  cases,  as  they  invariably 
Iiecome  displaced  or  torn,  and  are  liable  to  get  under  the  feet  of  the 
animals. 

Loading  and  unloading  should  always  be  from  a  suitable  platform. 
If  these  are  unobtainable  it  will  be  necessary  to  construct  portable 
ramps  for  that  ])urpose. 

ENTRAINING  AND  DETRAINING 

Reference  for  study.  Pars.  386-390,  392.  393.  396.  398,  399,  401-402. 
407.  40^.  410,  Field  Senicc  Regulations  1914;  287-309  inclusive.  United 
States  Transport  Regulations  1914;  Pars.  811-817,  Cai'alry  Service  Regida- 
tions  1<)14.  General -Ysirs.  1728-1808,  D.  &  S.  R.  F.  A.  " 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  185 

THE  ORDER  IN  WHICH  TRAINS  ARE  MADE  UP 

1.  Flat  cars  containing   Guns,   Carria.ues.    Wagons,   Tontoons,   etc. 

2.  Box  cars  containing  property. 

3.  Stock  cars  containing  animals. 

4.  Box  cars  containing  forage. 

5.  Baggage  cars,  last  one  containing  travel  rations  with  open  end  to 
rear. 

6.  Passenger  coaches  and  tourist  sleeping  cars. 

7.  Standard  sleepers  for  officers. 

8.  Kitchen  cars.  In  case  kitchen  cars  are  used  it  would  be  found 
advantageous  to  place  them  in  the  central  part  of  the  train  used  by  the 
men,  rations  being  stored  in  a  baggage  car  adjoining. 

The  stock  cars  furnished  which  may  be  used  are : 

1.  The  Palace  stock  car,  length  36  feet  to  40  feet,  capacity  16  to  20 
animals,  each  animal  in  a  separate  stall  with  a  com])artnient  for  at- 
tendants. 

2.  The  improved  stock  car,  length  36  feet,  capacity  20  to  24  animals, 
with  facilities  for  feeding  and  watering  in  the  car. 

3.  The  ordinary  stock  car,  length  30  feet  to  34  feet,  capacity  16  to 
20  animals,  with  no  appliances  of  any  kind. 

The  capacity  of  both  the  ordinary  and  the  Palace  stock  car  averages 
about  18  Artillery  horses  per  car.  The  ordinary  stock  car  will  carry 
about  20  mules. 

Harness,  kitchen  sup])lies,  officers'  baggage,  and  such  of  the  per- 
sonal equipment  of  the  men  as  are  not  necessary  on  the  journey  are 
carried  in  a  baggage  car  provided  for  the  purpose. 

Box  cars  are  provided  for  forage,  ammunition,  and  other  property 
according  to  the  necessities.  Box  cars  are  usually  at  least  36  feet  in 
length.  The  interior  cross  section  is  about  8  by  8  feet.  The  load 
capacity  varies  from  40,000  to  100,000  i>ounds.  It  is  inadvisable,  how- 
ever to  load  a  car  to  its  capacity,  and  40,000  pounds  may  be  assumed 
as  the  load  and  1,800  to  2,000  cubic  feet  as  the  cubical  capacity  of  the 
average  box  car. 

The  weight  limits  the  amount  of  ammunition  and  of  grain  which  can 
be  carried  in  a  single  box  car.  Cubical  capacity  limits  the  amount  of 
military  stores  of  other  kinds,  especially  hay. 

Twelve  hundred  pounds,  or  100  rations,  of  oats  occupy  a  space  of 
about  40  cubic  feet.  Fourteen  hundred  pounds,  or  100  rations,  of  baled 
hay  occupy  a  space  of  about  120  cul)ic  feet.  When  access  must  be  had 
to  forage  during  the  journey,  1,200  rations  is  a  suitable  load  for  a 
forage  car. 

Animals  are  carried  in  stock  cars  or  Palace  stock  cars.  If  Palace 
stock  cars  are  not  available,  a  box  or  stock  car  should  be  provided  for 
each  six  privately  owned  officers'  mounts. 


186  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

The  amount  of  baggage,  forage,  and  rations  to  be  taken  depends 
upon  circumstances,  and  should  be  definitely  prescribed  in  the  order 
directing  the  movement.  Ordinarily  rations  and  forage  sufficient  for 
three  days  after  the  completion  of  the  journey  is  ample.  More  than 
this  is  generally  unnecessary  and  causes  delay  and  congestion  in  en- 
training and  detraining. 

Horse  Artillery  organizations  require  the  same  number  of  cars  as 
corresponding  organizations  of  Light  Artillery,  with  the  exception  of 
stock  cars  for  the  animals  of  the  batteries.  A  horse  battery  on  a  peace 
footing  requires  9,  on  a  war  footing  14  stock  cars. 

When  Battery  Train  must  be  divided  into  two  sections,  the  first  sec- 
tion contains  the  forage  car,  all  the  stock  cars  and  one  sleeping  car  and 
the  second  section  all  the  remaining  cars.  The  first  section  should  be 
under  the  command  of  one  of  the  Lieutenants  and  he  should  have  with 
him  the  Stable  Sergeant,  the  horseshoer,  one  of  the  mechanics  and  a 
number  of  other  men  that  can  be  accommodated. 

INSPECTION 

Each  Train  Commander  should  detail  an  officer  to  accompany  the 
Quartermaster  during  the  inspection  of  the  cars  made  after  the  train 
is  turned  over  to  the  troops  for  loading.  The  stock  cars  must  be  in- 
spected to  see  that  the}^  are  in  good  condition  throughout,  examine  the 
cars  to  see  that  there  are  no  broken  boards,  loose  boards,  rotten  floor- 
ing, loose  fixtures,  protruding  nails,  loose  sides,  splinters  on  the  inside, 
and  see  that  the  floors  and  stalls  are  clean.  Before  accepting  cars  in 
time  of  peace,  commanding  officers  should  see  that  these  conditions 
are  fulfilled. 

In  time  of  war  when  cars  are  found  unsuitable  it  is  often  necessary 
to  make  such  repairs  as  possible  and  proceed  with  the  loading.  A 
report  should  be  forwarded  setting  forth  the  condition  of  the  car. 

The  cars  should  be  cleaned  and  floors  covered  with  sand  or  sawdust, 
hay  and  straw  should  never  be  allowed  in  the  cars  on  account  of  fire. 

Before  loading  an  officer  detailed  to  load  the  horses  accompanied  by 
the  Stable  Sergeant  and  one  or  more  of  the  mechanics,  makes  a  detailed 
inspection  of  the  stock  cars  examining  the  cars  for  all  things  mentioned 
above,  being  careful  to  note  whether  any  of  these  defects  are  on  breast 
bars  or  doorways  themselves.  The  necessary  repairs  are  tnade  and 
breast  bars  are  put  in  place  and  doors  firmly  fastened. 

PREPARATION  FOR  LOADING 

So  far  as  practicable  all  forage  and  animals  should  be  at  the  loading 
place  before  the  train  arrives.  The  animals  should  arrive  in  time  so 
that  the  horses  may  be  unharnessed  and  the  harness  placed  convenient 
to  the  loading  places.  As  soon  as  the  battery  has  been  unhitched  the 
teams  should  be  taken  to  the  vicinity  of  the  place  where  they  are  to  be 
loaded  and  there  imhitched.  Each  two  })air  should  be  held  by  one  can- 
noneer detailed  by  the  chief  of  section  and  the  remaining  cannoneers 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  187 

assist  the  drivers  in  unhaniessitis'  and  securing-  the  harness.  When 
harness  sacks  are  available  the  harness  of  each  pair  is  f)acked  in  a  sack 
and  plainly  marked.  Horse  ecjuiiMiient  of  fifficers  and  individually 
mounted  men  are  placed  in  sacks  aufl  plainly  marked.  The  horse  ecpiip- 
ment  of  officers  is  placed  in  the  baggage  car  and  in  the  separate  cars 
pro\  ided  for  the  private  mounts.  When  no  harness  sacks  are  available 
use  paulins.    The  followinj^  method  is  convenient : 

In  the  description  north,  south,  east  and  west  refer  to  the  sides  of  the 
paulin,  as  it  lies  on  the  ground,  and  are  used  merely  for  convenience 
any  particular  side  being  designated  as  north. 

Spread  paulin  on  the  ground,  marks  down,  place  near  swing  collar  in 
center  paulin,  bearing  surfaces  up.  top  north,  near  wheel  and  lead  col- 
lars on  right  and  left  of  it,  bearing  surfaces  up,  tops  south.  Place  saddle 
blanket  of  each  horse  on  his  collar,  folded  as  when  placed  on  harness 
peg.  Place  ofT  collars  on  blankets,  bearing  surfaces  up.  tops  in  a  direc- 
tion opposite  to  those  of  near  collars.  Place  blankets  on  collars.  Place 
near  saddles  on  blankets,  north  and  south,  attachments  folded  across 
seats.  Place  ofif  saddles  upside  down  across  near  saddles,  attachments 
underneath.  Lay  bridles  between  bars  of  off  saddles.  Fold  near  and 
swing  traces  and  lay  them  on  the  pile,  lengthwise.  Place  the  neck  yoke 
on  the  ends  of  the  ofT  blankets  on  one  side  of  the  pile.  Fold  wheel 
traces  once  and  place  on  the  other  side  of  pile. 

Fold  east  and  west  sides  of  paulin  over  ends  of  pile  then  north  and 
south  sides.  Pass  a  picket  rope  around  center  of  Ijundle.  turn  it  once 
on  itself,  then  take  a  turn  around  each  end  of  the  bundle  with  the  free 
ends;  cross  these  ends  over  ends  of  bundles,  roll  the  bundle  over,  pass 
the  ends  of  the  rope  along  the  other  side  of  the  bundle  taking  a  turn 
around  the  binding  parts  of  the  rope  in  passing  and  engage  the  hook  in 
the  ring.  Or,  lay  the  picket  rope  on  the  ground,  its  center  forming  a  U. 
the  sides  of  which  are  about  2  feet  apart.  Spread  the  paulin  over  this 
and  proceed  as  before.  After  the  bundle  is  folded,  the  binding  is  some- 
what simpler  than  in  the  first  case,  but  the  bundle  will  be  secured  by 
only  two  turns  instead  of  three  and  there  will  be  an  excess  of  rope. 
Tying  a  knot  in  such  a  heavy  rope  is  difficult. 

The  harness  having  been  secured  in  bundles  the  cannoneers  place 
them  convenient  to  the  loading  place.  In  carrying  the  bundles  care 
must  be  taken  to  hold  them  clear  of  the  ground. 

If  stables  or  nermanent  picket  lines  are  available  near  loading  nlace 
the  horses  should  be  secured  there  and  left  under  charge  of  two  drivers 
detailed  as  guards,  otherwise  horses  of  each  section  should  be  formed 
in  a  circle  the  halter  tie  rope  of  each  horse  being  tied  securely  to  the 
halter  of  the  horse  next  to  him.  Each  chief  of  section  details  a  driver 
to  remain  with  him,  in  which  case  the  horses  are  given  a  feed  of  hay 
which  should  have  been  withheld  from  them  for  some  hours  before  and 
should  be  watered  about  one  hour  before. 

If  the  horses  will  probably  be  unloaded  during  the  journey,  each  chief 
of  section  collects  the  feed  bags  belonging  to  his  section  and  turns  them 
over  to  the  Stable  Sergeant,  who  makes  a  memorandum  thereof.  The 
grain  bags  are  retained  by  the  men,  who  pack  them  with  their  saddles. 


188  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

The  Stable  S.ergcant  sees  that  the  feed  bags,  necessary  grain  measures, 
a  few  bandages  and  disinfectants  and  stable  tools  are  placed  in  the 
center  of  the  forage  car,  so  as  to  be  readily  accessible. 

Procure  loading  pens  and  chutes  if  possible.  If  none  are  available 
get  railroad  platforms  or  ramps.  Make  a  ramp  well  supported  with 
strong  sides  and  provide  it  with  cleats  to  prevent  slipping.  Lanyards 
should  be  attached  to  each  side  of  the  floor  near  the  middle  and  made 
fast  to  truss  rods  in  the  middle  of  the  car,  to  prevent  the  ramp  from 
sliding  ofif  the  car  near  the  door  sill.  Boards  and  brush  may  be  used  to 
make  a  bridge.  As  a  last  resort  use  a  bridge  of  earth  to  reach  as  near 
as  possible  to  the  side  of  the  car  and  bridge  the  ga])  with  the  car  door. 

If  loading  with  improvised  facilities,  always  try  to  get  the  car  in  a 
shallow  cut. 

For  each  car  being  loaded  four  selected  noncommissioned  officers,  a 
mechanic,  and  a  gun  squad  should  be  detailed.  Two  of  the  noncommis- 
sioned officers  are  detailed  to  work  inside  of  the  car.  The  remaining 
noncommissioned  officers  are  detailed  to  work  at  the  door  of  the  car. 
Two  of  the  members  of  the  gun  squad  are  detailed  to  collect  the  halter 
tie  ropes  and  see  that  they  are  turned  over  to  the  Stable  Sergeant  at 
the  forage  car.  The  remaining  cannoneers  assist  the  noncommissioned 
officers  at  the  doors.  When  chutes  are  available  all  these  men  except 
the  noncommissioned  officers  should  remain  outside  the  runways  until 
they  are  needed.  When  pens  and  chutes  are  available  the  horses  are 
penned  by  carload  lots.  A  noncommissioned  officer  and  a  driver  squad 
are  assigned  to  work  in  each  loading  pen.  The  horses  should  not  be 
loaded  until  the  loading  of  all  carriages  and  stores  has  been  completed. 

When  the  journey  is  to  exceed  24  hours  suitable  arrangements  should 
be  made  with  the  railroad  authorities  for  the  stop  for  feeding,  rest,  and 
exercise.  It  is  desirable  that  the  place  for  unloading  should  be  selected 
several  hours  beforehand  so  that  nroper  notice  may  be  given  to  the 
station  agent  and  other  railroad  officials.  In  order  to  avoid  reloading 
the  animals  at  night  a  station  should  be  selected  that  will  be  reached 
about  noon. 

The  necessary  requirements  for  a  suitable  feeding  station  are  water 
and  a  platform,  or  preferably,  a  chute  for  taking  the  animals  out  of  the 
cars. 

Ample  stock  pens,  dry  footing  facilities  for  renewing  the  1)edding  in 
the  cars,  etc.,  are  also  desirable. 

In  the  United  States  the  state  laws  for  shi])])ing  stock  should  be  con- 
sulted and  com])lied  with. 

LOADING 

The  remaining  dri\crs  bring  the  horses  from  the  loading  ])ens  and 
i)lace  a  new  carload  lot  in  the  loading  pen  as  soon  as  the  preceding-  lot 
has  been  loaded.  As  the  horses  arrive  the  drivers  in  the  loading  pen 
remove  the  halter  tie  ropes  and  pass  them  to  the  cannoneers  detailed 
to  collect  them.  The  gate  to  the  runway  is  kept  close  until  the  gang- 
plank is  in  place,  the  side  gates  closed  against  the  gangway,  and  the 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  189 

noncommissioned  officers  in  place.  Everything-  being-  in  order,  the  gate 
is  opened  and  one  of  the  drivers  leads  a  docile  horse  up  the  runway ; 
the  remaining  dri\ers  cause  the  horses  to  follow  as  closely  as  possible^ 
This  is  acconiplished  without  shouting  or  otherwise  exciting  the  ani- 
mals. Horses  that  hold  back  are  slapi)ed  or  gently  struck  across  the 
rump  with  a  tie  rope.  The  noncommissioned  officers  inside  the  car 
place  themselves  near  the  door  and  kpep  the  horses  quiet  by  speaking 
to  them.  When  the  first  horse  arrives,  one  of  the  noncommissioned 
officers  takes  him  from  the  driver  and  leads  him  to  one  end  of  the  car. 
After  this  the  noncommissioned  officers  confine  themselves  to  keeping 
the  horses  quiet  and  preventing  them  from  leaving  the  car.  Trained 
horses  are  thus  allowed  to  pack  themselves  in  the  car.  It  is  desirable 
that  as  many  horses  as  practicable  be  placed  in  each  car  not  provided 
with  separate  stalls. 

With  horses  not  trained  in  loading  each  noncommissioned  officer 
may  be  assisted  in  the  car  by  two  men  whose  duty  it  is  to  hold  the  last 
horse  received  in  place  across  the  car.  In  leading-  horses  be  careful  to 
face  the  front  and  do  not  turn  around  and  look  at  the  horse. 

The  car  having-  been  filled,  the  noncommissioned  officers  inside  the 
car  first  put  up  the  breast  bar  and  leave  the  car.  The  gangplank  is 
swung  back,  the  side  gates  slipped  back,  and  the  car  door  closed.  The 
mechanic  fastens  the  door  securely. 

When  loading  pens  are  not  available  and  the  horses  must  be  loaded 
from  a  platform  similar  methods  are  used  except  that  all  the  horses  are 
led  by  drivers  into  the  car.  The  halter  tie  ropes  are  taken  off  after 
entering  the  car  and  turned  over  to  the  cannoneers  collecting  them  as 
the  drivers  pass  out.  In  leaving  the  car  the  drivers  must  l)e  careful  to 
avoid  interfering  with  horses  just  entering. 

If  shy  of  the  ramp  a  little  hay  thrown  on  the  ramp  will  make  them 
less  shy.  Do  the  loading  quietly  and  have  the  animals  follow  one 
another  promptly.  Before  loading  the  car  see  that  the  door  on  the  far 
side  is  closed  and  fastened. 

In  some  cases  it  may  be  necessary  to  blindfold  an  animal  before  he 
can  be  led  into  the  car.  An  obstinate  animal  can  sometimes  be  made 
to  enter  by  holding  his  head  up,  twisting  his  tail  and  pushing  him  into 
the  car  by  main  force.  Another  method  which  can  be  used  is  to  drop  a 
loop  over  the  horse's  croup,  pass  the  end  of  the  rope  through  the  halter 
to  the  nose  piece  and  pull  on  the  rope,  this  will  make  him  move  forward 
a  step  or  two :  if  he  does  not  continue  to  move  up  the  ramp  get  enough 
men  on  the  ramp  to  pull  him  in.  Another  method  which  can  be  used,  is 
to  tie  a  blanket  over  his  head  or  otherwise  blindfold  the  aniiual.  turn 
him  around  several  times  and  lead  him  up  the  ramp. 

The  first  animal  is  led  to  one  end  of  the  car,  the  second  to  the  other 
end,  leaving  the  center  of  the  car  for  the  last  animals  loaded,  the  ani- 
mals are  arranged  so  that  the  alternate  ones  face  in  the  same  direction. 
Each  one  led  in  must  be  held  until  the  next  one  is  in  place. 

Load  quietly  and  avoid  exciting  the  animals  by  too  much  haste  or 
too  much  delay. 


190  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

The  man  in  charge  should  be  equipped  with  a  saw  and  hatchet  to  cut 
an  animal  loose  if  the  hoofs  g'et  fastened  between  the  sides  of  the  car. 

Except  in  hot  weather  the  animals  should  be  packed  snugly  together. 
If  an  animal  falls  down  and  he  cannot  get  up  without  assistance,  the 
man  in  charge  should  crawl  along  side  of  the  car  and  take  the  animal 
by  the  halter;  with  this  assistance  he  will  probably  get  up. 

DETRAINING 

The  train  conductor  should  be  requested  to  notify  the  train  Com- 
mander immediately  before  any  halt  of  10  minutes  or  longer  is  to  occur. 
During  that  time  the  stock  cars  are  to  be  inspected  by  an  officer,  the 
Stable  Sergeant  and  mechanics  and  any  necessary  repairs  are  to  be 
made  at  this  time. 

Before  reaching  the  feeding  station  the  senior  noncommissioned 
officer  in  each  car  details  a  cannoneer  to  remain  in  the  car  as  a  guard, 
causes  the  drivers  to  get  out  their  grooming  kits  and  cautions  the  men 
that  their  remaining  equipment,  except  pistols,  is  to  be  left  in  the  car. 

Upon  reaching  the  feeding  station  the  men,  except  the  Mess  Ser- 
geant, the  cooks  and  guards,  are  notified  to  leave  the  cars  and  fall  in  at  a 
designated  place.  Roll  having  been  called,  the  drivers  are  formed 
separately  from  the  cannoneers. 

Two  gun  squads  are  detailed  to  assist  the  Stable  Sergeant  in  prepar- 
ing the  forage.  These  men  are  at  once  marched  to  the  forage  car.  The 
Stable  Sergeant,  upon  reaching  the  forage  car,  gives  the  halter  tie  ropes 
to  one  of  the  gunners  who,  assisted  by  a  cannoneer,  takes  them  to  the 
stock  cars  and  distributes  them  as  they  are  needed.  These  men  are 
responsible  for  collecting  the  tie  ropes  and  turning  them  over  to  the 
Stable  Sergeant  when  the  horses  are  reloaded. 

The  Stable  Sergeant  causes  the  remaining  men  of  his  detail  to  put 
one  feed  of  oats  in  each  feed  bag  and  to  distribute  one  feed  of  hay  at  the 
feeding  places. 

The  feed  bags  are  not  taken  to  the  feeding  places  until  the  animals 
have  been  watered,  when  all  the  cannoneers  assist  in  this  distribution. 
No  attempt  is  made  to  give  the  horses  their  own  feed  bags. 

As  soon  as  the  stock  cars  have  been  unloaded,  the  mechanics  begin 
the  repairs.  An  officer  should  be  detailed  to  inspect  the  cars  and  have 
the  floors  resanded.  Before  any  car  is  unloaded  sufficient  drivers  to 
provide  one  for  each  two  horses,  are  sent  to  join  the  detail  of  four 
selected  noncommissioned  officers,  a  gun  squad  and  one  mechanic 
detailed  to  each  car  to  be  unloaded.  The  drivers  each  secure  two  halter 
tie  ropes.    An  officer  should  be  in  charge  of  this  unloading. 

Two  of  the  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  above  detail  are  assigned 
to  work  inside  the  car,  the  others  working  outside  at  the  door.  The 
cannoneers  assist  the  latter -noncommissioned  officers  and  also  assist 
the  drivers  in  catching  up  the  horses.  The  mechanic  removes,  the 
fastenings  and  assists  in  opening  the  door. 

The  princi])le  difficulty  in  unloading  is  in  i)re\'enting  the  horses  from 
leaving  the  car  before  the  gangwa3\  gates,  or  side  rails,  etc.,  are  in  ])lace 
and  in  avoiding  overcrowding  in  the  doorway. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  191 

As  soon  as  the  car  is  in  place  the  door  is  opened  enough  to  permit  the 
noncommissioned  officers  who  work  inside  to  enter.  These  men  at 
once  enter,  leaving  the  breast  bar  in  place,  and  quiet  the  horses  nearest 
the  door  by  speaking  to  and  caressing  them.  Everything  being  in 
readiness  the  door  is  completely  opened  and  the  gangway,  gates,  etc., 
put  in  position  as  quickly  as  possible. 

If  a  loading  pen  is  available  the  drivers  and  cannoneers  assigned  to 
the  car  go  into  the  pen  to  catch  the  horses  up  after  they  enter  it.  If  no 
pen  is  available  the  drivers  and  cannoneers  line  themselves  up  on  either 
side  of  door,  each  one  taking  an  animal  in  turn  as  he  leaves  the  doorway. 
All  men  being  in  their  places  the  noncommissioned  officers  inside  the 
car  remove  the  breast  bar,  and  every  endeavor  is  made  to  make  the 
horses  leave  the  car  quietly  and  in  single  file. 

The  cannoneers  assist  the  drivers  in  catching  up  the  horses.  As  soon 
as  all  the  animals  of  the  first  lot  have  been  caught  up  the  pairs  are 
formed  in  column  and  the  drivers  lead  the  horses  around  at  a  slow  walk. 
A  noncommissioned  officer  should  be  designated  to  lead  the  column  of 
this  first  lot.  As  each  succeeding  car  is  unloaded  and  the  horses  caught 
up,  the  drivers  join  the  rear  of  the  column. 

If  ample  feeding  lots  are  available  a  separate  lot  should  be  assigned 
each  separate  car.  In  any  case  no  attempt  is  made  to  separate  the 
horses  by  sections,  but  efi^ort  is  made  to  keep  together  the  horses  that 
have  been  in  the  same  car  and  to  reload  them  together.  Drivers  re- 
main with  the  pairs  which  they  catch  up  and  do  not  attempt  to  find 
their  own  horses  unless  the  latter  are  with  the  same  carload  to  which 
the  driver  is  assigned.  In  this  case  a  driver  may  be  allowed  to  take 
his  own  horses  after  they  are  tied  up  for  grooming  and  feeding. 

The  object  of  walking  the  horses  and  of  the  subsequent  grooming  is 
to  remove  the  stiffness  and  swelling  of  the  legs  induced  by  the  long 
standing  in  the  cars.  For  this  reason  the  exercise  of  the  horses  should 
be  continued  for  10  or  15  minutes  after  the  unloading  of  the  last  car  has 
been  completed. 

Hay  having  been  distributed  and  the  exercising  completed,  the 
horses  are  properly  secured  and  then  groomed  while  they  are  eating 
hay.  During  the  grooming  particular  attention  is  paid  to  cleaning  and 
hand  rubbing  the  legs  thoroughly.  All  kicks,  cuts,  and  abrasions  are 
reported  to  the  Stable  Sergeant,  who  visits  all  the  horses  at  this  time. 

During  the  grooming  the  cannoneers  proceed  to  the  stock  cars  and 
renew  the  sanding  if  material  is  available.  Tools  for  this  purpose  may 
frequently  be  had  from  the  railroad  or  stockyard  authorities  or  they 
may  be  taken  from  the  carriages.  Sometimes  it  may  be  necessary  to 
detail  a  number  of  cannoneers  to  draw  water  for  the  animals. 

The  grooming  is  continued  until  the  animals  must  be  watered,  which 
should  be  in  time  to  allow  them  to  eat  their  grain  before  it  is  necessary 
to  begin  reloading. 

At  the  proper  time  the  officer  in  charge  of  renewing  the  sand  causes 
the  cannoneers  to  take  the  filled  feed  bags  and  to  distribute  them  after 
all  the  horses  have  been  watered.     He  then  details  a  gun  squad  to 


192  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

collect  the  feed  bags  and  turn  them  over  to  the  Stable  Sergeant  at  the 
forage  car  after  they  havej^een  removed  from  the  horses. 

At  least  two  hours  should  be  allowed  for  unloading,  feeding,  and 
reloading. 

In  all  loading  and  unloading  particular  care  must  be  exercised  to 
avoid  any  shouting  or  excitement  on  the  part  of  the  men ;  these  are  the 
principle  causes  of  excitement  on  the  part  of  the  horses,  which,  in  turn. 
is  the  source  of  most  difficulties  in  handling  the  animals. 

The  horses  after  being  unloaded  are  arranged  by  sections  and  are 
secured  at  once,  care  being  taken  that  they  are  not  tied  to  a  flimsy  or 
movable  object.  The  feed  bags  are  not  filled  but  a  feed  of  hay  is  fed  at 
once.  Two  or  more  cannoneers  are  set  to  work  to  sort  the  feed  bags 
out  by  sections  and  later  when  the  horses  are  being  harnessed,  to  turn 
them  over  to  chiefs  of  sections. 

In  unloading  the  harness  it  is  arranged  by  sections  so  as  to  give  am- 
ple room  for  harnessing.  Ordinarily  the  battery  should  harness,  hitch 
in  and  clear  the  vicinity  as  soon  as  the  horses,  carriages  and  harness 
have  been  unloaded. 

The  first  essential  in  loading  and  unloading  is  a  definite  plan,  com- 
fortable to  existing  conditions  so  that  it  may  be  methodically  executed 
without  undue  haste. 

If  the  trip  is  to  be  for  a  great  length  of  time  the  horse's  shoes  should 
be  removed.     (This  applies  more  especially  to  a  sea  voyage.) 


PACKING  DRIVERS'  ROLLS 

(Taken  from  D.  &  S.  R.  F.  A.  Chap.  XIII) 

FIELD  AND  SURPLUS  KITS 

The  field  kit  consists  of  the  arms,  personal  and  horse  equipments 
and  clothing,  additional  to  that  worn  on  the  person,  required  by  and 
prescribed  for  the  soldier  in  the  field. 

The  articles  comprising  the  kit  var}^  with  the  duties  of  the  men  and 
are  furnished  by  the  Ordnance  Department,  the  Quartermaster  Corps, 
and  Medical  Department. 

The  field  kit  consists  of  the  arms,  personal  and  horse  equipments 
as  shown  below. 

ORDNANCE  PROPERTY 
(a)  Personal  Equipment 
Articles  Where  carried 

1   can,  bacon Near  saddle  pocket. 

1  canteen Near  cantle  ring. 

1   canteen  cover On  canteen. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  193 

1  cup  ]  fOn  canteen,  under  cover. 

1  fork  Near  saddle  pocket. 

1  knife  -Mess  Kit -  Near  saddle  pocket. 

1  spoon  Near  saddle  pocket. 

1  meat   canj  Near  saddle  pocket. 

,  ,    ,     ,    ,  .  fOn  person,  belt  outside  all  cloth- 

1  pistol,  belt,  holster,  magazine  poc-       ■  -^^^^  ^^  ^.j  ^^  hip,  first  aid 

kets,  2  extra  magazines,  21   cart-       ^^^^^^  ^^^  l^f^  ^^  ^^^  ^^^^^^ 

ridges   •  •  •  •  • •  • • front  of  belt,  magazine  pocket 

1    pouch   for  first   aid   packet |      -^^  ^^^^^  ^f  ^^^^^  ^-^  p^^l^^^ 

1  spurs,  pair On  person,  buckles  outside. 

1   spur  straps,  pair ) 

(b)  Horse  Equipment 

1  bridle On  horse. 

1  halter  headstall On  horse. 

.   ,    ,          .  (On   halter,   free   end   secured   in 

1  halter  tie  rope |     ^^^^  pommel  ring. 

1   link On  bridle,  free  end  snapped  up. 

1  saddle  blanket On  horse. 

1  saddle On  horse. 

fOn  saddle,  the  saddlebag  straps 

,        ,  ,,  ,               .  J     passed     through     the     cincha 

1   saddlebags,  pair ^-^^^  ^^^^  ^^^^^  ^-^^^^  ^^^^^^ 

[     fastening. 

1  surcingle Over  saddle,  buckled  on  near  side. 

1  currycomb       |„  .        .  .  ^^       ,  ,,  .    ^ 

1  horse  brush    jGroommg  kit....;   Off  saddle  pocket. 

1  feed  bag On  saddle. 

1  grain  bag In  feed  bag. 

QUARTERMASTER  PROPERTY 

(c)  Equipment 
Articles 

1  identification  tag Slung  around  neck  by  tape. 

.S  pins,  tent,  shelter j^^  ^^l^^l^^^  ^^^^ 

1  pole,  tent,  shelter 

,         .     ,    1        1    ,r             ,    ,  (Around    and    forming    part    of 

1  tent,  shelter,  half,  mounted |     blanket  roll. 

(d)  Clothing  Component 

1  blanket In  blanket  roll. 

.     ,.  ,  (Rolled  and  strapped  to  pommel 

1  slicker ^     ofsaddle. 

^            ,  (Off  saddle  pocket,  outside  canvas 

1   to^^el    \      lining. 


194  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

1  comb 

1  soap,  cake [Wrapped  in  towel. 

1  toothbrush  

1  drawers,  pair 

2  stockings,  pairs [In  blanket  roll. 

1  undershirt   

(e)  Rations 

2  reserve  rations,  each  consisting  of : — 

12  ounces  bacon In  bacon  can. 

16  ounces  hard  bread Divided  between  saddle  pockets. 

,  ,^                    rr       T>    o   r-  iln  coffee  bag  of  saddlebags,  in 

1.12  ounces  coiTee,R.&G ]     near  pocket. 

^  .  (In  sugar  bag  of  saddlebags,  in 

2.4  ounces  sugar j     ^^^^  p^^l^^^ 

^.,                      ,  (In    salt   bags   of   saddlebags,   in 

0.16  ounces   salt |     ^^^^  ^^^^^^ 

(f)  Forage 

1  feed,  4  pounds  of  grain In  grain  bag. 

(g)   Medical  Property 
1  first  aid  packet In  pouch  on  belt. 

When  the  sweater  is  carried  and  is  not  worn  on  the  person  it  is  placed 
in  the  blanket  roll.  When  the  overcoat  is  carried  and  is  not  worn  it  is 
rolled  and  strapped  on  the  pommel  of  the  saddle. 

To  roll  the  Overcoat  or  Slicker:  Spread  the  overcoat  on  the  ground, 
inside  down,  skirt  buttoned  throughout,  sleeves  parallel  to  the  middle 
seam,  collar  turned  over  on  the  shoulders. 

Turn  the  tails  of  the  coat  under  about  9  inches,  the  folded  edge  per- 
pendicular to  the  back  seam.  Fold  over  the  sides  to  form  a  rectangle 
not  more  than  34  inches  across,  according  to  the  size  of  the  coat.  Roll 
tightly  from  the  collar  with  the  hands  and  knees,  and  bring  over  the 
whole  roll  that  part  of  the  skirt  which  was  turned  under,  thus  binding 
the  roll. 

The  slicker  is  rolled  in  a  similar  manner. 

To  make  the  Blanket  Roll  for  Mounted  Men :  Spread  the  shelter  half 
(model  1904)  on  the  ground,  roll  straps  underneath,  and  fold  over  the 
triangular  part  of  the  rectangular  part.  Turn  under  the  roll  strap  edge 
of  the  shelter  half  so  that  the  width  of  the  fold  will  be  8  inches.  Fold 
the  blanket  once  across  the  longer  edges  and  lay  the  blanket  on  the 
shelter  half,  folded  edge  within  1  inch  of  the  roll  strap  edge  of  the 
shelter  half.  Fold  the  sides  of  the  blanket  and  of  the  shelter  half  in- 
ward, width  of  folds  about  11  inches.  The  shelter  tent  pole  and  pins  are 
now  laid  on  the  blanket  at  the  edge  farthest  from  the  roll  strap  edge, 
pole  on  one  side  of  the  center  line,  pins  on  the  other,  so  as  to  allow  the 
roll  when  completed  to  bend  at  the  center.   Place  the  underclothing  on 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  195 

the  blanket.     If  the  sweater  is  to  go  in  the  roll,  spread  smoothly  over 
the  blanket. 

Roll  tightly  toward  the  roll  strap  edge,  using  hands  and  knees,  and 
bring  over  the  entire  roll  the  i^art  of  the  shelter  half  which  was  turned 
under,  thus  binding  the  roll.  lUickle  the  two  available  roll  straps  about 
the  roll.  i)assing  them  aroun<l  twice.  The  roll  thus  formed  should  be 
about  44  inches  long. 

To  pack  the  Feed  Bag  for  Individually  Mounted  Men:  4  he  grain  is 
jilaced  in  the  grain  sack  and  e{|ually  divided  between  the  two  halves. 
The  elongated  grain  sack  is  then  placed  inside  the  feed  bag  and  the 
whole  lashed  tightly  to  the  blanket  roll  by  the  web  straps  at  each  end 
of  the  feed  bag.  so  that  the  open  part  of  the  feed  bag  is  closed  against 
the  blanket  roll.  If  empty,  the  feed  bag,  with  grain  sack  enclosed  and 
all  web  straps  buried  in  the  bag.  is  lashed  to  the  blanket  roll  by  the 
coat  straps. 

To  pack  the  blanket  roll  Vvith  the  attached  feed  bag.  three  coat  straps 
are  used,  one  to  fasten  the  middle  of  the  roll  to  the  middle  of  the  cantle 
of  the  saddle,  and  one  at  each  end  to  fasten  the  end  of  the  roll  to  the 
saddlebag"  strap  ring.  The  blanket  roll  is  placed  on  the  cantle  so  that 
the  feed  bag-  will  be  UDpermost.  44ie  coat  straps  are  passed  twice 
around  the  roll  and  buckled. 

The  equipment  of  each  driver  is  the  same  as  for  individually  mounted 
men  with  the  exception  of  horse  equipment  and  grain. 

The  driver's  horse  equipment  consists  of  1  horse  brush,  1  curry  comb, 
2  feed  bags,  2  grain  hags,  and  2  surcingles.  Each  driver  carries  a  feed 
of  grain  for  each  horse.  Halters,  saddlebags,  saddle  blankets,  etc.,  are 
included  in  the  harness. 

The  driver's  canteen  is  snapped  in  the  near  pommel  ring  of  the  off 
saddle.  His  saddlebags,  blanket  roll,  feed  bags,  slicker,  etc.,  are  like- 
wise packed  on  the  off  saddle.  After  attaching  his  slicker  the  driver 
turns  the  top  of  the  roll  over  the  ]^ommel  down  into  the  saddle  so  as  to 
avoid  any  interference  with  the  rein  roller  on  the  off  saddle.  When  old 
model  canteen  and  cup  are  issued  the  cup  is  carried  in  near  saddle 
pocket. 

To  pack  the  Driver's  Blanket  Roll  and  Feed  Bags:  The  grain  is 
placed  in  the  grain  sacks  and  each  sack  placed  in  its  feed  bag'.  The  two 
feed  bags  are  tied  securely  together  at  their  open  ends,  using  the  "nose 
and  head"  web  straps,  the  two  bags  being  tied  as  closely  as  possible  to 
prevent  the  lower  ends  chafing  against  the  traces.  The  two  feed  bags 
are  then  suspended  across  the  seat  of  the  saddle  of  the  off  horse  and 
lashed  in  place  by  the  60  inch  coat  straps  on  each  side,  as  follows : 

Pass  the  coat  strap  under  the  rear  quarter  strap  and  take  one  turn 
around  the  nose  bag,  if  necessary  punching  a  "  throat"  into  the  bag  near 
the  lower  end  to  prevent  the  coat  strap  slipping.  The  blanket  roll  being 
lashed  to  the  center  of  the  cantle.  bring  the  free  end  of  the  roll  for- 
ward so  as  to  bind  over  the  feed  bag  and  take  tw^o  turns  with  the  coat 
strap;  then  pass  the  free  end  of  this  strap  over  the  straps  thus  in 
place  and  buckle  tightly.     Do  the  same  on  the  other  side. 


196  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

If  more  than  one  feed  is  to  be  carried,  place  the  grain  for  the  first  feel 
in  the  closed  end  of  the  feed  bag"  and  lash  the  feed  bag  tightly  with 
the  rawhide  thong.  Put  the  remainder  of  the  grain  in  the  grain  sack, 
and  place  the  grain  sack  in  the  feed  bag ;  secure  two  feed  bags  to  the 
off  saddle  as  above. 

The  surcingles  are  carried  one  on  each  horse,  buckled  over  the  saddle. 

With  the  exceptions  noted,  all  articles  of  the  driver's  equipment  are 
packed  and  carried  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  described  for  individu- 
ally mounted  men.  Blanket  rolls  will  be  placed  well  up  on  cantle  of 
saddle;  in  the  saddle  when  possible  so  as  to  prevent  any  possibility 
of  having  weight  on  horses  loins. 

In  addition  to  the  kits  above  prescribed,  each  corporal  is  provided 
with  a  housewife  which  he  will  carry  in  his  haversack  or  off  saddle 
pocket. 

The  members  of  the  special  details  and  of  the  headquarters  company 
are  provided  with  various  equipment  which  they  carry  on  their  persons. 
The  field  glasses  will  be  carried  on  the  right  side,  the  flag  kit  on  the 
back,  the  strap  in  each  case  passing  over  the  left  shoulder. 

For  fastening  the  poncho  and  slicker,  two  straps  are  necessary. 
These  are  passed  through  the  staples  on  each  side  of  the  pommel. 

Individually  mounted  men  will  place  nose  bags  on,  with  near  side  of 
blanket  roll  inserted  in  nose  bag  and  both  firmly  strapped  together.  If 
nose  bags  are  empty,  a  nose  bag  is  placed  over  each  end  of  blanket  roll 
and  strapped  together  with  nose  bag  straps.  The  roll  is  buckled  and 
fastened  as  described  above. 

It  is  well  to  fasten  saddle  bag  to  "D"  ring  on  cincha. 

The  roll  should  be  of  proper  length  and  rolled  tightly  and  there 
should  be  no  part  of  the  roll  touching  the  horse,  being  especially  care- 
ful to  keep  weight  oft'  the  loins. 

KNOTS 
CORDAGE 

A  cord  which  is  more  than  one  inch  in  circumference  is  usually  called 
a  rope.  Ropes  are  made  of  hemp,  flax,  cotton,  coir  or  other  vegetable 
fiber;  or  of  copper,  steel,  or  other  flexible  metallic  wire. 

Several  vegetable  fibers  twisted  together  form  a  yarn,  the  size  of  the 
yarn  depending  upon  the  size  of  the  rope.  Several  yarns  are  then 
twisted  or  spun  into  a  strand.  Three  or  four  of  these  strands  twisted 
together  form  a  rope.  Beginning  with  the  fibers  composing  the  yarn, 
the  twists  of  the  different  parts  alwa3-s  alternate  in  opposite  directions 
Thus  the  fibers  are  twisted  right  to  form  the  yarn  ;  the  yarns  are  twisted 
left  to  form  the  strand  ;  the  strands  are  twisted  right  to  form  the  rope ; 
the  ropes  are  laid  up  left  to  form  the  cable.  This  alternation  in  the 
that  is,  in  following  the  strand  away  from  the  observer  the  rotation  will 
twist  serves  to  keep  the  rope  in  its  jiroper  form  when  under  tension. 
Ropes  have  special  names  according  to  the  number  and  arrangement  of 
strands.    The  three  strand  rope  which  is  laid  up  (twisted)  right  hand, 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  197 

be  clockwise,  is  called  a  plain  laid  or  a  right  hand  rope.  Such  roj)e  is 
said  to  be  laid  up  "with  the  sun." 

The  size  of  rope  is  determined  by  its  circumference  in  inches.  Any 
cord  less  than  an  inch  in  circumference  is  determined  by  its  diameter. 

When  four  strands  are  laid  up  (twisted)  right  handed,  the  rope  is 
called  shroud  laid.  Since  the  four  spiral  strands  would  leave  a  hollow 
in  the  center  they  are  usually  laid  up  around  a  smaller  inner  rope  called 
the  heart  or  core.  Jn  splicing,  this  heart  or  core  must  be  removed  in  the 
part  of  the  rope  unlaid  for  splicing. 

Cable  laid  rope  is  made  by  laying-  up  three  ropes  of  three  strands  each. 
The  individual  ropes  are  laid  up  right  handed  in  themselves  and  then 
the  three  ropes  are  laid  up  into  one  cable  left  handed. 

Ropes  and  cord  are  also  braided  by  machinery,  being  made  from 
hemp  or  cotton  yarns;  an  example  is  found  in  sash  cord. 

Wire  rope  is  made  up  of  wires  twisted  into  strands,  six  of  these 
strands  being  usually  laid  up  into  a  wire  rope  around  a  wire  or  hemp 
core. 

White  or  untarred  rope  is  more  flexible  and  stronger  than  tarred  rope. 
Since  there  is  less  waste  of  power  due  to  stifil'ness  of  cordage,  it  is  more 
suitable  for  tackles. 

Tarred  rope  is  more  durable,  particularly  when  exposed  to  moisture 
The  tarring  reduces  the  strength  of  the  rope  but  prevents  it  from  rot- 
ting. 

All  smaller  sized  cordage  usually  called  line  cord,  twine  or  spun  yarn 
is  known  as  "seizing  stuff."  The  different  kinds  have  special  names 
according  to  the  number  of  strands  and  manner  of  laying  up. 

Coiling:  Right  handed  rope  should  be  coiled  clockwise  and  vice  versa 
for  left  handed  rope.  Metal  wire  ropes  of  large  size  should  be  coiled 
in  figure  of  eight  which  enables  its  being  uncoiled  without  kinking. 

Uncoiling  and  stretching:  Before  using  a  rope  it  should  be  uncoiled 
against  its  lay  to  get  the  turns  out  without  kinking.  All  new  rope 
should  be  stretched  before  using.  Old  rope  should  be  frequently 
tested  by  stretching.  Any  rope  used  in  blocks  particularly  new  rope, 
will  have  a  tendency  to  twist,  and  the  greater  the  strain  the  greater  the 
tendency  of  the  rope  to  unlay  itself  and  so  cause  a  twist. 

To  stretch  a  rope  uncoil  it  by  following  and  unkinking  the  rope  for 
its  full  length  ;  attach  one  end  of  the  rope  to  a  swivel-hook  block  which 
is  secured  to  a  hold-fast  clear  of  the  ground  ;  connect  the  other  end  with 
a  capstan  or  attach  it  to  the  pintle  of  a  horsed  limber  and  pull  taut, 
whereupon  the  rope  will  begin  to  unlay  and  spin  the  block  around,  thus 
taking  the  twist  out  of  the  rope.  In  order  to  remove  the  twist  perma- 
nently, a  rope  should  be  made  fast  and  left  taut  for  an  hour  or  more. 
In  this  way  a  rope  may  be  tested  for  strength  as  well  as  stretched. 

CARE  OF  CORDAGE 

(a)  Always  keep  as  dry  as  possible. 

(b)  When  not  in  actual  use,  it  should  be  coiled  and  raised  ofif  the 
ground,  keeping  large  rope  on  a  skid  and  small  rope  hung  up  on  pins  or 
hooks. 


198  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

(c)  Never  coil  rope  until  it  is  perfectly  dry.  If  stored  in  a  damp  con- 
dition or  in  a  damp  place  it  will  rapidly  deteriorate.  Always  coil  up 
neatly  and  label. 

(d)  Exterior  appearances  may  be  all  right  whereas  rope  may  be 
worm  eaten  or  moldy  inside;  therefore  always  test  strength  of  rope 
before  using, 

(e)  Rope  in  storage  should  be  uncoiled,  dried  and  stretched  every 
six  months. 

(f)  Picket  rope  on  the  carriages  should  be  similary  treated  at  least 
once  a  month. 

(g)  Any  part  of  a  rope  exposed  to  chafing  should  be  parceled,  that 
is,  protected  by  narrow  strips  of  well  tarred  canvas. 

(h)  Where  rope  passes  over  projections,  corners  or  sharp  edges, 
these  should  be  carefully  padded  with  a  gunny  sack  or  pieces  of  wood 
to  avoid  damage  to  the  rope. 

(i)  When  a  weight  is  to  be  raised  it  should  be  prevented  from  sway- 
ing or  held  in  position  by  means  of  a  guy  rope,  thus  avoiding  damage 
to  the  lifting  rope. 

(j)  In  adjusting  a  sling  always  avoid  placing  the  splice  over  the 
lifting  hook  or  a  sharp  corner.  A  sling  should  always  be  carefully  ad- 
justed, jammed  down  and  hauled  taut  before  beginning  to  lift.  This 
will  insure  that  the  strain  is  gradually  equalized  throughout  the  whole 
rope.  Furthermore  proper  adjustment  of  a  sling  will  prevent  contents 
of  sling  from  falling  out. 

(k)  The  breaking  weight  of  an  ordinary  picket  rope  (2^  inch  to  3 
inch  rope)  is  about  3  tons  for  dead  loads.  The  safe  load  which  can  be 
])ut  on  a  rope  is  much  smaller,  usually  not  exceeding  one-third  to  one- 
half  the  breaking  weight.  With  old  rope  and  live  loads,  a  larger  factor 
of  safety  must  be  used. 

(1)  The  strength  of  a  new  rope  varies  as  the  square  of  the  circum- 
ference of  the  rope. 

The  bight  of  a  rope  is  any  part  of  it  not  an  end.  A  bight  or  loop  is 
formed  by  bending  or  doubling  the  rope.  The  spaces  between  the 
strands  of  a  rope  are  called  the  jaws.  A  rope  is  long-jawed  when  it  is 
loosely  twisted  or  laid  up ;  it  is  short-jawed  when  it  is  tightly  laid  up 
or  twisted. 

The  free  end  of  the  rope  is  called  the  running  end.  The  rest  of  the 
rope  is  called  the  standing  end  or  part. 

Stationary  ropes  such  as  guys,  stays,  etc.,  are  called  standing  rig- 
ging. Ropes  that  run  through  blocks  or  pulleys  are  called  running 
rigging. 

Whipping  a  rope  is  winding  a  i:)iece  of  twine  around  the  end  to  pre- 
vent it  from  unlaying  or  fraying  out.  Twine  or  other  stufif  is  issued 
for  whipping.  Worming  is  filling  up  the  jaws  of  the  rope  by  laying 
spun  yarn  or  other  small  stuff  along  them.  This  is  done  in  order  to 
make  the  surface  smooth  for  ])arceling. 

Parceling  a  rope  is  wrapping  narrow  strips  of  well  tarred  canvas 
around  it  in  order  to  protect  it  ?rom  water,  or  to  prevent  the  rope  from 
being  chafed  or  cut  when  bearing  against  a  rough  surface  or  sharp 
edge. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  199 

Serving  is  winding'  spun  yarn  or  other  small  stnfif  around  a  rope. 
The  turns  are  laid  on  close  tog^ether  and  drawn  ti^ht  by  means  of  a 
serving  mallet.  The  service  is  always  i)ut  on  against  the  lay  of  the 
rope. 

Splicing  a  rope  is  joining  two  ends  together  or  joining  an  end  of  a 
rope  to  any  part  of  it  by  interweaving  the  strands  in  a  regular  manner. 

Seizing  a  roi:)e  is  to  lash  two  parts  of  it  together  or  to  lash  any  part 
of  a  rope  to  prevent  it  from  unlaying  by  means  of  spun  yarn  or  seizing 
stuff. 

Pointing  a  rope  is  to  taper  an  end  so  that  it  can  enter  a  hole  or  block 
more  easily. 

Frapping  a  rope  is  to  draw  together  two  or  more  leads  on  a  rope  for 
the  purpose  of  taking  in  slack. 

Nippering  is  binding  together  two  or  more  ropes  to  prevent  them 
from  slipping  over  each  other.  This  is  usually  done  by  means  of  a 
loop  twisted  taut  with  a  stick. 

Mousing:  When  a  hook  is  closed  with  cord  or  yarn  so  as  to  prevent 
it  from  disengaging  or  slipping  its  lead,  the  hook  is  said  to  be  moused. 

KNOTS 

It  is  very  important  that  every  man  not  only  learn  how  to  tie  the 
following  knots,  but  also  understand  for  what  purpose  each  knot,  lash- 
ing and  hitch  may  be  used  and  the  different  ways  in  which  the  same 
knot,  lashing  or  hitch  may  be  applied,  depending  upon  circumstances. 
Almost  all  the  knots,  lashing  and  hitches  indicated  below  are  described 
and  illustrated  in  the  Eiifjiiurrs'  Field  Manual,  Pages  174  to  185, 
which   publication   should   be   in   the   possession   of   every  instructor. 

No  man  can  become  expert  in  the  use  of  ropes  without  thorough 
fundamental  instruction  supplemented  by  constant  practice  and  ma- 
nipulation. To  enable  their  men  to  acquire  this  manual  dexterity,  in- 
structors should  provide  the  necessary  rope  and  other  equipment  for 
tying  knots  and  making  hitches,  splices,  etc.  For  practice  in  tying 
knots,  etc.,  the  shelter  tent  rope,  halter  ropes,  and  later  on  picket  ropes 
may  also  be  used.  For  practice  in  splicing,  old  and  new  rope  either 
plain  or  shroud  laid,  in  five  or  six  lengths,  will  be  found  most  con- 
venient. Fvery  man  should  be  required  to  qualify  on  all  the  knots, 
splices,  hitches,  lashings  and  use  of  blocks  and  tackles  comprising  this 
course  (See  Engineers  Field  Manual,  Page  174). 

1.  Overhand  or  Thumb  Knot.  11.  Bowline. 

2.  Figure  8.  12.  Running  Bowline. 

3.  Square  or  Reef  Knot.  13.   Bowline  on  a  Bight. 

4.  Draw  Knot.  "     14.  Mooring  Knot. 

5.  Thief  Knot.  15.  Greble  Knot. 

6.  Granny  Knot.  16.   Prolonge  Knot. 

7.  Fisherman's  Knot.  17.  Single  Sheet  Bend. 

8.  Flemish  Loop.  (Weaver's  Knot) 

9.  Running  or  Slip  Knot.  18.  Double  Sheet  Bend. 
10.  Chain  Knot.                                      19.  Two  Half  Hitches. 


200  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  ;  _ 

20.  Round    Turn    and  Two   Half      26.  P.lackwall  IHtch. 
Hitches.  27.   Midshipman's  Hitch, 

21.  Fisherman's   Bend  or  Anchor      28.  'I>legraph  Hitch. 
Knot.  29.  Catspaw. 

22.  Clove  Hitch.  30.  Sheep  Shank. 

23.  Timber  Hitch.  31.  Wall  Knot. 

24.  Rollini^  Hitch.  1^2.  Crown  on  ^\'all. 

25.  Lever  Hitch. 

The  descriptions  of  knots,  etc.,  given  below  are  supplementary  to 
those  given  in  the  Engineers'  Field  Manual.  A  few  knots  not  given 
therein  are  also  described. 

A  draw  knot  dififers  from  a  square  knot  in  that  one  or  both  ends  are 
not  pulled  through,  permitting  it  to  be  readily  untied.  This  is  the 
knot  commonly  used  in  tying  shoe  laces.  It  is  used  for  joining  two 
ends  of  a  rope  when  it  is  required  to  untie  the  knot  readih^  or  from  a 
distance. 

Fisherman's  Knot:  Used  for  joining  two  stiff  ropes  whether  of  the 
same  or  unequal  size.  It  is  by  t3'ing  an  overhand  knot  on  the  end  of 
each  rope  that  the  knot  will  bind  the  other  rope.  The  two  knots  and 
ends  are  then  pulled  together.  When  necessary  to  insure  the  knot  from 
slipping,  two  overhand  knots  instead  of  one  may  be  made  on  each  rope. 

Flemish  Loop:  A  loop  on  the  end  of  a  rope  after  which  an  overhand 
knot  is  tied  wnth  the  running  end  around  the  standing  part  and  drawn 
taut.    Useful  knot  whever  a  standing  loop  is  desired. 

Running  or  Slip  Knot  is  used  to  form  a  loop  that  will  tighten  up 
around  an  object  when  the  rope  is  pulled.     It  may  be  single  or  double. 

Chain  Knot:  A  series  of  loops  on  a  cord  or  rope  in  which  each  loop 
successfully  locks  the  one  above  it  atid  the  last  loop  is  secured  by 
passing  the  end  of  the  cord  through  it.  This  knot  is  used  to  shorten 
up  a  cord  and  may  be  ornamental,  as  on  a  trumpet  cord. 

The  Greble  Knot  is  used  in  tying  a  halter  rope  to  the  picket  line. 
A  half  turn  is  taken  around  the  picket  rope  and  the  halter  rope  doubled 
back  over  the  standing  part  of  the  rope,  whereupon  another  half  turn 
is  made  around  the  picket  rope  in  the  opposite  direction  and  the  halter 
rope  again  doubled  back  around  the  standing  part,  the  running  end 
being  finally  passed  under  the  standing  part  of  the  rope.  This  knot 
will  not  slip  along  the  picket  rope  and  cannot  be  easily  untied  by  a 
horse.  Other  convenient  hitches  on  the  picket  line  are  the  rolling 
hitch  and  the  mooring  knot.  The  rolling  hitch  is  a  very  hard  knot  to 
untie  if  the  rope  has  become  wet. 

Prolonge  Knot  is  used  to  make  a  loop  that  will  not  run  up.  It  is 
similar  to  the  Carrick  bend  and  would  be  represented  by  the  Carrick 
bend,  if  the  two  ends  on  either  side  were  joined  to  form  a  loon,  which 
is  passed  around  the  trail.  Unless  the  pull  is  applied  to  both  the  ends, 
this  knot  is  apt  to  jam  so  that  it  cannot  be  readily  untied.  It  is  used 
to  attach  the  trail  of  a  field  gun  to  the  limber. 

Lever  Hitch  consists  of  an  incomplete  overhand  knot  along  the  bight 
of  a  rope  held  by  some  pin.  It  is  used  to  pull  up  pickets,  to  secure 
wooden  rounds  of  a  rope  ladder  or  to  draw  seizing  tight. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  201 

Midshipman's  Hitch  is  a  variation  of  the  l^lackvvall  Hitch.  AfU-r 
having'  made  the  IMackwall  hitch  another  iiitch  is  made  around  the 
onter  ])art  of  the  hook.  It  is  I)etter  adaj^ted  than  the  lUackwah  Iiitch 
hecause  it  does  not  sHp  or  become  nndone  as  readily  as  the  latter. 

The  Wall  Knot  and  the  Crown  on  Wall  are  both  nsed  for  finishing 
olT  ends  of  ropes  to  prevent  unstranding. 

Splices,     (Page  181,  Engineers'  Field  Manual) 

1.  Eye  Splice, 

2.  Long  Splice, 

3.  Short  Splice. 

Slings. 

1.  Horizontal  Barrel  Sling, 

2.  Vertical  Barrel  Sling, 

3.  Ordinary  Sling, 

4.  Body  Sling. 

The  ordinary  sling  is  nothing  more  than  a  large  bowline  made  into 
a  sling  around  a  box,  barrel  or  package. 

If  the  loops  of  a  bowline  on  a  bight  are  made  large  these  loops  may 
be  used  as  a  body  sling,  one  loop  passing  under  the  arm  pits,  the  other 
loop  under  the  knees. 

Lashings,     (Page  182,  Engineers'  Field  Manual) 

1.  Shear  Lashing. 

2.  Gin  Lashing, 

3.  Square  Lashing, 

4.  Hold  Fasts. 

Blocks  and  Tackles.     (See  ])age  185  Engiiwers  Field  Manual.) 
The  follow^ing  are  the  princi])le  points  to  be  carefully  observed  in  the 
arrangement  and  the  use  of  tackles. 

(a)  That  the  condition  and  strength  of  the  straps.  l)locks  and  fall 
are  good. 

(b)  That  the  fall  is  free  from  kinks  and  runs  freely  over  the  sheave. 

(c)  That  the  lead  and  running  end  of  the  fall  do  not  rub  against 
the  shell. 

(d)  That  the  running  end  goes  in  the  proj^er  direction,  otherwise 
both  the  fall  and  the  shell  will  suffer. 

(e)  That  the  blocks  are  well  lubricated,  and  both  blocks  and  fall  are 
at  all  times  kept  free  from  dirt  and  grit.  Blocks  not  in  good  working 
order  will  "com])lain,"  that  is,  make  a  noise  or  scuieak. 

(f)  Tackles  should  be  carried  and  not  dragged  along  the  ground. 

(g)  See  that  the  pins  securing  the  hook  and  the  sleeves  of  the  blocks 
are  not  loose,  that  the  standing  end  of  the  fall  is  properly  fastened  to 
the  block. 

(h)  See  that  the  fall  is  properly  stoppered  and  that  the  stopper  is 
fully  equal  to  the  strain  to  which  it  will  be  subjected. 

(i)  The  position  of  the  men  should  be  such  as  to  insure  safety  to 
themselves  in  case  of  accident. 


202  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

(j)  Men  should  be  trained  to  pull  together  silently.  At  the  caution 
"fast"  the  slack  is  taken  in,  and  at  the  command  '"heave"  they  should 
pull  together  and  keep  what  they  gain. 

(k)  To  prevent  long  tackles  from  twisting  it  is  a  good  plan  to  leave 
them  so  that  the  running  end  comes  from  the  center  sheave. 

(1)  Never  trust  to  hold  a  suspended  Aveight  directly  by  man  power 
alone.  If  it  is  possible,  always  take  a  turn  around  some  object  and  in 
this  way  hold  securely  what  has  been  gained. 

(m)  Always  use  blocks  that  are  large  enough  so  that  the  fall  will 
run  freely  through  the  block  and  not  ride  upon  the  edge  of  the  sheaves. 
The  rope  should  not  quite  fill  the  grooves  on  the  sheave. 

(n)  When  the  falls  are  new  it  will  be  found  that  the  tackles  have 
a  tendency  to  twist.  This  can  be  prevented  by  placing  a  smooth  picket 
at  right  angles  between  the  leads  as  close  to  the  moving  block  as  pos- 
sible, the  picket  being  kept  in  place  by  a  lashing  or  drag  rope  at  one 
end  while  the  other  end  is  held  by  two  men  or  made  fast  to  some  fixed 
object. 

(o)  Care  must  be  taken  that  the  men  can  apply  their  strength  in 
the  direction  in  which  it  would  be  most  effective.  This  is  done  by 
using  a  single  block  made  fast  at  some  point  so  as  to  lead  the  fall  in 
the  direction  desired. 

WHiere  the  necessary  equipment  is  available  the  following  maneuvers 
should  be  practiced  with  tackles  (see  Pages  185-186,  Engineers'  Field 
Manual)  : 

(a)  Overhaul,  round  in  and  chock-a-block. 

(b)  Whip  tackle. 

(c)  Gun  tackle. 

(d)  Luff  tackle. 

(e)  Double  tackle. 

(f)  Triple  tackle. 

(g)  Single  Burton, 
(h)   Double  Burton. 

By  the  power  of  a  tackle  we  mean  its  mechanical  advantage  or  the 
ratio  of  the  force  exerted  by  it  to  that  applied  to  the  fall. 

A  whip  tackle  doubles  the  power. 

A  whip  upon  a  whip  quadruples  the  original  power  or  multiplies  it 
by  four. 

The  power  of  a  gun  tackle  is  2. 

The  power  of  an  inverted  gun  tackle  is  3. 

The  power  of  a  luff  tackle  is  3. 

The  power  of  any  similar  combination  of  two  blocks  consisting  of 
two  or  more  pulleys  each,  over  which  a  continuous  rope  passes,  is 
equal  to  the  number  of  parts  of  the  rope  that  act  onthe  block  to  which 
the  weight  is  attached.  The  force  or  pull  necessary  to  support  a  given 
weight  using  this  kind  of  a  tackle  is  therefore  equal  to  the  weight 
divided  by  the  power  of  the  tackle. 

A  single  Burton  has  a  power  of  3.  Inverted,  this  tackle  is  a  whip 
upon  a  whip  and  has  a  power  of  4. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  203 

A  double  Burton  has  a  power  of  7.    Inverted  it  is  a  whip  upon  a  whip 
and  has  a  j^ower  of  8. 
Field  Expedients  for  Field  Artillery. 

Ropes  may  l)c  attached  in  the  following-  way: 

For  ordinary  pulls:  By  running  bowline  or  a  clove  hitch  around  the 
trail  of  the  carriage,  well  back  near  the  breech  of  the  gun. 

For  a  short,  hard  pull,  as  in  lifting  a  carriage  out  of  a  ditch,  take  a 
turn  with  one  end  of  the  rope  around  the  felloe  as  near  as  possible  to 
the  ground.  Bring  the  rope  over  its  short  end  and  up  over  the  tire  to 
the  front.  The  rope  should  be  placed  around  the  felloe  so  that  it  will 
be  pulled  clear  of  the  wheel  when  the  short  end  is  released  by  the  turn- 
ing of  the  wheel. 

For  use  -without  team  or  when  it  is  desired  to  use  team  in  advance 
of  its  regular  position :  By  passing  the  hook  end  of  .one  rope  and  the 
ring  end  of  another  under  the  doubletree  on  ojiposite  sides  of  the  pole 
and  hooking  together  above  pole  in  rear  of  doubletree.  (For  rope 
without  hooks  tie  ends  above  pole.)  With  each  rope  a  half  hitch  is 
taken  around  the  pole  near  its  end.  Attach  rope  to  limber  in  case  it 
is  desired  to  use  teams. 

When  carriage  is  mired  it  may  be  pulled  out  by  attaching  it  with  a 
rope  to  the  middle  of  a  log  or  balk.  Each  end  of  this  balk  is  then 
attached  to  the  pintle  of  a  limber.  The  balk  acts  as  a  giant  doubletree 
between  the  two  limbers. 

For  use  to  give  wheels  more  traction:  The  rope  is  wound  around 
the  felloe  and  tire  with  turns  about  a  foot  apart  to  enable  the  wheel  to 
get  a  grip.    The  ends  should  be  fastened  with  a  half  hitch. 

For  use  as  a  brake:  The  ropes  are  secured  around  the  felloe  and  tire 
(bowline)  of  the  rear  wheels  and  then  tied  as  far  forward  on  the  same 
carriage  as  possible. 

To  repair  spokes:  If  spoke  is  split,  lash  with  rope;  if  almost  broken 
place  a  splint  on  each  side  and  lash  securely. 

To  repair  pole  (wooden)  :  If  ])ole  is  split  lash  wnth  rope  with  or  with- 
out splints  according  to  the  nature  of  the  split.  If  pole  is  broken  ofif  and 
no  extra  pole  is  available  cut  a  pole  from  a  tree  and  fit  it  into  the  pole 
clamp  seat  and  socket. 

To  repair  pole  (steel)  :  Straighten  liroken  ends  out  so  as  to  make 
socket  and  insert  wooden  pole  and  run  pin  through  to  hold  in  place. 

To  hold  lunette  on  the  pintle,  if  the  pintle  is  broken  off:  Place  a 
mast-head  or  carrick  bend  over  the  lunette  and  draw  it  taut.  Place 
the  lunette  on  the  pintle  and  bring  the  double  ends  of  the  rope  around 
in  back  beneath  the  pintle.  Take  two  or  three  turns  back  of  the  pintle 
in  opposite  directions  with  each  double  end  and  secure  with  a  square 
knot. 

If  lunette  is  broken:  Place  the  trail  of  the  caisson  in  a  sling  (carrick 
bend)  and  bring  the  ends  up  inside  the  handles  and  through  pintle 
and  secure  with  a  square  knot. 

If  pintle  is  broken:  Place  a  mast  head  over  end  of  the  lunette  and 
run  the  double  ends  up  through  the  lunette.  Take  two  or  thr^e  turns 
around  back  of  the  one  turn  passing  through  the  opening  above  the 
rails. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  205 

TYPES  OF  STABLES  AND  CORRALS 

Stables  are  built  in  two  .general  types,  closed  and  open. 

Closed  stables  are  the  normal  type  in  the  United  States  Army  and 
in  ])ractically  all  other  armies.  They  are  found  in  all  .^'arrisons  except 
those  located  in  very  warm  climates.  'J'hey  afford  the  best  shelter  for 
animals  and  are  necessary  wherever  extremely  cold  weather  is  expe- 
rienced. 

Open  stables  are  common  along-  the  Mexican  Border  and  in  other 
warm  climates,  in  remount  depots  and  v/herever  hasty  or  temporary 
shelter  is  required.  It  was  the  type  used  overseas  by  the  Allies  both 
for  troops  and  in  remount  depots  and  veterinary  hospitals.  While 
not  affording-  as  much  shelter  from  the  elements  as  the  closed  type, 
they  are  perfectly  ventilated  and  of  much  simpler  construction  hence 
are  to  be  preferred  wherever  the  climate  permits. 

There  are  certain  essential  features  of  construction  which  are  com- 
mon to  both  types,  i.e.,  site,  arrangement,  drainage,  ventilation,  light, 
floors  and  fitting. 

The  Site  should  provide  pure  air,  a  dry  foundation  and  surroundings, 
good  w^ater  supply,  good  drainage,  protection  from  storms,  sunlight, 
and  good   roads. 

The  Arrangements  of  Stables  should  be  in  echelons,  or  in  parallel 
lines.  They  should  not  be  built  too  closely  together  nor  so  as  to  form 
small  inclosures  on  account  of  the  lack  of  ventilation  and  sun  light, 
and  danger  of  spreading  communicable  diseases. 

The  Interior  of  Stables  should  be  well  drained  as  well  as  the  ex- 
terior. Stalls  should  have  a  slight  slope  from  head  to  heel.  There 
should  be  a  shallow  open  drain  just  outside  the  line  of  heel  posts,  run- 
ning the  length  of  the  stable,  wnth  a  small  slope  to  sub-drain  in  the 
center  or  at  the  ends.  In  open  stables  the  roof  should  be  drained  by  a 
gutter  running  along  under  the  eaves  which  carries  the  water  to  a  sub- 
drain  at  one  end. 

Ventilation  must  be  thorough  %and  continuous — WITHOUT 
DRAFT.  This  is  automatic  in  the  open  type.  In  the  closed,  it  is 
effected  by  means  of  ventilators,  louvre  boards,  windows  and  doors. 
Animals  rarely  suffer  greatly  from  cold  air  provided  there  is  no  draft. 
They  will  however  suffer  greatly  from  foul  air,  hence  the  imporance  of 
an  abundant  supply  of  fresh  air.  Ventilators  and  louvre  boards  are 
constructed  in  the  stable  roofs  and  serve  to  carry  off  the  warm  tainted 
air.  The  principle  supply  of  fresh  air  is  obtained  through  windows  and 
doors,  ^^^indows  should  be  built  to  hinge  at  the  bottom  and  open 
inwards,  thus  forcing  the  incoming  fresh  cool  air  up  and  over  the 
animals  instead  of  directly  on  them.  Doors  are  apt  to  cause  drafts. 
They  should  be  closed  on  the  windward  side  in  stormy  weather.  Any 
unpleasant  odor  perceived  on  entering  a  stable  is  proof  of  insufffcient 
ventilation  and  should  be  corrected  immediately. 

Flooring  of  Stables  should  be  level,  non  absorbent  and  roughened 
sufficiently  to  prevent  animals  from  slipping.  The  alleyways  of  closed 
stables  and  roadways  surrounding  open  stables  may  be  made  of  any 


206  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

suitable  paving  material.  If  nothing-  else  is  available  macadam  can  be 
constructed  of  crushed  rock  or  cinders  and  clay.  The  more  durable 
the  better,  and  the  more  economical  in  maintenance. 

Stall  Floorings  are  constructed  of  various  materials,  but  for  all 
around  use  there  is  nothing  better  than  concrete  when  properly  laid 
dow^n.  It  must  be  level,  except  for  the  slight  drainage  slope,  and 
roughened  to  prevent  slips  and  falls.  Its  hardness  is  its  greatest  objec- 
tion but  this  is  inconsiderate  if  stalls  are  properly  bedded  and  ani- 
mals worked  and  tied  out  on  the  picket  lines  during  the  day  as  they 
should  be. 

Wood  Floorings,  either  creosoted  blocks  or  planks  are  good,  but 
they  absorb  urine,  and  are  also  apt  to  be  slippery.  They  wear  out  in  a 
couple  of  years,  hence  are  rather  expensive. 

Vitrified  Brick  makes  one  of  the  best  floorings.  COMMON  BRICK 
is  apt  to  be  too  absorbent.  Cobble  stones  may  be  used  and  makes  a 
lasting  floor,  but  are  not  recommended  on  account  of  their  unevenness. 
Failing  any  of  these  durable  materials,  a  macadam  of  clay,  and  crushed 
rock  or  cinders  may  be  used.  Sand  floors  will  serve  for  temporary  use, 
but  on  account  of  the  never  ending  repair  necessary  to  keep  them  level, 
they  are  expensive  and  the  least  desirable.  Sand  is  objectionable 
also  on  account  of  the  danger  of  sand  colic. 

Plain  dirt  or  clay  is  perhaps  the  easiest  on  animal's  feet,  but  are 
open  to  two  serious  objections:  They  constantly  absorb  urine  and  are 
therefore  unsanitary  being  productive  of  thrush  and  canker;  they  are 
continually  wearing  out  requiring  daily  repair  to  keep  them  level. 
There  is  no  greater  nuisance  in  our  service  than  dirt  floors. 

The  old  theory  that  the  dirt  floor  was  the  best  and  most  economical 
and  that  no  hard  material  could  be  used  on  account  of  the  animal's 
feet,  has  unquestionably  been  refuted  by  experience.  Hard  floors  when 
abused  are  not  the  best,  but  used  rationally  they  are.  and  far  more 
economical  in  the  long  run  than  any  soft  material. 

The  Lighting  should  be  ample,  both  for  sanitation  and  convenience. 
Windows  accomplish  this  in  the  day  and  artificial  lights  (preferably 
electric)  at  night. 

Dimensions:  Stables  should  be  large  enough  to  hold  the  number  of 
stalls  required.  They  should  be  wide  enough  for  full  length  stalls  and 
in  closed  stables  allow  for  one  or  more  alleyways  about  12  feet  wide. 
They  should  be  high  to  assist  in  securing  good  ventilation.  The 
dimensions  of  stalls  should  be  eleven  feet  in  length  from  wall  to  heel 
post  and  5>^  feet  wide. 

Fittings:  Mangers  should  be  of  iron  sheeting.  There  is  no  better 
manger  than  one  made  of  iron  sheeting  in  the  shape  of  a  rounded 
trough  about  two  feet  wide  and  one  foot  deep,  and  running  across  the 
full  width  of  the  stall.  The  sides  are  bent  around  and  secured  to  2  by  4 
or  similar  rails  about  Sy^  feet  above  the  floor.  The  ends  should  be 
closed.  There  should  be  nothing  below  the  trough  excei:)t  props  from 
its  outer  edge  to  the  wall  for  support  when  necessary.  The  advantages 
of  this  manger  are :    easy  to  keep  clean ;  holds  large  quantity  of  feed 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  207 

necessary  when  chop  is  fed  ;  permits  spreadin£2^  out  of  the  feed  to  break 
up  greedy  feeding";  catches  any  hay  falling  from  hay  nets  or  racks 
above;  can  be  used  for  long  hay  if  desired;  economy,  saving  feed; 
and  favors  thorough  cleaning  of  stall  floors. 

Various  types  of  metal  feed  boxes  are  issued,  which  are  sanitary  and 
serve  to  feed  grain.  Their  capacity  is  too  small  however  to  hold  a 
proper  chop  feed,  and  they  are  not  as  desirable  as  the  manger.  For 
feeding  cooked  feeds  there  should  be  a  shallow  bucket,  which  is  set 
down  in  the  manger. 

If  hay  nets  are  used,  and  they  should  be,  no  hay  rack  is  necessary. 
If  not  in  use  there  should  be  hay  racks  against  the  wall  above  the  man- 
ger. These  may  be  made  of  twisted  baling  wire,  or  wooden  or  iron 
slats. 

PICKET  LINES  AND  STANDINGS 

Picket  Lines  are  used  in  stable  corrals  and  to  a  large  extent  in  the 
field.  They  are  either  elevated  lines  or  ground  lines,  the  former  being 
much  preferable.  They  are  made  of  one  and  one  half  inch  rope  or  small 
wire  cable.  In  emergencies  a  picket  line  of  lariats  can  be  used.  They 
should  be  long  enough  to  provide  four  feet  of  space  for  each  animal, 
Picket  lines  must  be  kept  drawn  taut  at  all  times.  The  elevated  line 
is  supported  by  heavy  posts,  about  five  and  one  half  feet  above  the 
ground.  This  "height  is  sufficient  to  hang  hay  nets  from  and  to  keep 
animals  from  eating  their  bedding,  at  the  same  time  allowing  them  to 
lie  down,  and  have  access  to  their  hay  if  laid  on  the  ground.  There  is 
no  chance  for  them  to  become  tangled  in  it  or  to  be  rope  burned. 

A  second  line  below  the  first,  breast-high  is  excellent  for  keeoing 
the  animals  all  on  one  side,  which  is  much  the  best  plan  whenever  there 
is  space  and  rope  enough.  It  will  prevent  fighting  across  the  line,  the 
tangling  up  of  animals,  and  permits  laying  the  hay  just  across  the  line 
where  it  can  be  reached  but  will  not  be  trampled  upon. 

Ground  Lines  are  picket  lines  stretched  on  the  ground  and  secured 
at  intervals  and  at  the  ends  by  pins.  It  is  the  simplest  form  of  line,  but 
should  never  be  used  when  it  is  possible  to  elevate  the  line.  Animals 
are  continually  becoming  tangled  with  it  and  their  halter  shanks,  and 
many  rope  burns  result.  It  is  also  far  less  secure,  requiring  much 
closer  attention. 

The  Standing  of  picket  lines  require  the  same  general  features  as 
stall  floorings.  Except  in  very  dry  or  sandy  soils  it  is  not  safe  to  use 
unimproved  standings  for  more  than  a  few  days,  and  in  poorly  drained 
and  muddy  soils  it  is  imperative  that  some  sort  of  well  drained  dry 
surface  be  improvised  without  delay  or  the  animals  will  suffer.  Few 
conditions  detract  from  the  health  and  condition  more  quickly  than 
standing  in  mud.  It  is  always  a  cause  for  much  debility  and  a  large 
sick  reoort.  The  lines  should  be  placed  on  firm,  sloping  ground.  If 
there  is  insufficient  slope  it  must  be  constructed,  preferably  sloping 
from  line  to  heels  and  drained  by  a  ditch  running  parallel  to  the  line 


208 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 
Method  of  Stretching  the  Picket  Line 


Figure  14.  Attaching 
end  of  picket  line.  Tie 
used  on  spoke  just  be- 
low hub  is  a  clove 
hitch. 


Figure  16.  Stretching  picket  line  between  carriages.  Cannoneer  marked 
X  is  taking  up  the  slack  provided  by  the  lifting  of  the  left  wheel  of  the  carriage 
and  by  pulling  on  the  line,  and  is  holding  all  tlic  line  he  gets  by  means  of  a 
round  turn  on  the  felloe. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


209 


and  about  ten  or  twelve  feet  from  it.  If  necessary  to  use  a  considerable 
slope,  tbe  line  should  run  up  and  down  the  sloi)e  instead  of  on  a  con- 
tour, around  it.    This  t>ives  a  much  better  ]:)Osition  for  all  the  animals. 

It  is  rareh^  i)racticable  to  have  ])ernianent  standing's  as  in  stall  floors, 
but  some  sort  of  macadam,  clay  and  crushed  rock  or  cinders,  etc.,  must 
be  constructed.  In  wet  climates  it  should  be  well  raised  aboxe 
the  ground  level,  first  using-  larg^e  rocks  as  a  foundation  and  smaller 
ones  as  the  surface  is  approached.  When  bound  with  clay  and  care- 
fully built,  this  makes  a  very  durable,  suitable  standing'. 

In  the  A.  E.  F.  ]:)Oor  standings  was  one  of  the  chief  causes  for  loss 
of  animal  life. 


]         MODEL     f>'Cxf  r    L'f^'E 


/ 

ro  ae  r/Lteo 


t(  \Ooo-fM- turns 


Construction  cf  Model  Picket  Line 


210 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


DRIVER'S  EXAMINATION 


Subject   No.   1 — Harness-Fitting  and   Draft 
Quiz  : 

1.  Why  is  a  detailed  knowledge  of  harness- 
fitting  essential? 

2.  Name  the  ways  in  which  a  collar  may 
be  adjusted. 

3.  What    are    the    six   axioms   of   saddle- 
fitting? 

4.  How  should  the  Snaffle  Bridle  fit? 

5.  How  would  you  test  the  fit  of  a  collar? 

6.  How  should  the  following  be  adjusted: 
Back  Strap ; 

Collar  Strap; 
Hip  Straps; 
Side  Straps ; 
Martingale ; 
Breast  Straps ; 
Loin  Straps ; 
Traces ; 
Coupling"  Rein? 

7.  What  is  known  as  the  useless  compo- 
nent in  draft  and  how  is  it  minimized? 

Subject   No,   2 — Equitation   Quizz: 

1.  Describe  a  good  "seat"  on  horseback. 

2.  Why  is  riding  without  reins  so  bene- 
ficial. 

3.  What   are  the  aids,  and  which   is   the 
most  important? 

4.  Which  aid  is  most  abused?     \Miich  is 
most  neglected  in- use? 

5.  Why  is  bareback  or  blanket  riding  so 
valuable? 

6.  What  gait  usually  best  shows  up  poor 
equitation?    Why? 


Subject  No.  3 — Driving  Drill  Quiz : 

1.  Explain  the  use  of  the  whip  in  driving 
a  pair. 

2.  How  and  when  is  the  voice  used? 


Reference : 

— F.  A.  D.  R.,  par.  632. 

—3".  3.8",  4.7"  and  6" 

Material  Handbooks. 

— F.  A.  D.  R.,  par.  230. 

— F.  A.  D.  R.,  par.  233. 
— F.  A.  D.  R.,  par.  420. 
— H  a  n  d  b  o  o  k   of   6" 

Howitzer  Materiel,  p. 

112  F.  A.  D.  R.,  par. 

420. 


— School  of  Fire  Notes. 


Reference : 

— F.  A.  D.  R.,  par.  283. 
— F.  A.  D.  R.,  par.  283. 


F.  A.  D.  R.,  pars.  288- 
291. 

Weight. 


291. 
-1.  Reins.    2 


-Because  it  teaches 
the  natural  seat. 

-The  gallop.  The 
equilibrium  and  har- 
mony that  should  ex- 
ist between  horse  and 
rider  are  destroyed 
by  riding  with  a  pull 
instead  of  an  easy 
handling  of  the 
weight  of  the  rider. 

Reference : 

-F.  A.  R.,  par.  443. 

-F.  A.  D.  R.,  par.  444. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  211 

3.  How    arc    the    l)ri(lle    reins   of    the    off  — F.  A.  D.  R.,  par.  445. 
horse  used  ? 

4.  What  is  the  proper  way  to  stop  a  car-  — F.  A.  D.  R.,  par.  452. 
ria.s:e? 

5.  How    should    the    brake   be   applied   in  — F.  A.  D.  R.,  par.  453. 
stopping-  the  carriage? 

6.  What  should  be  done  when  a  carriage  — F.  A.  D.  R.,  pars.  457 
is    "stuck"?      What    effect    does    repeated  and  460. 

failures  have  on  a  team? 


DRILL  SIGNALS 

The  drill  signals  include  both  the  preparatory  commands  and  the 
commands  of  execution  ;  the  last  note  is  the  command  of  execution. 

The  drill  signals  are  taught  in  succession,  a  few  at  a  time,  until  the 
officers  and  men  are  thoroughly  familiar  with  them,  some  drills  being 
specially  devoted  to  this  purpose. 

The  memorizing  of  these  signals  will  be  facilitated  by  observing 
that  signals  for  all  movements  to  the  right  are  on  the  ascending  scale  ; 
that  signals  for  the  corresponding  movements  to  the  left  are  corre- 
sponding signals  on  the  descending  scale ;  that  the  changes  of  gait  are 
all  upon  the  same  note;  that  captains'  call  is  the  first  two  bars  of  offi- 
cers' call  with  the  attention  added. 

In  the  presence  of  the  enemy  all  bugle  calls  are  prohibited. 


212 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


To  Horse. 


Quick. 


Water. 


Boots  and  Saddles 


Quieh 


Stable. 


Quick. 


Attention. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


213 


Gallop. 


1^ 


/T\  «N 


214 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


Drivers  Prepare  to  Mount. 


Drivers  Prepare  to  Dismount. 


Qui^k. 


Cannoneers  Prepare  to  Dismount. 


Forward. 


Trot. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


215 


Column  Left. 


By  the  Right  Fuank. 

MARCH. 

Moderate.  ^ 


By  the  Left  Flank. 

JIABCH. 


Moderate^ 


l^r^^~^~r 


Right  Oblique. 


Left  Oblique. 


Iff=^^^^ 


Right  Front  into  Line. 
3[oderaie.  /f^ 


p 


Left  Front  into  Line. 


r.  i/!/[-^.Hi.-f?vfvrT 


:is^W 


J-^-l^-^ 


On  Right  into  Line. 


Moderate. 


216 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 
On  Left  into  Line, 


Battery  RrGHT  Wheel. 
Quick,  a  .  s 


Pieces  Front, 


Moderato. 


/c^         I      /^ 


t\\^\[^fMlJ-\-\t^^A 


Caissons  Front. 


Double  Section,  Right  Oblique. 


Quick. 


^^  /T\ 


^ 


rri.fri-i^ 


^E5 


^'^^\^ 


Double  Section,  Left  Oblique. 

MABCH. 


Quick.  L.f^F.f''^.  ."^ 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


217 


FuANK  Column.  Right  Oblique. 
Moderate.       ^ ^_        — 


1 

m  MARCH. 

i 

M 

p=t^ 

=!=d 

^ 

Flank  Column,  Left  Oblique. 


Moderate 


Right  by  Sections. 


Moderate. 


Moderate. 


Left  by  Sections. 


MAKOH. 
1       /ts 


tTJWjLmf=f^^ 


Quick, 


Form  Double  Section  Line. 

MABCH. 


Route  Order. 


Moderate.  ^ 


ajiJ-Mr  I 


218  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


FIRST  TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 


"Equitation 
(Light  Batteries) 
All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Service  Regulations  for 
Field  Artillery  (Horse  and  Lig-ht),  1917. 

Lesson  1. 

Read,  explain  and  question  the  men  on  Pars.  590  and  591. 

Impress  thoroug-hly  upon  the  men  that  the  secret  of  success  in 
handling  horses  is  patience  and  kindness.  Explain  that  a  horse  is  an 
animal  w^ith  very  little  brains  but  an  excellent  memory,  and  is  ex- 
tremely nervous.  Harsh  treatment  or  a  kind  act  are  never  forgotten. 
From  the  very  beginning  instil  a  pride  in  the  men  in  the  appearance 
and  care  of  their  horses  and  their  equipment. 

The  object  of  horsemanship  in  the  army  is  to  enable  the  soldier  to 
so  condition  and  ride  his  horse  that  the  animal  will  be  able  to  carry 
both  rider  and  load  the  required  distance  in  the  required  time,  with 
the  least  injury  to  both  rider  and  horse. 

Read  and  explain  Pars.  205  to  213,  inch,  and  603.  604  and  605. 

Explain  and  demonstrate  "stand  to  heel."  Par.  236.  Insist  on  snap 
without  exciting  the  horses.  Demonstrate  how  to  approach  a  horse. 
Assign  each  man  to  a  horse  and  issue  grooming  kits.  Have  the  horses 
examined  and  brushed  off  (5  minutes).  After  "stand  to  heel,"  assemble 
the  men  and  explain  the  principal  parts  of  the  bridle  and  saddle. 
Explain  how  to  fold  the  saddle  blanket  and  demonstrate  it.  Par.  226. 
Fold  it  several  times  having  the  men  fold  theirs  at  the  same  time. 

Saddle  and  bridle  a  horse,  explaining  it  at  the  same  time.  Pars.  228 
and  231. 

Have  the  men  "stand  to  heel"  with  their  horse  equipment  on  the 
ground  (if  no  harness  pegs  are  available),  saddle  one  yard  in  rear  of 
horse,  pommel  toward  the  horse,  blanket  across  the  saddle,  folded  edge 
towards  the  pommel,  stripe  to  the  right,  bridle  across  the  blanket,  bit 
to  the  right. 

Have  the  men  saddle  and  bridle  by  detail,  and  lead  out  individually. 
Par.  238.  Inspect  the  fit  of  each  bridle  and  the  saddling  of  each  horse. 
Have  faults  corrected  and  explained  individually  to  each  man.  As 
the  men  file  by  have  them  form  line  one  yard  apart.     Par.  239. 

Explain  and  demonstrate  "stand  to  horse"  and  prepare  to  mount 
and  mount.     Pars.  237,  240  and  244. 

Have  the  men  adiust  their  stirrups  approximately  by  the  length  of 
their  arms,  the  tread  of  the  stirrup  placed  under  the  ariiji  pits,  and  the 
fingers  touching  the  center  of  the  saddle. 

Have  the  men  mount  and  move  out  at  a  walk  in  a  column  of  files, 
one  yard  from  head  to  croup,  form  an  elipse  about  forty  by  eighty 
yards.  Study  the  individual  men  and  correct  their  faults  without 
shouting  or  nagging.  Explain  in  general  the  position  of  the  soldier 
mounted.     Explain  the  position  of  the  reins  in  both  hands. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  219 

Allow  forty  minutes  to  unsaddle,  clean  the  equipment  and  groom. 
Return  the  squad  to  the  stables.  Form  line  and  explain  and  demon- 
strate, "prepare  to  dismount"  and  "dismount,"  Par.  245.  Have  the 
men  dismount.  Explain  and  demonstrate  how  to  unsaddle  and  to 
remove  the  bridle.  Pars.  229  and  235.  Have  the  bits  washed  and  dried, 
inspect  them  and  have  the  equipment  put  up.  Issue  grooming  kits, 
explain  and  demonstrate  grooming  by  detail. 

Have  the  men  "stand  to  heel"  and  groom  by  detail.  Impress  upon 
them  the  absolute  necessity  for  a  thorough  grooming. 

Lesson  2. 

Assign  men  to  the  same  horses  they  had  in  the  first  lesson.  Issue 
grooming  kits.  "Stand  to  heel"  briskly.  '  Have  horses  examined  and 
brushed  off.  Cease  grooming,  "stand  to  heel."  Assemble  the  men, 
using  one  horse,  explain  and  demonstrate  the  method  of  picking  up 
and  holding  a  horse's  foot.  In  raising  the  hind  foot,  insist  upon  the  man 
swinging  his  inside  leg  well  to  the  rear,  the  horse's  fetlock  resting  on 
the  thigh  of  the  man's  leg.  Par.  39  (Army  Horseshocr).  Explain  why 
and  how  to  clean  the  feet.  Whenever  cases  of  thrush  are  found, 
assemble  the  men  and  explain  the  cause,  result  and  remedy. 

Issue  horse  equipment.  Refold  saddle  blankets  several  times.  Have 
the  men  saddle  by  detail  and  adjust  their  bridles.  In  this  connection 
have  sufficient  holes  punched  in  the  check  straps  of  the  new  model 
bridles  to  permit  their  proper  adjustment. 

Form  line  to  the  right,  the  men  standing  to  horse  properly.  Explain 
and  demonstrate  prepare  to  mount  and  mount,  and  prepare  to  dis- 
mount, and  dismount.  Have  the  men  execute  this  several  times.  Insist 
on  their  keeping  the  toe  of  their  left  foot  from  touching  the  horse. 
This  can  be  done  by  pointing  the  toe  to  the  rear  in  mounting  and  to 
the  front  in  dismounting  and  keeping  their  left  knee  against  the  horse. 

Move  out  on  the  track  as  in  the  first  lesson.  After  a  few  minutes  at 
a  walk,  from  a  circle,  have  all  horses  faced  inward.  From  the  center 
of  the  circle  explain  in  detail  the  position  of  the  soldier  mounted,  and 
give  reasons.  Demonstrate  the  habitual  incorrect  positions  and  the 
ill  eft'ects  to  both  rider  and  horse. 

IMove  back  on  the  track  and  change  hands  frequently.  Pars.  250, 
252. 

Have  men  come  to  the  center  of  the  track  to  adjust  equipment  or 
stirrups.     .Study  each  man  and  have  him  properly  adjust  his  stirrups. 

On  returning  to  the  picket  line,  unsaddle  and  groom  by  detail. 
Continue  the  exactness  and  snap. 

Lesson  3, 

Repeat  Lessons  1  and  2.  Get  more  speed  in  the  saddling  and  groom- 
ing, but  not  at  the  expense  of  exactness. 

Explain  the  holding  of  the  reins.  Pars.  250,  251,  252,  and  253.  Have 
it  executed.     Explain  at  ease,  rest  and  route  order.    Par.  258 

Explain  gathering  the  horse  to  move  forward  and  halt.  Pars.  297, 
298,  and  299.    Have  it  executed  several  times. 


220  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Explain  the  change  in  gait  from  the  walk  to  trot.  Have  the  men  sit 
down  in  the  saddle.  Don't  permit  posting.  Have  them  take  the  jolt. 
It  will  emphasize  the  necessity  of  having-  a  snpple  waist  line  and 
relaxed  muscles. 

Return  to  the  picket  line  and  unsaddle  and  groom  as  before. 

Lesson  4. 

Repeat  Lessons  1,  2  and  3  omitting  the  explanations,  except  in  indi- 
vidual cases  where  necessary. 

After  forming-  line  rigidly  ins])ect  equipment.  Have  every  fault 
corrected  carefully,  explaining  the  reason.  For  example,  explain  and 
demonstrate  the  method  of  ])utting  on  a  stirrup  strap;  give  the  rule 
for  remembering  it.  Have  the  buckle  toward  the  horse  and  down  close 
to  the  top  of  the  stirrup.  Have  the  quarter  straps  of  such  length  that 
the  quarter  strap  safe  will  be  split  by  the  lower  edge  of  the  blanket. 
Have  the  quarterstrap  l^uckle  always  close  uj)  to  the  scpiare  at  the 
cantle  of  the  saddle,  the  tongue  of  the  buckle  pointed  up.  Explain  and 
demonstrate  how  to  put  it  together.  Have  the  center  of  the  cincha 
under  the  center  of  the  horse's  belly.  Remember  that  the  details  of 
equipment  can  not  be  understood  or  remembered  by  the  men  if  given 
all  at  one  time,  as  at  harness  cleaning.  Explain  them  as  cases  arise 
without  delaying  the  drill. 

After  getting  the  men  on  the  track  repeat  the  exercise  at  a  walk,  in 
taking  the  reins  in  different  hands,  carry  reins  habitually  in  both  hands. 
After  getting  all  stirrups  adjusted,  move  into  the  slow  trot.  Change 
the  holding  of  the  reins  from  one  hand  to  the  other  at  the  trot.  Gradu- 
ally insist  on  tlie  men  keeping  their  eyes  up  while  changing  the  reins, 
keeping  a  very  light,  steady  feel  on  the  horse's  mouth. 

Change  the  gait  frequently  from  the  trot  to  the  walk  and  vice  versa. 
See  that  the  horses  are  properly  gathered  before  each  increase  in  gait. 

Execute  "rest"  se\'eral  times,  alwa^^s  from  the  walk.  Insist  on  the 
horse  being  "gathered,"  and  the  reins  quickly  released.  The  horse 
will  lower  his  head  and  relax  all  over  if  this  is  projierly  done. 

Change  hands  on  the  track  frequently  and  walk  the  horses  at  least 
five  minutes  before  returning  to  the  stables. 

In  unsaddling  remember  the  requirements  about  loosening-  the 
cincha  for  a  few  minutes  before  unsaddling.  Par.  501.  During  this 
time  have  the  bits  washed  and  grooming  kits  drawn,  leaving  a  few 
men  to  watch  the  horses.  Use  this  time  to  explain  things  to  the  men. 
Encourage  them  to  ask  questions. 

Explain  how  to  tie  a  horse  to  the  i)icket  line  and  in  the  stall.  (Iroom 
by  detail. 

Lesson  5. 

Repeat  as  much  as  the  former  lessons  as  may  he  necessary.  After 
getting  the  men  settled  down  in  the  saddles  with  a  little  trotting  have 
them  cross  or  take  ofif  their  stirrups,  and  execute  the  slow  trot  at  in- 
tervals of  never  more  than  ten  minutes.  Have  the  men  sit  up  at  this 
exercise  keeping  awav  from  the  cantle  of  the  saddle,  the  legs  hanging 
naturally.     Pan  285.  ' 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  221 

Explain  the  aids,  and  the  chanq-es  of  direction,  and  execute  by  the 
flank.    Pars.  288,  289,  290,  291.  294^;  295,  296,  303,  and  304. 

\Miere\er  necessary  permit  a  man  to  retake  his  stirrups.  There  is 
nothing  gained  in  getting  a  man  chafed.     Groom  by  detail. 

Lesson  6. 

Review  ])arts  of  all  former  lessons.  Vary  the  exercises.  First  at 
a  walk  and  then  a  trot,  have  the  men  drop  their  reins,  l^ar.  28.5. 
Groom  by  detail. 

Lesson  7. 

After  settling  the  men  down,  have  them  cross  or  remove  their  stir- 
rups and  drop  their  reins;  vary  this  with  changes  by  the  flanks  and 
right  and  left  abouts,  reins  in  both  hands  and  watch  for  the  proper  use 
of  all  aids.    Groom  by  detail. 

Lesson  8. 

After  riding  without  reins  or  stirrups,  explain  and  execute  move- 
ments by  the  flank  with  the  reins  in  one  hand.  Throughout  all  of  the 
work,  constanth^  coach  the  individual  rider  and  correct  his  faults. 
Groom  by  detail. 

Lesson  9. 

Ride  without  stirrups  or  reins.  Explain  and  execute  the  exercises 
under  Pars.  264  to  278,  inch,  first  with  the  stirrups  and  then  without 
them.    Groom  by  detail. 

Lesson  10. 

Before  leaving  the  picket  line,  explain,  demonstrate,  and  have  the 
men  execute  mount  and  dismount  from  the  right  side.  On  returning 
dismount  from  the  right  side.  Repeat  this  from  time  to  time.  On  the 
track  first  ride  without  reins  or  stirrups.  Later  execute  numerous 
changes  of  gait  and  direction.     Groom  by  detail. 

Lesson  11. 

After  riding  without  reins  or  stirrups,  execute  the  changes  of  gait 
and  direction  several  times.  Insist  on  the  horses  being  "gathered" 
before  each  change  of  direction.  Execute  "rest"  several  times.  Groom 
by  detail. 

Lesson  12. 

Review  the  jirincipal  parts  of  all  former  lessons.     Groom  liy  detail. 

FIRST  TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 

Hints  on  Equitation 
(Light  Batteries.) 
All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Service  Regulations  for 
Field  Artillery  (Horse  and  Light),  1917. 

The  Seat:  The  saddle  is  so  constructed'  that  if  the  rider  assumes  a 
correct  seat,  the  weightiwill  be  equally  distributed  on  the  side  bars. 


222  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

If  the  weight  is  too  far  back  in  the  cantle,  more  weight  than  is  desirable 
is  on  the  rear  of  the  side  bars,  and  a  sore  back  results.  If  the  rider  leans 
too  far  forward,  stands  in  his  stirrups,  etc.,  sore  withers  result.  The 
question  is:  Where  should  he  sit  to  get  even  distribution  of  weight? 
Answer:  By  taking  his  feet  out  of  the  stirrups,  placing  his  hand  on 
the  pommel,  and  pulling  himself  forward  until  he  feels  that  he  is  start- 
ing to  "slide  up  hill,"  the  rider  will  place  himself  in  the  deepest  part 
of  the  saddle.  The  saddle  being  properly  placed  on  the  horse's  back, 
the  rider  should  be  directly  over  the  center  of  gravity,  which  is  also  the 
center  of  motion,  or  the  spot  where  the  rider  would  receive  the  least 
motion.  The  next  question  is:  What  becomes  of  the  rider's  feet  and 
legs,  and  how  should  they  be  held?  Answer:  Let  the  legs  and  feet 
hang  down  naturally.  The  tread  of  the  stirrup  should  strike  the  instep 
about  where  the  spur  strap  crosses.  Now  without  moving  the  buttocks 
in  the  saddle,  reach  for  the  stirrups  and  place  the  ball  of  the  feet  on 
the  tread  of  the  stirrup.  Supple  and  relax  the  ankle  so  that  the  heel 
will  be  lower  than  the  ball  of  the  foot.  The  calf  of  the  leg  should 
maintain  contact  with  the  side  of  the  horse.  Do  not  think  the  ankle 
joint  is  supple  when  the  heel  is  lowered  by  sticking  the  feet  to  the 
front;  this  will  bring  the  heel  lower,  but  the  ankle  joint  is  not  supple 
and  the  calf  of  the  leg  ceases  to  maintain  contact.  Contact  at  the  calf  of 
the  leg  is  one  of  the  most  important  things  to  watch  in  riding.  When 
the  rider  has  done  the  above  correctly,  the  following  will  be  the  result. 
(1)  The  thigh  makes  an  agle  of  about  30  degrees  with  the  vertical.  (2) 
The  "lower  leg"  (knee  down)  is  a  little  in  rear  of  the  vertical.  (3)  The 
stirrup  strap  is  vertical.  (4)  The  calf  is  in  contact.  (5)  The  ankle 
joint  is  supple.     (6)  The  heel  is  below  the  ball  of  the  foot. 

In  connection  with  the  foregoing,  the  following  remarks  are  applic- 
able and-explain  the  reason  for  the  same:  (1)  The  thigh  is  let  down 
in  order  to  assist  in  securing  a  firm  seat.  If  you  have  ever  seen  a  run- 
ning race  or  steeple  chase,  where  the  rider's  thighs  are  horizontal,  it 
will  be  appreciated  how  very  insecure  the  rider's  seat  is ;  the  slightest 
move  beyond  the  expected,  and  "off  he  goes."  The  reason  is :  "no 
thigh  grip."  The  jockey  takes  this  seat  because  more  speed  can  be 
obtained  by  the  rider's  weight  being  as  far  forward  as  possible.  The 
seat  itself  in  a  race  of  that  kind  is  sacrificed  for  speed.  (2)  The  ankle  is 
supple,  and  the  heel  is  below  the  ball  of  the  foot.  This  is  done  to  insure 
the  thigh  being  well  let  down  so  that  the  seat  is  secure.  If  you  have 
ever  noticed  a  man  on  a  bucking  horse,  just  before  he  goes  over  the 
horse's  head,  you  will  note  the  following:  The  heels  are  "up"  and  the 
thigh  approaches  the  horizontal.  "Heels  up,  thigh  up,"  go  hand  in 
hand.  An  insecure  seat  is  bound  to  result.  (3)  The  calf  of  the  leg 
is  in  constant  contact,  because  the  aids  are  first  applied  with  the  calf, 
later  running  down  to  the  spur  if  the  horse  does  not  answer  them  by 
calf  application.  The  rider's  calf  should  always  be  the  first  to  apply  the 
aids,  not  the  spur.  To  stick  the  heel  to  the  front,  and  then  strike  the 
horse  with  the  spur  without  giving  the  animal  the  correct  aids  with  the 
calf,  is  the  strongest  proof  of  a  poor  and  unintelligent  rider.    The  calf 


MOtJ^^TED  INSTRUCTION  223 

must  be  in  contact.  Gatherinjif  the  horse  and  the  aids  all  start  with  the 
calf.  Contact  can  only  be  obtained  by  the  "lower  leg"  being  slightly 
in  rear  of  the  vertical.  To  obtain  this  contact,  the  rider  should  turn 
the  toe  and  knee  out  until  he  has  obtained  the  same.  There  should  be 
no  constraint  to  these  movements.  Normally  the  rider's  foot  will 
turn  out  about  the  same  amount  as  it  does  when  he  walks.  If  the 
rider  takes  this  position  of  his  lower  leg,  the  stirrup  strap  will  be 
vertical. 

A  general  rule  which  will  assist  the  rider  to  tell  when  his  lower 
leg  is  correctly  placed  is:  The  point  of  the  toe  should  be  obscured  by 
the  knee  cap  (assuming  that  the  rider's  seat  is  correct). 

We  have  now  worked  from  the  rider's  seat  to  his  heels ;  now  we  will 
work  from  seat  up. 

The  "seat,"  as  taught,  is  a  combination  of  "grip  and  balance."  The 
grip  elements  have  already  been  discussed,  "balance"  remains. 

Let  us  consider  a  straight  stifif  rod,  and  a  strung  bow  (bow  such  as 
used  with  bow  and  arrow).  Suppose  we  take  the  stiff  rod,  and  placing 
our  hand  on  the  top  of  it,  strike  the  ground.  There  is  no  give  to  the  rod 
and  all  of  the  force  is  taken  up  on  the  hand.  Now  take  the  bow  and 
do  the  same.  Part  of  the  force  is  taken  up  by  the  bow  bending,  and 
part  on  the  hand,  the  more  supple  the  bow,  the  less  force  on  the  hand. 
So  it  is  with  a  stiff  and  supple  back.  The  first  pounds  the  horse,  the 
second  "pats,"  the  rest  of  the  "pound"  being  taken  up  in  the  supple 
back. 

Here  begins  one  of  the  hardest  things  to  teach  recruits.  The  back 
must  be  supple  and  the  bow  in  the  back  must  be  in  the  lower  part, 
namely,  where  the  belt  crosses  the  spinal  column.  The  rest  of  the  back 
is  supple,  but  is  erect.  One  way  of  explaining  to  the  recruit,  is  to  tell 
him,  "Let  your  stomach  say  'How  do  you  do'  to  your  backbone." 

"Suppling  exercises,"  such  as  patting  the  horse  on  the  right  shoulder, 
etc.,  increase  suppleness,  and  will  be  taken  up  in  instructions  on  the 
schedule. 

Remember  the  supple  back  "pats"  the  horse,  the  stiff  "pounds."  The 
next  to  consider  is  the  "hands."  How  should  the  hands  be  carried? 
Answer:  Stiff  shoulders  and  arms  make  the  rider  jerk  his  horse  on  the 
mouth  at  each  step  of  the  trot.  If  the  hands  (reins  in  both  hands)  are 
held  low,  forearm  inclined  slightly  dowmward,  backs  of  hands  out, 
hands  separated  about  six  inches,  the  rider  has  the  right  start.  A  light 
"feel"  of  the  horse's  mouth,  but  giving  to  the  motion  of  the  head,  will 
insure  the  rest.  The  rider  w^ith  hands  in  the  above  position  is  ready 
to  "give  and  take."  The  "upper  arm"  is  held  without  stiffness,  close  to 
the  body,  and  is  slightly  in  front  of  the  vertical. 

The  head  is  held  erect,  but  without  stiffness. 

The  following  sum  up  what  to  look  for  in  locating  faults  of  the  rider. 

(1)  Is  the  thigh  well  let  down? 

(2)  Is  the  "lower  leg"  back? 

(3)  Is  the  heel  depressed,  ankle  supple? 


224  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

(4)  Is  the  rider  rounding  his  entire  back  instead  of  giving  at  the 
waist  only? 

(5)  Are  the  backs  of  the  hands  out? 

(6)  Are  the  hands  separated  about  6  inches? 

(7)  Has  the  rider  a  correct  position  of  the  upper  and  forearm  ? 

(8)  Has  the  rider  a  light  feel  of  the  horse's  mouth  ? 

(9)  Is  the  rider's  head  erect,  eyes  looking  to  the  front,  and  not  down  ? 

In  the  adjustment  of  the  bridle  many  riders,  when  looking  to  see  if 
the  bit  clears  the  "tusk,"  look  at  the  lower  tusk.  This  is  wrong;  look 
and  see  that  the  bit  clears  the  upper  tusk.  The  bits  must  not  be  too 
low.  If  the  bit  clears  the  upper  tusk  and  does  not  pull  the  corners  of 
the  mouth,  the  rider  has  his  bit  adjusted. 

fathering:  The  leg  pressure  acts  in  a  "vibratory  or  pulsating"  man- 
ner— the  action  being  from  rear  to  front.  Gathering  causes  the  horse 
to  get  his  haunches  under  him  ready  to  move  out.  The  rider  "drives 
the  haunches  under"  by  leg  action  and  prevents  him  moving  forward 
by  the  pressure  on  the  bit.  The  horse  is  between  two  forces — the 
legs  pushing  him  forward,  and  the  bit  pressure  preventing  him  actually 
moving  forward.  The  action  resembles  a  river  being  dammed — the 
dam  is  the  bit,  the  current  the  leg  action. 

Move  forward:  When  we  release  the  pressure  on  the  rein  and 
increase  the  action  of  the  legs,  the  horse  has  received  the  "forward 
aids."  The  action  in  this  case  is  to  break  the  dam  and  allow  the  current 
to  act.  Remember,  if  the  leg  action  is  not  "vibratory  or  pulsating," 
the  aid  has  not  been  given  but  the  rider  has  merely  tightened  his  grip. 
The  leg  action  is  from  "rear  to  front,"  the  calf  not  going  back  more  than 
one-half  inch  under  ordinary  circumstances.  Should  it  be  necessary 
to  increase  the  action  aid  develops  into  "taps" ;  should  further  increase 
be  necessary,  the  toe  is  turned  slightly  out  and  the  spur  begins  to  act. 
With  little  training  most  horses  will  answer  the  aid  applied  by  calf 
action  alone. 

The  subject  of  the  accord  of  the  aids  can  not  be  dealt  with'  too 
strongly.  To  illustrate :  Suppose  the  rider  gives  the  aids  to  move 
forward,  the  horse  answers  it  and  the  rider  loses  his  balance.  To 
save  himself  the  rider  "hangs"  on  to  the  reins.  What  has  the  rider 
done?  He  has  given  the  aids  to  move  forward,  then  immediately 
applied  the  aid  to  stop. 

Remember  in  equitation  you  must  "remake"  yourself.  For  in- 
stance, when  a  man  falls  he  will  naturally  use  his  hands  and  arms  to 
save  himself.  In  equitation  this  is  impossible.  Your  hands  must  not 
act;  your  legs  and  balance  are  what  count.  For  illustration,  suppose 
a  horse  rears  and  the  rider  loses  his  balance ;  if  he  pulls  on  the  reins, 
he  is  pulling  the  horse  over  backward,  the  worst  thing  he  could  do. 
The  rider  must  learn  to  tighten  his  grip  by  his  legs.  The  hands  must 
never  be  used  to  hold  on  by. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  225 


SECOND  TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 


Equitation 
(Light  Batteries) 

All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Serxice  Reynlations  for 
Field  Artillery  (Horse  and  Light),  1917. 

Lesson  1. 

Have  men  mount  and  dismount  from  right  side.  After  settling  the 
riders  and  horses  down,  have  them  remove  the  stirrups.  Place  the 
stirrups  where  each  man  can  find  his  proper  stirrups.  This  is  neces- 
sary to  prevent  hooded  stirrups  being-  placed  on  team  saddles  at  the 
end  of  the  exercise.  Have  the  men  ride  without  stirrups  and  without 
reins.  A  knot  should  be  tied  in  the  reins  and  the  men  permitted  to 
take  them  whenever  necessar}^  to  control  the  horses.  Explain  g^aits — 
Pars.  351  and  illustrate. 

Teach  three  or  four  of  the  suppling  exercises.  Pars.  264  to  278,  in- 
clusive. In  teaching  these  exercises,  explain  the  objects  to  be  attained 
by  them.  Replace  the  stirrups  when  necessary.  Do  not  ride  more  than 
fifteen  minutes  without  stirrups.  Execute  several  chang^es  of  direction. 
Remember  to  have  the  horses  properly  gathered  each  time.  Groom 
by  detail. 

Lesson  2. 

Before  leaving  the  picket  line,  insist  that  the  equipment  be  properly 
adjusted  in  every  detail.  \\^atch  carefully  for  articles  of  horse  equip- 
ment and  harness  getting  mixed ;  a  common  fault  when  saddles  and 
bridles  from  artillery  harness  are  used  with  horse  equipment  for  equita- 
tion. In  order  to  correct  this,  it  is  necessary  for  the  instructor  to  know 
the  nomenclature  and  model  of  all  items  of  both  harness  and  horse 
equipment,  and  their  uses. 

Before  removing-  stirrups  always  see  that  both  horses  and  riders 
are  settled  down.  Limit  the  riding  without  stirrups  and  reins  to  fifteen 
or  twenty  minutes.  There  is  nothing  gained  in  getting-  the  men  chafed 
and  sore.     Do  not  take  the  stirrups  from  a  man  who  is  badly  chafed. 

Repeat  the  suppling-  exercises  already  taught  and  teach  three  or 
four  new  ones.  Execute  changes  of  gait  from  walk  to  slow  trot,  and 
vice  versa,  several  times.  Insist  on  the  men  starting  and  stopping 
their  horses  together.  See  that  the  last  men  start  out  with  the  first. 
Execute  by  the  right  and  left  flank  several  times. 

Before  replacing  the  stirrups  have  the  stirrup  straps  removed  from 
the  stirrups,  and  then  put  together.  Explain  how  to  twist  the  stirrup 
straps  correctly.    Groom  by  detail. 

Lesson  3. 

While  riding  without  stirrups  continue  the  supplying  exercises  and 
teach  a  few  new  ones.  Select  especially  gentle  horses  and  teach  and 
execute  the  mounted  gymnastic  with  the  horse  in  place.  Pars.  279  to 


226  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

280,  inclusive.  Wherever  necessary  have  a  man  hold  the  horses.  Be 
very  careful  not  to  undertake  exercises  that  are  too  difficult  or  danger- 
ous, nor  continue  them  too  long. 

Vary  these  exercises  with  changes  in  gait  and  movements  by  the 
flank.  Intersperse  several  halts.  Insist  upon  the  horses  being  properly 
gathered.  Constantly  correct  the  individual  riders.  Insist  upon  their 
keeping  their  legs  back,  their  heels  down,  and  heads  up  and  their  hands 
down.      Don't   permit   anything   that   tends   to   stiffen    their   muscles. 

Groom  by  detail.  During  the  grooming  explain  to  the  individual 
men  the  proper  method  of  picking  out  the  horse's  feet.  Point  out  to  all 
the  men  any  cases  of  thrush  you  may  find. 

Lesson  4. 

Continue  the  suppling  exercises  and  mounted  gymnastics  with  the 
changes  in  gait.  Form  the  men  in  a  circle  and  explain  the  aids,  Pars. 
288  to  295,  inclusive.  Demonstrate  them.  From  now  on  insist  upon 
the  correct  application  of  the  proper  aids  at  all  times.  Execute  changes 
of  direction  at  a  walk  at  first  when  teaching  the  aids.  Where  necessary 
with  sluggish  horses  have  the  men  wear  spurs. 

Groom  by  detail.  During  the  grooming  each  day  teach  the  proper 
method  of  plucking  a  horse's  tail,  and  have  the  tails  that  require  it 
plucked,  being  careful  to  do  only  a  little  plucking  each  day  as  the 
horse's  tail  will  otherwise  become  very  sore. 

Lesson  5. 

Repeat  parts  of  all  former  lessons  and  teach  more  of  the  mounted 
gymnastics.  Repeat  the  explanation  of  any  of  the  aids  that  seem 
necessary.  Encourage  the  use  of  the  voice  aids  without  permitting 
any  shouting.  This  is  particularly  necessary  with  artillery  horses  in 
draft  or  when  they  become  excited.     Groom  by  detail. 

Lesson  6. 

Explain  and  demonstrate  the  half  halt  and  its  use.  Repeat  the  sup- 
pling exercises  and  change  the  direction  without  stirrups.  Change 
hands  on  the  track  frequently.  Make  frequent  changes  in  gait.  Insist 
on  the  horses  being  started  and  stopped  together. 

Groom  by  detail. 

Lesson  7. 

Repeat  Lesson  6.  Take  up  "circles,"  Par.  306.  Explain  having 
troopers  in  column  of  files.  "By  the  right  or  left  flank"  given  where 
guide  shifts,  Par.  340.  Continue  work  on  the  track.  Remember  during 
all  instructions  to  watch  for  faults  of  riders.  Take  up  remainder  of 
suppling  exercises.  Frequently  change  the  gait.  Watch  that  at  the 
preparatory  command  the  horses  are  "gathered";  at  the  "march,"  see 
that  aids  are  properly  applied  and  that  aids  are  coordinated. 

Lesson  8. 

See  that  equipment  is  properly  adjusted.  Get  recruits  in  the  habit 
of  "looking  over"  their  horses  to  see  that  shoes,  feet,  etc.,  are  in  good 
condition.     Take  up   circles,   flank   movements,   decreasing  the   gait. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  227 

Make  constant  corrections  of  seat.  Teach  "Right  by  file,  march," 
Par,  341,  and  "To  (  )  yards,  take  distance,  march,"  Par.  342.  Use 
the  latter  frequently  to  break  up  the  "herding  instinct"  of  the  horses. 
Call  men  by  name  and  have  them  individually  execute  a  "right  or  left 
about"  and  join  the  rear  of  the  column.  Teach  "To  (  )  yards,  close, 
march."    Par.  343. 

Lesson  9. 

Teach  the  different  model  bridles  and  bits.  Watch  for  equipment 
not  properly  adjusted.  Take  up  "Backward,  March."  Par.  307.  Review 
all  previous  movements.  See  that  men  do  not  stiffen  their  bodies  when 
applying  leg  aids.  Correct  all  mistakes  in  seat,  etc.  Teach  Right  into 
line,  March ;  Squad,  Halt.    Par.  344. 

Teach,  On  right  into  line  March,  Squad  Halt.  Par.  345.  During 
time  when  horses  are  "allowed  their  heads"  and  men  are  riding  "at 
ease"  teach  parts  of  saddle  by  saying  "Put  your  hand  on  the  pommel, 
cantel,  left  side  bar,  cinch,"  etc.  Same  principal  for  bridle.  Review  all 
previous  movements — suppling  exercises,  etc. 

Lesson  10. 

Teach  "By  fours,  by  the  right  (left)  flank,  March."  Being  in  column 
of  files  on  the  track,  first  count  off  from  head  of  column.  The  men 
count  off  1,  2,  3,  4,  1,  2,  3,  etc.  The  instructor  gives  "By  fours  by  the 
right  (left)  flank,  March,"  when  he  has  the  leading  four  properly 
placed.  The  leading  set  of  fours  executes  individually  "by  the  right 
flank."  The  remaining  sets  of  fours  continue  the  march,  each  set  of 
fours  individually  executing  "by  the  right  flank"  on  the  same  ground 
as  the  leading  set  of  four.  The  instructor  will  then  have  his  class  in 
"column  of  fours"  with  extended  intervals  and  distances.  With  the 
class  so  formed  execute  circles,  flank  movements,  halts,  etc.  To  break 
in  "column  of  files"  again  from  above  formation  give  "By  fours  by  the 
right  (left)  flank,  march."  The  leading  set  of  four  executes  individu- 
ally "by  the  right  (left)  flank,"  and  "takes  the  track."  The  remain- 
ing sets  of  four  continue  the  march  and  when  on  the  same  ground  as 
the  leading  set  of  four  was,  individually  execute  "  by  the  right  flank." 
Teach  "Column  of  twos  from  column  of  files,"  and  vice  versa.  Pars. 
346-347. 

Lessons  11  and  12. 

Review  all  previous  exercises.  Remember,  to  learn,  men  must  know 
where  they  are  at  fault.  See  Hints  in  Second  Twelve  Day  Period. 
Work  a  lot  with  men  in  "By  fours  by  right  (left)  flank"  formation. 
By  giving  halts,  increase  gaits,  circles,  flank  movements,  the  instructor 
can  cause  the  recruits  to  get  considerable  practice  in  applying  aids. 


228  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 


SECOND  TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 


Hints  on  Equitation 
(Light  Batteries) 

The  Second  Twelve  Day  Period  had  for  its  object  the  teaching  of 
the  soldier: 

(a)  What  the  correct  seat  is  and  how  to  take  it. 

(b)  The  gather,  forward,  halt,  and  the  preliminaries  to  the  turn 
and  about. 

The  Third  Twelve  Day  Period  has  for  its  object : 

(a)  Establishing  in  the  soldier  a  correct  seat. 

(b)  Perfecting  him  in  the  application  of  the  simple  aids. 

Riding  without  stirrups  and  suppling  exercises  are  of  the  utmost 
importance  in  suppling  the  soldier  and  properly  seating  him.  On  the 
other  hand  if  carried  to  the  extreme  "without  stirrups,"  will  have  the 
opposite  effect.  For  example  :  If  the  instructor  rides  his  class  without 
stirrups  to  such  an  extent  that  the  men  become  chafed,  there  will  be 
an  unconscious  setting  of  the  muscles  because  of  the  discomfort  in 
riding.  Under  these  circumstances  the  muscles,  instead  of  relaxing 
as  desired,  become  set  and  tense.  The  instructor  must  therefore  use 
judgment  when  giving  the  same  to  the  class. 

The  gaits  to  be  employed  are : 

(a)  The  slow  trot,  six  miles  per  hour. 

(b)  The  gallop,  twelve  miles  per  hour. 

Never  use  the  eight  mile  per  hour  trot  when  riding  without  stirrups. 

Always  permit  the  soldier  to  take  stirrups  when  he  feels  that  he  is 
chafed. 

The  work  with  the  class  in  an  open  formation  (such  as  when  by  fours 
by  the  right  flank  has  been  executed)  permits  the  instructor  to  take  up 
right  or  left,  increase  or  decrease  of  gaits.  Ordinarily,  flank  move- 
ments, circles,  etc.,  should  be  executed  at  the  slow  trot.  The  instructor 
should  constantly  watch  for  faults  in  the  seat  and  the  application  of 
the  aids.     Never  permit  "posting"  during  this  Twelve  Day  Period. 

The  rein  aids  taught  arc. 

(a)  The  leading  rein. 

(b)  The  bearing  rein. 

(c)  The  direct  rein  of  opposition. 

The  leading  rein  is  used  when  the  reins  are  held  in  both  hands  and 
its  action  is  as  its  name  implies,  "to  lead."  For  example:  being  on  the 
track,  the  reins 'held  in  both  hands;  "Right  about,  March."  At  the 
preparatory  command,  "gather."  At  the  command  of  execution,  open 
out  the  right  rein  by  carrying  the  right  hand  to  the  right  about  four 
inches  and  "leading"  the  horse  around. 

There  is  little  or  no  pull  to  the  rein  in  a  backward  direction  ;  its 
action  is  to  the  right.     The  legs  are  used  for  two  purposes:    (a)  To 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  229 

keep  up  the  gait,  (b)  To  turn.  To  keep  up  the  gait,  the  "forward  aids" 
are  used.  To  turn,  the  inside  leg  is  active  and  the  outside  leg  "guards" 
and  prevents  the  haunches  from  swinging  outside  the  circle  made  by 
the  forelegs. 

It  will  be  seen  from  the  above  that  if  a  horse  is  inclined  to  throw  his 
haunches  to  the  inside  in  making  the  about,  the  rider's  inside  leg  will 
become  more  active  and  force  the  haunches  back  on  the  circle ;  the 
outside  leg  acting  as  a  "guard"  to  prevent  the  haunches  from  swinging 
too  far.  The  opposite  is  the  case  when  the  haunches  have  the  tendency 
to  swing  to  the  outside.  The  rider's  weight  is  shifted  to  the  right 
buttock.  The  gait  is  kept  up  for  "forward  aids,"  should  there  be  an 
attempt  to  slow  same  on  the  turn. 

The  bearing  rein  is  used  to  make  changes  of  direction  when  the  reins 
are  held  in  one  hand.  When  the  horse  answers  this  aid,  he  "reins  over 
the  neck"  (civilian  expression).  The  etTect  of  this  rein  is  as  follows: 
the  rein  acts  against  the  side  of  the  horse's  neck  in  front  of  the  withers 
and  bears  in  the  direction  w  hich  the  rider  wishes  to  g'o.  There  is  little 
action  on  the  bit  proper,  the  effect  being  to  push  the  mass  of  the  horse's 
neck  to  the  left  or  right. 

For  example:  "Right  about,  March"  (rein  aid  only  discussed).  The 
reins  being  held  in  one  hand,  are  carried  to  the  right  so  that  the  left 
rein  bears  against  the  left  side  of  the  horse's  neck  in  front  of  the 
withers,  thereby  having  a  tendency  to  push  the  mass  of  the  neck  to  the 
right.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  right  rein,  because  of  the  fact  that  the 
reins  are  carried  to  the  right,  acts  as  a  leading  or  opening  rein.  There- 
fore, when  the  reins  are  used  as  above  described,  they  have  two  dis- 
tinct efifects,  one  bearing  and  the  other  leading. 

The  bearing  rein  may  best  be  taught  by  having  the  soldier  hold  the 
reins  in  both  hands  and  when  executing  an  "about,"  or  a  change  of 
direction,  starting  it  by  the  use  of  the  opening  rein,  completing  the 
movement  with  the  bearing  rein  predominating. 

The  "direct  rein  of  opposition"  opposes  the  forward  movement  and 
acts  directly  to  the  rear,  for  example,  when  halting. 

If  the  gallop  is  taken  for  suppling  purposes,  it  is  better  to  form  a 
large  circle  wnth  the  instructor  at  the  center,  and  increase  the  gait  until 
the  horses  break  from  the  trot  to  the  gallop.  In  this  case,  the  action 
of  the  outside  leg  should  be  stronger  than  that  of  the  inside.  Do  not 
take  the  gallop  at  the  beginning  of  the  hour. 

One  common  fault  in  applying  leg  aids  is  for  the  rider  to  carry  the 
"lower  leg"  back  by  bending  the  knee  and  allowing  the  heel  to  come 
up.  This  is  wrong.  The  lower  leg  moves  to  the  rear  only  slightly. 
In  a  well  trained  horse,  this  movement  is  imperceptible,  in  an  untrained 
animal  the  leg  should  not  move  more  than  an  inch.  Under  any  circum- 
stances, the  heel  is  always  down.  Leg  aids  are  vibratory  or  pulsating 
in  character.    A  steady  squeeze  is  merely  tightening  the  grip. 

In  working  with  circles,  about,  flank  movements,  etc.,  do  not  jump 
from  one  movement  to  another.  Give  the  rider  a  chance  to  get  his  horse 
"in  hand"  before  giving  another  movement.  Five  or  ten  yards  will 
straighten  out  a  horse. 


230  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

In  circles  (Par,  306),  the  outer  rein  "measures"  the  amount  of  bend 
to  the  horse's  neck  when  the  reins  are  held  in  both  hands.  Hence,  if  the 
horse  bends  his  neck  to  the  inside  too  much,  the  outer  rein  will  check 
the  bend.  Because  of  the  difficulty  in  bending  his  body  around  the 
circle,  the  horse  will  tend  to  slow  the  gait  during  this  movement.  The 
rider  must  then  change  his  aids  to  the  "forward  drive"  and  then  resume 
the  proper  aids  for  circling. 

THIRD  TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 

Equitation 

(Light  Batteries) 

All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Service  Regulations  for 
Field  Artillery  (Horse  and  Light),  1917. 
Lessons  1  to  12. 

Take  up  Equitation  movements  as  taught  in  Second  and  Third 
twelve  Day  Periods. 

Side  stepping  Par.  315.    Posting  Par.  361  and  362. 

Note:  1.  The  side  step,  with  slight  modifications,  is  used  in  limber- 
ing. In  this  operation  the  horse  swings  on  an  arc  of  a  circle  in  addition 
to  the  side  step  movement.  The  aids  applied  will  be  considered  in  the 
following  discussion ;  the  direction  of  side  stepping  is  assumed  as  left. 

The  horse  is  gathered,  weight  transferred  slightly  to  the  left  buttock, 
right  rein  bears,  left  rein  leads,  moving  the  horse's  forehand  to  the  left 
at  the  same  time  both  reins  are  ready  to  prevent  too  much  movement, 
the  right  leg  becomes  active  and  pushes  the  horse's  haunches  to  the 
left.  The  left  leg  acts  as  a  guard  and  prevents  the  haunches  swinging 
too  far.  Use  the  voice  and  proper  aids  in  halting  and  straightening. 
When  the  reins  are  held  in  one  hand  only;  the  bearing  rein  is  used  but 
it  will  be  remembered  that  in  previous  discussion  of  the  use  of  the 
rein  it  was  shown  that  there  were  two  efifects,  leading  and  pushing. 

When  the  movement  for  limbering  is  practiced  with  the  pair,  the 
driver,  in  addition  to  applying  the  above  mentioned  aid  to  the  near 
horse,  must  apply  the  proper  aids  to  the  ofiF  horse,  (whip,  voice,  and 
rein.    See  Drill  Regulations.) 

Note :  2  When  rising  to  the  trot  the  instructor  must  pay  attention 
to  the  following  points  : 

(a)  That  the  rider's  back  is  supple  and  bows  to  the  rear  only  where 
the  belt  crosses  the  spinal  column. 

(b)  That  the  rider's  body  moves  forward  and  upward  when  rising 
to  the  trot.    The  knees  act  as  a  pivot  in  this  case. 

Under  no  circumstances  should  the  rider  while  rising  to  the  trot, 
hollow  the  back.  If  the  back  is  bowed  inward  the  buttocks  are  not 
under  the  rider;  furthermore,  when  rising  to  the  trot  under  these 
circumstances,  the  body  will  not  conform  to  the  motion  of  the  horse, 
but  will  rise  from  the  saddle  in  a  vertical  direction  only.  There  is 
always  an  "effort"  on  the  part  of  the  rider  to  post  if  the  back  is  hol- 
lowed. In  posting  the  rider  should  receive  the  propulsion  from  the 
thrust  of  the  hind  leg. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  231 

FIRST  TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 
Driving  Instruction,  Dismounted 

(Light  Batteries) 

All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Service  Regulations  for 
Field  Artillery  (Horse  and  Light),  1917. 

Lesson  1. 

Teach  the  following  arm  signals. 
Attention. 

(1)  Forward — March, 

(2)  Halt. 

(3)  By  the  right  flank,  March. 

(4)  By  the  left  flank,  March. 

(5)  Right  about,  March. 

(6)  Left  about,  March. 

Explain  the  formation  of  the  battery  in  line,  Par.  477. 

Explain  the  formation  of  the  battery  in  section  column,  Par.  478. 

Explain  the  formation  of  the  battery  in  flank  column,  Par.  479. 

For  instruction  in  battery  drill  use  each  driver  to  represent  his  pair. 
Have  the  three  drivers  of  each  team  formed  as  a  team,  two  yards  dis- 
tance between  the  men  of  each  team  and  separate  the  "teams"  by 
any  amount  to  represent  the  space  occupied  by  the  carriage.  (The  men 
of  each  team  can  take  hold  of  ropes  to  represent  traces  or  any  other 
improvised  method  which  will  assist  instruction  may  be  used.)  Have 
the  drivers  of  the  "piece"  lie  handkerchiefs  on  their  left  arms.  Have 
the  chief  of  section  and  caisson  corporal  take  their  posts.  The  idea 
is  to  teach  the  drivers  the  various  formations  and  evolutions  of  the 
battery. 

Lesson  2. 

Review  Lesson  L 

Teach  the  following  signals  : 

(1)  Countermarch,  March. 

(2)  Right  and  left  about  March. 

(3)  Right  sections,  forward,  March. 

(4)  Right  and  left  and  oblique  March. 

(5)  Increase  the  gait. 

(6)  Decrease  the  gait. 
Explain  Pars.  508-515,  inch 

Lesson  3. 

Review  Lessons  1  and  2. 

Teach  the  following  arm  signals. 

(1)  Halt. 

(2)  Change  direction  to  the  right  and  left. 

(3)  Close  intervals.     March. 

(4)  Extended  intervals.     March. 

(5)  Right  (left)  by  section. 


232  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

(6)   Right  (left)  front  into  line. 
Explain  Rules  1  and  2,  Par.  519. 
Explain  to  align  the  battery,  Par.  520. 

Lesson  4. 

Review  previous  arm  signals. 
Teach   the  following  arm   signals. 

(1)  Right  (left)  into  line,  March. 

(2)  Pieces  front,  March. 

(3)  Caissons  front,  March. 

(4)  Flank  column  right  (left)  oblique  March. 

(5)  Double  section  right  (left)  oblique  March. 

(6)  Action  front  (right,  left,  rear). 

(7)  Limber. 

Forward  March,  Par.  522. 

Battery  Halt,  Par.  523. 

By  the  right  and  left  flank,  Pars.  524  and  525. 

Lesson  5. 

Review  all  arm  signals. 

Take  up  the  following  movements. 

Right  (left  about)  March,  Par.  526. 

Countermarch.  March. 

Right  section  forward,  March,  Par.  527. 

Review   all    previous   movements. 

Lesson  6. 

Review  all  arm  signals. 
Right  (left)  oblique,  March  Par.  529. 
Column  right  (left)  March  Par.  530. 
Column  half  right  (left)  March  Par.  531. 
Pieces  (caissons  front),  March  Par.  532. 
Review  all  previous  movements. 

Lesson  7. 

Review  all  arm  signals. 

To  close  or  extend  intervals  in  line.    Par.  533. 
To  form  line  from  section  column  Pars.  535-536. 
Review  all  previous  movements. 

Lesson  8. 

Review  all  arm  signals. 

On  right  (left)  into  line,  March  Par.  537  and  538. 
Flank  column  right  (left)  oblique,  March.    Par.  539. 
Right  (left)  front  into  line,  March  Par.  540. 
Review  all  previous  movements. 

Lesson  9. 

Review  all  arm  signals. 

At  (so  many)  yards  right  (left")  into  line.  March  Par.  541. 

Pieces   (caissons)   front,  March,   Par.  542. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  233 

To  form  double  section  and  to  resume  the  previous  order.     Par.  543 
and  Par.  544. 

Being  in  flank  column,  double  section,  right  (left)  obliciue,  March. 

Pars.  245  and  246. 

Review  all  previous  movements. 

Lessons  10  to  12. 

Review  all  arm  signals  and  movements. 

SECOND  TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 

Drivers'  Instruction  with  Harness 
(Light  Batteries) 

All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Service  Regulations  for 
Field  Artillery  (Horse  and  Light),  1917. 

Lesson  1. 

Nomenclature  of  harness,  function  of  parts  of  harness. 

Handbook  of  3-inch  Gun  Material,  Pages  145  to  151  ;  and  Par.  406. 

Lesson  2. 

Same  as  Lesson  1. 

Lesson  3. 

Nomenclature  and  function  of  parts  of  harness. 
Handbook,  Pages  145  to  151. 
.     Disposition  of  harness  in  the  field,  Par.  408. 

Lesson  4. 

Nomenclature  and  funtion  of  parts  of  harness. 

Handbook,  Pages  145  to  151.  ' 

Disposition  of  harness  in  garrison  and  in  the  field.  Pars.  408  to  409. 

Disposition  of  harness  in  entraining,  Par.  409. 

Lesson  5. 

Review  Pars.  408-409. 

Harnessing  and  unharnessing  by  the  instructor.  Par.  410. 
Nomenclature  and  function  of  parts  of  harness. 
Handbook.  Pages  145  to  151. 

Lesson  6. 

To  harness-and  unharness  by  detail.  Pars.  411  to  414,  inch 
Nomenclature  of  harness. 

Lesson  7. 

To  harness  by  detail,  Par.  411. 

Adjustment  and  fitting  of  harness,  Pars.  416  to  420,  incl. 

By  detail  to  unharness,  Par.  413. 

Nomenclature  and  function  of  parts  of  harness. 

Lesson  8. 

Same  as  Lesson  7.  ,    j 


^34  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Lesson  9. 

To  harness  and  unharness  in  the  field,  Par.  415. 

Disposition  of  harness  in  the  field,  Par.  408. 

Nomenclature  and  function  of  parts  of  harness,  Pars.  416  to  420. 

Lesson  10 

Nomenclature  of  harness. 

To  harness  and  unharness  in  garrison,  Par.  412  to  414. 

Adjustment  and  fitting  of  harness ;   function  of  parts  of  harness. 

Lesson  11. 

To  harness  and  unharness  in  the  field,  Par.  415. 
Adjustment  and  fitting  of  harness.  Pars.  416  to  420. 
Nomenclature  of  harness  ;  ITandbook. 
Function  of  parts  of  harness. 

Lesson  12. 

To  harness  and  unharness  in  the  field,  Par.  415. 
Adjustment  and  fitting  of  harness,  Par.  416  to  420. 
Function  of  parts  of  harness. 
Nomenclature  of  harness. 


SECOND  TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 

Hints  on  Drivers'  Instruction  with  Harness 

(Light  Batteries) 

All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Service  Regulations  for 
Field  Artillery  (Horse  and  Light),  1917. 

Harnessing. 

The  instructor  should  take  a  complete  set  of  harness  and  place  it 
on  the  harness  pegs  in  accordance  with  Par.  407,  giving  the  reasons 
for  the  arrangement  of  each  part.  For  example:  the  near  and  then 
the  ofif  bridle  are  removed  first  and  placed  on  the  upper  peg  next  to  the 
heel  post,  as  they  are  the  last  to  be  put  on  when  harnessing.  The 
traces  are  arranged  next  over  the  upper  peg  with  the  toggles  of  each 
pair  on  opposite  sides  for  convenience  in  harnessing. 

In  this  connection  it  is  better  to  drive  a  spike  about  six  inches  above 
the  upper  peg  for  the  traces  rather  than  place  them  on  the  peg,  as  this 
arrangement  gives  more  room  on  the  upper  peg  for  the  ofif  saddle,  and 
permits   the   saddle  to  be  removed   without  disarranging  the  traces. 

Only  the  near  saddle  and  blanket  are  placed  on  the  lower  peg.  Both 
collars  are  placed  on  the  upper  peg  to  avoid  disarranging  the  breech- 
ing and  other  attachments  of  the  off  saddle,  as  would  be  the  case  if  the 
near  collar  were  placed  on  the  lower  peg  with  the  saddle. 

The  blankets  are  placed  over  the  saddles  to  prevent  injury  to  the 
seat  of  the  saddle  particularly  to  protect  the  zinc  linings  of  the  collars. 

It  is  advisable  to  hang  both  bridles  on  the  outer  end  of  the  upper  pe^"- 
under  the  off  saddle  as  the  harness  will  not  h^ve  to  be  removed  in  order 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  2i5 

to  reach  the  bridles.  This  also  permits  of  better  inspection  of  the  bits 
for  cleanHness. 

A  pair  of  horses  should  then  be  harnessed  by  the  instructor  "by 
detail,"  Par.  411.  He  should  give  the  command  and  explain  thoroughly 
the  method  of  placing  each  part  of  the  harness  on  the  horses. 

After  placing"  the  saddle  on  the  horse  the  collar  strap  is  fastened. 
This  should  be  done  immediately  to  prevent  the  collar  sliding  up  behind 
the  horse's  head,  should  the  animal  lower  his  head.  The  back  strap  is 
then  turned  back  with  the  right  hand,  the  cincha  strap  lowered  with 
the  left  and  the  cincha  passed  over  to  the  off  side  with  the  right  hand. 
The  driver  then  goes  to  the  ofif  side  of  the  horse,  sees  that  the  cincha  is 
properly  lowered,  comes  back  to  the  rear  of  the  horse,  grasps  the  crup- 
per with  the  right  hand  and  the  horse's  tail  with  the  left,  raises  the 
tail  and  passes  the  crupper  under  the  tail,  and  buckles  the  crupper. 
The  saddle  should  be  evenly  buckled  on  both  sides,  that  is  in  corre- 
sponding holes. 

While  standing  in  the  rear  of  the  horse  the  driver  should  glance 
along  the  horse's  back  through  the  cantle  arch  and  see  that  the  saddle  is 
correctly  placed.  He  then  steps  up  on  the  near  side  and  completes  the 
saddling  as  in  Par.  228. 

In  putting  the  trace  toggles  through  the  hame  tugs  the  toggles 
should  be  run  through  the  loop  from  the  inside  out.  While  the  trace 
chains  of  the  two  traces  for  each  horse  are  required  to  be  hooked  in  the 
same  corresponding  link,  it  is  better  to  have  all  four  trace  chains  of  the 
pair  hooked  in  the  same  corresponding  link.  This  will  prevent  any 
injury  to  the  horse  from  pulling  with  traces  of  unequal  length,  in  case 
the  four  traces  become  mixed  when  hung  on  the  harness  peg. 

When  using  the  old  model  bridle,  after  passing  the  ofT  rein  through 
the  lead  rein  roller  the  driver  should  make  a  twist  in  the  reins  by  pas- 
sing the  bight  through  the  loop  in  the  reins,  the  reins  having  been 
drawn  through  the  roller  sufficiently  to  permit  the  bight  to  be  passed 
through  the  loop  so  formed.  This  will  prevent  the  reins  slipping  back 
through  the  roller.  Tying  a  knot  in  the  bight  is  objectionable  because 
it  is  hard  to  undo  and  often  results  in  having  to  cut  the  reins  to  get  them 
out  of  the  roller. 

Before  coupling  the  pair  is  placed  in  the  passageway  in  the  rear  of 
the  stalls.  Unless  this  is  done  the  chain  or  wire  supporting  the  kicking 
bar  will  prevent  the  pair  from  being  led  or  backed  out  of  the  stall. 
While  Par.  411  prescribes  that  the  hook  at  the  end  of  the  coupling  rein 
be  attached  to  the  right  pommel  ring  of  the  near  saddle,  this  hook 
should  be  placed  with  the  collar  strap  hook  on  the  "D"  ring  on  the 
pommel  of  the  near  saddle.  This  ring  is  securely  fastened  by  a  rivet 
through  the  pommel  arch  and  can  not  easily  be  pulled  out,  while  the 
pommel  ring  is  fastened  to  the  side  bar  by  two  wood  screws  which  are 
easily  displaced.  It  should  be  explained  that  snapping  of  the  coupling 
rein  strap  into  the  "D"  ring  instead  of  into  the  right  pommel  ring  is 
distinctly  at  variance  with  the  drill  regulations.  When  leading  the 
pair  the  driver  should  always  be  on  the  near  side. 


236  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Before  giving  the  command  "yoke"  care  should  be  taken  that  the 
breast  straps  are  hooked  to  the  outside  of  the  wheel  collars  with  the 
buckle  end  of  the  breast  straps  up  and  outside.  This  is  necessary  as 
the  inside  ends  of  the  breast  straps  are  passed  through  the  roller  at  the 
end  of  the  neck  yoke  from  the  outside  in.  The  buckle  end  of  the  breast 
strap  will  not  pass  through  the  roller  and  therefore  should  be  attached 
to  the  outside  of  the  collar.  The  upper  side  of  the  breast  strap  has  on 
it  a  re-inforced  strap. 

If  the  breast  strap  is  turned  with  the  buckle  upward,  the  re-inforced 
strap  is  turned  downward  and  does  not  bear  against  the  roller  as  in- 
tended. In  fastening  the  neck  yoke  the  driver  stands  between  the  two 
horses  of  the  pair  opposite  their  chests,  facing  in  the  same  direction  as 
the  horses,  holds  the  center  of  the  neck  yoke  with  his  left  hand.  With 
his  right  hand  he  grasps  the  free  end  of  the  breast  strap  of  the  off  horse 
and  passes  it  through  the  neck  yoke  roller  from  the  outside  and  hooks 
the  end  of  the  breast  strap  hook  in  the  near  side  of  the  collar  of  the  off 
horse.  He  then  passes  the  neck  yoke  into  his  right  hand  and  similarly 
fastens  the  breast  strap  of  the  near  horse.  The  breast  strap  always 
passes  from  the  outside  inward  through  the  roller.  Before  passing  the 
martingale  through  the  standing  loop  on  the  cincha,  care  should  be 
taken  that  the  neck  yoke  is  so  held  that  the  upper  surface  of  the  martin- 
gale, or  the  side  that  comes  against  the  horse,  is  upward.  This  will 
place  the  "D"  ring  at  the  end  of  the  martingale  downward.  If  the  neck 
yoke  is  turned  around,  the  martingale  will  be  upside  down,  which  is 
wrong. 

After  fastening  the  breast  strap  of  the  near  horse,  the  driver  is  left 
facing  partly  toward  the  near  horse.  He  then  stoops  down  and  passes 
the  martingale  of  the  near  horse  between  the  front  legs  through  the 
cincha  and  attaches  the  hooks  of  the  side  straps  into  the  martingale 
through  the  "D"  ring,  beginning  with  the  left  strap,  and  then  hooks  the 
right  side  strap  to  the  near  horse  in  same  ring.  He  then  faces  about  and 
passes  the  martingale  of  the  off  horse  through  in  the  same  manner  and 
hooks  the  side  straps,  beginning  with  the  right  one. 

He  should  be  careful  to  see  that  the  side  straps  are  not  twisted  After 
hooking  them  in  the  "D"  ring  the  side  strap  hook  and  the  buckle  on  the 
side  strap  near  the  breeching  ring  should  be  downward. 

Unharnessing:  At  the  command  "unyoke,"  each  wheel  driver,  before 
attempting  to  unhook  the  breast  straps,  should  always  unhook  the  side 
straps  from  the  martingale  "D"  rings  of  both  horses  and  draw  the 
martingales  out  of  the  cinchas.  If  the  breast  strai)s  are  unhooked  first 
the  neck  yoke  falls  to  the  ground  with  the  martingales  still  attached, 
and  is  apt  to  frighten  the  horses ;  a  mistake  often  made.  The  horses 
must  be  uncoupled  before  being  led  into  the  stalls.  After  uncoupling, 
the  coupling  rein  is  usually  thrown  over  the  neck  of  the  off  horse. 

Time  is  always  saved  in  harnessing  by  carefully  hanging  the  two 
traces  of  each  horse,  when  unharnessing,  with  the  toggles  in  the  oppo- 
site direction. 

In  unsaddling  the  driver  first  passes  over  the  near  stirrup  and  un- 
fastens the  cincha,  letting  the  cincha  strap  hang.    He  then  steps  to  the 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  237 

rear  of  the  horse,  unbuckles  the  crupper  and  removes  it  from  under  the 
horse's  tail;  in  the  case  of  wheel  drivers  removing  the  breeching  body 
to  the  outside  of  the  horse's  tail. 

He  then  goes  to  the  off  side  of  the  horse  and  passes  over  the  off  stir- 
rup and  the  cincha,  taking  the  off"  stirrup  in  the  left  hand  and  the  cincha 
in  the  right,  in  order  to  save  time.  IJe  then  goes  back  to  the  near  side 
of  the  horse  and  when  opposite  the  horse's  left  hip,  grasps  the  back 
strap  where  the  crupper  joins,  with  the  right  hand  ;  in  the  case  of 
wheel  drivers,  picking  up  the  center  of  the  breeching  body  with  his 
right  hand,  as  he  passes  in  rear  of  the  horse,  and  then  grasping  the  back 
strap  with  the  same  hand,  as  explained  for  other  drivers.  Without 
stopping,  he  grasps  the  cincha  strap  with  left  hand  as  he  steps  forward 
on  the  near  side  of  the  horse  and  folds  over  the  cincha  strap  with  the 
left  hand  and  the  back  strap  with  the  right.  Next  he  unhooks  the  collar 
strap  and  removes  the  saddle. 

Unharnessing  in  the  Field:  The  order  of  unharnessing  as  stated  in 
Par.  411  is  changed  to  suit  the  disposition  of  the  harness.  For  example, 
after  unyoking,  the  neck  yoke  with  the  martingales  is  placed  on  the 
foot  board  of  the  limber. 

The  traces  instead  of  the  bridle  are  next  removed  and  after  being 
removed  are  laid  on  the  ground,  there  being  no  other  place  to  put  them. 
The  wheel  traces  are  released  from  the  hame  tugs  only  and  are  turned 
back  on  the  foot  board  of  the  limber,  still  attached  to  the  single  trees. 

The  saddle  is  next  removed  and  placed  on  the  limber  pole.  The 
traces  are  then  picked  up,  folded,  and  placed  across  the  blankets  over 
the  saddle. 

The  bridles  are  next  removed  and  placed  over  the  traces.  The  collars 
are  removed  and  placed  across  the  saddle  with  the  bridles. 
If  care  is  taken  both  the  collar  and  bridle  can  be  placed  on  the  seat 
of  the  saddle  over  the  blankets,  which  will  permit  the  bridles  to  be 
moved  without  disturbing  the  collar.  It  is  often  necessary  to  remove 
the  bridle,  as  when  leading  to  water  and  so  on. 

Adjustment  and  Fitting  of  Harness:  The  adjustment  and  fitting  of 
harness  is  carefully  laid  down  in  Par.  420. 

Before  attempting  to  adjust  the  harness,  holes  of  the  proper  size  and 
the  normal  distance  apart,  should  be  punched  in  the  following  straps : 
back  straps,  loin  straps,  hip  straps  and  side  straps,  using  a  leather 
punch.  Under  no  condition  should  they  be  cut  with  a  knife  or  punched 
through  with  any  other  instrument.  By  doing  this  any  set  of  harnesF 
can  be  fitted  to  any  horse  for  draft  purposes  by  simply  taking  up,  or 
letting  out  the  strap  without  having  to  stop  to  punch  holes. 

Common  faults  in  fitting  harness  are  as  follows:  The  back  strap  is 
usually  left  too  long  and  the  crupper  taken  up  too  short,  this  draws 
the  hip  strap,  particularly  with  the  wheel  horses,  too  near  the  horse's 
tail  and  does  not  pull  the  breeching  body  up  in  its  proper  place. 

While  the  drill  regulations  require  that  the  hip  straps  be  so  adjusted 
as  to  enable  the  breeching  body  to  bear  flat  against  the  thighs  and  to 
rest  from  twelve  to  fifteen  inches  below  the  dock,  it  is  better  to  shorten 


238  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

the  rear  hip  straps  until  the  breeching  body  is  just  below  the  point  of 
the  buttock.  The  front  hip  strap  should  be  so  adjusted  so  as  to  allow  as 
far  as  possible  a  straight  pull  from  the  point  of  the  buttocks  through 
the  breeching  body  and  side  straps  to  the  "D"  ring  of  the  martingale. 
In  other  words  the  breeching  body  should  be  tilted  until  it  is  about  in 
the  prolongation  of  the  side  straps.  If  the  front  hip  straps  are 
shortened  so  as  to  make  the  breeching  body  hang  horizontal,  all  the 
strain  in  backing  the  carriage  comes  on  the  front  hip  straps,  which  are 
very  easily  broken.  The  breeching  body  should  not  hang  horizontally, 
but  should  be  tilted  to  the  front  as  before  explained.  Side  straps  are 
then  shortened  sufficiently  for  the  carriage  to  be  stopped  by  the  point 
of  the  horse's  buttock  against  the  breeching  body  and  not  by  the  top 
of  his  neck  against  the  collar  as  is  commonly  the  case. 

The  breeching  should  be  carefully  watched  in  draft  to  see  that  it  does 
not  chafe  the  horse's  buttock  or  the  point  of  the  stifle.  As  soon  as  any 
chafing  is  noticed  the  side  straps  should  be  let  out  and  gradually  tight- 
ened, as  the  skin  is  hardened. 

In  adjusting  the  breeching  and  the  side  straps  the  starting  point  is 
the  martingale.  The  martingale  cincha  strap  should  be  of  such  length 
as  to  permit  the  "D"  ring  of  the  martingale  to  extend  three  or  four 
inches  through  the  standing  loop  on  the  cincha.  With  this  as  a  starting 
point,  adjust  the  side  strap  and  breeching  as  indicated  above.  If  this 
is  not  done,  or  if  the  side  straps  are  too  long  and  the  martingale  cincha 
strap  is  taken  up  too  short,  the  "D"  ring  will  be  slipped  forward 
through  the  standing  loop  and  tear  it  from  the  cincha. 

Final  adjustment  of  harness  must  be  made  after  the  team  has  been 
placed  in  draft.  It  is  then  the  duty  of  officers  and  non-commissioned 
officers  and  drivers  constantly  to  watch  the  harness  and  to  make  or 
have  made  such  adjustments  as  are  necessary. 

A  good  way  of  impressing  upon  beginners  the  importance  of  care- 
fully adjusting  the  martingale,  side  straps  and  breeching  is  to  hitch  a 
quiet  team  to  a  carriage  with  the  martingale,  cincha  straps  and  side 
straps  too  long  and  with  the  breeching  hanging  too  loose,  as  is  com- 
monly seen.  Have  the  carriage  move  down  a  gentle  slope  at  a  fast  walk 
or  slow  trot  and  suddenly  stop,  without  putting  on  the  brakes.  Both 
wheel  horses  will  lift  their  heads  in  an  effort  to  stop  the  carriage  with 
the  tops  of  their  necks  by  means  of  the  collars,  and  the  carriage  will  be 
stopped  without  the  breechings  becoming  tight.  This  is  what  causes 
the  sores  on  the  tops  of  tli,e  horse's  neck,  commonly  known  as  a  "collar 
boil,"  which  the  ignorant  driver  would  claim  was  caused  from  a  hot 
collar  pad,  particularly  if  the  collar  had  been  left  in  the  sun. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  239 


SECOND  TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 


Drivers'  Instruction — Theory — Drill  Regulations 

(Light  Batteries) 

All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Service  Regulations  for 
Field  Artillery  (Horse  and  Light),  1917. 

Lesson  I. 

Care  of  horses,  Pars.  590  and  591. 

Object  and  sequence  of  instruction,  Pars.  205  to  210,  inch 

Standard  required,  Pars.  211  to  213,  inch 

Hints  to  instructors.  Pars.  214  to  224,  inch 

Lesson  2. 

Review  Lesson  1. 
To  blanket.  Par.  227. 
Fitting  the  saddle,  Par.  230. 
To  saddle,  Par.  228. 
To  unsaddle,  Par.  229, 

Lesson  3. 

Review  Lesson  2. 
To  bridle,  Pars.  231  and  232. 
To  fit  the  snafHe  bridle,  Par.  233. 
To  fit  the  double  bridle.  Par.  234. 
To  remove  the  bridle,  Par.  235. 

Lesson   4. 

Review  Lesson  3. 

To  mount.  Pars.  240  to  244,  inch 

To  dismount,  Pars.  245  to  249,  inch 

Holding  the  reins,  Pars.  250  to  254. 

The  stirrups,  Par.  255, 

Position  of  the  soldier  mounted.  Par.  256. 

Note:    See  Hints  on  E — Equitation,  Second  Twelve  Day  Period. 

Lesson  5. 

Review  Lesson  4. 

Establishing  confidence,  Pars.  260  to  262,  inch 
Establishing  a  firm  and  correct  seat,  Pars.  283  to  284,  inch 
Riding  without  reins  and  stirrups.  Pars.  285  and  286. 

Lesson  6. 

Review  Lesson  5. 
The  aids,  Par.  288. 
Leg  aids.  Par.  289. 

Discuss  in  detail  the  application  of  the  leg  aid.     Consider  different 
movements  and  teach  how  the  leg  aids  act  in  each  case. 
See  Hints  on  E— Equitation,  Second  Twelve  Day  Period. 


240  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Rein  aids,  Par.  290. 

Discuss  in  detail  the  ai)plication  of  tlie  rein  aid.  Consiiler  different 
movements  and  teach  how  the  rein  aids  act  in  each  case. 

Lesson  7. 

Review  Lesson  6. 

Use  of  spurs,  Par.  292. 

Impress  upon  the  recruit  that  the  spur  is  not  a  means  of  punishment, 
but  a  means  of  accentuating  the  leg  aids. 

The  weight.  Par.  291. 

Discuss  in  detail  when  the  weight  is  used  and  its  effect. 

Lesson  8. 

Review  Lesson  7. 

The  whip,  Par.  293. 

The  voice,  Par.  294. 

Impress  upon  the  recruit  that  the  voice  is  one  of  the  most  powerful 
aids  employed  in  Equitation.  Its  employment  is  of  the  utmost  import- 
ance, particularly  to  the  Artilleryman.  Discuss  in  detail  how  to  use 
this  aid. 

The  use  and  accord  of  aids.  Par.  295. 

Teach  what  accord  of  the  aids  means  an<l  the  eft"ect  of  contradictory 
aids.    See  Hints  on  E — Equitation  Second  Twelve  Day  Period. 

Lesson  9. 

Review  Lesson  8. 

Gathering  the  horse.  Par.  297. 

Teach  the  aids  employed  and  the  effect  of  their  application.  See 
Hints  on  E — Equitation,  Second  Twelve  Dav  Period. 

Forward,  March,  Par.  298. 

Teach  the  effect  of  the  gather  and  the  aids  following  for,  Forward, 
March. 

To  halt,  Par.  299. 

Teach  the  theory  of  the  application  for  the  aids  emploved. 

The  half  halt.  Par.  300. 

Teach  the  aids  employed  and  their  application. 

Lesson  10. 

Review  Lesson  9. 

Change  of  gait.  Par.  301. 

Extending  or  reducing  the  speed  at  the  various  gaits.  Teach  the 
aids  employed  and  the  theory  of  their  application. 

Change  of  direction.  Par.  303. 

To  march  by  the  flank,  Par.  304. 

Teach  the  aids  employed  and  the  theory  of  their  application. 

Lesson  11. 

Review  Lesson  10. 

Circles.  Par.  306. 

Teach  the  aids  employed  and  theory  of  their  application. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  241 

To  back  and  halt.  Par.  307. 

Teach  the  aids  employed  and  the  theory  of  their  application. 

Lesson  12. 

Review  Lessons  6  to  11,  incl.     General  qniz. 

SECOND  TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 

Hints  on  Drivers'  Instruction — Theory — Drill  Regulations 
(Light  Batteries) 

See  Hints  on  E — Equitation,  Second  Twelve  Day  Period. 

In  discussing  the  fitting-  of  the  bridle,  the  instructor  will  also  teach 
the  following : 

The  snaffle  bit  acts  on  the  corners  of  the  horse's  month  and  when 
the  rein  becomes  active,  tends  to  elevate  the  horse's  head.  The  curb  bit 
acts  on  the  bars  and  when  active  lowers  the  horse's  head.  Because  of 
the  fact  that  the  curb  acts  on  the  "bars"  and  that  leverage  is  obtained, 
this  bit  is  much  more  severe  than  the  snaffle. 

In  teaching  the  theor}^  of  the  application  of  aids,  impress  on  the 
recruit  the  eiTect  which  the  application  lias  on  the  horse.  In  every  case 
show  the  effect  of  contradictory  aids. 

In  general  the  voice  has  the  following  effects  : 

(1)  To  soothe  or  quiet. 

(2)  To  encourage. 

(3)  To  admonish. 

The  weight  has  the  following  effects  • 

(1)  To  act  as  a  brake,  (the  halt,  for  example). 

(2)  To  change  the  center  of  gravity  of  the  horse. 
The  rein  aids  have  the  following  effects : 

(1)  To  assist  in  changing  direction. 

(2)  To  diminish  the  gait. 

(3)  To  change  the  center  of  gravity  of  the  horse. 
The  leg  aids  may  be  classified  as  follows : 

(1)  Active:  ('Eor  example,  both  legs  are  active  when  applying  the 
forward  leg  aids.) 

(2)  Passive:  (For  example,  both  legs  are  passixe  when  they  are  not 
applying  an  aid.  as  when  the  rider  is  moving  at  the  gait  he  desires 
while  on  a  straight  line.) 

(3)  Guarding:  (For  example,  in  circling  left,  the  right  leg  is  carried 
back  slightly  in  order  to  be  in  a  position  to  prevent  the  haunches  swing- 
ing to  the  outside  of  the  circle.  If  the  haunches  remain  on  the  circle 
the  right  leg  remains  passive,  but  if  haunches  tend  to  swing  outside, 
the  leg  becomes  active.) 

The  instructor  will  obtain  excellent  results  in  this  subject,  if  he  will 
first  read  a  paragraph  from  the  book  and  then  in  his  own  words,  explain 
and  discuss  it.  His  discussion  where  possible  should  include  a  hypo- 
thetical case  to  illustrate  and  bring  out  the  point  he  desires  to  impress. 


242  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

All  paragraphs  covered  in  these  lessons  are  of  the  utmost  importance. 
Much  assistance  can  be  given  the  class  by  picking  out  the  "meat"  of 
each  paragraph  and  covering  the  same  by  a  question  and  answer. 
These  questions  and  answers  may  be  printed  and  a  copy  given  each 
member  of  the  class.  Illustration :  What  are  the  three  principles  of 
feeding?  Answer:  1 — Water  before  feeding.  2 — Feed  in  small  quanti- 
ties and  often.  3 — Do  not  work  a  horse  hard  immediately  after  a  full 
feed. 

SECOND  TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 

Noncommissioned  Officers'  Instructions — Theory — Drill  Regulations 
(Light  Batteries) 

All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Service  Regulations  for 
Field  Artillery  (Horse  and  Light),  1917. 

Note:  The  Instructor  will  read  the  paragraph  and  discuss  it,  illus- 
trating where  practicable.     The  review  will  consist  of  quizzes. 

Lesson  1. 

Pars.  205  to  224,  incl. 

Lesson  2. 

Review  Lesson  1. 

Position  of  the  soldier  mounted,  Pars.  256  and  257, 

The  rests,  Par.  258. 

Establishing  confidence.  Par.  260. 

Exercises  favorable  to  imparting  confidence.  Par.  261. 

Suppling  exercises.  Pars.  262  and  263. 

Lesson  3. 

Review  Lesson  2. 

Establishing  correct  seat.  Par.  283. 

Favorable  exercises.  Par.  284. 

Riding  without  rein  and  stirrups.  Par.  285. 

Jumping,  Par.  287, 

Lesson  4. 

Review  Lesson  3. 
Teaching  aids.  Par.  288. 
Leg  aids.  Par.  289. 
Rein  aids,  Par.  290. 
The  weight.  Par.  291, 

Lesson  5. 

Review  Lesson  4.  ' 

LTse  of  the  spur.  Par.  292. 

The  whip.  Par.  293. 

The  voice,  Par.  294.  ._.  .    . 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  243 

The  accord  of  aids,  Par.  295. 
Terms  employed,  Par.  296. 
Gathering  the  horse,  Par.  297. 

Lesson  6. 

Review  Lesson  5. 

Care,  conditioning  and  training  of  horses.  Par.  590. 

Rules  for  the  care  of  horses.  Par.  591. 

Lesson  7. 

Review  Lesson  6. 

Stables  and  stable  management,  Pars.  592  to  595. 

Feeding,  Pars.  596  to  600,  incl. 

Lesson  8. 

Review  Lesson  7. 
Watering,  Pars.  601  and  602. 
Stable  duty,  Pars.  603  and  604. 

Lesson  9. 

Review  Lesson  8. 
Grooming,  Pars.  605  to  610. 
Shoeing,  Pars.  6U  to  613. 

Lesson  10. 

Condition  and  exercise,  Pars.  614  to  623. 

Care  of  horses  on  the  march  and  in  the  field,  Pars.  623  to  633. 

Lessons  11  and  12. 

Review  Lesson  10. 
General  quiz. 


THIRD  TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 

Driving  Instruction  Dismounted 
(Light  and  Heavy  Batteries) 

All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Servicel  Regulations  for 
Field  Artillery,  1917. 

Same  as  for  the  Second  Twelve  Day  Period. 

In  addition,  take  up  Pars.  551  to  568,  inch,  teaching  the  movements 
prescribed  therein  which  aiTect  the  driver. 

THIRD  TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 

Driving  (Lessons  and  Hints) 

(Light  Batteries) 

All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Service  Regulations  for 
Field  Artillery,  (Horse  and  Light).  1917. 


244  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Lessons  1  to  12. 

The  work  in  this  period  consists  of  teaching  the  driver  how  to  handle 
the  pair.  At  the  beginning  of  the  hour  the  instructor  should  work  with 
the  pairs  on  the  track.  During  this  time  equitation  movements  will  be 
taken  up  ;  viz  :  Forward,  Increase  and  Decrease  of  gait ;  Backward,  etc., 
(see  that  the  about  is  executed  on  a  six-3^ard  radius)  ;  Halt;  Backward, 
etc.,  (See  Par.  447).  The  instructor  must  insist  on  both  the  near  and  off 
horses  being  "gathered"  and  aids  for  the  movement  being  properly 
applied  to  both  near  and  off  animals.  Pay  special  attention  to  the  use 
of  the  voice.    See  Pars.  442-450. 

After  the  horses  have  been  worked  out  as  above  described,  the  in- 
structor will  form  the  pairs  into  teams,  (Par.  448.)  The  traces  will  not 
be  hooked.  In  order  to  hold  up  the  traces  of  the  wheel  horses,  halter 
swivel  snaps  should  be  drawn  and  by  means  of  an  open  link  of  one- 
quarter  inch  round  iron  permanently  attached  to  the  ring  end  of  the 
wheel  trace  (which  holds  the  quick  release  device).  The  end  of  the 
wheel  trace  can  then  be  snapped  or  hooked  in  the  ring  at  the  end  of  the 
breeching  body  (where  the  side  straps  are  fastened).  This  will  not 
only  hold  the  wheel  traces  in  place  in  pair  drill,  but  will  prevent  the 
front  hip  straps  to  which  the  wheel  traces  are  supposed  to  be  fastened 
from  being  torn  out  by  the  pull  of  the  swing  and  lead  pairs  in  team  drill. 
The  lead  and  swing  traces  will  be  crossed  over  the  horse's  back  behind 
the  cantle  and  fastened  by  passing  the  trace  toggle  (left,  for  example) 
through  the  ring  on  the  trace  chain  (right  ring,  in  this  case). 

The  movements  prescribe<l  in  The  Battery  Mounted,  Pars.  464  to  568, 
will  be  covered  by  means  of  drill.  Remember  that  the  traces  are  not 
hooked,  but  that  the  pairs  are  in  "team  formation."  Use  arm  signals, 
as  well  as  verbal  commands,  gradually  working  away  from  the  latter. 
During  this  Twelve  Day  Period  the  instructor  may,  if  he  so  desires, 
take  one  or  two  short  road  marches  (without  carriages,  traces  un- 
hooked and  placed  as  previously  described).  If  the  road  march  is  taken 
the  instructor  will  conduct  it  as  prescribed  in  Field  Service  Regula- 
tions. The  following  points  must  be  insisted  upon  in  order  to  conduct 
a  successful  march : 

(1)   Steady  Gaits. 

Nothing  will  break  down  horses  more  than  unsteady  gaits.  If  the 
walk  is  too  slow,  the  teams  jam,  necessitating  a  continuous  halting 
and  closing  up  during  the  march ;  if  too  fast,  there  is  a  continuous  "jig- 
ging" throughout  the  column  in  order  to  maintain  proper  position. 
The  four  mile  per  hour  walk  can  be  taken  by  the  average  horse,  when 
draft  is  good.  Teach  the  soldier  this  gait  over  a  staked  course.  If  the 
trot  is  too  slow,  there  will  be  a  continuous  change  of  gaits  (walk  and 
trot)  in  the  column.  This  results  in  a  continual  jamming  and  opening 
out,  from  front  to  rear.  If  the  trot  is  too  fast,  some  of  the  animals  will 
either  "pound  themselves  to  death"  or  will  be  forced  to  "break"  the 
gait. 

The  knowledge  of  the  four  mile  walk  and  the  eight  mile  trot  is  one  of 
the  secrets  of  "horses  in  condition." 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  245 

Lameness,  founder,  etc.,  generally  mean  poor  gaits.  In  case  a  car- 
riage or  team  is  forced  to  fall  out  during  the  march  it  should  close  on 
the  rear  of  the  column  at  the  regulation  trot  and  take  its  place  in 
column  at  the  next  halt,  unless  otherwise  ordered. 

(2)  During  the  Halt. 

(a)  When  halting,  teams  and  carriages  should  halt  on  the  right  side 
of  the  road,  leaving  the  left  clear  so  that  traffic  will  not  be  congested. 
Individually  mounted  men  must  also  keep  to  the  right  of  the  road. 
This  is  of  the  utmost  importance,  because  of  the  fact  that  orders  are 
continually  sent  from  front  to  rear  and  vice  versa.  Before  going  into 
action  and  during  the  "approach  march"  it  often  happens  that  organi- 
zations in  rear  are  ordered  forward.  Their  march  must  not  be  delayed 
by  a  congested  road. 

(b)  Immediately  after  halting",the  soldier  must  adjust  his  equipment 
and  harness.  This  necessitates  a  careful  examination  by  the  soldier 
and  an  inspection  by  the  chiefs  of  section  and  chiefs  of  platoon.  All 
animals  should  be  examined  to  see  that  they  have  no  sores,  or  rubs, 
that  the  shoeing  is  O.  K.  and  that  no  stones  have  been  "picked  up,"  etc. 
The  general  condition  of  the  horse  should  ])e  noted  and  any  symptoms 
of  sickness  reported  immediately.  L'nder  no  circumstances  will  a 
soldier  leave  his  horse  or  pair,  without  first  getting-  a  man  to  "stand 
by"  in  his  place.  It  should  be  remembered  that  when  carriages  are  used 
the  pole  prop  should  be  let  down  immediately  after  halting. 

The  chiefs  of  section  and  gunners  should  make  it  a  point  to  caution 
"Pole  props  down,"  and  should  inspect  to  see  that  this  is  done. 

Horses  in  harness  should  not  be  permitted  to  graze  because  of  the 
danger  of  the  animals  becoming  entangled,  thereby  resulting  in  kick- 
ing- or  a  stampede  of  the  team.  This  will  prevent  the  driver  from  ex- 
amining the  horse's  shoulder  and  the  bearing-  surface  of  the  collar. 

If  it  is  intended  to  water  during  the  halt,  two  circumstances  arise: 
(1)  when  the  animals  may  be  watered  from  a  running-  stream,  (2)  when 
buckets  must  be  emplo^'ed.  In  the  first  case,  the  teams  are  unhitched 
and  the  traces  looped  over  the  horse's  back  as  prescribed  in  the  Drill 
Regulations.  Each  individual  driver  takes  charge  of  his  pair  and  the 
Battery,  Platoon  or  Section  is  formed  in  column.  The  v.'atering  of  the 
animals  is  superintended  by  the  Captain  and  Battery  Officers,  each 
chief  of  section  superintending  the  watering  of  his  section.  After  the 
stream  has  been  filled  with  all  the  animals  which  it  will  accommodate, 
all  should  be  held  in  the  stream  until  the  last  horse  has  finished  drink- 
ing. 

In  leading  in  to  water  it  is  advisable  to  fill  the  down-stream  end  first. 
This  method  gives  the  horses  on  the  down-stream  side  clean  water 
whereas  if  the  up-stream  end  is  filled  first,  by  the  time  the  down-stream 
side  is  filled  the  water  in  that  section  is  liable  to  be  muddy.  The  com- 
mand, "Move  out"  is  then  given  by  the  officer  superintending  the 
watering,  whereupon  all  the  horses  leave  the  stream  and  form  in 
column  in  the  direction  from  whence  thev  came.     A  new  batch  move 


246  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

■  down  to  the  stream  and  the  process  is  repeated.  After  the  horses  are 
watered  the  teams  are  marched  back  to  their  carriages. 

The  above  is  not  a  "hide-bound"  rule  for  watering  but  merely  gives 
the  general  idea.  Watering  may  be  performed  by  Battery,  Platoon  or 
Section.  Regardless  of  the  method  of  watering,  an  ofhcer  should  al- 
ways be  present.  The  reason  why  all  horses  are  held  in  the  stream 
until  the  last  horse  has  finished  drinking,  is  as  follows : 

"The  herding  instinct"  of  the  horse  is  very  strong  and  some  horses 
who  would  have  drank  their  fill,  had  they  been  given  time,  will  go 
thirsty,  rather  than  leave  the  other  animals. 

When  the  animals  are  very  thirsty  it  is  a  good  plan  to  hold  back  the 
horses  which  are  waiting  to  water  so  that  they  are  unable  to  see  the 
other  animals  drinking.  This  will  prevent  any  uneasiness  or  bolting 
for  the  stream. 

The  second  case  requires  little  discussion.  Care  should  be  taken  that 
the  cannoneers  "stand  by"  while  the  drivers  are  filling  the  buckets. 

(3)  Relaying  Signals  and  Commands. 

(a)  All  signals  and  commands  must  be  relayed  to  the  rear  element 
of  the  column.  This  permits  a  smooth  execution  of  changes  in  gait  and 
informs  the  rear  of  the  column  what  to  expect.  For  example :  If  the 
command  is  to  halt  for  ten  minutes,  a  knowledge  of  the  length  of  halt 
is  necessary  in  order  for  the  entire  organization  to  be  ready  to  move 
out  at  the  appointed  time.  By  relaying  back  this  information  the  entire 
command  will  know  exactly  when  it  is  to  move  out.  This  knowledge 
prevents  slowness  and  straggling. 

(4)  March  Discipline.     (See  Field  Service  Regulations). 

(a)  On  long  marches  "slouching  in  the  saddle"  must  be  watched 
All  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  are  responsible  that  this 
does  not  occur. 

(b)  Chiefs  of  section  march  in  rear  of  their  sections. 

(c)  Chiefs  of  platoon  march  in  rear  of  their  platoons. 

(d)  When  subdivision  takes  place  all  should  take  their  posts. 

THIRD  TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 
Drivers'   Instruction — Theory — Drill    Regulations 
(Light  Batteries) 
All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Service  Regulations  for 
Field  Artillery,  (Horse  and  Light).  1917. 

Lesson  1. 

Gaits.  Par.  351. 

The  walk.  Par.  3.S2. 

The  trot.  Par.  3.S3. 

The  gallop.  Par.  354. 

Work  on  long  lines.  Par.  356. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  247 

Lesson  2. 

Review  Lesson  1. 

Work  on  varied  ground,  Pars.  357  to  360. 

Lesson   3. 

Review  Lesson  2. 

Management  of  the  pair,  Pars.  442  to  449. 

Lesson  4. 

Review  Lesson  3. 

Care  of  the  horse,  Pars.  590  and  59L 

Stables  and  stable  management,  P'ars.  592  to  595,  incl. 

Lesson  5. 

Review  Lesson  4. 
Feeding,  Pars.  596  to  600. 

Lesson  6. 

Review  Lesson  5.  ' 

Watering,  Pars.  601  and  602. 
Stable  duty.  Pars.  603  to  610. 

Lesson  7. 

Review  Lesson  6. 
Shoeing,  Pars.  611  to  613. 

Lesson  8. 

Review  Lesson  7. 

Condition  and  exercise,  Pars  614  to  622. 

Lesson  9. 

Review  Lesson  8. 

Care  of  the  horse  on  the  march  and  in  the  field,  Pars.  623  to  633. 

Lesson  10. 

Review  Lessons  1  to  3  incl. 

Lesson  11. 

Review  Lessons  4  to  6  incl. 

Lesson  12. 

Review  Lessons  7  to  9  incl. 


THIRD  TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 

Noncommissioned  Officers'  Instruction — Theory — Drill  Regulations 
(Light  Batteries) 

All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Service  Regulations  for 
Field  Artillery,  (Horse  and  Light),  1917. 

Note:  The  instructor  will  read  the  paragraph  and  discuss  it,  illus- 
trating where  practicable.    The  review  will  consist  of  quizzes. 


248  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION 

Lesson   1. 

Elementary  training  in  equitation,  Par.  3S5. 

Work  on  long  lines,  Par.  336. 

Work  on  varied  ground,  Pars.  357  to  360,  incl. 

Lesson  2. 

Review  Lesson  1. 

Posting,  Par.  361. 

Changing  the  diagonal  in  posting",  Par.  362. 

The  trot,  Par.  363. 

Lesson  3. 

Review  Lesson  2. 

Conditioning  and  exercise,  Pars.  614  to  623. 

Lesson  4. 

Review  Lesson  3. 

Care  of  horses  on  the  march  and  in  the  field,  Pars.  623  to  633. 

Lesson  5. 

Review  Lessons  3  and  4,  Pars.  614  to  633. 

Lesson  6. 

Management  of  the  pair.  Pars.  442  to  449. 

Lesson  7. 

Review  Lesson  6. 

Teams  and  their  management.  Par.  4.^0. 

Teaming  of  artillery.  Par.  451. 

To  start  a  carriage.  Par.  452. 

To  stop  a  carriage,  Par.  453. 

To  back  a  carriage,  Par.  454, 

Lesson   8. 

Review  Lesson  7. 

Turns,  Par.  455. 

Turn  in  limbering,  Par.  456. 

To  confirm  in  horses  a  willingness  to  pull.  Par.  457. 

Lesson  9. 

Review  Lesson  8. 

Driving  up  steep  slopes.  Pars.  458  to  463. 

Lesson  10. 

Review  Lessons  1,  2  and  3. 

Lesson  11. 

Review  Lessons  4,  5  and  6. 

Lesson  12. 

Review  Lessons  7,  8  and  9. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  249 


FOURTH  TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 


Drivers'    Instruction — Theory — Drill   Regulations 
.   (Light  Batteries) 

All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Service  Regulations  for 
Field  Artillery,  (Horse  and  Light)  1917. 

Note :  The  instructor  w^ill  read  and  discuss  the  paragraphs,  illus- 
trating where  practicable.    The  review  will  consist  of  quizzes. 

Lesson  1. 

Posting,  Pars.  361   and  362. 
Management  of  the  pair.  Pars.  442  to  449. 
Teams  and  their  management  in  draft,  Par.  450. 

Lesson  2. 

Review   Lesson   1. 

Teaming  of  artillery  horses,  Par.  451. 

To  start  a  carriage  or  increase  its  speed.  Par.  452. 

To  stop  a  carriage  or  reduce  its  speed.  Par.  453. 

Lesson  3. 

Review  Lesson  2. 

To  back  a  carriage,  Par.  454. 

Turns,  Par.  455. 

To  turn  in  limbering.  Par.  456. 

To  confirm  in  horses  a  willingness  to  pull,  Par.  457. 

Lesson  4. 

Review  Lesson  3. 

Driving  up  steep  slopes  and  over  difficult  ground,  Par.  458. 

Lesson  5. 

Same  as  Lesson  6,  Second  Twelve  Day  Period. 

Lesson  6. 

Same  as  Lesson  7,  Second  Twelve  Day  Period. 

Lesson  7. 

Same  as  Lesson  8,  Second  Twelve  Day  Period. 

Lesson  8. 

Same  as  Lesson  9,  Second  Twelve  Day  Period. 

Lesson  9. 

Same  as  Lesson  10,  Second  Twelve  Day  Period. 

Lesson  10. 

Same  as  Lesson  11,  Second  Twelve  Day  Period. 

Lessons  11  and  12. 

General  review  of  Lessons  1  to  10,  incl. 


250        "       '""^  MOUNTEt)  INStRUCTlOr>J 

TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 

S— Stables 

(Light  Batteries) 

All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Service  Regulations  for 
Field  Artillery  (Horse  or  Light),  1917. 

Groom  by  detail,  Par.  605. 

Take  up  by  short  talks,  Pars.  603-610. 

Officers  at  stables  can  at  this  time  teach  the  men  the  "points  of  the 
horse." 

Reference  should  be  had  to  some  standard  book  on  this  subject. 

In  telling-  a  man  to  brush  off  a  certain  part,  use  its  correct  name, 
"pastern,"  "flank,"  etc. 

Make  grooming  as  instructive  as  possible. 

TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 

Cleaning  of  Harness  and  Saddlery 
(Light  Batteries) 

All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Service  Regulations  for 
Field  Artillery  (Horse  and  Light),  1917. 

Lesson  1. 

Talk  on  leather  and  its  care,  Pars.  647  to  677. 

Hand  book  3-inch  Gun  Material,  Page  151.  Ordinance  Pamphlet 
No.  1965. 

Lesson  2. 

Review  Lesson  1. 

Explain  :  (a)  To  clean  the  harness,  Par.  675.  (b)  To  clean  and  dress 
the  harness.  Par.  678.     (c)  To  oil  the  harness,  Par.  679. 

Practical  demonstration  of  cleaning  the  harness  by  the  instructor. 

Lesson  3. 

Quiz  on  Lesson  2. 

Practical  work  :   "Cleaning  the  harness." 

During  the  practical  work  the  instructor  should  go  from  one  man  to 
another  and  see  that  he  is  cleaning  the  harness  as  prescribed.  He  can 
at  this  time  assist  instruction  in  nomenclature  by  asking  the  soldier. 
"What  are  you  cleaning  now?  What  is  its  use?  How  do  you  know 
when  it  is  adjusted?" 

Lesson  4. 

Explain  again  the  difference  between:    (a)  To  clean  the  harness, 
(b)  To  clean  and  dress  the  harness,  (c)  To  oil  the  harness. 
Practical  work  in  cleaning  harness. 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION  251 

Lesson  5. 

Practical  demonstration  by  instrnctor  of:    "To  clean  and  dress  the 
harness." 

The  instructor  should  name  each  part  of  the  harness  as  he  cleans. 

Lesson  6. 

Practical  work :    "To  clean  and  dress  the  harness." 

Lesson  7. 

Same  as  Lesson  6. 

Lesson  8. 

Quiz  on  the  difference  between  (a)  To  clean  the  harness,  (b)  To 
clean  and  dress  the  harness,  (c)  To  oil  the  harness. 

Lesson  9. 

Practical  demonstration  by  instructor  of:   "To  oil  the  harness,"  Par. 
679. 

Lesson  10. 

Practical  work :    "To  oil  the  harness." 

Lessons  11  and  12. 

General  review  of  previous  lessons. 

TWELVE  DAY  PERIOD 

Making  Rolls— Shelter  Tent  Pitching 

(Light  and  Heavy  Batteries) 

All  references  are  to  Provisional  Drill  and  Service  Regulations  for 
Field  Artillery. 

Lesson  1. 

Par.  1809-1813. 

Lesson  2. 

Same  as  Lesson  1. 

Lesson  3. 

Par.  1814. 

Lesson  4. 

Par.  1814-1816. 

Lesson  5. 

Par.  1815-1818,  incl. 

Lessons  6. 

Par.  1818-1823. 

Lesson  7. 

Par.  1823-1830. 


252  MOUNTED   INSTRUCTION 

Lesson  8. 

Par.  1856-1860. 

Lesson  9. 

Same  as  Lesson  8. 

Lesson  10. 

Par.  1861-1864,  incl. 

Lessons  11  and  12. 

Review.     Subjects  taken  are  at  the  discretion  of  the  Instructor. 

Note :  For  Heavy  Batteries  make  the  necessary  modifications  in 
schedule  excluding"  the  rolls  applving  to  "the  soldier  mounted"  (Par. 
1815  to  1818  incl)^. 


Webster  Family  Library  of  Veterinary  Medicine 
Gummings  School  of  VeterLiarv  Medicine  at 
Tufts  University 
200  Wfistboro  Road 


